JP6548299B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachinko machine") and a drum-type gaming machine (generally referred to as "pachislot machine") .

If a starting hole and an obstacle nail etc. are arranged in the game area formed on the front of the game board, and the game ball which is a gaming medium is winning in the starting hole, a big hit lottery is performed based thereon, and the lottery result is a big hit There is known a gaming machine which generates a gaming state advantageous to a player.
In this type of game machine, as shown in Patent Document 1, a center character is incorporated substantially at the center of the game board, and the display screen of the effect display device is viewed through the opening window of the center character. There is. Then, by displaying various effect images on the effect display device in accordance with the gaming state and the lottery result of the big hit lottery, the sense of expectation to the lottery and the like are given, and the player's interest is enhanced.

The center part is attached to the front of the game board after being inserted from the front into an opening formed at the center of the game board. That is, the center product has an annular insertion portion inserted into the opening of the game board, and a thin flange portion projecting radially outward from the insertion portion and fixed to the front of the game board. There is. In addition, in the center role, a partition wall that divides the internal space of the center role and the game area from the player side so that the game balls rolling the game area do not enter the center role. It is formed to protrude.
In addition, the inner edge of the opening of the center character is provided with one or more decorations, thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the center character and impressing the gaming machine concept.
In addition, since this decoration is generally arrange | positioned inside a division wall part, it becomes possible to provide a large-sized decoration, so that the size of a division wall part is large. In other words, in order to make the decoration look large, it is necessary to make the radial size of the partition wall, that is, the size of the opening window, relatively large.

JP 2005-13703 A

However, if the size of the center role is increased in order to enlarge the opening window of the center role, the area of the game area where the game ball rolls is relatively narrowed, and thus the behavior of the game sphere becomes monotonous, It may be difficult to secure a space for passing the game ball.

Therefore, in view of the above-described situation, the present invention has an object to provide a gaming machine capable of making the opening window of the center product appear large without narrowing the gaming area.

Means 1: "a game board having a game area on the front side and an opening formed in the game area;
A center piece inserted into the opening of the gaming board;
And a decorative part with three-dimensional decoration,
The center feature is
A warp inlet opening to the outside of the center piece and a warp passage communicating with a warp outlet opening to the inside of the center piece;
An insertion portion inserted into the opening of the gaming board;
A partition wall that protrudes toward the player from the front of the gaming board and partitions the gaming area and the internal space of the center product;
A flange portion which protrudes radially outward from the insertion portion and abuts on a front surface of the gaming board;
An extended gaming area expanded between the insertion portion and the partition wall by arranging at least a part of the partition wall at a predetermined position radially inward of the inner edge of the opening in a front view And a game area extension unit to form
The gaming area extension, which is formed radially inward of the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board in a front view, is formed of a transparent member which can transmit light;
The decorative portion, which is three-dimensionally decorated, is a transparent member through the gaming area extension formed radially inward of the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board in a front view. Located behind the gaming area extension so that the decoration of the above can be viewed visually, and is provided straddling from the rear of the gaming area extension to the radially inner position of the partition wall,
The length in the direction along the partition wall is longer than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the gaming area extension is formed;
A special decorative portion that makes a decoration on the player side of the gaming ball passing surface of the gaming area extension is provided radially inside the partition wall in a front view with respect to the gaming area extension,
The width between the insertion portion, which is the gaming area extension, and the partition wall is larger than the width of the space generated between the insertion portion and the game board,
A game area extension is provided on the left side flow area where the game ball collided with the top provided on the center product flows down "
A game machine characterized by

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to make the opening window of the center character appear large without narrowing the game area.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of the outer frame which comprises a pachinko machine, a main body frame, a game board, and a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of an outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the removal | desorption structure of the upper shaft support bracket of a main body frame, and the upper support bracket of an outer frame. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided in the back surface of the upper-support metal fitting of an outer frame, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the figure of (A) from the downward direction. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a pivot pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the effect | action of a locking member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame, and was looked after. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base substrate cover and wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from back. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the mode of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the right side decoration unit and looked at it after. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame, (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the left side decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left side decoration unit and was looked after. It is a front perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decoration unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and observed the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of a plate unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the tray unit and was seen after. It is a front perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from upper right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and was seen from lower right front. It is sectional drawing of an operation unit. It is sectional drawing shown in the state which the press operation part in the operation unit was pushed. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle device in a door frame, and was looked after. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fal cover unit in a door frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fal cover unit in a door frame, and was looked after. It is a front view shown in the state which removed the front cover of the foul cover unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball | bowl feed unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball | bowl feed unit in a door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the ball | bowl feed unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view seen after removing the back case of a ball | bowl feed unit. It is a front view which shows arrangement | positioning of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of a main body frame. It is a rear view of a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of a main body frame. It is a left side view of a main part frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was seen from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and was looked after. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in a main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hit and fired device in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hit and fired device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the award ball unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball unit and was looked after. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles and shows the relationship between the prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the prize ball apparatus in a prize ball unit, and it saw after it. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the delivery path, the delivery motor, and the delivery rotary body in a winning ball apparatus. It is sectional drawing which shows the distribution passage of the ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball | bowl outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball | bowl outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball | bowl outlet opening-and-closing unit in a main body frame, and the fal cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of a substrate unit in a main part frame. It is a rear perspective view of the board | substrate unit in a main body frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit and was looked after. It is a perspective view explaining the effect | action of the standing wall part of the power supply board | substrate box in a board | substrate unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of a firing power supply substrate box, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which expands and shows the site | part of the fastening mechanism in a back cover. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and was seen from the back side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding door for a glass door slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the locking device and a sliding rod for a main frame It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the locking device and was looked after. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a sliding door for glass doors and a sliding door for body frames in a lock device. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a fraud control member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame in the state which removed the door frame of the pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board and was seen after. (A) is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko machine, (B) is a front view which shows the other form of a function display unit. FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming board using the gaming panel of the embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 etc. disassembled and viewed from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board which looked at FIG. 103 later. FIG. 140 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction. It is a fragmentary sectional view showing the crime prevention structure in the axial support side of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view seen from the back side in the state which accommodated the game board in the main part frame. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board into every main component, and was seen diagonally from the front. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 112 as seen obliquely from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game panel and the member mounted | worn with it, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is a front view of a prize-winning apparatus unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the prize-winning apparatus unit diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the prize-winning apparatus unit from diagonally back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the prize-winning-apparatus unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is a front view of a base member in a winning device unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the mechanism part in a winning a prize apparatus unit from diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the mechanism part of the winning a prize apparatus unit for every main component, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and showed the opening-and-closing drive mechanism of the 2nd starting opening diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the opening-and-closing drive mechanism of the 1st opening-and-closing prize-winning device, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the opening-and-closing drive mechanism longitudinally, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is a section perspective view showing the operation state of an opening-and-closing drive mechanism. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 2nd opening and closing winning device and was seen from diagonally. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower part of the 2nd opening and closing winning device diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the side decoration unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at center characters obliquely from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the center character and was seen from diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the base frame member of center goods, a warp passage, a shelf board, and a shelf back cover diagonally from the front. (A) is a principal part enlarged front view which expanded the upper left part of the game board, (b) is a principal part enlarged front view which expanded the right center part of the game board. (A) is a cross-sectional perspective view of the cross section AA in FIG. 132 (a) seen obliquely from the front, and (b) is a cross-sectional perspective view of the cross section B-B in FIG. 132 (b) is there. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the relationship between a base frame member and a game panel. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the back unit into every main component, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper character item unit in the back unit diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper character item unit into the large unit part and the small unit part, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the large unit part into every main structural members, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotation unit in a large unit part, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled and looked at the large side light emission rotation part and the small side light emission rotation part in a rotation unit from diagonally front. (A) is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut the small side light emission rotation part and its drive part longitudinally, and was seen diagonally from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked the small side cover member from diagonally downward is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the small side luminescence rotation part and its drive part from diagonally back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the rotary decoration in a small unit part, and was seen from diagonally from the front. It is the cross-sectional perspective view which cut | disconnected the rotary body decorative body longitudinally and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the enclosure unit of the small unit part, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the left-handed item unit in the back unit diagonally from the front. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a left-hand side item unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left-hand side item unit into every main structural members, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the principal part of the left side thing unit, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable decoration in a left-hand item unit, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked the right-handed item unit in the back unit diagonally from the front. It is an explanatory view showing operation of a right-hand side item unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right-hand thing unit by main component members, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the movable decoration in a right-hand side item unit diagonally from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the movable decoration to every main component, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the movable part main body in a movable decoration, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the movable arm part in the movable decoration, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the drive mechanism in the right side thing unit, and was seen diagonally from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the center character provided with the logo display unit in a back unit from the lower front, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a). It is the perspective view which looked at the logo display unit diagonally from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the logo display unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the shelf back decoration unit in a back unit diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the other structure in the back unit for every main structural member, and was seen diagonally from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the display unit and was seen diagonally from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the left-hand side item unit in a game board. It is an explanatory view showing movement of the right-hand side thing unit in the game board. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 170 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 169. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing a drive circuit of a firing solenoid. It is a circuit diagram showing a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group. It is a figure which shows the characteristic of a DC / DC converter. FIG. 171 is a timing chart of predetermined points in the drive circuit of the discharge solenoid of FIG. 171. (A) is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main process executed by the main control MPU of the embodiment, (b) is an interrupt process periodically performed by the main control MPU of the embodiment It is a flowchart which shows the procedure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol big hit judging processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. (A) is a big hit determination table used for lottery processing for a big hit, (B) is a reach determination table used for lottery processing for reach, and (C) is a lottery processing for types of big hit Symbol determination table used for It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol fluctuation time determination processing performed by main control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the submain process performed by periphery control MPU of the embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about 16 ms regular processing performed by periphery control MPU of the embodiment.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7.
FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main frame is opened to an outer frame of a pachinko machine according to the embodiment and a door frame is opened to the main frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Furthermore, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of an outer frame, a main frame, a game board, and a door frame constituting a pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, a main frame, and a game board constituting a pachinko machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

  1 to 7, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the outer frame 2 installed on the island facility (not shown) of the game hall and the outer frame 2 are pivotably supported openably at the front side. A game board 4 having a box-shaped main body frame 3 and a game area 1100 which is fixedly attached to the main body frame 3 from the front side and into which a game ball as a game medium is struck, and the front of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 It has the door frame 5 pivotally supported openably and closably with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to close from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be viewed from the player side, and a space below the game window 101 for storing game balls. A tray-like upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 5 are provided.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in the drawings, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are formed in vertically long rectangular shapes respectively extending in the vertical direction in front view. The dimensions of the vertical width of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 with respect to the outer frame 2 are formed to be slightly short. The decorative cover 23 is attached to the front of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are arranged such that the upper ends thereof are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatable at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and the right end of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is moved forward with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be in an open state.

  In front view, the pachinko machine 1 is such that the game area 1100 where the game ball is struck through the substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and it projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper dishes 301 and lower dishes 302 are arranged up and down. In the front lower right corner of the door frame 5, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is disposed, and the player handles the handle device 500 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper tray 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the gaming balls in the upper plate 301 are driven into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 with a hitting strength according to the rotation angle, and it is possible to play a game.

  Although details will be described later, although the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, the player can view the inside of the game area 1100. A hand or the like is inserted, and it is possible not to touch the game ball or the obstacle nail in the game area 1100, various winning openings, features or the like. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, there are provided various control boards and a cover body 1250 which is closed so as to cover the rear of the game board 4.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Furthermore, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support bracket of the main body frame and the upper support bracket of the outer frame. FIG. 14A is an exploded perspective view showing the mounting state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14B is a perspective view of the view of FIG. . FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the pivot pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the lateral direction, and left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12 and 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the end portions of the respective frame plates 10, 11, 12 and 13 are provided. They are assembled in a vertically long rectangular shape (square shape) by connecting them. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment are formed of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, There is provided an engagement notch 15 which penetrates and is recessed to the left and right direction center side. A mounting step 10a recessed from the other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and an upper support fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step 10a. It is supposed to be.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are light-weight metal molds (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is substantially flat, and the inner side surface protrudes inward at the rear end. A protrusion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extruding direction) is provided to enhance strength and rigidity (see FIGS. 9 and 106). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when installing the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility of the game hall, etc. While being able to make it easy to hold the pachinko machine 1 as a finger hold, the design of the appearance can be enhanced. In addition, there are also drawings in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted for convenience.

  The connection member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 to be in the left-right direction. To the side frame plates 12 and 13 extending from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 in the vertical direction to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and opposite to the vertical piece 18 It has a plate-like engagement piece 19 which can be inserted into and engaged with the engagement cutout portion 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 extending in the direction. In this example, the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 for connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively left-right asymmetrical The vertical pieces 18 are formed separately in the front and back direction. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 connecting the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are respectively formed in symmetrical shapes. It is done.

  In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 abut on the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engagement piece 19 is an engagement notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame are inserted into and engaged with the portion 15 by screwing predetermined screws into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 through the horizontal piece 17 and the engagement piece 19. It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts on the upper inner side surface of the side frames 12 and 13, and a predetermined screw The upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18. The rear vertical piece 18 of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state of being inserted into the projecting portion 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It is supposed to be. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frames 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 abuts on the lower inner side surface of the side frames 12 and 13. The lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected by being screwed into the vertical piece 18, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 can be connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

  The outer frame 2 of this example is disposed to face the upper support fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support fitting 20 and fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower side frame 12 of the left side. Fixed on the front surface of the reinforcing bracket 22 and the reinforcing bracket 22 disposed so as to support the lower surface of the lower supporting bracket 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13. And a decorative cover 23. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be able to open and close.

  First, the upper support fitting 20 includes a plate-like fixed piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projection piece 20b projecting forward from the front end of the fixed piece 20a than the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion Support rod hole 20c notched to be bent from the right end near the front end in the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and the left side frame hanging down from the left end of the fixed piece 20 and the support protrusion 20b A plate-like hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) in contact with the outer side surface of the plate 12 and a hanging wall 20e continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d and hanging along the outer edge of the support protruding piece 20b (figure 14 and a stop drop 20f (see FIG. 15) which is continuous with the drop wall 20e and sloped inward at the inlet end of the support well 20c. A pivot pin 633 (see FIG. 63) of an upper pivot support 630 of the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook 20c of the upper support fitting 20. Further, the upper support fitting 20 is configured such that the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 can be connected by the fixed piece 20a and the depending fixed piece 20d.

  The upper support fitting 20 has the strength of the support protrusion 20b enhanced by the depending wall 20e depending from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but when viewed from the front, the support protrusion 20b The lock member 27 disposed on the back of the cover can be concealed so as not to be visible from the player side, and the appearance of the lock can be improved. In addition, the support hook 20c formed in the support projection 20b is bent in a V shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed (right side) toward the center of the tip. In addition, the width dimension of the inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c is slightly larger than the diameter of the pivot pin 633.

  On the other hand, the lower support fitting 21 includes a horizontal fixing piece 21a mounted on and fixed to the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece rising upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-like support projection 21c projecting forward from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a beyond the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and a pin shape projecting upward from near the front end of the support projection 21c. And the support protrusion 21d. A main body frame support formed on a main body frame support bracket 644 (see FIG. 66 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support fitting 21. After inserting the support projection 21 d of the support fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame support bracket 644 in the main body frame 3, the support pin 633 of the upper support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked to the support hook hole 20 c Thus, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner.

  Further, in the outer frame 2 of the present embodiment, as shown in the drawing, two closing plates 24 and 25 arranged at a predetermined distance apart in the vertical direction are attached and fixed inside the side frame plate 13 on the right side. The closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in plan view, and the closing plate 25 disposed on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25 a penetrating in the front-rear direction (see FIG. See 9). The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 93) of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when the body frame 3 is closed to the outer frame 2. As described in detail later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the engagement between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 is released. The main body frame 3 can be opened relative to the outer frame 2.

  Furthermore, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcement fitting 22. The guide plate 26 guides the main body frame 3 smoothly when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is exchangeably mounted and fixed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of the present example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support protrusion 20b of the upper support fitting 20, and the rivet 28 supports the support protrusion 20b. It is pivotally supported rotatably. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a in the right direction from the stopper portion 27a protruding forward from the position supported by the rivet 28 and the position supported by the rivet 28 The operating portion 27b which protrudes, the elastic piece 27c which protrudes from the opposite side to the position supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the front end of the stopper portion 27a And an arc-shaped end surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic portion 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to be narrower than the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as it is separated from the stopper portion 27a to the left.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (B) and FIG. 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support projecting piece 20b of the upper support fitting 20 (normal state), the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27c is a hanging wall The stopper portion 27a is in contact with the inner surface of 20e, and the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is an inclined hole portion of the support weir 20c. The head space portion of the body frame 3 is not closed, and a space in which the pivot pin 633 of the upper shaft support fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted is formed at the head space portion of the support hook 20c. .

  In the support mechanism of the pivot support pin 633 using the upper support fitting 20 and the lock member 27 in this example, the pivot support pin 633 is inserted into the end space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and the stopper portion 27a In the state where the front end side is opposed to the stop drooping portion 20f of the inlet end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the front end side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop drooping portion 20f and the state is in contact) In the usual pivotally supported state, the support pin 633 positioned in the end space portion of the inclined hole of the support hole 20c formed by bending and the end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a The centers are shifted in the diagonal direction and opposed to each other. And, in this normal support state, the support pin 633 supporting the heavy main body frame 3 is in a state of being in contact with the front end portion of the support hook hole 20 c. Since the load on the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. Since the distal end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arc-shaped distal end surface 27d, when the operation portion 27b is turned to turn the lock member 27, the lock member 27 can be smoothly turned. It has become. Further, in the drawing, the arc center of the tip end surface 27d is taken as the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the pivotal support pin 633 is pulled out along the inclination of the inclined hole of the support weir 20c and abuts on the circular arc tip surface 27d, the operative force F is supported A component force F1 (a normal direction of the arc of the end surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped end surface 27d, and one side of an inclined hole of the pivot pin 633 and the support hook 20c When divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact part with the inner surface, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the rotation center of the lock member 27). The moment to turn the tip in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) in which the tip end separates from the support projecting piece 20b does not work, and the pivot pin 633 is the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole of the support hook 20c Maintain the state of being held between To. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 and elasticity formed integrally by synthetic resin It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c, and to prevent the shaft support pin 633 from coming off from the support hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if the end of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction (clockwise direction in the figure) that is released from the support projecting piece 20b by applying an unreasonable force, one side of the end of the stopper portion 27a Since it does not rotate in the direction in which it abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f and disengages further, the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b.

  In addition, even if the shape of the tip end surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arc-shaped, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above or the tip of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protruding piece 20b. By placing the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 as well. Since the tip end side of the stopper portion 27a just contacts the stop hanging portion 20f even when the member 27 rotates, the applicant of the present invention has a point that the lock member 27 does not protrude outside the support projecting piece 20b. I have confirmed.

  The operation of the lock member 27 of this embodiment will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise of pivotally supporting the body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 so as to be able to open and close, lower support brackets in a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the body frame shaft support bracket 644 (see FIG. 63) of the body frame 3 It is necessary that 21 support protrusions 21d be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 of the main body frame 3 is pressed into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27. As shown in FIG. 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates in the counterclockwise direction while deforming the elastic piece 27c, the pivot pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook 20c. Then, when the pivotal support pin 633 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support wedging hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16 (C), the pivotal support pin 633 does not abut the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support weir 20c. The tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the pivoting pin 633 so that the pivoting pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook 20c.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 16 (D), this state is held even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Then, in order to remove the pivot pin 633 from the support hook 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support projection 20b to turn the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 counterclockwise. By the rotation, the lock member 27 is rotated against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip end portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support wedge hole 20c. It can be removed from the hole 20c. Thereafter, the main frame 3 is lifted by lifting the main frame support hole formed in the main frame support bracket 644 and the support projection 21 d of the lower support bracket 21 to thereby release the main frame 3 into the outer frame 2. Can be removed from the

  As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the prior art, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extrusion type material of aluminum alloy), when installing the pachinko machine 1 in an island facility arranged in a row, it is necessary to perform an operation of fixing at a predetermined angle with respect to the vertical surface of the island Although such work is carried out by nailing the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, the nail can be made easy to strike, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily installed in the existing island facility. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are formed of a lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy) as an extrusion-shaped material, it becomes possible to form a thinner wall while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame, When viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 63 etc.) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inner side of the side frame boards 12 and 13, the lateral width can be increased. Can be attached to the main unit frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

  The upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and fixed in a state in which the connecting member 14 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged, the assembly strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased. It is possible to make it a square shaped framework. Further, after the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are connected by the connecting member 14, when the upper support fitting 20 is attached at a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member projecting outward from the outer surface (peripheral surface) of the frame plate 10, 11, 12, 13, when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall not shown, adjacent devices (for example, It can be attached closely with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[1-2. Overall configuration of the door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided openably and closably on the front side of the main body frame 3 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front. FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right rear. Furthermore, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the back. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover disassembled from the door frame and viewed from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded view of the side speaker and the side speaker cover from the door frame It is a disassembled perspective view.

  As illustrated, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a door frame having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly elongated circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the right side decoration unit 200 at the front of the door frame base unit 100 The left side decoration unit 240 attached to the outer circumference, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the top outer circumference of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 And a pair of side speaker covers 290 which are disposed and attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100. .

  Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the dish unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 at the front of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the dish unit 300 A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for performing a game ball driving operation, and a rear side of the door frame base unit 100 disposed behind the plate unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 interposed therebetween. And ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the fal cover unit 540, and mounted so as to close the game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. And a glass unit 590.

1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 26 to FIG. FIG. 26A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 26B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. 27 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame base substrate cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 30 shows a state of wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is a perspective view expanding and showing.

  As illustrated, the door frame base unit 100 of this example is a door having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and which is penetrated in the front-rear direction and whose inner periphery is formed in a substantially oval shape which is vertically elongated. A frame base body 110, an upper bracket 120 mounted at the upper center of the game window 101 in front of the door frame base body 110 for fixing an upper decoration unit, and a lower edge of the game window 101 in front of the door frame base body 110 A pair of side speakers 130 disposed on both outer sides, a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110, and the front face of the door frame base main body 110 attached to the lower right corner in front view And a handle bracket 140 for supporting the handle device 500.

  Note that the door frame base unit 100 is outside the side speaker 130 on the right side in a front view, with the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring 136 (see FIG. 24) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 etc. And a cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 (see FIGS. 22 and 24 and the like). The cover member 134 can guide the wiring 136 along the outer periphery of the speaker mounting portion 111, and hold the wiring 136 so that the wiring 136 does not get in the way when attaching or removing the side speaker 130. It is possible to

  In addition, the door frame base unit 100 covers the lower portion of the game window 101 with a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the left side from the center in the horizontal direction ) Mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotational position of the handle device 500 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 below the launch cover 191 A handle device relay substrate 192 relaying connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control substrate 4100 and a rear side of the handle device relay substrate 192 are covered. Door frame arranged on the opposite side to the rear cover (in rear view) with respect to the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board 192 etc. with the center in the left / right direction sandwiching the center of the rear cover A door frame base substrate 194 attached to the rear surface of the base body, a door frame base substrate cover 195 covering the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194, and a door rotatably supported on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195 And a wiring holding member 197 for holding a part of the wiring cord 196 connecting the frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side.

  In the door frame base unit 100 of the present example, the overall rigidity is enhanced by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 in which metal sheet metal is assembled by rivets or the like on the rear side of the rectangular door frame base main body 110 made of synthetic resin. It has the strength which can fully support each decoration unit 200,240,280, the dish unit 300 grade | etc.,.

  The door frame base substrate 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to 4140, and includes an amplification circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130. In this example, the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, the decoration substrates 430, 432 provided in the operation unit 400, the dial drive motor 414 provided in the operation unit 400, the sensors 432a, 432b, The wiring cord 196 connecting the handle device relay board 192, the ball lending unit 360 of the dish unit 300, etc. to the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140 etc. The details are described later, but are held by the wire holding member 197 and extended backward, and the main side relay terminal board 880 of the main body frame 3 and the peripheral side relay terminal board are described later. It is connected to 882 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  The door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically elongated frame shape as shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 etc. The game window 101 having a substantially elliptical shape is formed to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the drawing, the game window 101 is formed in a smooth curve shape in which the left and right and upper inner peripheral edges are continuous, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed in a linear shape extending left and right. ing. In addition, a notch portion of the rectangular shape 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the fal cover unit 540 can be inserted on the pivotally supported side (left side in front view) on the lower inner peripheral edge of the game window 101 in the door frame base main body 110. Is formed. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and widths of left and right side sides are the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the pivoting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 disposed behind the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and the game area 1100 wider than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It is supposed to be.

  The door frame base main body 110 is disposed on the left and right outside of the lower side of the game window 101 in addition to the game window 101, and the speaker attachment portion 111 for attaching and fixing the side speakers 130 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached and fixed. The ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 28) and the ball feeding unit mounting recess 112 penetrate in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position and the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301 of the tray unit 300 are sent to the ball feeding unit 580 A ball feed opening 113 for feeding, and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140 by slanting obliquely so that the right (open side) end of the front disposed at the lower right corner in front view and bulging forward is retracted. A wire passage port 115 which penetrates in the longitudinal direction at a predetermined position of the handle attachment portion 114 and through which a wire from the handle device 500 can pass; Cylinder lock 1010 to be described later is formed in a cylindrical shape extending short toward the front in the upper Le mounting portion 114 is provided with a Joana 116, which can be inserted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 28, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a relay board attachment portion 117 for attaching the handle device relay board 192 to the lower side in the ball feed unit attachment recess 112; From the disposition closer to the center than the speaker attachment portion 111 on the board attachment portion 118 disposed on the lower right side (axial support side) for attaching the door frame base substrate 194 and the rear view left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101 The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 185 of the security cover 180 projecting backward and the door frame base main body 110 is recessed toward the front side substantially along the inner periphery of the game window 101 to the rear side. The glass unit support stepped portion 110a which can be in contact with the front outer peripheral edge of the front face of the game window, and the glass unit locking member 190 which protrudes rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 Further comprises a, and four of the locking member mounting portion 110b for supporting the.

  Furthermore, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a door frame protrusion 110c that protrudes backward from the lower side by a predetermined amount. This door frame protrusion 110c is an engagement groove 603 of the main frame 3 described later. It is supposed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked to the main body frame 3, and an incorrect tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 from the gap between the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. Also, the door frame protrusion 110c engaged with the engagement groove 603 can prevent the tool from invading and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, there is provided a positioning projection 110d which protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower than the lock hole 116 in rear view and is fitted with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions by fitting the positioning protrusion 110 d with the fitting groove 612.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 27, the door frame base main body 110 is provided at its front surface with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decoration units 200, 240, 280, the plate unit 300, etc. In addition, a large number of attachment holes for attaching the upper bracket 120, the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, the door frame base main body 110 has an attachment portion 110g (see FIG. 24) for attaching the speaker bracket 132 to which the side speaker 130 is attached, and an attachment hole 110h for attaching the side speaker cover 290 (FIGS. 25 etc.) are respectively formed at appropriate positions.

  In the side speaker cover 290, as shown in FIG. 25, the left and right glass units 590 are arranged to penetrate through the glass unit support stepped portion 110a into which the glass unit 590 is fitted from the rear side. In a state where the glass unit 590 is removed from the door frame 110 (the door frame 5), it can be detached by a predetermined screw via the mounting hole 110h. Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the mounting hole 110 h for mounting the side speaker cover 290 is configured such that the rear side is covered by fixing the crime prevention cover 180 to the door frame base main body 110. Therefore, in order to remove the side speaker cover 290, the security cover 180 and the glass unit 590 must first be removed from the door frame base main body 110. Thus, taking some time to remove the side speaker cover 290 can make the person who intends to conduct a fraud etc. take time and effort for the removal work, and removes the relatively large glass unit 590. As a result, the removal work can be made conspicuous, and the deterrence (security) against fraud etc. can be enhanced by making the theft behavior against the side speaker 130, fraud inside the gaming area 1100, etc. It has become.

  Further, in the door frame base main body 110, the lower disc ball supply port 310g in the disc unit base 310 of the disc unit 300 described later between the ball feed unit attachment recess 112 and the board attachment portion 118 and At a position corresponding to the double ball outlet 544b, a rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided.

  Next, the upper bracket 120 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the center of the front upper portion of the door frame base main body 110, and although the detailed illustration is omitted, the left and right attached to the door frame base unit 100. While concealing the upper clearance formed between the side decoration units 200 and 240, the left and right ends are supported by the side decoration units 200 and 240, respectively. Also, the upper bracket 120 is configured such that a part of its tip is inserted into the upper decoration unit 280, and can support the upper decoration unit 280 from the upper side when the door frame 5 is assembled. It is supposed to be.

  Further, although the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is not shown in detail, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) forward from the center of the game area 1100 in front view It is obliquely fixed so as to be at the position of 5 m), and the sound can be most efficiently delivered to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the side speakers 130 are mainly configured to output middle-to-high range sounds, and are disposed at positions separated as far as possible from the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction. By outputting different related sounds from the side speakers 130, it is possible to output sounds with high stereo feeling.

  These side speakers 130 have their outer peripheries sandwiched by a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 disposed on the front side and the speaker attachment portion 111 of the door frame base main body 110 disposed on the rear side. It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 is attached to the attachment portion 110g of the door frame base main body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

  In addition, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape whose front side is opened as shown in FIG. 27 to FIG. 29 and the like. It has a step 195a recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the. The wire holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195 a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30 etc., the wire holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape elongated in the lateral direction, and the cross section is formed in an I shape. It is formed of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three each in the upper and lower sides in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at the upper and lower ends. The wire holding member 197 has the end portion on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the assembled state of the door frame 5 in the vertical direction at the step portion 195 a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. It is pivotally supported around the extended axis, and although the detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wire holding member 197 is rotated toward the door frame base substrate cover 195 side, the wire holding member 197 is It can be accommodated in the step portion 195 a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

  The wire holding member 197 has a wire cord 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side, and a predetermined binding is formed in the holding holes 197a which are paired in the upper and lower direction. The wiring cord 196 can be held by inserting the band 198 and tightening the wiring cord 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 30).

  When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated in the direction to close the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring cord 196 to the main body frame 3 It is pushed forward by the part, and it will rotate in the direction which approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. Thereby, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring cord 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main frame 3 is free. The bend is large (sharp) near the end. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring cord 196 is folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 is opened, since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively distant from each other, wiring is performed by the wiring cord 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the holding member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves in the direction of moving away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (the direction of the main body frame 3). Thereby, the wiring cord 196 folded at the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is expanded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being blocked by the wiring cord 196.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the end of the wire holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is moved by the door frame base substrate cover 195 so that the free end moves to the main body frame 3 side. The main frame 3 is pivotally supported on the rear surface and held so that a part of the wiring cord 196 electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 does not move in the vertical direction. When opening and closing the door frame 5, the wiring cord 196 can be folded or unfolded in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring cord 196 is caught when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent occurrence of problems (breaks in the wiring cord 196, disconnection of the connection connector, etc.) due to pinching or the like.

  Further, according to this embodiment, since the wire holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even when a force is applied through the wire cord 196 when the door frame 5 is opened and closed, It is possible to prevent the vertical movement of the wiring cord 196, and to securely fold the wiring cord 196 in the lateral direction to prevent the occurrence of a failure.

  Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, a bridge is put between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 by the wiring holding member 197. Since a part is bridged by the wire holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from hanging down even if the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the door frame 5 can not be closed, or the main control board 4100 as the main body side electric device, the peripheral control unit 4140, the payout control board 4110, etc. Each decoration board 214 as electric equipment 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 430, 432, speakers 130, 222, 262, ball rental unit 360, handle Location 500, etc., capital can provide pachinko machine 1 capable of malfunction in the wiring 196 to be connected to reduce the occurrence as much as possible.

  Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the rotatable wiring holding member 197, and even when the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. Because the force can be released at the same time, it is possible to prevent the wire 196 from being pulled and to prevent the occurrence of a failure such as disconnection of the wire 196 or disconnection of the connection connector. it can. In addition, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 is only partially bent as the wiring holding member 197 rotates, the conventional one (for example, JP 2009-213675 A) And the wiring 196 does not slide, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being rubbed to cause a fault such as an electric leakage or a disconnection.

  Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into the penetrating holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. The holding band 197 can prevent the holding band 197 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and surely prevent the wiring 196 from falling off together with the binding band 198 from the wiring holding member 197 can do.

  Further, even if the position where the wire 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged at a position separated from the side supporting the door frame 5, as described above, the wire 196 can be Since the wire 196 can be favorably prevented from hanging down when opening and closing the door frame 5 by guiding (guiding), the body frame 3 in which the strength and rigidity of the pivotally supported side of the door frame 5 are enhanced. Or it can be set as the door frame 5, and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention property with respect to a fraud.

  Furthermore, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with the ridges projecting at least the side along the wiring 196 from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, the wiring by the pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wire holding member 197 The three sides 196 can be surrounded, and the wiring 196 can be easily held along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wire holding member 197 is provided with a protrusion, the bending rigidity of the plate-like wire holding member 197 can be enhanced, and the wire holding member 197 is prevented from being bent when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The door frame 5 can be opened and closed in a good condition.

  Further, the length from the proximal end to the distal end of the wire holding member 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the axial center of the door frame 5 to the axial center of the proximal end, and the main frame 3 of the wiring 196 extends The predetermined position is a position closer to the axial center of the door frame 5 than the front end of the wiring holding member 197 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member A pantograph link is formed by the axis of 197, the tip of the wire holding member 197, and the position where the wire 196 in the main frame 3 extends, the wire when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be made smooth, and the opening and closing operation can be facilitated, and the occurrence of an unreasonable force acting on the wiring 196 etc. is reduced to cause problems such as disconnection. Can be prevented. In addition, a pantograph link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wire 196 extending from the tip of the wire holding member 197 is folded back along the wire holding member 197 at the tip side. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compacted, and the space for the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame base substrate cover 195 of the door frame 5 pivotally supporting the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, A step portion 195 a capable of storing the wire holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the step provided with the wire holding member 197 on the door frame base substrate cover 195 Since it is stored in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, and the door frame 5 can be easily closed. The wiring 196 can be compacted, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by another member, thereby preventing a failure from occurring.

  Furthermore, the wiring 196 is held along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (the door frame base substrate cover 195 side). The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

  Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the side of the door frame 5 that moves (opens and closes), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force that opens and closes the door frame 5, It is possible to reliably achieve the above effects. In addition, since the wire holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and there is no need to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 relatively. To make the pachinko machine 1 capable of holding the game board 4 having the larger game area 1100 and having the large game board 4 so as to strongly attract the interest of the player. it can.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28 etc., the handlebar bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. A plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding in the right-angled direction outward with respect to the annular flange portion 142 and the cylindrical portion 141 protruding in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141 A plurality of reinforcing ribs 144 are provided, which connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 to each other in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown, the shaft of the cylindrical portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage port 115 in a state of being attached to the handle attachment portion 114.

  The handle bracket 140 is provided with one protrusion on the upper side and two protrusions 143 on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 141, and these protrusions 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed in the position corresponding to the three groove parts 502a. Then, only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 coincide with each other, the cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 141. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported so as to be incapable of relative rotation with respect to the handle bracket 140.

  The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 inclined at an angle so that the axis of the tube portion 141 extends toward the right side (open side) as it goes to the front in a front view. The axis of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in the state is similarly inclined.

  Subsequently, as shown mainly in FIGS. 27 and 28, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 mounted along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110; A pivot support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 mounted along the back surface of the support side portion 110 of the support side, an open side reinforcement sheet metal 153 mounted along the back side of the open side end portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110 The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is attached along the lower side back surface of the game window 101, and they are mutually tightened with a screw or a rivet to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 27, this reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided in the upper and lower directions on the upper surface and at the upper and lower end portions of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 And a lower support portion 158 having an axial pin 157 (see FIG. 18). The upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 formed on the upper and lower shaft support sides of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is mounted on the main body frame 3. It is pivotally supported open and close freely.

  The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 is formed to have a predetermined width and substantially the same length as the lateral width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side edge of the long side edge A lower bent piece 159 bent forward (see FIG. 27) and an upper bent piece 160 bent forward on the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in a front view. And a vertically bent projecting piece 161 which is bent backward at a central portion of the upper long side edge and extended in the vertical direction. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is enhanced by the lower bending projection 159 and the upper bending projection 160 and the like. Further, the vertical bending and projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed to engage and engage with a locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of a unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertical bending protrusion 161 is engaged with the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 It is possible to regulate moving backward. In the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, a notch 162 substantially corresponding to the notch 101a of the door frame base main body 110 is formed.

  In addition, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 is provided with an open side outward bending projection 163 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 154; It has an open side inner bent piece 164, and as shown in the figure, the open side inner bent piece 164 is formed to extend backward more than the open side outer bent piece 163. ing. In addition, a hook cover 165 is provided on the lower rear side of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 to be in contact with a door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 described later. Further, the axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 is provided with a U-shaped axially supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166 which extends rearward at the outer end of the long side and opens at the outside of the axially supporting side (see FIG. See 106). In addition, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bending projections 167 that are bent backward on both sides of the long side.

  The axially supporting reinforcing metal plate 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two upper and lower points of the upper and lower shaft supporting portions 156 and 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed, and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is enlarged. Although there is a possibility that it becomes easy to carry out an action, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced. The support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. In addition, the front end piece 952b of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted in the U shape of the axially supported U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the axially supported reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 106) can prevent the insertion of the tool, and can prevent only the pivotally supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from being bent, and can enhance the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1.

  Next, the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 27 and FIG. The crime prevention cover 180 is provided with a crime prevention function that covers the lower back surface of the above-mentioned glass unit 590 to prevent intrusion of the illegal tool to the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right are made of transparent synthetic resin. Is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 590 disposed between the reinforcing sheet metals 152 and 153, and is arced substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4 at the upper side The contact recess 181 is formed, and the post-security projection piece 182 protrudes rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, on the left and right ends of the crime prevention cover 180, there are provided crime prevention rear end projecting pieces 183 projecting backward along the shape of the end. The rear end protrusion 183 on the right side (axial support side) in the rear view is extended to the rear more than the rear end protrusion 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 180, the crime prevention front protrusion 184 protruding along the lower shape of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590 with the crime prevention cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the crime prevention front protrusion 184 And a U-shaped attachment elastic piece 185 projecting forward at the lower end of the connector.

  The crime prevention cover 180 mounts the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) in a front view to the crime prevention cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (axial support side) By being attached to the crime prevention cover attaching portion 364 of the unit 300, the door frame 5 can be detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5. When the crime prevention cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, although the detailed illustration is omitted, the front crime prevention piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 is in contact with the vertical bending projection 161. In addition, when the door frame 5 is closed, the rear half of the pivot support side 182 is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 fixed to the game board 4 when the door frame 5 is closed, and the open side half is front It is in a state of being inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 in the component 1110. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool tries to intrude into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, it is possible to prevent the intrusion by the post-security projection piece 182 inserted below the inner rail 1112. .

  In addition, since the crime prevention cover 180 can cover the front lower portion of the guiding passage of the hitting ball formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed by the back surface thereof. It is possible to prevent the striking of the hitting path against the glass plate 594 which flies or reverses the guide passage portion.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the outer periphery of the rear lower portion of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5 is covered with the crime prevention cover 180, so the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 from the front side of the door frame 5. Even if you try to cheat inside the pachinko machine 1 (in the game area 1100) by inserting a highly flexible tool between them, the security cover 180 can prevent the intrusion of the tool, cheating It has become possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high safety against such as.

  Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are fitted with the fitting portions 190 a rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portions 110 b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110. And a locking piece 190b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a and locking the locking projection 451f of the glass unit 590. The glass unit locking member 190 fixes a screw for securing the locking member to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 passes through the fitting portion 190a. By doing this, it is rotatably supported with respect to the locking member mounting portion 110b.

  The locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a protrusion that protrudes rearward on the rear side, although detailed illustration is omitted, and this protrusion is rotated when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook for operation. Among the four glass unit locking members 190, no protrusion is formed on the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 mounted at the lower right in rear view, and the rear surface is flat. ing.

  Further, the launch cover 191 in the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150. In addition, the handle device relay substrate cover 193 and the door frame base substrate cover 195 are respectively fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base 110. When the launch cover 191, the handle device relay substrate cover 193, and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame unit base 100, their rear surfaces are substantially flush with one another. It is possible to cover the front surface of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 attached to the main body frame 3.

[1-2 B. Right side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 31 to FIG. FIG. 31A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 31B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit as viewed after being disassembled.

  The right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the right side half of the front periphery of the game window 101 except the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure. While being formed in circular arc shape along, the outer side is formed linearly along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 is provided for the side decoration frame 202 forming the skeleton of the right side decoration unit 200, the side upper decoration member 204 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 202, and the side upper decoration member 204. The side upper decorative member 204 is attached to the front side so as to cover the upper side of the side upper decorative lens 206 fitted from the rear side, the side decorative frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204, and to sandwich the side upper decorative lens 206. A side upper cover 208, a side lens 210 that supports the lower part of the side upper cover 208 and is fitted and fixed from the rear side to the side frame 202, and a side inner lens 212 that is fitted to the back of the side lens 210 And.

  In addition, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 from the approximate center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LEDs) and 214b (white LEDs) are mounted on the surface A substrate 214, and a lower-side lower decorative substrate 216 which is disposed on the lower side from the approximate center of the side inner lens 212 in the vertical direction from the lower side and has a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LEDs) and 216b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; A right side upper decorative substrate cover 218 attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to cover the rear side of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and sandwich the right side upper decorative substrate 214, and a right side covering the rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 Attached to the side lens 210 and the side decoration frame 202 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 216 The right side under the decorative board cover 220 that is provided with a.

  Furthermore, the right side decoration unit 200 supports the upper right speaker 222 disposed at the upper left in the front view of the side decoration frame 202 and the upper right speaker 222 and is fitted at the rear upper portion of the side decoration frame 202 A speaker bracket 224, an upper speaker cover 226 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 224 and the side decoration frame 202, and a side sub lens 228 attached from the inside at a predetermined position on the side surface of the side upper cover 208; There is. On the rear side of the side sub lens 228, the LED 214c of the decoration substrate 214 on the right side is disposed, and light emission decoration is performed by the LED 214 c.

  In this right side decoration unit 200, the side decoration frame 202, the side upper decoration member 204, the right side upper decoration substrate cover 218, and the right side lower decoration substrate cover 220 are formed of opaque members, and the side decoration Plated layers of predetermined colors are formed on the surfaces of the frame 202 and the side upper decorative member 204. In addition, the side upper decorative lens 206, the side upper cover 208, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker cover 226, the upper speaker bracket 224, and the side sub lens 228 of the right side decoration unit 200 are translucent members. The substantially upper side cover 208 is milky white, and the upper side decorative lens 206, the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, the upper speaker bracket 224, the upper speaker cover 226, and the side sub lens 228 are substantially transparent. It is assumed.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the back side of the substantially transparent side lens 210 and the upper speaker cover 226 and the front side of the side inner lens 212 and the upper speaker bracket 224 are formed in a polyhedron shape. It is designed to be able to diffuse and refract light. Therefore, the upper right side decoration substrate 214 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 210 and the side inner lens 212, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b, etc. mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the lower right side decoration substrate 216 It can not be clearly seen from the In addition, the front surface of the right upper side decoration substrate 214 and the right side lower decoration substrate 216 is white, and the light such as the mounted LEDs 214 a, 214 b, 216 a and 216 b efficiently decorates the right side decoration unit 200. While the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit, the decorative boards 214 and 216 are not noticeable. The upper right upper decoration substrate 214 and the lower right decoration substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, and 216a are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can be made to emit light as appropriate, so that the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

  The side decoration frame 202 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example is generally formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101 as shown, specifically, along the outer periphery of the game window 101 The arc-shaped inner frame 202a and the upper part are arranged at positions separated outward with respect to the inner frame 202a, and are straight along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper part The outer frame 202b is formed in an arc shape so as to be curved toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 202a, the upper end frame 202c connecting the upper edges of the outer frame 202b and the inner frame 202a, the outer frame 202b and the inner frame An inner frame 2 is disposed at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of a lower end frame 202d that connects lower end edges of 202a and the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b. And a, and the partition frame 202f having a slit 202e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 202b.

  The inner frame 202a of the side decoration frame 202 extends in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with substantially the same width at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, in the outer frame 202b, the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is formed in a straight line at substantially the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 202a. Both ends of the are formed in an arc shape projecting forward. In addition, a curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the portion of the outer frame 202b that extends vertically in a straight line is formed in a curved arc shape also curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end edge side protrudes forward. The partition frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202 is curved in the front-rear direction so that the portion between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 202f is disposed on radiation radially extended from near the lower center of the game window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 202 has a configuration in which the space between the inner frame 202a and the outer frame 202b is divided into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition walls 202f. The light emission decorative opening 202g is formed as the light emission decorative opening 202g, and a circumferential lens portion 210a of a side lens 210 described later is fitted from the rear side. The radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 is fitted into the slit 202e of the partition frame 202f from the rear side. Furthermore, the slit 202e and the light emitting decorative opening 202g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 202f, so that the respective light emission modes can be made different.

  The side upper decoration member 204 of the right side decoration unit 200, as shown in the figure, extends in the left and right direction substantially along the arc-like upper portion of the outer frame 202b of the side decoration frame 202, and A plurality of openings 204 a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 204 is provided with a Jomon-shaped relief on the upper side along the arrayed openings 204a.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 206 is shaped to fit in the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 204, and from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 204 through the opening 204a to near its front end A plurality of light guides 206a that can protrude can be provided. The light guide portion 206a has a polyhedron at its tip, and by inserting and fitting it into the opening 204a of the side upper decorative member 204, it may appear as if a jewel is fitted into the opening 204a. It can be done. In addition, the light from the right side upper decoration substrate 214 disposed on the rear side by the light guiding portion 206 a of the side upper decoration lens 204 may be emitted forward (to the player side) from the opening 204 a of the side upper decoration member 204. As well as being able to, the tip of the light guide 206a can be made to shine as a jewel.

  The upper surface and the right side surface (in front view) of the side upper cover 208 of the right side decoration unit 200 is shaped substantially along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100) and the lower surface (lower end) Is shaped substantially along the side upper decoration member 204. The side upper cover 208 is formed with an attachment step 208a which is open at the lower side and is recessed rearward so as to be able to accommodate the side upper decoration member 204 at the lower part of the front surface. On the end face, a mounting boss, a mounting hole and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 204 and the like are formed. Also, on the right side of the side upper cover 208, two notches 208b arranged up and down are formed, so that the side sub lens 228 attached inside through the notches 208b looks to the surface side It has become. By fitting the side sub lens 228 into the cutout portion 208 b of the side upper cover 208, it is possible to emit light in a different manner only at this portion.

  The side lenses 210 of the right side decoration unit 200 are shaped substantially along the side decoration frame 202, and the rear face is recessed, and are inserted later into the light emitting decoration opening 202g of the side decoration frame 202. A circumferential lens portion 210 a and a radiation lens portion 210 b to be inserted later into the slit 202 e of the side decoration frame 202 are provided. As illustrated, the side lens 210 does not include the peripheral lens portion 210a corresponding to the light emission decorative opening 202g in contact with the upper end frame 202c of the side decoration frame 202, and the corresponding portion is opened forward and downward. It is set as the accommodated accommodating step part 210c. An upper right speaker 222, an upper speaker bracket 224, and the like, which will be described later, are accommodated in the accommodation step portion 210c. In addition, the side lens 210 includes an attachment portion 210d which forms the upper surface of the accommodation step portion 210c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step portion 208a of the side upper cover 208.

  The side lens 210 has a curved surface shape which bulges forward so that the front surfaces of the circumferential lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b substantially follow the front end of the partition frame 202f of the side decoration frame 202. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces directed in different directions, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 210a is uneven. By this, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 210a is irregularly refracted. In addition, due to the polyhedral inner surface, the peripheral lens portion 210a can be made to have a distinctive characteristic appearance.

  The side inner lens 212 is inserted and fitted from the rear side into the inside of the side lens 210, and corresponds to a portion of the side lens 210 where the peripheral lens portion 210a and the radiation lens portion 210b are formed, as illustrated. The main body portion 212a is formed in such a manner that the rear surface is recessed, and it continues from the rear end of the main body portion 212a and protrudes forward beyond the main body portion 212a and corresponds to the radiation lens portion 210b (slit 202e of the side decoration frame 202) And a plate-like light guide portion 212b disposed at the same position. The main body portion 212 a of the side inner lens 212 is formed in a state in which the front surface thereof is spaced from the inner surface of the side lens 210 by a predetermined distance. Also, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the same manner as the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210, one surface of the main body portion 212a of the side inner lens 212 is polyhedral by a plurality of surfaces directed in different directions. Because the plate thickness of the main body portion 212a is not uniform, light transmitted through the main body portion 212a is irregularly refracted.

  By combining this side inner lens 212 with the side lens 210, it is possible to irregularly refract light passing through the peripheral lens portion 210a and the main body portion 212a in a double manner, and it is possible to It is almost impossible to recognize. Also, due to the irregular refraction and the irregular reflection due to the polyhedron shape, it is possible to make the appearance of the side lens 210 (peripheral lens portion 210a) glitter and to make the perspective feeling unclear and mysterious.

  A plurality of high-brightness color LEDs are mounted on the surface of the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 and the right-side lower decoration substrate 216 of the right-side decoration unit 200, and the light emission decoration opening 202 g of the side decoration frame 202 (peripheral of the side lens 210 The LEDs 214a and 216a disposed at positions corresponding to the lens portions 210a) have relatively wide illumination angles (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slits 202e of the side decoration frame 202 (the side lenses 210) are used. The LEDs 214b and 216b disposed at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b) have relatively narrow illumination angles (for example, 15 ° to 60 °). The LED 214 c on the right-side upper decoration substrate 214 for emitting and decorating the side sub lens 228 is a red LED in this example.

  The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200, like the side speaker 130, outputs middle-to-high range sound and can be attached at a predetermined position by the upper speaker bracket 224 in a predetermined direction. There is. The upper speaker bracket 224 that supports the upper right speaker 222 includes a cylindrical horn portion 224 a that protrudes diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. Then, the upper right speaker 222 is fixed to the upper back side of the horn portion 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224, so that the upper right speaker 222 can not be seen from the player by the horn portion 224a in front view It has become.

  The upper right speaker 222 in this example is made to emit toward the player from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 by the horn section 224a of the upper speaker bracket 224, and noise is generated for other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 224 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing in different directions, as with the peripheral lens portion 210 a of the side lens 210 and the main portion 212 a of the side inner lens 212. The light is transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 224 so as to be irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform thickness.

  Further, the upper speaker cover 226 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 224 is fitted from the rear side of the side decoration frame 202 so as to close the light emitting decoration opening 202g in contact with the upper end frame 202c in the side decoration frame 202. The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 210. Further, a plurality of through holes 226a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 226, so that the sound from the upper right speaker 222 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 226 also has a plurality of inner surfaces that face in different directions as the circumferential lens portion 210 a of the side lens 210 and the main body portion 212 a of the side inner lens 212. The light is transmitted through the upper speaker cover 226 so as to be irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform thickness. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 226 and the upper speaker bracket 224, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the through holes 226a formed in the upper right speaker 222 and the upper speaker cover 226 from the player side by random refraction of light. The outer appearance of the side lens 210 is similar to that of the circumferential lens portion 210a.

[1-2 C. Left side decoration unit]
Subsequently, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 34 to FIG. FIG. 34 (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed from the front. Furthermore, FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit as viewed after being disassembled.

  The left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment is for decorating the left half of the front periphery of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, as shown in the figure. While being formed in a circular arc shape along with the outer side is formed in a straight line along the outer periphery of the door frame base unit 100, it is formed substantially symmetrical with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 is provided for the side decoration frame 242 forming the skeleton of the left side decoration unit 240, the side upper decoration member 244 disposed along the upper side of the side decoration frame 242, and the side upper decoration member 244. Side upper decorative member 244 is attached on the front side so as to cover the upper side of the side upper decorative lens 246 fitted from the rear side, the side decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative member 244, and sandwich the side upper decorative lens 246 A side upper cover 248, a side lens 250 for supporting the lower part of the side upper cover 248 and fitted and fixed from the rear side to the side frame 242, and a side inner lens 252 fitted to the back of the side lens 250; And.

  In addition, the left side decoration unit 240 is disposed on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from the approximate center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and the decoration on the left side is mounted with a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LEDs) and 254b (white LEDs) on the surface A substrate 254, and a left side lower decoration substrate 256 disposed on the lower side from the approximate center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction from the lower side and having a plurality of LEDs 256a (full color LEDs) and 256b (white LEDs) mounted on the surface; A left side upper decorative substrate cover 258 attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to cover the rear side of the left upper side decorative substrate 254 and sandwich the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and a left side covering the rear side of the left side lower decorative substrate 256 Attached to the side lens 250 and the side decoration frame 242 so as to sandwich the lower decoration substrate 256 That the left side under the decorative board cover 260, and a.

  Furthermore, the left side decoration unit 240 supports the upper left speaker 262 disposed at the upper right in the front view of the side decoration frame 242 and the upper left speaker 262 and is fitted at the rear upper portion of the side decoration frame 242 A speaker bracket 264 and an upper speaker cover 266 sandwiched between the upper speaker bracket 264 and the side decoration frame 242 are provided.

  In the left side decoration unit 240, the side decoration frame 242, the side upper decoration member 244, the left side upper decoration substrate cover 258, and the left side lower decoration substrate cover 260 are formed of opaque members, and the side decoration Plated layers of predetermined colors are formed on the surfaces of the frame 242 and the side upper decoration member 244. In addition, the upper side decorative lens 246, the upper side cover 248, the side lens 250, the inner side lens 252, the upper speaker cover 266, and the upper speaker bracket 264 of the left side decoration unit 240 are formed of a translucent member. The substantially upper portion of the side upper cover 248 is milky white, and the side upper decorative lens 246, the side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper speaker cover 266 are substantially transparent.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the back side of the substantially transparent side lens 250 and the upper speaker cover 266 and the front side of the side inner lens 252 and the upper speaker bracket 264 are formed in a polyhedron shape. It is designed to be able to diffuse and refract light. Therefore, the upper left side decoration substrate 254 disposed on the rear side of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. mounted on the front surface (front surface) of the left side lower decoration substrate 256 It can not be clearly seen from the In addition, the front surface of the upper left side decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 is white, and the left side decoration unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the light of the mounted LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, etc. While the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are not lit, the decorative substrates 254, 256 are not noticeable. The upper left upper decoration substrate 254 and the lower left lower decoration substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. The light emitting decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 can be made to emit light appropriately.

  The side decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example is generally formed in an arc shape substantially along the game window 101 as shown, specifically, along the outer periphery of the game window 101 An arc-shaped inner frame 242a and an upper part arranged at a position away from the inner frame 242a and extending along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame base unit 100) from the lower end to the upper part The outer frame 242b is formed in an arc shape so as to be curved toward the upper end edge of the inner frame 242a, the upper end frame 242c connecting the upper edges of the outer frame 242b and the inner frame 242a, the outer frame 242b and the inner frame An inner frame 2 is disposed at a plurality of locations (four locations in this example) along the circumferential direction of a lower end frame 242 d that connects lower end edges of 242 a and the inner frame 242 a and the outer frame 242 b. And a, and the partition frame 242f having a slit 242e of a predetermined width with connecting 2a and an outer frame 242b.

  The inner frame 242a of the side decoration frame 242 extends in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with substantially the same width at substantially the same position in the longitudinal direction. On the other hand, in the outer frame 242b, the rear end of the linear portion extending along the side surface of the door frame 5 is formed in a straight line substantially at the same position as the rear end of the inner frame 242a. Both ends of the are formed in an arc shape projecting forward. The curved arc-shaped portion on the upper side of the linearly extending portion of the outer frame 242b is formed in an arc shape curved in the front-rear direction so that the upper end side protrudes forward. The partition frame 242f of the side decoration frame 242 is curved in the front-rear direction so that the portion between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b protrudes most forward. The partition frame 242 f is disposed on radiation radially extended from near the lower center of the game window 101 in a state where the door frame 5 is assembled (see FIG. 17 and the like).

  As shown in the figure, the side decoration frame 242 has a configuration in which the space between the inner frame 242a and the outer frame 242b is divided into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) by a plurality of partition frames 242f. The light emission decorative opening 242g is formed as the light emission decorative opening 242g, and a circumferential lens portion 250a of a side lens 250 described later is fitted from the rear side. Further, the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250 is fitted into the slit 242e of the partition frame 242f from the rear side. Furthermore, the slit 242e and the light emitting decorative opening 242g can be partitioned by the partition wall frame 242f, so that the respective light emission modes can be made different.

  The side upper decoration member 244 of the left side decoration unit 240 extends laterally at a constant height substantially along the arc-like upper portion of the outer frame 242b of the side decoration frame 242, as shown in the figure, and And a plurality of openings 244a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the front surface. The side upper decorative member 244 is provided with a Jomon-like relief on the upper side along the arrayed openings 244a.

  On the other hand, the side upper decorative lens 246 has a shape that can be fitted into the recessed rear surface of the side upper decorative member 244, and from the rear side of the side upper decorative member 244 through the opening 244a to near its front end A plurality of light guides 246a that can protrude can be provided. The light guide portion 246a has a polyhedral shape at its tip, and by inserting and fitting it into the opening 244a of the side upper decorative member 244, it may appear that a jewel is fitted into the opening 244a. It can be done. In addition, light from the left side upper decoration substrate 254 disposed on the rear side by the light guiding portion 246a of the side upper decoration lens 244 may be emitted forward (to the player side) from the opening 244a of the side upper decoration member 244. As well as being able to, the tip of the light guiding portion 246a can be made to shine as a gem.

  The upper surface and left side surface (in front view) of the side upper cover 248 of the left side decoration unit 240 is shaped substantially along the outer periphery of the door frame 5 (door frame unit base 100), and the lower surface (lower end) Is shaped substantially along the side upper decorative member 244. The side upper cover 248 is formed at the lower part of the front surface so as to be able to accommodate the side upper decorative member 244, and has an open lower portion and a backward recessed installation step 248a. On the end face, a mounting boss, a mounting hole and the like for mounting the side upper decorative member 244 and the like are formed. Further, the side upper cover 248 is provided with a covering portion 248 b covering the upper pivot support portion 156 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 on the outer side surface (left side surface in front view).

  The side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240 is shaped substantially along the side decoration frame 242 and has a concave rear surface, and is inserted later into the light emitting decoration opening 242 g of the side decoration frame 242 A circumferential lens portion 250 a and a radiation lens portion 250 b to be inserted later into the slit 242 e of the side decoration frame 242 are provided. As illustrated, the side lens 250 does not include the circumferential lens portion 250 a corresponding to the light emitting decorative opening 242 g in contact with the upper end frame 242 c of the side decorative frame 242, and the corresponding portion is opened forward and downward. It is set as the stored accommodating step part 250c. An upper left speaker 262, an upper speaker bracket 264, and the like, which will be described later, are accommodated in the accommodation step 250c. In addition, the side lens 250 includes an attachment portion 250d which forms the upper surface of the accommodation step 250c and is fixed to the rear side of the attachment step 248a of the side upper cover 248.

  The side lens 250 has a curved surface shape bulging forward such that the front surfaces of the circumferential lens portion 250 a and the radiation lens portion 250 b substantially follow the front end of the partition frame 242 f of the side decoration frame 242. Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the back surface (inner surface) side of the peripheral lens portion 250a is formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of surfaces directed in different directions from each other, and the plate thickness of the peripheral lens portion 250a is uneven. Thus, the light transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a is irregularly refracted. In addition, due to the polyhedral inner surface, the peripheral lens portion 250a can have a distinctive appearance with glitter.

  The side inner lens 252 is inserted into and fitted to the inside of the side lens 250 from the rear side, and corresponds to a portion of the side lens 250 on which the peripheral lens portion 250 a and the radiation lens portion 250 b are formed, as shown in the drawing. The main body portion 252a is formed in such a manner that the rear surface is recessed, and it continues from the rear end of the main body portion 252a and protrudes forward beyond the main body portion 252a and corresponds to the radiation lens portion 250b (slit 242e of the side decoration frame 242) And a plate-like light guide 252b disposed at the same position. The main body portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252 is formed in a state in which the front surface thereof is spaced from the inner surface of the side lens 250 by a predetermined distance. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, similarly to the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250, one surface of the main body portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252 is polyhedral by a plurality of surfaces directed in different directions. The light transmitted through the main body 252a is irregularly refracted because the thickness of the main body 252a is not uniform.

  By combining this side inner lens 252 with the side lens 250, the light passing through the peripheral lens portion 250a and the main body portion 252a can be irregularly refracted in a double manner, and the shape etc. of the object disposed on the opposite side It is almost impossible to recognize. Also, due to the irregular refraction and the irregular reflection due to the polyhedron shape, it is possible to make the appearance of the side lens 250 (peripheral lens portion 250a) glitter and to make the perspective feeling unclear and mysterious.

  A plurality of high-brightness color LEDs are mounted on the surface of the left side upper decoration substrate 254 and the left side lower decoration substrate 256 of the left side decoration unit 240, and the light emission decoration opening 242g of the side decoration frame 242 (peripheral of the side lens 250 The LEDs 254a and 256a disposed at positions corresponding to the lens portion 250a) have relatively wide irradiation angles (for example, 60 ° to 180 °), and the slits 242e of the side decoration frame 242 (the side lenses 250) are used. The LEDs 254b and 256b disposed at the positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 250b) have relatively narrow illumination angles (for example, 15 ° to 60 °).

  The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs middle-to-high range sound similarly to the side speaker 130, and is mounted by the upper speaker bracket 264 at a predetermined position in a predetermined direction. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion 264 a that protrudes diagonally forward and downward at the left and right center of the pachinko machine 1 in a front view. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the upper back side of the horn portion 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper left speaker 262 can not be seen from the player by the horn portion 264a in a front view. It has become.

  The upper left speaker 262 in this example is made to emit toward the player from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 by the horn part 264a of the upper speaker bracket 264, and noise is generated for other pachinko machines. It has become difficult. Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker bracket 264 also has a plurality of front surfaces facing in different directions, as with the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 and the main body portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252. The light is transmitted through the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to be irregularly refracted as the plate thickness becomes uneven.

  Further, the upper speaker cover 266 covering the front side of the upper speaker bracket 264 is fitted from the rear side of the side decoration frame 242 so as to close the light emitting decoration opening 242g in contact with the upper end frame 242c in the side decoration frame 242 The surface is formed in a curved surface shape that is continuous with the surface of the side lens 250. Further, a plurality of through holes 266a are formed on the surface of the upper speaker cover 266 so that the sound from the upper left speaker 262 can be sufficiently transmitted to the player side.

  Although not shown in detail, the upper speaker cover 266 also has a plurality of inner surfaces facing in different directions, as with the peripheral lens portion 250 a of the side lens 250 and the main portion 252 a of the side inner lens 252. The light is transmitted through the upper speaker cover 266 so as to be irregularly refracted due to the non-uniform thickness. Therefore, in the upper speaker cover 266 and the upper speaker bracket 264, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the through holes 266a formed in the upper left speaker 262 and the upper speaker cover 266 from the player side by irregularly refracting light. The outer appearance of the side lens 250 can be made similar to that of the circumferential lens portion 250 a.

[1-2 D. Upper decoration unit]
Subsequently, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit as viewed from the rear.

  The upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is, as shown in FIG. 17 and the like, at the upper center of the front of the door frame 5, between the upper end edges on the central side of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. It is mounted between and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 has a substantially inverted isosceles triangular shape as a whole when viewed from the front, and penetrates the central opening 281a which largely penetrates to the center and both left and right sides of the central opening 281a. A front decorative member 281 having a pair of side openings 281b into which the tip of the upper bracket 120 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted above the central opening 281a, and a rear side inside the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 The outer shape of the front view is the center lens 282 fitted from the inside, the inner lens 283 disposed at the rear end of the center lens 282, the pair of side lenses 284 fitted from the rear side into the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281 The central lens 282, the inner lens 283, and the pair of side lenses 284 have a shape similar to that of the front decorative member 281. A main body member 285 attached to the rear side of the front decorative member 281 so as to be held by the decorative member 281, and an upper decorative substrate 286 disposed on the rear side of the main body member 285 and having a plurality of color LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the front surface And a substrate cover 287 attached to the rear surface of the main body member 285 so as to cover the upper decorative substrate 286 from the rear side.

  The upper decorative unit 280 extends backward while bending from the lower end of the front decorative member 281 so that the upper front end is supported by the front decorative member 281 and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100 A lower surface decorative member 288 having a pair of lower openings 288a penetrating toward the lower surface, and a lower lens 289 inserted from the upper side into the lower opening 288a of the lower surface decorative member 288 and fixed to the lower surface decorative member 288 and the substrate cover 287 And. In the present example, a plated layer having metallic luster is formed on the surfaces of the front surface decorative member 281 and the lower surface decorative member 288. The LED 286 a of the upper decorative substrate 286 is disposed at a position corresponding to the central lens 282, and the LED 286 b is disposed at a position corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289. The lens 284 and the lower lens 289 can be separately illuminated and decorated. Further, in this example, the LED 286a is a full color LED, and the LED 286b is a high brightness white LED.

  The inner peripheral shape of the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 in the upper decorative unit 280 of this example is an arc whose center upper end is a side extending in the left and right direction in a front view It has three projections which extend from the approximate center of the upper side on both sides of the upper side and the lower end apex into the central opening 281a. Further, the front decorative member 281 is formed with a plurality of streaks extending diagonally upward and outward on the outer side of the upper side of the central opening 281 a, whereby the front decorative member 281 is formed from the central opening 281 a The wing is formed in an extended shape, and a side opening 281b is formed along the cross-cut.

  The central lens 282 fitted in the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281 has an outer shape that is substantially the same as the central opening 281a, and has a shape that bulges forward and the front surface thereof. Are formed in a polyhedron shape by a plurality of faces directed in different directions. The central lens 282 of this example is formed of a transparent (colorless transparent, colored transparent) resin. By fitting the central lens 282 into the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, the central lens 282 looks like a jewel cut like a brilliant cut and the front decorative member 281 looks like a pedestal of the jewelry. .

  Further, the inner lens 283 disposed on the rear side of the central lens 282 is formed of a transparent resin so as to close the opening on the rear side of the central lens 282, and a minute lens (or prism) is formed on the surface. A plurality of light sources are formed so that light from the upper decorative substrate 286 can be widely diffused to the central lens 282 side. On the other hand, the side lens 284 fitted in the side opening 281b of the front decorative member 281 is formed of a transparent resin so that the front surface is substantially continuous with the front surface of the front decorative member 281 in a state fitted into the side opening 281b. It is done. A plurality of fine lenses (or prisms) are formed on the back surface side of the side lens 284 as in the inner lens 282, and the entire side lens 284 is substantially uniform by the light emitted from the upper decorative substrate 286. It is possible to emit light.

  The inner lens 283 and the side lens 284 have a feeling of cloudiness due to a plurality of fine lenses and the like formed on the surface, and the rear side can not be clearly seen through the inner lens 283 and the side lens 284. It has become.

  The main body member 285 of the upper decorative unit 280 extends in a tubular shape in the front-rear direction with an outline substantially along the shape of the central opening 281a of the front decorative member 281, and the rear end is closed with the front end opening inclined obliquely downward The central portion 285a inclined obliquely upward, and the rear ends disposed on both sides of the central portion 285a and closed are substantially at the same position as the rear end of the central portion 285a and the front end extends shorter than the central portion 285a And a plurality of openings 285c formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 286a and 286b mounted on the upper decorative substrate 286 through the rear end faces of the central portion 285a and the side portions 285b. ing. When the upper decorative substrate 286 is disposed on the rear side of the main body member 285, the LEDs 286a of the upper decorative substrate 286 are inserted into the opening 285c, and light from the LEDs 286a does not leak to the rear side. It has become. The central portion 285a and the side portion 285b of the main body member 285 are recessed from the front side to the rear side so that the light from the corresponding LEDs 285a and 286b does not affect the side.

  Further, the lower surface decorative member 288 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed to become thinner toward the rear, and the left and right side shapes thereof are the upper speaker cover 226 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240, The shape is substantially the same as the shape of the end on the side closer to the upper end frame 202c or 242c of 266, and the end on the side closer to the upper end frame 202c or 242c of the upper speaker cover 226 or 266 is placed and fixed ing. The lower lens 289 is held between the lower surface decoration member 288 and the upper speaker cover 226, 266. In addition, light from the right side upper decoration substrate 214 and the left side upper decoration substrate 254 is supplied to the lower lens 289 through the upper speaker brackets 224 and 264 of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. It emits light.

[1-2 E. Side speaker cover]
Next, the pair of side speaker covers 290 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side speaker cover 290 covers and decorates the front of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the pan unit 300 Are placed between the

  The side speaker cover 290 supports a disk-shaped cover body 291 having a plurality of holes curved so as to cover the front surface of the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100 and the outer periphery of the cover body 291 from the front side. A body member 292 formed to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 having an annular opening, and a lower tray of the pan unit 300 disposed on the lower side of the body member 292 And a lower member 293 formed to be continuous with the left and right rear ends of the cover 328. In this example, since the cover body 291 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or struck from the front side, and the side speaker 130 can be made. As long as it can be protected.

  The side speaker cover 290 has a metallic gloss plating layer formed on the surface of the main body member 292. Further, the lower member 293 is formed of a milky white light transmitting member similar to the lower plate cover 328 in the plate unit 300 described later.

  The side speaker cover 290 in this example is attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100 independently of the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the dish unit 300, and the door frame base main body It is fixed to the door frame base main body 100 by a predetermined screw inserted from the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 through an attachment hole 110 h (see FIG. 18) formed at a predetermined position of 110.

  Thereby, after the crime prevention cover 180 in the door frame 5 is removed, the side speaker cover 290 can be removed to the front side by removing the screw attaching the side speaker cover 290 from the rear side of the door frame 5 By removing the speaker bracket 132 from the front side of the door frame 5, the side speaker 130 can be removed. Therefore, even if it becomes necessary to replace the side speaker 130 for some reason, the front surface of the side speaker 130 can be removed without removing the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the plate unit 300, etc. It is possible to easily remove only the side speaker cover 290 that covers the side speaker 130 so that the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced.

  Thus, in this example, to replace the side speaker 130 mounted between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the pan unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame 5 First, since the main body member 292 disposed on the front side of the speaker in the side speaker cover 290 is detachably attached to the door frame base main body 110 from the rear side, the door closing the front of the main body frame 3 After opening the frame 5 to the front side and removing the attachment of the main body member 292 to the door frame base main body 110 from the rear side of the door frame 5, the main body member 292 and the cover body 291 are made of the door frame base main body 110 (door frame 5). When it is moved to the front side and removed from the door frame 5, the side speaker 130 comes to be viewed from the front side of the door frame 5. Since this side speaker 130 is held by the speaker bracket 132 attached from the front side to the door frame base main body 110, the speaker for the door frame base main body 110 from the front side of the door frame 5 after removing the main body member 292 By removing the attachment of the bracket 132, releasing the sandwiching of the side speaker 130, and further moving the side speaker 130 to the front side, the door frame 5 (the door frame base main body 110) The side speaker 130 can be removed from the door frame 5 without removing it from the door frame 5, and the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily replaced.

  Further, even if the player or the like knocks the door frame 5 (side speaker cover 290) during the game and the side speaker 130 is broken, as described above, the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame 5 can be easily made. Since it can be exchanged, the interruption time of the game due to the replacement of the side speaker 130 can be shortened as much as possible, and the interruption is prolonged and the player becomes frustrated or lose interest, thereby reducing interest. It is possible to suppress it.

  Further, the side speaker 130 is held between the speaker bracket 132 and the door frame base main body 110, and the side speaker 130 can be mounted on the door frame 5 (even if there is no mounting piece or mounting hole for attaching the side speaker 130). Since it can be attached to the door frame base main body 110), there is no need to provide the side speaker 130 with a mounting piece, a mounting hole or the like, the cost for the side speaker 130 can be reduced, and the cost for the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the cover body 291 covering the front surface of the side speaker 130 is formed of a metal plate (punching metal) having a plurality of through holes, the cover body 291 is Deformation and breakage can be reduced as much as possible, and the side speaker 130 can be sufficiently protected to suppress occurrence of a defect, and the durability of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. .

  In addition, since the side speaker cover 290 covering the side speaker 130 is provided between the left and right side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300, the side speaker 130 should be relatively close to the player. As a result, as described above, the side speaker 130 can be easily replaced, and the interruption time of the game can be shortened as much as possible. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player. In addition, since the side speaker 130 is disposed as close to the player as possible, the sound output from the side speaker 130 can be more efficiently heard by the player, providing a powerful sound. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the sound effect and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Further, since the side speakers 130 are disposed between the left and right side decoration units 200, 240 and the dish unit 300, continuity of the decoration by the side decoration units 200, 240 can be maintained, and the side decoration unit The pachinko machine 1 can be connected between the tray 200 and the tray unit 300 without a sense of incongruity, and the side speaker cover 290 can be used to prevent the appearance from being deteriorated and to attract the player's interest strongly. Further, since the surface shape of the main body member 292 in the side speaker cover 290 is formed so as to be continuous with the surface shape of the side decoration unit 200, 240 or the pan unit 300, the side speaker cover 290 is formed of the side decoration unit 200, 240. This makes it possible to make the player feel as one with the tray unit 300. Even if the side speaker 130 is provided on the front side separately from the side decoration units 200 and 240, etc., it is possible to make the player less uncomfortable. The designability of the front of the door frame 5 (pachinko machine 1) can be made favorable.

  Furthermore, when removing the main body member 292 of the side speaker cover 290 from the door frame 5, it is necessary to first remove the crime prevention cover 180 attached to the rear side of the door frame 5 and the glass unit 590. Can take some time for removal of the unit, and can take time and effort for the removal operation to those who intend to perform an illegal act etc. and make the removal operation stand out by removing the relatively large glass unit 590 It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 high in deterrence (security) against fraudulent acts etc. by making theft acts and fraudulent acts insult.

[1-2 F. Dish unit]
Subsequently, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 41 to FIG. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the pan unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the pan unit in the door frame. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes the upper tray 301 and the lower tray 302 for storing gaming balls paid out from the winning ball device 740 described later, and the game stored in the upper tray 301 A ball can be supplied to a ball striking device 650 described later via a ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the dish unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-like dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100; When the upper outer periphery of the upper dish body 312 is covered with the dish-like upper disc body 312 fixed to the front approximately in the center and the upper side and the rear being open and the front left side (axial support side) is largely bulging forward An upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward when viewed visually, and a plurality of openings 316 a attached to the upper front end edge of the upper plate upper panel 314 and penetrating vertically. There is a dish front decoration member 316, and a plurality of light guiding portions 318a disposed between the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper panel 314 and fitted into the openings 316a of the upper dish front decoration member 316. did The right pair of upper dish upper lens 318 and the upper dish upper lens 318 are disposed on opposite sides of the upper dish upper panel 314 and attached to the lower surface of the upper dish upper panel 314 and have a plurality of color LEDs 320a, 322a on the upper surface Is disposed between the upper dish right decorative substrate 320 and upper dish left decorative substrate 322, and the upper dish upper lens 318 and the upper dish upper panel 314, from the upper dish right decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 And an upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of microprisms for diffusing the light of the light source to the upper dish upper lens 318 side.

  In the dish unit 300, the lower part of the upper dish body 312 is fixed to the front of the dish unit base 310 and the upper and the rear are open and the center in the left and right direction bulges forward in front view and the front end is the center in the left and right direction The lower dish body 324 formed to become lower toward the head and the upper end of the lower dish body 324 are fixed to the upper portion of the lower dish body 324 and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward similarly to the lower dish body 324 in front view A lower dish having a plate-like lower dish top plate 326 curved to become higher toward the center, and an opening 328a along the front ends of the lower dish top plate 326 and the lower dish main body 324 and covering the outer periphery of the opening 328a A cover 330, a plate side middle cover 330 having openings 330a disposed on the left and right sides of the lower plate cover 328 and penetrating in the front and rear direction, and an opening 330a of the plate side middle cover 330 And a disk side outer cover 334 disposed on the left and right outer sides of the disk side middle cover 330 and extending in the left and right direction to positions corresponding to the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100. ing. A lock hole 330b is formed at the right end of the plate side middle cover 330 disposed on the right side in a front view, in which a cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 described later faces. Further, a handle insertion hole 334a into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front is formed in the plate side outer cover 334 on the right side in a front view.

  Furthermore, the dish unit 300 includes an upper dish ball removing mechanism 340 for removing the gaming balls attached to the dish unit base 310 and the upper dish main body 312 and stored in the upper dish 301 to the lower dish 302; A lower disc ball removing mechanism 350 for removing the gaming balls attached to the lower surface and stored in the lower disc 302, and attached to the upper left side in a front view of the disc unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 A ball lending unit 360 for operating a ball lending machine (also referred to as CR unit 6, see FIG. 171).

  The dish unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper dish 301 capable of storing gaming balls by a part of the dish unit base 310, the upper dish main body 312, the upper dish upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the tray unit 300 constitutes a lower tray 302 capable of storing gaming balls by a portion of the tray unit base 310, the lower tray main body 324, the lower tray top plate 326, the lower tray cover 328 and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 43, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left and right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed at the upper end edge extending in the left and right direction. It is equipped. A rental ball unit attachment portion 310b is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a for attaching the rental ball unit 360 through in the front-rear direction. The dish unit base 310 is disposed on the lower side (near the upper left corner in a front view) of the ball unit attachment portion 310b and has an oblong ball supply port 310c having a horizontally long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front and back direction; An upper countersink outlet 310d which penetrates vertically in the front-back direction below the mouth 310c (approximately in the middle in the height direction of the tray unit base 310) and near the right end of the decorative portion 310a; And a pair of lower tray support portions 310e which are disposed directly below the ball outlet 310d and the upper ball inlet 310c and which project forward and whose upper surfaces have the same height. The upper flat ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to the middle position in the front-rear direction of the upper surface of the lower flat support portion 310e disposed immediately below.

  Further, the pan unit 300 is disposed between the pair of lower pan support portions 310e, is fitted with the rear ends of the lower pan main body 324 and the lower pan top plate 326, and is formed into a horizontally long rectangular ring in a front view. A groove 310f, and a rectangular lower ball supply port 310g disposed at the lower right of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 44, the bowl unit base 310 is provided with a lower bowl ball feeding rod 310h cylindrically extended rearward so as to be continuous with the lower bowl ball feeding port 310g, and an open side of the lower ball bowl feeding rod 310h. And a notch 310i formed on the side and of a size through which the game ball can pass.

  The upper bowl ball supply port 310 c of the bowl unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit through the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the notches 101 a and 162 of the reinforcing unit 150. It is in communication with the first ball outlet 544 a of the unit 540. At the front end of the upper flat ball supply port 310c, there is provided a guiding recess 310j which extends in the right direction in a front view and is recessed rearward. The guiding recess 310j is inclined so that the right end in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined such that the front end is lower in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the height difference between the front end of the guiding recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper tray main body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guiding recess 310j, and at the right end of the guiding recess 310j, the bottom surface of the upper plate main body 312 and The difference in height is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

  Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper bowl ball supply port 310c is closed by the gaming ball stored in the upper plate 301, the gaming ball paid out from the winning ball device 740 via the far cover unit 540 is Since it is not possible to go straight forward into the upper tray 301 from the upper flat ball supply port 310c, the paid-out gaming ball abuts on the gaming ball in which the front side of the upper flat ball supply port 310c is closed and rolls The direction is changed, and guided so as to roll in the guiding recess 310j to the right in front view, and released from the vicinity of the right end of the guiding recess 310j to the upper side of the gaming ball stored in the upper plate 301; Become. Thus, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper plate 301 in the upper and lower two stages, so that the player does not move the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. Even when the game balls are paid out, the game balls can be continuously supplied (released) into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to suppress the player from feeling bothersome for the storage of the game balls on the upper plate 301. In addition, it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game by concentrating the player on the game by the operation of hitting the game ball and the game ball hit, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. It is possible to

  The upper bowling ball outlet 310d of the bowl unit base 310 includes the opening 344a of the upper bowl bowling base 344 in the upper bowl bowling mechanism 340 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is in communication with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the lower ball supply port 310g extends rearward from the rear side through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. Above, while being connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, the notch portion 310i of the lower flat ball supply rod 310h is provided in the upper flat ball extraction mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344 c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower spherical ball supply port 310g is provided with an expanded portion 310k that is expanded in the left direction in a front view, and the lower conical ball supply port is formed by this expanded portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is spread in the left and right direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress early clogging of the lower ball supply port 310g due to the game balls in the lower plate 301 remaining on the front side of the lower ball supply port 310g, thereby preventing more balls A ball can be fed into the lower plate 301.

  The upper plate main body 312 of the plate unit 300 is formed so that the left side (axial support side) bulges forward than the center in a front view and the bottom surface is entirely lower at the left end side (open side) and the rear end side There is. In the bottom surface of the upper disc body 312, the rear end on the pivotal support side is near the bottom of the upper disc ball supply port 310c in the disc unit base 310, and the rear end on the open side is the upper disc ball discharge port 310d in the disc unit base 310. The gaming balls, which are formed to be respectively positioned near the middle position in the vertical direction, are supplied to the upper disc main body 312 (the upper disc 301) from the upper disc ball supply port 310c and are guided to the upper disc ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

  In the upper tray main body 312, a metal upper tray rail 312a that can contact the game ball is attached from the center in the left-right direction at the rear end of the bottom to the open side. Although not shown, the upper tray rail 312a is electrically grounded (earthed) so that static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 protrudes forward, and outside the open side of the upper plate body 312 A mounting hole 314a is formed through which the mounting hole 314a penetrates in the vertical direction and on which the upper disc ball extracting button 340 described later is attached. The upper tray upper panel 314 is formed in the front end at a step shape which is one step lower than the upper front end of the upper tray main body 312 and has a decorative attachment portion 314 b for attaching the upper tray front decorative member 316. An operation unit attachment portion 314 c is formed in a step shape which is further lowered than the decoration attachment portion 314 b at a position on the front side of the plate main body 312 and for attaching an operation unit 400 described later.

  Although the detailed description is omitted, the upper plate right panel 310 and the upper plate left decorative substrate 322 attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 are positioned at positions corresponding to the LEDs 320a and 322a. An opening and a notch that penetrate in the direction are formed, and an opening that allows passage of a wiring cord that connects the operation unit 400 and the peripheral control unit 4140 is formed in the operation unit attachment portion 314c. .

  The upper front decorative member 316 is curved in the left and right direction along the front end of the upper tray upper panel 314, and a plurality of openings 316a from the lower side to the light guide portion 318a of the upper tray upper lens 318. Is fitted to the decorative attachment portion 314 b of the upper tray upper panel 314 so that the upper tray upper lens 318 can be held between the upper tray upper panel 314 and the upper plate upper panel 314. Further, an upper dish upper inner lens 319 having a plurality of minute lenses (prisms) on the surface is disposed under the upper dish upper lens 318, and the upper dish right decoration substrate 320 and the upper dish left decoration substrate 322 are disposed. It is possible to sufficiently diffuse the light from the above to make the entire upper dish upper lens 318 emit and decorate substantially uniformly. As shown in the figure, the inner peripheral shape of the opening 316a in the upper dish front decoration member 316 is formed in a pear shape, and the light guiding section 318a of the upper dish upper lens 318 fitted in the opening 316a is the same. The light guide 318a is shaped so as to have an appearance like a pair of shape-cut gems being fitted into the opening 316a of the upper plate front decoration member 316. .

  A lower plate body 324 of the lower plate unit 300 is fanned in a front view in plan view and has a bottom plate 324a formed so that a rear end is formed linearly in the left-right direction and a substantially center of the upper surface is lowest, and a center of the bottom plate 324a And a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end of the bottom plate 324a excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. An upper end of the side plate 324c of the lower tray main body 324, which rises upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a, is formed in a curved shape so as to be lower toward the front side and higher toward the rear side. The upper end rising upward from the end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower counter top plate 326 are placed and connected to the straight part of the upper end.

  The lower plate main body 324 is configured such that the rear ends of the bottom plate 324 a and the side plate 324 c are inserted and supported in a lower plate support groove 310 f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower bowl ball opening hole 324b of the lower bowl main body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower bowl ball outlet mechanism 350 disposed on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

  The lower surface cover 328 has an outer shape in a front view bulging downward, and each side is formed in an inverted triangle shape of a circular arc, and is provided with an opening 328 a penetrating in the front-rear direction at the center. The inner shape of the opening 328 a matches the shape formed by the lower plate body 324 and the front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and forms the opening of the lower plate 302. The lower plate cover 328 is formed of a translucent milk-white resin, and although not shown, color LEDs are arranged at predetermined intervals on the back side, and the entire lower plate cover 328 emits light. It can be decorated.

  The pan side middle cover 330 is disposed on the left and right outsides of the lower pan cover 328 in a front view, and is predetermined along the lower side of the lower pan cover 328 from the approximate center in the left and right direction to the side surface of the door frame 5 The upper rear end extending to the side of the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The plate side middle cover 330 has an opening 330a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the plate side middle cover lens 332 is fitted into the opening 330a from the rear side. Furthermore, a lock hole 330b penetrating in the front-rear direction to a position corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 in the vicinity of the outer end (right end) of the right side (open side) When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces from the lock hole 330 b.

  The plate side middle cover 330 further includes a bottom plate portion 330c extending rearward from the lower portion of the front end, and the rear end of the bottom plate portion 330c is attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It is supposed to be. In addition, a portion of the lower side of the lower plate body 324 is covered by the bottom plate portion 330 c of the plate side middle cover 330.

  The plate side outer cover 334 is disposed on the left and right sides of the plate side middle cover 330 in a front view and has a substantially triangular shape along the side and the bottom of the door frame 5 and is open rearward and upward. It is shaped like a box. In this example, a handle insertion hole 334a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the right (open side) plate side outer cover 334 at a position corresponding to the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100. The bowl side outer cover 334 is attached to the front of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and a part thereof is attached to the bowl unit base 310. In addition, the lower side except the central portion of the lower plate main body 324 is covered by the plate side outer cover 334 and the plate side middle cover 330.

  The upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 in the disc unit 300 is operated with respect to the upper disc ball extracting button 341 which is mounted to be able to advance and retract in the vertical direction with respect to the mounting hole 314 a of the upper disc upper panel 314. The actuating piece 342 moves up and down more than the up and down movement of the upper disc ball release button 341 and is supported on the front side of the disc unit base 310, and the ball feed unit 580 slides vertically by the up and down movement of the actuating piece 342 The upper disc ball-out slider 343 disposed on the rear side of the disc unit base 310 and the upper disc ball-out slider 343 can be slid in the vertical direction And an upper countersinking base 344 attached to the rear side of the support and the tray unit base 310.

  Although the detailed illustration of the upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340 is omitted, the operation piece 342 which moves up and down with the upper disc ball extraction button 341 so that the upper disc ball extraction button 341 is positioned at the upper moving end. It is biased upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper ball ball removal slider 343 is urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper ball ball removal base 344 and the upper ball ball removal base 344.

  The upper disc ball removing base 344 of the upper disc ball removing mechanism 340 closes the upper disc ball outlet 310d of the disc unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper disc ball outlet 310d and opens forward. 42 and a ball guiding channel 344b communicating with the opening 344a on the back side of the upper countersinking base 344 and guiding the gaming ball that has passed through the opening 344a downward and then guiding it backward (FIG. 42 and FIG. 44) and extends downward from the lower side of the ball guiding channel 344b and then extends toward the right (axially supported) end in a rear view substantially along the lower side of the upper countersinking base 344 And a ball removing channel 344c in which the game balls can be distributed.

  In the upper bowl ball removal base 344, the opening 344 a communicates with the upper bowl ball outlet 310 d, and the lower end of the ball guiding channel 344 b communicating with the opening 344 a is the ball of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper tray 301 is communicated with the ball feed unit 580 by communicating with the entrance 581 a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 through the feed opening 113. It can be supplied to

  Further, the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper countersink ball extraction base 344 communicates with the ball extraction port 581b of the ball feed unit 580 through the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 at the upper end adjacent to the ball guide flow path 344b. And the lower end extending to the pivotal support side is in communication with the notch 310i of the lower ball supply rod 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the gaming ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 is It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower end of the rear end of the ball removal flow passage 344c is closed by the upper countersink ball removal flow passage cover 345.

  When the upper disc ball extracting mechanism 340 presses the upper disc ball extracting button 341 downward against the biasing force of the coil spring, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343 a which protrudes backward is also obtained. Move down. The actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a rotates the partition 583a of the ball removing member 583 in a predetermined direction by the downward movement of the contact piece 343a. The movement between the entry port 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition portion 583a is released, and the entry port 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication. Thus, the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301 enter the entrance 581a of the ball feeding unit 580 through the opening 344a of the upper countersink base 344 and the ball guiding path 344b from the upper countersink outlet 310d. The ball is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball outlet flow passage 344c of the upper bowl ball removal base 344 and is transferred from the lower bowl ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower bowl ball supply rod 310h of the bowl unit base 310. It can be discharged.

  The ball removing member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball removing slider 343 biased upward by a coil spring, so that the ball removing member 583 is Even if game balls are vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a of the above, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that biases the upper disc ball removal slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, and the ball removal member 583 etc. While being able to prevent breakage, it is possible to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition 583a.

  The lower disc ball draining mechanism 350 in the disc unit 300 has a lower disc ball out base 351 disposed between the bottom plate portions 330 of the disc side middle cover 330 disposed on the lower side of the lower disc main body 324 in the front view right and left. A plate-like opening / closing shutter 352 pivotally supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball withdrawal base 351 and capable of opening and closing the lower plate ball withdrawal hole 324b of the lower plate body 324; A lower countersink slider 353 slidably supported in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the ball remover base 351, and a lower countersink release button 354 attached to the front end of the lower countersink slider 353.

  The lower disc ball dropping base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351 a vertically penetrated at a position facing the lower disc ball dropping hole 324 b of the lower disc body 324. In addition, the opening / closing shutter 352 is a closing portion 352a that can close the lower flat ball opening hole 324b, and a shutter round hole that is disposed on the front side of the closing portion 352a and penetrates in the vertical direction substantially coincident with the lower flat ball opening hole 324b And the lower ball ball extraction base 351 and a coil spring bias the closing portion 352a to a position where the lower ball ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a are closed.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the open / close shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin that can contact with the lower flat ball slide slider 353, and this contact pin contacts the lower flat ball slide slider 353. The closing portion 352a and the shutter ball opening hole 352b are moved to move backward by the lower disk ball opening slider 353, or the lower disk opening slider 353 is slid forward by the biasing force of the coil spring. It is possible to

  Further, as shown in the figure, the lower disc ball extraction button 354 is disposed at a position under the middle in the left-right direction of the lower disc cover 328 in the disc unit 300 and sandwiched by the left and right disc side middle covers 330. The surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 or the plate side middle cover 330 is formed so as to be smoothly continuous.

  In the lower disc ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the open / close shutter 352 is substantially coincident with the lower ball removing hole 324b of the lower disc body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower disc remover base 351. A holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower countersinking slider 353 at a predetermined position is further provided in order to hold the moving position.

  The lower disc ball extracting mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is moved to the front end when the surface shape of the lower disc ball extracting button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower disc cover 328 or the like. The lower countersink hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a of the open / close shutter 352. In this state, gaming balls can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower disc ball release button 354 in the closed state is pushed backward, the lower disc ball release button 354 and the lower disc ball out slider 353 slide backward, and the slide of the lower disc ball out slider 353 toward the back The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates against the biasing force of the coil spring so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball opening hole 352b move rearward.

  Then, the opening / closing shutter 352 is rotated backward, so that the shutter ball opening hole 352b is overlapped with the lower ball opening hole 324b and the base ball opening hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball opening hole 352b and the lower ball opening hole The game balls stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 300 through the lower tray ball removal holes 324b. When the lower countersink slider 353 is moved backward to a position where the shutter holes 352b and the lower counters ball 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower countersink 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. When the slide of the lower disc ball removal slider 353 is locked (held), the lower disc ball release button 354 is kept in the open state retracted backward, and the shutter ball out hole 352 b is released The game ball stored in the lower tray 302 can be discharged downward even if it is held in alignment with the removal hole 3324 b and the lower tray removal button 354 is not kept pressed.

  On the other hand, in the case where the lower ball ball extraction hole 324b is closed, when the lower ball ball extraction button 354 in the retracted state is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower ball ball slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released. The open / close shutter 352 is urged in such a direction that the closing portion 352a is closed by the coil spring so as to be able to slide, and the closing portion 352a is moved by the biasing force. It will turn in the direction which moves in the direction (forward) of ball removal hole 324b. Then, as the open / close shutter 352 pivots forward, the lower countersink slide 353 slides forward, and the lower countersink outlet 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower counterball relief button 354 is lowered. The game ball can be stored in the lower plate 302 by returning to the closed position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the plate cover 328 or the like.

  The holding mechanism 355 of the lower ball ball pulling out mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism will not be described.

  A rental ball unit 360 in the tray unit 300 includes a rental ball button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a rental balance display unit 363 between the rental ball button 361 and the return button 362. In this ball lending unit 360, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be distributed to the bowl unit 300 by inserting cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and pressing the ball rental button 361. Can be borrowed (dispensed) into the upper tray 301, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the loaned amount is subtracted and the cash remainder and prepaid card inserted are returned. There is. In addition, the remaining amount display portion 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

  The ball lending unit 360 is attached from the rear side to a ball lending unit attaching portion 310 b formed in the upper end decorative portion 310 a of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball lending unit 360 is provided with a crime prevention cover attachment portion 364 which protrudes backward from the rear surface and attaches and locks the attachment elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the crime prevention cover 180.

  The plate unit 300 of this example includes the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, and can be the pachinko machine 1 having the same feel as a conventional pachinko machine provided with two storage dishes. A new pachinko machine 1 (a new model pachinko machine) can be regarded as a pachinko machine 1 which is easy to select as a pachinko machine to be played by reducing anxiety and the like given to the player. It has become.

[1-2 G. Operation unit]
Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 45 to FIG. FIG. 45 is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 46 is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the lower right front. Furthermore, FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view showing a state where the pressing operation unit in the operation unit is pressed.

  The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is disposed on the front surface of the upper tray 301 substantially at the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and the dial operation unit 401 which can be operated by the player An operation unit 405 is provided, and the player's operation can be received according to the game state, and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved. , To be able to participate in the production during the game.

  The operation unit 400 includes an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical press operation unit 405 inserted into the annular ring of the dial operation unit 401, and an annular follower connected with the lower end of the dial operation unit 405. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 engaged with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 with the drive gear 412 fixed to the rotation shaft, an annular gear rail 416a rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, An operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b slidably supporting the press operation unit 405 in the vertical direction, and the press operation unit 405 disposed in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 It has an opening 420a through which a spring 418 for biasing upward, a gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 and a button support cylinder 416b can pass. A base member 420 to which the operation portion holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 are fixed on the lower surface, and an upper cover 422 having an opening 422a which covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. And a lower cover 424 attached on the lower side of the upper cover 422 so as to sandwich the base member 420 and covering the lower surface of the base member 420 and the dial drive motor 414.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422, and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. A cover body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit attaching portion 314c in the pan unit 300, a surface cover 428 covering the top surface of the cover body 426, and an operation portion holding member 416 attached to the top surface of the base member 420 A dial decoration substrate 430 having an opening 430a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the button operation cylinder 416b and the dial operation unit 401 can pass and a plurality of color LEDs 430b mounted at positions corresponding to the ring of the dial operation unit 401 on the upper surface And the lower side of the base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 A pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting rotation, a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressure operation unit 405, and a button decoration substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below the pressure operation unit 405 And.

  The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is formed of a translucent material, and extends outward from the upper end of the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and the inner cylinder portion 401a. An annular top plate portion 401b having a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder portion 401c cylindrically extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate portion 401b and shorter than the inner cylinder portion 401a, and an outer cylinder It mainly includes a collar portion 401d annularly extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401 d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422 a of the upper cover 422. In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a connection locking unit (see FIG. 48) at the lower end of the inner cylindrical portion 401a, and the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410 is locked, whereby the dial operation unit 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected.

  Furthermore, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a protrusion 401 f protruding in the center direction from the inner wall of the inner cylindrical portion 401 a at a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating portion 401 is annularly formed along the inner periphery of the inner cylindrical portion 401 a. The projecting portion 401f, which will be described in detail later, can come in contact with the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the stepped portion 407a of the button cap 407 projects the dial operating portion 401. By coming into contact with the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (the pressing operation portion 405) from being further retracted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401 f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407 a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 have their contact surfaces lowered toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. And the contact area is increased when they abut each other. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed (released) more to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

  In addition, the pressing operation portion 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape whose upper end is closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button main body 406, a button cap 407 for closing the upper end of the button main body 406, and a button cap And a cap inner 408 disposed between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 has a frusto-conical shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the frusto-conical shape. And a through hole 406a vertically penetrating in the center of the lower end face of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the button inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It is supposed to be.

  Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406 b which extend downward from the lower part of the outer periphery and the lower end protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axial direction. By locking with the locking convex portion 416f (see FIGS. 49 and 50) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is set so that the button main body 406 does not come off the button support portion 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although not shown in detail, in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416, there is provided a contact portion which prevents the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction, The button main body 406 (the pressing operation unit 405) is configured not to rotate in the button support cylinder 416b. A gap of a predetermined amount is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

  The button main body 406 further includes a pressing detection piece 406c which can be detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c of the button decoration substrate 432 which extends downward from a position different from the outer peripheral lower portion from the locking claw 406b. When the button main body 406 (press operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressure detection piece 406c is detected by the pressure detection sensor 432c.

  Furthermore, as illustrated, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation portion 405 has an outer diameter smaller than that of the upper side below the approximate center in the vertical direction, and a step 407a is formed between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 below the step portion 407a, and the dial operation portion above the step portion 407a. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of 401 and larger than the inner diameter of the projecting portion 401f. Thus, when the button cap 407 (the pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder 401a from above the dial operating unit 401, the step 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projecting portion 401f of the dial operating unit 401. The button cap 407 (the pressing portion 405) can not be further inserted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e (see FIG. 50).

  Furthermore, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The character “Push” is displayed on the top surface of the cap inner 408 so that the character can be viewed from the outside through the button cap 407.

  The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 is provided with a plurality of gear teeth meshing with the drive gear 412 on an annular outer periphery. The driven gear 410 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416 b in the operation portion holding member 416, and has an annular slide that contacts the gear rail 416 a of the operation portion holding member 416 on the lower surface. A moving surface 410a is provided. By inserting the sliding gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the sliding gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It can be done.

  Further, the driven gear 410 is provided with a pair of connection locking claws 410b which project upward from a position where the upper end is opposed and then project inward. The driven gear 410 and the dial operating portion 401 are coupled so as to be integrally rotatable by locking with the connection locking portion 401e of the inner cylindrical portion 401a.

  Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, and the details will be described later, but the rotation detection pieces 410c and the rotation detection pieces 410c The rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 can be detected by the detection pattern of each of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c by the slit 410d formed between the two. In this example, the lengths in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d are substantially the same.

  Further, as illustrated, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotational direction, rotational speed, and rotational angle, and the drive gear 412 is rotationally driven by the dial drive motor 414 via the rotational shaft. Thus, the dial operating unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation in small increments of the drive gear 412 (rotation shaft) by the dial drive motor 414. In addition, the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 is stopped for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, etc. It is possible to give a feeling.

  Furthermore, the operation portion holding member 416 in the operation unit 400 has an annular gear rail 416a for rotatably supporting the driven gear 410, and a button main body 406 of the pressing operation portion 405 projecting cylindrically upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a. And a locking projection 416f formed on the inner peripheral surface in the vicinity of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b and capable of locking with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. 49 and 50) and a through hole 416c for transmitting the light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 through the center of the bottom in the button support cylinder 416b to the inside of the button support cylinder 416b (the pressing operation portion 405) And the rotation detection sensor 4 mounted on the button decoration substrate 432 by vertically penetrating the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b. An opening 416d through which the 2a and 432b can pass, an opening 416e which the pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decoration substrate 432 vertically penetrates the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and viewed from the upper side; And a pair of substrate holding claws 416 f for locking and holding the extending button decorative substrate 432.

  The operation portion holding member 416 is disposed in the button support cylinder 416b and forms a gap of a predetermined amount in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and the locking is performed. It further has a plurality of contact parts that can be brought into contact with the claws 406b. The contact portion allows the button main body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range, and prevents the button main body 406 from rotating around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although the detailed description of the operation portion holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decoration substrate 432, etc. It is prepared for.

  The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operating unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 around the outer periphery of the button support cylinder 416b and placing the driven gear 410 on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported rotatably and rotatably. Further, by inserting the button main body 406 of the pressing operation section 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation section 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button main body 406. . A coil spring 418 is disposed between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416 b and the truncated conical lower surface of the button body 406. 405) is biased upward.

  The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is formed of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, and the operation unit 400 is less likely to be damaged even if the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 vertically penetrates the lower recess 420b which is fittable on the outer periphery of the operation holding member 416 and is recessed upward, and the bottom (ceiling) of the lower recess 420b. An inner opening 420a through which the gear rail 416a can pass, and an upper recess 420c disposed on the opposite side of the opening 420a from the lower recess 420b and capable of accommodating at least the driven gear 410; It is equipped. In addition, as shown in FIG. 48, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and a motor mounting portion 420d for attaching the dial drive motor 414, and from the outside to the lower recess 420b. A plurality of (four in the present example) legs 420e that project a predetermined amount and positioning holes 420f that open downward from the lower ends of the legs 420e are provided.

  In addition, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 disposed on the upper side outside the upper concave portion 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions outside the upper concave portion 420c. And a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decoration board 430 protruding therefrom. Furthermore, although detailed description is abbreviate | omitted, the positioning boss | hub for positioning each member, an attachment hole, etc. are formed in the suitable position of the upper surface and the lower surface of the base member 420. FIG.

  The base member 420 is inserted into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side to the central opening 420a, and then the predetermined screw is inserted. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, whereby the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although the base member 420 is not shown in detail, when the operation portion holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom of the upper recess 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

  The leg 420 e of the base member 420 is configured such that a positioning hole 420 f formed at the lower end thereof is fitted with a positioning projection 424 a formed on the upper surface of the bottom of the lower cover 424 described later. The lower cover 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at predetermined positions. Further, the substrate mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and disposed in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decoration substrate 430 mounted on the substrate mounting boss 420h is driven It is not in contact with the gear 410.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 contacts the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor attachment portion 420 d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transmitted to the base member 420 side. It can be sufficiently transmitted to the base member 420 so that the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. As a result, it is possible to suppress the overheating of the dial drive motor 414, and it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to the overheating.

  The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 is in the form of a box whose lower part is opened, and the top plate thereof is provided with an opening 422a of an inner diameter which allows the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 to pass and the collar portion 401d can not pass. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (horizontal direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the shaft center of the pressing operation unit 405 (follower gear 410) and the shaft center of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in plan view. It is formed to be extended, and is provided with engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both longitudinal direction ends, and by engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper surface is formed. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

  In addition, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer periphery of one (front side of the pattern machine 1) in the short axis direction (front and rear direction of the pachinko machine 1), and has a claw-like locking piece 422c whose lower end protrudes outward. It is equipped. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper tray front decoration member 316 in the tray unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper tray front decoration member 316, The operation unit 400 can be prevented from coming off the operation unit attachment portion 314 c upward.

  The upper cover 422 has the dial operation unit 401 from the lower side with respect to the opening 422 a in a state where the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decoration substrate 430, the dial member 401 and the like are attached to the base member 420. By covering the upper side of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the opening 422 a can prevent the dial operating portion 401 from being pulled upward.

  On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 is in the form of a box whose upper part is open, and the outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the outer periphery of the upper cover 422. A positioning projection 424a that can be fitted to the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of the 420d is provided. The lower cover 424 is provided with an engaging portion 424 b engageable with the engaging claw 422 b of the upper cover 422 at the upper part of each end in the long axis direction (left and right direction in the pachinko machine 1). The upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424 by engaging the engagement claws 422b.

  As shown, the cover main body 426 of the operation unit 400 extends in the vertical direction at the center and extends outward from the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the dial operation portion 401 (except for the collar portion 401d) can pass. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the tray unit 300, and a fixing boss 426c extending downward from the outer peripheral lower surface of the opening 426a and fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 .

  The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the pan unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation unit 400 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is attached in a state (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm) slightly floating above the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. The cover main body 426 is elastically deformed when it is pressed or struck, so that the impact can be alleviated.

  In the operation unit 400, with the front cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the pan unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then the cover main body 426 is The front cover 428 is attached to the top surface.

  In the operation unit 400 according to the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410, which rotates with the dial operation unit 401, has a circumferential length in the slit between adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and a circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths of the directions are the same. Further, in the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decoration substrate 432, the distance in the circumferential direction corresponding to the dial operation portion 401 is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410 It is assumed. Thereby, although the details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection It is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotated from the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b.

  Further, although the operation unit 400 of this example will be described in detail later, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. . In addition, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist rotation, to prevent it from turning intentionally, and to add a sense of click to the rotation. Furthermore, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeating the forward and reverse rotations of the dial drive motor 414 little by little.

  Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, as shown in FIG. 50, when the pressing operation portion 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 abuts on the projecting portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401, and the button cap As 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can not be further inserted into the inner cylindrical portion 401e, the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is dialed through the step 407a and the projection 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

  Furthermore, in the operation unit 400 of this example, with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 in contact with each other by pressing the pressing operation portion 405 By repeating the rotation and reverse rotation, it is possible to vibrate the pressing operation unit 405 as well as the dial operation unit 401, and it is possible to surprise the player by the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 and enjoy the game and the effect. It has become.

  According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated and operated by the player and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be operated by pressing are supported by the metal base member 420. Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player etc. hit the operation unit 401 or 405 strongly, and the operation unit 401 or 405 can be freely made to the player. While being able to operate it, it is possible to improve the operability of the operation units 401 and 405, and enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405 to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game it can.

  In addition, the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401. If the pressing operation unit 405 is to be strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is also likely to be hit, and the operation unit The force of tapping 401 and 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and concentration of impacted impact can be suppressed to prevent damage to the operation unit 400 and the tray unit 300. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 can withstand the smashing, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405. While being able to improve the operability of 405, it is possible to enjoy the effects using the operation units 401 and 405, and to suppress the decrease in the interest for the game Door can be.

  Further, the base member 420 and the like of the operation unit 400 are accommodated in the depressed operation unit attachment portion 314c of the pan unit 300, and a predetermined amount of clearance is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c. When the cover main body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the plate unit 300 so that the operation parts 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to apply an impact or load, The impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover main body 426 until the lower end of the operation unit 400 abuts on the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 and the bottom surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c After contact, the bottom (dish unit 300) of the operation unit attachment portion 314c Since the load can be received, it is possible to disperse the impact and the like from the operation units 401 and 405 and to avoid the concentration of the impact and the like, so that the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the pan unit 300 can be reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of legs 420e that project downward to a position away from the position supporting the operation parts 401 and 405, and the legs 420e of the base member 420 are the operation units in the tray unit 300. Since the leg 420e is not disposed immediately below the impact even when an impact from the operation portion 401 or 405 is applied to the base member 420 in contact with the bottom surface of the attachment portion 314c, the operation portion 401 or 405 of the base member 420 is The portion supporting the support is flexed by the impact, and the base member 420 is flexed (elastically deformed), so that the impact from the operation portions 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300 The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

  Further, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from the lower side so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in plan view. When the operation portion holding member 416 holding the dial operation portion 401 is removed from the base member 420 and moved downward when the operation portion 401 is smashed from the upper side, the dial operation portion 401 abuts on the upper surface of the base member 420 The downward movement of the dial operation unit 401 can be restricted by the base member 420, and depression of the dial operation unit 401 can be favorably prevented.

  Furthermore, since the dial operation unit 401 in which the pressing operation unit 405 is disposed at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the game state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotational drive including vibration). Allows the player to be surprised and to pay attention to the effect by the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can be entertained, and the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414, whereby the dial operation unit It is possible to make it difficult to get bored by making the effect using the 401 (the pressing operation unit 405) more diverse, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 through the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, so that the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 can be Therefore, even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly struck, the impact is transmitted via the rotation shaft of the dial operation unit 401. Direct application to the dial drive motor 414 can be avoided, and damage to the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) can be prevented.

  Furthermore, after making the opening 420a of the base member 420 smaller in diameter than the dial operation unit 401, the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a. Even if the gear rail 416a (the operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can contact the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 is the base member It is possible to reliably prevent the user from falling below 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased. Thus, it is possible to disperse the impact and load from the rear side and prevent the operating portion holding member 416 from being damaged.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 for rotationally driving the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotated and driven by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414 Even if the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 is forcibly stopped by the player despite the fact that it is rotationally driven by the above, even if the calorific value increases due to an excessive load on the dial drive motor 414, The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be well dissipated and dissipated through the base member 420, and any problems with the dial drive means 414 due to overheating can be prevented. It can be made to withstand high loads Can be sufficiently embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using a dial driving means 414 as described above, can be pachinko machine 1 to be entertained player.

  Furthermore, rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and a pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the pressure of the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressure operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation or the pressing operation of the player, it is possible to perform an effect according to the player's operation based on the detection signal, and one more for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide a sensation that has a sense of bodily sensation, and it is possible to entertain the player and to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. Further, the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 for emitting and decorating the operation units 401 and 405 can be provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be illuminated and decorated. By doing this, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation unit 401, 405, and the player can easily operate the operation unit 401, 405.

  In addition, since the step 407 a of the pressing operation unit 405 and the projecting portion 401 f of the dial operating unit 401 are in contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is pressed, the player presses the pressing operation unit 405. When the dial drive motor 414 causes the dial operation unit 401 to repeatedly rotate forward and reverse within a predetermined angle range and vibrates, the stepped portion 407a in contact with the projection 401f of the dial operation unit 401 is pressed. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even without separately providing a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to give the player a feeling of operation for the pressing operation 405, so that the effect using the operation unit 400 is enjoyed It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the player can be greatly surprised by the movement of the pressing operation unit 405 which was thought not to move by hand, which is good It is possible to make people think that there is something to be done, and it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the game and to suppress the decrease in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 move freely, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the effect using the operation unit 400. While being able to make it easy, it is possible to make the player operate the operation unit 400 positively, enjoy the operation of the dial operation part 401 of the operation unit 400 and the pressing operation part 405, and the interest to the game decreases Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the press operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other when the press operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the press operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. This enables the load and impact applied to the pressure operation unit 405 to be dispersed to the side of the dial operation unit 401 even when the pressure operation unit 405 is strongly hit, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressure operation unit 405. Can be enhanced. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is smashed, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being broken, thereby avoiding interruption of the game due to the breakage of the pressing operation unit 405 (the operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced by the interruption of the game.

  Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is supported so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angle range around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even when the dial operation unit 401 is driven to rotate by the motor 414, the pressing operation unit 405 can be prevented from rotating together with the dial operation unit 401. The respective roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be surely recognized, and it is possible to make it easy for the player to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400 and guiding the player to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. Therefore, the player can easily read the character "PUSH" from the player's side without turning or tilting greatly. It is possible to reliably recognize that the part 405 is intended to pressing.

  In addition, the dial operation unit 401 has a projecting portion 401 f that protrudes from the inner periphery of the inner cylinder portion 401 a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 has a smaller diameter below a predetermined position in the vertical direction. In the upper end of the operation unit 400, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylindrical portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as close as possible. As a result, the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance and the inside of the operation unit 400 via the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and it is difficult for the dial operation unit 401 to rotate or for the pressing operation unit 405 to be difficult because of the intrusion of foreign matter. The occurrence of a problem it is possible to prevent that or Tsu.

  Furthermore, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, whichever direction in the circumferential direction with respect to the dial operation unit 401 Since it is possible to make contact even at a position, even if the pressure operation unit 405 is inclined and pressed (presses a position deviated to the outer periphery than the center of the pressure operation unit 405), it reliably contacts the dial operation unit 401 Thus, the rotary drive from the dial drive motor 414 can be reliably transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, since the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 contact in an annular shape, the load from the press operation unit 405 can be widely dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the press operation unit 405 Impact resistance can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to be lower in the direction of the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, The contact area can be relatively increased in comparison, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed radially outward in the direction perpendicular to the direction in which the rotation axis extends, and the concentration of the load can be prevented. The loadability and the impact resistance can be surely enhanced, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced, and the occurrence of problems during the game can be reduced as much as possible to reduce the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of rotating in the forward and reverse directions, not only the dial operating unit 401 is simply rotated but also it is easily stopped at a predetermined position, The operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that can be easily vibrated by repetition and can achieve the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the dish unit 300 provided with the upper tray 301 for storing gaming balls, the strength and rigidity of the dish unit 300 is high in order to reliably store a large number of gaming balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a blow to the operation unit 400 (the pressing operation unit 405), and to make it easy to enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400.

[1-2 H. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame, as disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle device 500 of this embodiment is, as shown in the figure, through the handle insertion hole 334a of the plate side outer cover 334 of the plate unit 300 to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front of the door frame base body 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A handle base 502 fixed in a cylindrical shape and having a front end rounded in a direction perpendicular to the axis, an annular rotary handle main body 504 disposed on the front side of the handle base 502 rotatably relatively to the handle base 502, and a rotary handle The rotary handle main body front 506 fixed to the front of the main body rear 504 and made integral with the rotary handle main body 504 and arranged on the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and fixed to the handle base 502 In cooperation with rotating handle body front 506 and rotation A front cover 508 for rotatably supporting the bundle body after 504, and a.

  Further, the handle device 500 is attached and fixed so as to project rearward from the front side to the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle main body, and has a shaft member 510 having a noncircular bearing portion 510a at its rear end, and a bearing portion of the shaft member 510 A rotational position detection sensor 512 having a detection shaft portion 512a fitted to the 510a and made rotatable and non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base 502, and the rotational position detection sensor 512 sandwiched by the handle base 502 A sensor support member 514 fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 and having a through hole 514a through which the detection axis 512a of the rotational position detection sensor 512 can pass, a touch sensor 516 attached to the rear surface of the sensor support member 514, and a touch sensor 516 is a firing stop switch 518 mounted at a different position on the rear surface of the sensor support member 514; The single rotation button 520 rotatably supported on the material 514 and operating the firing stop switch 518, and the rotary handle front 506 and the rotary handle rear 504 disposed at initial rotation positions And a handle return spring 522 biased to return to the counterclockwise rotation end in a front view).

  As illustrated, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 according to this example has a cylindrical shape in which the front end side has a hemispherical shape that is expanded toward the front side and has a hemispherical shape and the rear end side has an open rear end. In the cylindrical outer periphery on the rear end side, three axially extending grooves 502a are formed. The three groove portions 502 a of the handle base 502 are one at the upper side, two at the lower side, and unevenly spaced with respect to the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. It is arranged. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the cylindrical portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502 a fits with the protrusion 143.

  The handle device 500 has an arc-shaped slit 506a disposed concentrically with the rotation shaft in the front of the rotary handle main body 506, and three mounting bosses 508a protruding rearward on the front end cover 508. The mounting bosses 508 a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slits 506 a in the front of the rotary handle main body 506. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 506a in the front of the rotary handle main body 506 abuts on the mounting boss 508a of the front end cover 508, whereby the rotation range of the rotary handle main bodies 504, 506 is restricted.

  Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 506b that protrudes rearward is formed on the front of the rotating handle main body 506, and one end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 506b. And the other end side (rear end side) of the handle return spring 522 is engaged with the sensor support member 514, and the handle return spring 522 causes the rotary handle main body 504 to be locked. , 506 are urged to rotate counterclockwise in a front view.

  The handle device 500 of this example is attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. The handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so that its attachment surface faces the outer side (open side) in a plan view as viewed from above, so the handle attached via the handle bracket 140 The device 500 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko machine 1) and the door frame It is attached and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle device 500, and can easily perform the turning operation without feeling discomfort in the turning operation.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the rotational handle main bodies 504 and 506 (the handle device 500) are rotated, detection of the rotational position detection sensor 512 via the shaft member 510 The shaft portion 512a is to be rotated. Then, the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512 changes in accordance with the rotation angle of the detection shaft 512a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 described later changes in accordance with the internal resistance of the rotational position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the front end cover 508 are plated with conductive, and the touch sensor 516 detects contact when the player contacts the rotary handle bodies 504 and 506 and the like. It is supposed to be. Then, when the rotary handle main body 504, 506 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the player's contact, the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled with the strength according to the rotation, and the game ball It is possible to type in That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball can not be hit, It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original and reduce the load (burden) associated with the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Also, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the launch stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the launch control unit 4120 stops the rotational drive of the launch solenoid 654. It is supposed to be. As a result, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the gaming ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 520, the operation before the one-shot button 520 is performed. It is possible to fire the game ball with a hitting strength.

  The handle device 500 of this example electrically detects the rotation operation of the rotation handle main bodies 504 and 506 by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and then controls the firing based on the detection of the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the part 4120, the handle device 500 provided on the door frame 5 and the striking ball launch device 650 provided on the main body frame 3 like a conventional pachinko machine There is no need to provide a mechanical (for example, joint unit) mechanism so as to be linked to each other when the door frame 5 is closed and to be released when the door frame 5 is opened, simplifying the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to eliminate the occurrence of a defect in the joint unit, and the player's interest is reduced due to the hitting defect of the game ball. And it is capable to suppress.

[1-2 I. Foul cover unit]
Next, the fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 52 to FIG. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the fal cover unit in the door frame, as viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the fal cover unit in the door frame, as viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a front view showing the front cover of the fal cover unit in a removed state.

  The fal cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is fired by a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 700 described later, or a hit ball firing device 650. The game ball (Fall ball) which has not reached the inside of the game area 1100 despite this is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The fowl cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 open on the front side and having a flow path of a plurality of gaming balls therein, and a front cover 544 closing the front end of the cover base 542.

  As shown in FIG. 53, the cover base 542 of the far cover unit 540 is disposed at the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction with the first ball inlet 542a, and the front end of the cover base 542 in communication with the first ball inlet. A second ball inlet 542c disposed on the outer side (right side in rear view) of the first ball inlet 542a and larger than the first ball inlet 542a; The second ball inlet 542c is in communication with the ball passage 542d, extends downward, and is lowered toward the lower right corner of the front view in the interior of the cover base 542. The first ball inlet 542 a and the second ball inlet 542 c are configured such that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 with the door frame 5 closed to the main frame 3. And are respectively formed at opposite positions. In the second ball passage 542d of the cover base 542, as shown in the figure, the height of the portion extending in the left and right direction along the lower end is about three times the height of the outer diameter of the gaming ball. A housing space 546 capable of housing a predetermined amount of gaming balls is formed.

  Further, the cover base 542 can communicate with the far ball inlet 542e disposed at the substantially central upper portion in the lateral direction and opened upward, and the far ball inlet 542e, and can guide the game ball to the upper portion near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. And the ball passage 542f. In addition, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening / closing operation piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the rear surface below the second ball inlet 542c. The opening and closing operation piece 542 g rotates the opening and closing crank 793 by contacting the spherical abutment portion 793 d of the opening and closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

  The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 540, is disposed at the upper left corner in front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 540, and penetrates in the front and rear direction And a second ball outlet 544b disposed in the lower right corner of the front view and communicating with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 540 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544 a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper countersink supply port 310 c of the tray unit 300 through the notch 101 a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet 544 b is connected to the rear end of the lower flat ball supply rod 310 h in the pan unit 300 through the ball passage opening 110 f of the door frame base main body 110.

  The far cover unit 540 of this example is the first ball outlet through the first ball passage 542 b for the game balls supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542 a. It can be supplied to the upper tray 101 through the upper tray ball supply port 310c of the tray unit 300 from 544a. In addition, the foul cover unit 540, the game ball supplied to the second ball inlet 542c from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700, through the second ball passage 542d second ball outlet It can be supplied to the lower tray 302 from the lower tray ball supply rod 310h and the lower tray ball supply port 310g of the tray unit 300 from 544b.

  Furthermore, although the details of the fal cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the fal ball inlet 542 e is positioned below the far space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball fired by the hit ball launch device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 and becomes a far ball and falls down the far space 626, it is received by the far ball inlet 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the far ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d (supply ) Can be.

  Further, the fal cover unit 540 of this example forms a side surface of the second ball passage 542 d on the upstream side (left side in a front view) of the accommodation space 546, and the cover base 542 is pivotable by the game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. The rocking member 548 pivotally supported at the same time, a full tank detection sensor 550 for detecting the rocking of the rocking member 548, and a spring for urging the rocking member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550 552 and. As shown in FIG. 54, the lower end of the pivoting member 548 is pivotally supported by the cover base 542 and the upper end is pivoted to the left in front view, and is substantially vertical. In this state, the left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed. The swinging member 548 is biased by the spring 552 to a substantially vertical position. Further, the swinging member 548 has a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side opposite to the housing space 546 side, and this detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. .

  Furthermore, the fal cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 disposed at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542 d, and a plate-like earth metal fitting 556 covering the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 in rear view. , And can remove static electricity generated by rolling resistance due to circulation of gaming balls.

  In this example, the game balls paid out from the winning ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the far cover unit 540, If the game ball is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 even if the inside of the upper plate 301 is full, it stays in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540 and further the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770 When the inside of the normal passage 773 on the upstream side is also full, gaming balls are distributed to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 79). The second ball inlet 542 c, the second ball passage 542 d, and the second ball outlet 544 of the far cover unit 540 from the full tank outlet 776 It comes to be supplied to the lower tray 302 of tray unit 300 via the.

  Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 is filled with gaming balls, the game balls can not be released from the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540, and stagnated in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The game ball will be stored. Furthermore, as game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 and a large number of game balls are stored in the storage space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swinging member 548, resisting the biasing force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swinging member 548 moves to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the swinging member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 is stopped in the payout control board 4110, and the dish unit for the player A notification prompting the player to discharge the gaming balls in 300 to the outside is performed.

  In addition, when the gaming ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swinging member 548 returns to the substantially vertical state by the biasing force of the spring 552, the detection of the detection piece 548a by the full tank detection sensor 550 It becomes non-detection, and the payout of the game ball from the winning ball unit 700 is resumed.

[1-2 J. Ball feed unit]
Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 55 and FIG. FIG. 55 is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 56 is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the door frame. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit with the rear case removed and seen from the rear. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the gaming balls supplied from the upper tray 301 in the tray unit 300 one by one to the ball launching device 650 and the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301. The upper tray ball removal mechanism 340 can be removed to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper tray ball removal button 341.

  In this ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper bowl ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 A box-shaped front cover 581 having a through opening 581a and a ball outlet 581b opened to the lower side of the opening 581a, and the rear end of the front cover 581 is closed and the front is opened. The rear cover 582 has a striking ball supply port 582a for supplying to the striking ball launch device 650 the gaming ball which penetrates in the longitudinal direction and enters from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581, a rear cover 582 and a front cover A partition 58 for pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and partitioning the entrance 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b on the rear side of the front cover 581. The ball removal member 583 having a and the gaming balls on the partition 583a of the ball removal member 583 are sent one by one to the ball hitting supply port 582a of the back cover and extend in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582 A ball feeding member 584 rotatably supported around the axis and a ball feeding solenoid 585 for turning the ball feeding member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feeding member 584 is disposed on the right side of the entrance 581a in a front view, and the ball feeding member 583 is on the left side of the ball feeding member 584 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is on the right. It is arranged.

  The front cover 581 of the ball feeding unit 580 has an arc-shaped slit 581c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball removing member 583 on the left side of the ball outlet 581b in a front view. An operating rod 583c of a ball removing member 583, which will be described later, is extended forward from 581c. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding channel 344b in the upper countersinking base 344 It is formed to close the.

  Further, the ball removing member 583 is a partition portion 583 a that partitions the space between the inlet 581 a and the ball outlet 581 b below the inlet 581 a and the upper surface becomes lower in the direction of the ball feeding member 584. It extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feed member 584 and is bent in a V shape toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction, and the lower end extends around the longitudinally extending direction A pivoting collar portion 583b rotatably supported, a rod-like operating rod 583c projecting forward from an upper end of the pivoting rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c And a weight 583d projecting to the opposite side to the partition 583a. The actuating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 55), and the ball feed opening of the door frame base main body 110 It comes in contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300 via the disc 113.

  Further, the ball feeding member 584 has a blocking portion 584a having a fan shape in plan view with a center on a rotation axis centering on the entrance 581a and the partitioning portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 and extending in the vertical direction. It has a ball holding portion 584b which is recessed in a circular arc shape from the rear end to the rotary shaft side, and a rod-shaped collar portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are respectively formed within an angle range of about 90 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 is sized to be able to hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 584 rotates around the axis of rotation by moving the collar portion 584c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 in the left-right direction. ing.

  In the ball feed member 584, the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b is in communication with the hitting ball supply port 582a at the same time as the blocking portion 584a turns in the direction of the partition portion 583a is the supply position, and the ball holding portion 584b faces in the direction of the partition portion 583a. It pivots between the holding position. When the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position, the game balls held by the ball holding portion 584b are supplied from the ball hitting supply port 582a to the ball striking and launching device 650, and the game entered into the partition 583a from the entrance 581a. The movement of the ball toward the ball holding portion 584b (ball hitting supply port 582a) is blocked by the blocking portion 584a, and the ball remains on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the partition 583a, and the ball holding portion 584b has the end portion on the flange portion 584c side closing the hitting supply port 582a. Only one game ball on the partition 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

  Also, the ball feed unit 580 has a ball feed operation rod 586 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of a ball feed solenoid 585, and movement of the tip of the ball feed movement rod 586 that is swung in the vertical direction A ball feed crank 587 is provided, which pivots about an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 about an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 and extends in the left and right direction with an engaging portion 587a, and a side engaged with the ball feed actuating rod 586 of the engaging portion 587a. A shaft portion 587b rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. And a transmission portion 587c engaged with a rod-like collar portion 584c (see FIG. 57) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center. In this example, a flapper solenoid in which a ball feeding solenoid 585 and a ball feeding operation rod 586 are integrally formed is used.

  The ball feed unit 580 of this example transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 586, which is oscillated by the driving of a ball feeding solenoid 585 which advances and retracts in the vertical direction, by a ball feeding actuating rod 586 and a ball feeding crank 587. The 584 can be turned. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted downward. In the state, the ball feed member 584 is at the supply position. Also, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the tip of the ball feed actuating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and is pivoted upward so that the ball feed member 584 pivots to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 584 receives one game ball, and when the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 584 receives The game ball is sent (supplied) to the ball hitting device 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the launch control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 654.

  In addition, the ball extraction member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feeding unit 580 in this example is configured to apply a moment so as to rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view by the weight portion 583 c. The forward movement of the actuating rod 583 c abuts against the upper end of the contact piece 343 a of the upper disc ball withdrawal slider 343 in the upper disc ball ejection mechanism 340 of the disc unit 300, thereby restricting its rotation. In normal times, the dividing portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 divides the space between the entrance 581a and the ball removing hole 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball removing hole 581b. Then, when the player presses the upper countersink releasing button 341 of the upper countersink removing mechanism 340 in the countersink unit 300 downward, the upper countersink removing slider 343 slides downward with the contact piece 343a and comes into contact As the piece 343a moves downward, the operating rod 583c also moves relatively downward.

  In this way, the actuating member 583c moves downward with the contact piece 343a of the upper ball ball extracting mechanism 340, so that the ball removing member 583 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front and the entrance by the partition 583a. The partition between 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the gaming ball entering from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball outlet flow path 344c of the upper tray ball outlet base 344 of the dish unit 300. , And is discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 302.

  In addition, since the contact piece 343a of the upper disc ball removal slider 343 with which the operation rod 583c of the ball removal member 583 is in contact is biased upward by a coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 581a Also, the impact can be absorbed by a coil spring that biases the upper ball ball withdrawal slider 343 via the actuating rod 583c, so that breakage of the ball withdrawal member 583 and the like can be prevented, and the gaming ball is It can be prevented that the partition part 583a bounces back.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and supplied to the ball feed unit 580, and then the player operates the handle device 500 provided on the front of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650 by driving the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580, and the game ball is hit into the game area 1100 by the ball hitting and firing apparatus 650. The game is performed in the game area 1100 which is made visible through the game, and the player can be entertained, and the feed mechanism (the ball feed member 584 or the ball feed solenoid 585) is provided on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and the discharging mechanism (ball removing member 583), and the ball feeding unit 580 is disposed. The ball feed member 584 and the ball hitting and firing device 650 also come close to each other as much as possible, and remain on the ball feed member 584 when the game ball in the upper tray 301 is ejected by operating the upper disc ball release button 341. The number of gaming balls can be reduced as much as possible, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 including the ball removing member 583 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, it is possible to increase the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300, and the game ball is hit. The game balls in the upper plate 301 can be eliminated early by the operation, and the upper plate 301 can be prevented from being filled with the game balls at an early stage, and the game balls in the upper plate 301 can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to reduce the feeling of inconvenience for the player and to suppress the decrease in interest, and also to miniaturize the plate unit 300 while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to be the pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Further, since the ball feeding unit 580 is provided with the ball pulling member 583, the ball feeding member 580 can be compared with the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 separately. The 584 and the ball removing member 583 can be attached, and the time and effort for assembling can be simplified, and the feeding unit 580 can be easily replaced, and a defect occurs in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball removing member 583 Even if the ball feeding unit 580 is replaced, the problem can be solved easily.

  Furthermore, since the ball feed unit 580 is disposed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper disc ball is compared to that provided with the ball feed unit 580 on the main body frame 3 side. There is no need to configure the transmission mechanism (upper disc ball extraction mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the extraction button 341 to the ball extraction member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 so as to straddle the openable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (every time the door frame 5 is opened compared to the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side) Blocking of the upper ball ball withdrawal mechanism 340) can prevent the possibility of premature wear of the transmission mechanism, causing malfunction or breakage, and reliability for operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. And durability can be enhanced.

  Further, since the upper disc ball release button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper disc ball release button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301 It is possible to stop the game balls from being discharged from the game player, and to allow the player to easily operate the ball extraction operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball extraction button 341.

  In addition, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 which slides in the vertical direction according to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, the partition 583a is also movable in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper countersink slider 343 and the partitions 583a can be reduced as much as possible. The unit 580 can be downsized, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

  Further, the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper disc ball extracting slider 343 is at the raised position, the partitioning portion 583 a of the ball extracting member 583 brings the entry port 581 a into communication with the hitting supply port 582 a. Therefore, even if the game ball from the upper plate 301 vigorously abuts against the partition portion 583a, the impact can be mitigated by the biasing force acting on the upper tray ball withdrawal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a The durability of 583) can be enhanced. In addition, since the impact applied to the partition 583a can be alleviated by the biasing force acting on the upper flat ball slide slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to collide even if it collides with the partition 583a. Thus, the ball feeding unit 580 or the like can be damaged and the occurrence of a defect can be suppressed.

  Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, it is related to the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a as compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. The friction loss can be reduced, and the operation of the upper bowl ball withdrawal button 341 can be lightened to improve the operability, and the movement range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in plane projection, as in the above. The effects and effects of

  In addition, since the partition 583a is rotated by its own weight in the direction to connect the inlet 581a and the ball outlet 581b, if a problem occurs in the partition 583a or the upper countersinking mechanism 340, the partition By turning by its own weight, the entrance and the discharge port are communicated, and the game medium in the storage tray is fed to the feed mechanism (loading device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it is discharged to the player without being stopped, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and it is moved to the pachinko machine 1 having no problem so that it is interesting It is possible to suppress the decrease.

  Furthermore, since the ball removing member 583 is rotated through the pivoting collar portion 583b of the dividing portion 583a, when the game ball collides with the partitioning portion 583a, the pivoting collar portion whose impact is bent It is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotation shaft by dispersing the pressure by the 583 b or absorbing it by the bending of the rotation flange portion 583 b, so that the durability of the ball removing member 583 can be reduced. It can be enhanced.

  Further, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper tray 301, when discharging the gaming ball in the upper tray 301, the right and left sides of the gaming ball in the ball feeding unit 580 The movement of the direction can be minimized, and the game ball can be discharged well by improving the passage of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580. In addition, since the ball outlet 581b is disposed immediately below the entrance 581a, the discharge path of the game balls in the ball feed unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feed unit 580 can be used as a discharge mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to suppress the ball feeding unit 580 from being unnecessarily enlarged.

[1-2 K. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 22 and FIG. This glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the gaming window 101, and an annular octagonal unit frame 592 molded with synthetic resin, and two sheets for closing the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592 respectively. A transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 106). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 is disposed at the left and right ends vertically apart from each other, and includes four pieces 592a extending outward in the form of a plate, and a plate extending horizontally along the lower end and downwardly extending And an interlocking piece 592b.

  The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be engaged from behind and above Then, the outer periphery of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support stepped portion 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the locking piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190. The base unit 100 is detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 23, FIG. 28, etc.).

  As described above, in the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing game balls are vertically arranged below the vertically elongated oval shaped game window 101. In order to drive the gaming balls stored in the upper tray 301 to the right of the lower tray 302 in the front view right side of the lower tray 302 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 disposed behind the transparent glass unit 590 closing the gaming window 101. A handle device 500 is arranged. In addition, the door frame 5 surrounds the lower side of the game window 101 while the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 2200, and the upper decoration unit 280 are disposed so as to surround the left and right and upper sides of the game window 101. Thus, the plate unit 300 is disposed to be continuous with the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220 across the side speaker cover 290, and the appearance of each unit 200, 220, 280, 300 is rounded. It has an appearance with a continuous and integrated unity.

  In addition, the door frame 5 causes the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, etc. provided in the respective units 200, 220, 280, 300 to emit light, thereby the game window 101 The light emitting decoration can be made with any light emitting color so as to surround the opening 328 a of the lower plate cover 328. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 220, on the rear side of the radiation lenses 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. By turning on or off the arranged LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256, it is possible to change the mode of the light emission decoration surrounding the game window 101.

  Specifically, the light emission modes of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a in the side lenses 210, 250, and the light emissions of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b. If the modes are the same light emitting mode (the light emitting color and the light emitting pattern are the same), the entire light emitting decoration can be substantially uniform, and if the light emitting modes are different so as to emphasize the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a When it is made to be able to make it a light emission decoration that there was a break in the circumferential direction, when the light emission modes are made different so as to emphasize the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b, they glow radially around the center of the game window 101 It can be a light emitting decoration, and can attract the player's attention strongly.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the base member 420 for supporting the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is made of aluminum alloy by die casting, and the base member 420 is formed of the plate unit 300 by the cover main body 426. Because the operation unit attachment portion 314c is suspended, when the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 is hit, the cover main body 426 is elastically deformed so as to bend, and then the base member 420 is lowered. It will be in contact with the upper surface of the operation unit attachment portion 314c via the cover 424, so that the impact applied to the dial operation portion 401, the pressing operation portion 405, etc. can be alleviated and breakage of the operation unit 400 can be prevented. It can be done.

  Furthermore, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 405 is inserted into the annular dial operation unit 401, and even if the player etc. strongly strikes the pressing operation unit 405, the dial operation unit 401 as well. Since the impact performed by the dial operation unit 401 can be dispersed, it is possible to prevent concentration of the impact and make it difficult to break. Also, the gear rail 416a of the operation portion holding member 416 rotatably supporting the dial operation portion 401 is attached to the opening 420a of the metal base member 420 so as to slightly project from the upper surface from below, and the dial operation When the impact striking the portion 401 is transmitted to the operation portion holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) through the driven gear 410 and the operation portion holding member 416 is bent downward, the lower surface of the driven gear 410 is the outer periphery of the metal opening 420a. Since the base member 420 can be in contact with the upper surface and the impact can be received by the base member 420, the load on the operation portion holding member 416 can be reduced and the gear rail 416a can be prevented from being crushed by an impact. The durability of the operation unit 400 can be enhanced.

  In addition, since the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 is attached from the upper side to the plate unit 300, the operation unit 400 can be easily replaced even if the operation unit 400 is damaged, It is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 due to the replacement of the unit 400.

[1-2 L. Luminescent decoration in the door frame]
Then, the light emission decoration in the door frame 5 is mainly demonstrated with reference to FIG.59 and FIG.60. FIG. 59 is a front view showing the arrangement of the light emitting decoration LEDs in the door frame. Moreover, FIG. 60 is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emission decoration in a door frame. The door frame 5 of the present embodiment has a substantially annular outer periphery of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300. It is formed to surround. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 has a decorative substrate 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322 on which the LED is mounted. The outer periphery of can be decorated with light emission.

  The right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer periphery except the lower side of the game window 101 as described above. The lens units 210 a and 250 a are disposed along the outer periphery of the game window 101, and the radiation lens units 210 b and 250 b extend along a radial axis centered around the lower portion in the left-right direction center of the game window 101 Are disposed between the circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other. The peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 are surrounded by the side decoration frames 202 and 242 which are opaque (in this example, have a plated layer on the surface) Is enclosed.

  The side inner lenses 212 and 252 are disposed on the rear side of the side lenses 210 and 250, and the body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 are opposed to the rear surfaces of the circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a. The light guide portions 212b and 252b are formed to extend to a position as close as possible to the rear surface of the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b. It is done. Although detailed illustration is omitted in the main body portions 212a and 252a of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surface, and the decoration substrates 214, 216 and 254 disposed on the rear side. , 256 can be diffused.

  The upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 disposed on the rear side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, and circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a LED 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a disposed at the corresponding position, and LED 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b disposed at the position corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b, 250b. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a are full color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b are white LEDs (upper decoration The normal brightness lower than the LED 286 b of the upper decorative substrate 286 in the unit 280 is considered. In addition, two LEDs 214c disposed on the upper and lower sides corresponding to the side sub lenses 228 in the right side upper decoration substrate 214 are red LEDs.

  In this example, the surface of the upper right side decorative substrate 214, the lower right side decorative substrate 216, the upper left side decorative substrate 254, and the lower left side decorative substrate 256 is white photoresist, white printing (for example, silk printing) ), White paint, etc. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 can be increased, so that light from the player is reflected by the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 210a, 210b, etc. are not lit. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and worsening in appearance, and at the same time, the board reflects the light from the LEDs 210a and 210b emitting light to the player. The lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated more brightly.

  Next, as described above, the upper decoration unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the end portions of the upper portion of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 facing the center of the door frame 5 in the left-right direction. To decorate the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 has a large central lens 282 formed in the center in the center, a side lens 284 formed obliquely on both the upper and lower left sides of the central lens 282, and lower left and right sides of the central lens 282. And a lower lens 289 disposed. The central lens 282 of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the side lenses 284 and the lower lens 289 are formed of a translucent (white) member. . Thereby, the inner lens 283 disposed on the rear side of the central lens 282 can be visually recognized from the player side.

  The inner lens 283 of the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of fine lenses (including prisms) formed on its surface, and can diffusely reflect or diffuse light, so it can be transmitted through the transparent central lens 282 Looking at the inner lens 283, the central lens 282 appears to be deep, and the central lens 282 itself appears to glow. In addition, the upper decoration substrate 286 disposed on the rear side of the inner lens 283 is not visible from the player side.

  The upper decorative substrate 286 in the upper decorative unit 280 has a plurality of (six in this example) LEDs 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 and disposed behind the inner lens 283, the side lenses 284 and the lower lens 289 A plurality of LEDs 286b (in this example, two for the side lens 284 and one for the lower lens 289, which are disposed on the left and the right, respectively) disposed on the side are provided. In this example, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 is a full color LED, and the LED 286b corresponding to the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 is a white LED of high brightness. Further, the front surface of the upper decorative substrate 286 is also white, so that the same function and effect as described above can be obtained.

  Subsequently, in the plate unit 300, the plurality of light guide portions 318a in the upper plate upper lens 318 along the front end of the upper plate 301 are connected to the upper plate along the front end of the upper plate 301 so as to connect the lower ends of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240. It is arranged in a state of being exposed through the opening 316a of the front decoration member 316, and when viewed from the front, the lower side outer side of the game window 101 by the upper dish front decoration member 316 and the upper dish upper lens 318 as shown. The lower side is decorated. Under the upper plate upper lens 318, an upper plate upper inner lens 319 having a projection corresponding to each light guide 318a is disposed. The upper dish upper lens 318 of the dish unit 300 is formed of a bluish transparent member, and the upper dish upper inner lens 319 is formed of a transparent member.

  The upper plate upper inner lens 319 of the plate unit 300 has a plurality of minute prisms formed on the surface (upper surface) corresponding to the light guiding portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 to diffusely reflect or irregularly refract light. As in the case of the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280, the light guide 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 is given a richness and a sparkling brilliance, thereby The light section 318a looks as if it were a gem. The upper dish upper inner lens 319 does not allow the upper dish right decoration substrate 320 and the upper dish left decoration board 322 disposed on the lower side to be seen from the player side through the light guide 318a.

  A plurality (six in this example) of the upper dish right decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 in the dish unit 300 correspond to the light guide portions 318 a of the upper dish upper lens 318. LEDs 320a, 322a are provided. In this example, the LEDs 320a and 322a of the upper dish right decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 are full color LEDs. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the upper dish right decorative substrate 320 and the upper dish left decorative substrate 322 are also white, and the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

  Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the pan unit 300 includes a translucent annular dial operation unit 401 and a translucent cylindrical press operation unit disposed inside the dial operation unit 401. A dial decoration substrate 430 and a button decoration substrate 432 are disposed below the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, respectively. The dial decoration substrate 430 is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) LEDs 430 b arranged in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. In addition, the button decoration substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432 d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decoration substrate 430 is a white LED of high brightness, and the LED 432d of the button decoration substrate 432 is a full color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surfaces) of the dial decoration substrate 430 and the button decoration substrate 432 are also white, and the same function and effect as those described above can be achieved.

  By the way, in the door frame 5 of this example, the right side decoration unit 200 covering the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101 and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 correspond. The second annular group 103 in which the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are disposed outside the first annular group 102 and the first annular group 102 (within the range of the hatch in FIGS. 59 and 60) close to the game window 101. (In the range of cross hatch in FIG. 59 and FIG. 60), the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are lighted appropriately, so as to surround the game window 101 approximately concentrically A plurality of (two in this example) light emitting decorations can be made. In other words, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 emit light, the hatch area near the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 When all lights are emitted, the area of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is annularly decorated to emit light.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lenses 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 correspond to the first annular group 102 and the The radial group 104 (within the shaded area in FIGS. 59 and 60) radially extends around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the two-ring group 103 in the circumferential direction. ing. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the gaming window 101 can be decorated to emit light radially, and in addition, the annular group by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 The light emission decoration can be made to be divided in the circumferential direction. In addition, the LEDs 214c corresponding to the side sub lenses 228 on the upper right side in the right side decoration unit 200 are the upper right side group 105, and one of the upper right sides of the door frame 5 is lit by appropriately emitting the LEDs 214c. The portion (side sub lens 228) can be decorated to emit light.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 286a corresponding to the central lens 282 in the upper decoration unit 280 for decorating the upper center of the game window 101 emits and decorates the upper center of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is considered as a group 106. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 286a of the upper central group 106, the upper central portion of the game window 101 can be illuminated and decorated, and a reference point of the annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 Can be made to emit light. In addition, the LEDs 286 b corresponding to the side lenses 284 and the lower lenses 289 in the upper decorative unit 280 are the upper central side group 107 for emitting and decorating the left and right sides of the upper central group 106. The LED 286b of the upper central side group 107 is appropriately illuminated to illuminate and embellish the boundaries between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106, and the upper side of the game window 101 (including the upper part) Can be made to emit light in a V-shape.

  Furthermore, in the door frame 5, an LED 320a corresponding to the light guide portion 318a of the upper plate upper lens 318 fitted into the plurality of openings 316a of the upper plate front decoration member 316 in the plate unit 300 for decorating the lower side of the game window 101. , 322a are connected to a lower group 108 for emitting and decorating the outer periphery of the lower side of the game window 101 so as to connect the lower ends on the left and right of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The lower side of the gaming window 101 and the front edge of the upper plate 301 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting the LEDs 320 a and 322 a of the lower group 108, and the LEDs 214 a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. , 216a, 254a, 256a, the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 can be decorated to emit light in a ring shape.

  Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operating unit 401 and the pressing operating unit 405 of the operation unit 400 disposed at the upper center of the tray unit 300 at the lower center of the game window 101 It is considered as an operation unit group 109 for emitting light and decorating. By appropriately emitting the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation unit group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be decorated to emit light, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 can be obtained. It is possible to notify the player.

  The light emission decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided corresponding to the control system in the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which they respectively belong. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the twenty LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are provided for each of the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 by 102a to 102j. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j for each of the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250, which are divided into 10 systems. It is done.

  The twenty LEDs 214 b, 216 b, 254 b and 256 b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems 104 a to 104 h for each of the radiation lens parts 210 b and 250 b of the side lenses 210 and 250. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the upper right side group 105 are divided into two systems of an upper side 105a and a lower side 105b. Furthermore, the six LEDs 286a belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a lower portion 106a, an upper right portion 106b, and an upper left portion 106c. Further, the six LEDs 286b belonging to the upper central side group 107 are divided into two systems of the right side 107a and the left side 107b.

  Further, the twelve LEDs 320a and 322a belonging to the lower group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d three by three from the front right side. In the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109, four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 are arranged diagonally across the pressing operation unit 405, and the LEDs 430b form a pair. , And one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 are divided into three systems of one system. Thus, in the door frame 5 of this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, 430b, and 432d are divided into 42 systems. ing.

  By the way, in the door frame 5, as above-mentioned, LED214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, 432d is made into full color LED, These LED214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 286a, 320a, 322a, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c, to which 432 d belongs, are further provided with three independent systems of RGB in order to emit light in full color. It is 84 lines of double. The LEDs 286 b and 430 b are white LEDs of high brightness, and the four systems 107 a, 107 b, 109 a and 109 b to which the LEDs 286 b and 430 b belong require a large amount of current to emit light at high brightness. Two systems are connected in each case, and in actual light emission control, eight systems are doubled.

  The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs with normal luminance and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Moreover, LED214c is made into red LED, and belongs to 2 system | strain 105a, 105b. The ten systems 104a to 108h, 105a, and 105b of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled in each system. Therefore, the same number of ten systems is used in actual light emission control.

  Therefore, the actual number of systems in the light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102 systems, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 286a, 286b, 320a, 322a, Lighting and flickering are controlled by dynamic lighting for each system to which 430b and 432d belong, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control) . By this, it is possible to perform expressive light emission effects.

  As the light emission effect in the door frame 5, for example, light is emitted sequentially from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (the same color or similar colors are sequentially emitted) so that the light spreads outward around the game window 101. On the other hand, light emitting effects such as converging from the outside toward the game window 101 by causing the second ring group 103 to sequentially emit light (in the same color or similar colors sequentially) from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102; Alternatively, by causing the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 to emit light simultaneously, it is possible to perform a light emission effect or the like that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

  In addition, the LED of the game board 4 and the LED of the first ring group 102 near the game window 101 are coordinated with the LEDs provided on the front of the game board 4 and the front unit 2000 etc. (details are omitted). With the LEDs of the second annular group 103 disposed outside the first annular group 102, it is possible to perform a more expressive luminous effect, and it is possible to attract the player's interest strongly. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, in the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, and the lower group 108, light is circulated around the outer periphery of the game window 101 by appropriately emitting light from the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, and 108a to 108d. Light may be directed toward the central lens 282 of the upper decoration unit 280 along the outer periphery of the game window 101, or light may be transmitted along the outer periphery of the game window 101 from the central lens 282. It is possible to make a light emission effect that moves. In this example, the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 are divided into ten groups 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction (10 divisions), but the present invention is not limited thereto. If it is divided into about eight systems (about eight divisions), it is possible to favorably perform light emission effect such that light circulates on the outer periphery of the game window 101.

  Furthermore, by emitting only the radial group 104, the light emission effect of emitting light radially around the game window 101 is performed, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted simultaneously with the radial group 104. By making it emit light that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or making the radial group 104 emit light (light on / blink) while emitting light from the first annular group 102 or the second annular group 103 It is possible to give a light emission effect that gives an accent to the light emission decoration of In addition, by causing each system 104 a to 104 h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to perform a light emission effect such that the radiation lens portions 210 b and 250 b circulate.

  In addition, it is possible for the light to be rotated in the central lens 282 by causing each system 106 a to 106 c to emit light simultaneously by causing each system 106 a to 106 c of the upper center group 106 to emit light simultaneously, or sequentially emitting light from each system 106 a to 106 c. Light emission effects can be performed. In addition, by making the upper central side group 105 emit light, the side lens 284 and the lower lens 289 are illuminated and decorated with high brightness, and the player comes to a chance or a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a probability change game) It is possible to perform a light emission effect that suggests a state, a time saving game state, a probability changing time short game state, etc.). The lower lens 289 is arranged to emit light toward the player from above the player's head, so that the player can easily notice the light emission of the high-brightness LED 286 b. .

  Furthermore, by causing each system 108 a to 108 d of the lower group 108 to emit light appropriately, a light emission effect for emitting and decorating the front edge of the upper tray 301 or emitting light in association with the operation group 109 is performed. Or, a light emission effect can be performed to urge the operation of the pressing operation unit 405. In addition, by causing the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109 to emit light as appropriate, the operation of the dial operation unit 401 is prompted or the light emission effect for guiding the rotational operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 is provided. can do. Furthermore, by causing the system 109 c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that urges the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

  Since the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the system 109c of the operation group 109 are full color LEDs, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform light emission effects with different gradations such as light emission color and brightness for each of 109, and for each of the systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c. A rich luminous effect can be performed.

  As described above, in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment, in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are close to the game window 101. A plurality of outer sides of the game window 101 (game area 1100) can be divided because the ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 far from the game window 101 outside the first ring group 102 can be divided to emit light. The pachinko machine can be illuminated and decorated in a substantially concentric fashion, and by surrounding the outer periphery of the game window 101, a light can be rendered without the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine can attract the interest of the player strongly It is designed to be one.

  In addition, one circumferential lens portion 210a and 250a is provided with two systems of LEDs arranged substantially concentrically, and even if the appearance looks like one, each of the two systems of LEDs emits light. Since the light emission decoration can be made substantially concentric, it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the external appearance, and the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a by the light emission decoration (right side decoration unit 200 and left side decoration unit It is possible to make the change of 240) large and to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of attracting the player's attention strongly by increasing the impact of the light emission decoration.

  Further, the LEDs 214b, 216b, and 214b arranged radially on the decoration boards 214, 216, 254, 256 of the left and right decoration units 200, 240 in the door frame 5 outside the transparent game window 101 closing the front of the game area 1100. And an LED 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, which are circumferentially divided by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b and arranged substantially concentrically. Since the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 are lit depending on the game state, the outer circumference of the game window 101 can be decorated with a plurality of rings. And I have never seen it on a conventional pachinko machine It is possible to show the cormorants Do not light-emitting decoration to the player, can be a pachinko machine 1 attracted is strong interest in the player.

  In addition, the annular first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 configured by the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 in the door frame 5 are arranged substantially concentrically (FIG. 60) ), And by emitting light in the second ring group 103 and then the first ring group 102 in this order from the outside to the Can make the player's attention turn to the game area 1100, and can make it think that something good may be done in the game area 1100, thereby increasing the expectation for the game It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest. Furthermore, by emitting light in order of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 from the inside toward the outside, it is possible to perform a light emission effect that spreads outward from the game window 101, ie, the game area 1100, The light emission effect that spreads out makes it possible to give the player a sense of expectation that something is good, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Furthermore, since the above-described light emission effect can be performed outside the game window 101 (game area 1100), not only the player who plays a game with the pachinko machine 1, but also the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The above-described luminous effects can be shown to the player in the game hall, and the other player's attention is strongly drawn to make it easy to select this pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play a game Can.

  In addition, the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b of the radial group 104 radially disposed so as to divide the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 extending in the circumferential direction. Since it is possible to divide the annular luminous decoration by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 in the circumferential direction by emitting the radial groups 104, an accent can be given to the luminous decoration, The change of the light emitting decoration can strongly attract the player's attention. In addition, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 correspond to the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250 by the radial groups 104 arranged radially. Since the lens groups 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j are divided, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a are caused to emit light independently for each of the groups 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j. Thus, it is possible to perform light emission effects such that the light moves in the circumferential direction, and by providing more colorful light emission effects, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 hard to get tired.

  Furthermore, the side lenses 210 and 250 are provided with circumferential lens portions 210a and 250a corresponding to the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a and 256a, and radiation lenses 210b and 250b corresponding to the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b. Since it is possible to change the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 as compared with the case where the radiation lenses 210b and 250b are integrally included in the peripheral lenses 210a and 250a, it is possible to change the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250. Even when the light emitting decoration is not performed, the design of the appearance of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to attract the player's attention strongly. Incidentally, even if the side lenses 210 and 250 are divided into the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a and 256a which are annularly arranged and the LEDs 214b and 216b which are radially arranged , 254b and 256b can be made to emit light in the same light emission mode, so that it becomes possible to illusion the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b to be integrated, and the outer periphery of the game window 101 is integrated Light emission decoration can be performed in a ring shape, and the above-described effects can be sufficiently achieved.

  In addition, the LEDs 214a of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 circumferentially partitioned by the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b radially disposed on one of the circumferential lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. , 216a, 254a, 256a, and even if the appearance looks like one, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are caused to emit light respectively Since the light emission decoration can be performed substantially concentrically, it is possible to make it difficult to imagine the aspect of the light emission decoration from the appearance, and the change of the side lenses 210 and 250 due to the light emission decoration can be increased. Increase the impact of decoration to draw the player's attention It can be pachinko machine 1 to be kicked.

  Furthermore, a side inner lens 212 that diffuses the light from the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 between the side lenses 210, 250 and the decoration substrates 214, 216, 254, 256 and irradiates the side lenses 210, 250 with the light. Since the light emitting decoration of the side lenses 210 and 250 can be prevented from having unevenness due to the provision of the light emitting diode 252, the appearance of the light emitting decoration can be improved, and in addition, the LEDs 214a, 216a, Since the side lenses 210 and 250 can be illuminated and decorated like a plane even with the use of 254a and 256a, light emitters emitting linear light (for example, cold cathode tubes (fluorescent tubes), neon tubes, organic EL, etc.) The first annular group 1 can be obtained by individually emitting each of the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a as compared to the case where It becomes possible to change the light emission in the second and second ring groups 103 also in the circumferential direction, and more various light emission effects can be presented, making it difficult to get bored and suppressing the decrease in the player's interest The pachinko machine 1 can attract the player's attention strongly.

  In addition, since light can be diffused by the side inner lenses 212 and 252, even if the transparency of the side lenses 210 and 250 is increased, the back side of the side inner lenses 212 and 252 is caused by irregular refraction in the side inner lenses 212 and 252. It is difficult to look at the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256 arranged on the screen, and it is possible to prevent the appearance of the decorative boards 214, 216, 254, 256, etc. from being directly seen from the player side. Can.

  Furthermore, the light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b is guided by the light guiding parts 212b, 252b of the side inner lenses 212, 252 and irradiated to the radiation lens parts 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250. The light from the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b can be reliably guided to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b for light emission decoration, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be reliably embodied. In addition, even if the distance between the side lenses 210 and 250 and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b and 256b is long due to the light guiding portions 212b and 252b of the side inner lenses 212 and 252, the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 are assured Therefore, the distance between the side lenses 210 and 250 is sufficient to widely illuminate the peripheral lens portions 210 a and 250 a of the side lenses 210 and 250 by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b arranged radially can be mounted on the same substrate as the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a which secure the space, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

  Further, since the outer periphery of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a and the radiation lens portions 210b and 250b of the side lenses 210 and 250 is surrounded by the side decoration frames 202 and 242, the light from the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a is a radiation lens It is possible to reduce as much as possible the influence of light from the light emitting lens portions 210b and 250b to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a to the portions 210b and 250b, and it is possible that the respective light emitting decorations interfere with each other. It is possible to prevent the light emission effect with a good appearance.

[1-3. Overall configuration of body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 67. FIG. 61 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 62 is a rear view of the main body frame. Also, FIG. 63 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 64 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and seen from the front, FIG. 65 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and seen from the rear FIG. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side in a front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. In addition, the main unit frame 3 can detachably hold the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

  The main body frame 3 of this example forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and also has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4; Upper shaft support bracket 630 and lower shaft support bracket 640 for supporting the door frame 5 by being attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left side end portion of the front view 600 and supported by the outer frame 2; Ball hitting device 650 for hitting the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 attached to the lower front of the game board, and attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 And the flow of game balls from the winning ball unit 700 to the tray unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is attached to the front of the main frame 3 Open ball exit It includes a unit 790, a.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards for controlling the electric parts provided on the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 And a back cover 900 covering the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 covering the left end of the main frame base 600 in a front view And a lock device 1000 attached to the right side end in a front view of the main body frame base for opening and closing locking of the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and opening and closing locking of the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3.

[1-3A. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 68 and FIG. FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of a main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally formed of a synthetic resin, and the outer shape in a front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5 It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 65). Thus, when attaching the main body frame base 600 to the main body frame base 600 at the time of attaching the prize ball unit 700, the substrate unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. The rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is substantially flat at the height of the depth D in the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily mounted. Can be improved.

  As shown in the figure, the main frame base 600 has a gaming board holding opening capable of fittingly holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating the inside of the range of about 3⁄4 of the whole from the top to the bottom in a rectangular shape in the front and back direction. 601, a U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming a front end outer periphery excluding the front side left side of the main body frame base 600, a recess from the front of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear; The door frame projecting piece 110c which protrudes backward from the lower end of the upper frame, the upper bent projecting piece 167 which protrudes to the rear of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side projecting to the rear of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 And an engagement groove 603 into which the bent projection piece 163 is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600 and is recessed downward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 A peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 601 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601 is provided. The free end portion (upper and lower left end portions in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 is connected by the peripheral wall portion 605, and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It is supposed to be.

  In addition, the main frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and the game board placement unit 606 on which the game board 4 is placed; Positioning projections 607 that project upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction and engage with the outer ball discharge grooves 1156 of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 and are formed at predetermined positions on the right inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 in front view The game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 61) to which the fastener 1120 is fastened, and the plate shape which descends downward from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall 605 and whose lower end can contact the upper end of the game board 4 A plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 are provided. The positioning projection 607 of the main body frame base 600 can be engaged with the out ball discharging groove 1156 of the game board 4 to restrict movement of the lower end of the game board 4 in the left and right direction and backward. ing. In addition, the game board locking portion 608 can restrict movement of the right side in a front view of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board fastener 1120 of the game board 4 There is. In addition, although the details will be described later, the movement of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the game board 4 in a front view.

  Furthermore, the body frame base 600 is a bracket attachment for attaching the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 to the rear surface of the free end (upper and lower left end in front view) of the U-shaped front end frame 602. Portion 610 (see FIG. 69). As shown in FIG. 68 etc., the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the vertical and horizontal directions on the front side, and the upper shaft support 630 and the lower shaft support 640 should be attached with sufficient strength. It is possible to Further, the body frame base 600 is formed in a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall 604 in front view, and formed in the lower left in front view of the cylinder lock through hole 611 The U-shaped fitting groove 612 which fits with the positioning projection 110d which protrudes backward from the door frame base main body 110 in the above, and the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting and firing device 650 formed on the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in front view And a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

  As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602. On the front side, the hitting and launching device 650 is attached from the front side so that the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting and launching device 650 is accommodated in the solenoid receiving recess 613. In a state where the hitting and launching apparatus 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIG. 63 and FIG. 98 etc. A downwardly extending far space 626 is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542 e of the foul cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the feline space 626 is lowered. A game ball is received at the ball entry 542 e of the far cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower tray 302 of the pan unit 300.

  Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are formed on the upper side of the opening 614 and on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left than the left and right center of the lower rear wall 604 in front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by the relay terminal board cover 692 (see FIG. 66 etc.), and the lower rear wall 604 through the opening 692 a of the relay terminal board cover 692. The main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 of the board unit 800 attached to the rear face of the rear face face the front side. The plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 disposed on the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation-type holes having a barrier on the front side.

  In addition, the main unit frame base 600 rotatably supports a game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 in the vicinity of the front upper end of the lower rear wall 604 above the opening 614. 616, and a stopper 617 which protrudes forward from the lower right of the fixture support portion 616 in a front view and restricts the rotational position of the game board fixture 690.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 61 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixed piece 690a fanning around an axial center pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and a fixed piece 690a. And an operation piece 690b extending outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side to be the rear end when rotated in a clockwise direction in a front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600 and then operates the operation piece 690 b to rotate the game board fixture 690 clockwise in a front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward beyond the game board placement unit 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 placed on the game board placement unit 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. In addition, the game board fixture 690 is configured such that the operation piece 690b abuts against the stopper 617, and by abutting against the stopper 617, the rotational end in the counterclockwise direction in front view is restricted. It has become.

  Furthermore, a door frame open switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. In addition, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the main body frame base 600 on the lower rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached. 69), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing thereof is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

  Further, the three main body frame bases 600 penetrate longitudinally in the front and rear direction inside the engagement groove 603 on the right (open side) side in a front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. A door hook hole 620 and a lock locking hole 621 which is penetrated in the front and rear direction below the door hook hole 620 at the lower end and aligned in the left and right direction are provided. These three door hook holes 620 are respectively formed in the vicinity of upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and at substantially the center in the vertical direction. Locking projections 1004 provided on the upper and lower ends of the lock device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and middle door hook holes 620 and the lock lock holes 621, respectively. The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side in the front view in the front view. Then, in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. A state 1010 is projected forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 63).

  Furthermore, the main body frame base 600 is gently and diagonally lowered from the upper right end toward the approximate center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 in a rear view, and the lower rear wall 604 in the approximate center in the lateral direction. The game apparatus is provided with a main frame base ball removal passage 622 which is suspended from the middle in the vertical direction to a position slightly upward to allow the game balls to be distributed. The body frame base ball removal passage 622 is configured such that the rear side is closed by the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800, and the game balls distributed in the ball removal passage 741 d in the winning ball device 740 will be described later in detail. It is distributed.

  In addition, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are disposed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the back view, and back cover shaft support portion 623 rotatably supporting the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900. And a mounting portion 624 for attaching the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to the front left side of the opening 614 in the front of the lower rear wall portion 604 and a lock device 1000 on the right side (open side) of the peripheral wall 605 And a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for attaching the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed.

[1-3 B. Upper shaft support and lower shaft support]
Next, the upper shaft support fitting 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67. The upper shaft support fitting 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the main body frame 3 by using predetermined screws respectively to the metal fitting attachment portions 610 on the left and right rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported in an openable and closable manner, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner.

  First, the upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the upper bracket attachment portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-like attachment portion 631 extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-like attachment portion extending forward from the upper end of the attachment portion 631. A front extension portion 632, a pivot pin 633 protruding upward from near the front end of the front extension portion 632, and a pivot pin 155 of the door frame 5 disposed on the left side of the pivot pin 633 in a front view. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 63 etc.) vertically penetrated into which the is inserted and the downward movement from the front end left end of the front extension portion 632 to the open side of the door frame 5 A stopper 635 (see FIGS. 65 and 107) for restricting the end. In the upper shaft support fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extension portion 632, and the stopper 635 are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 includes a door frame shaft support bracket 642 for supporting the door frame 5 and a lower portion of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and supports the main frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. And a main body frame shaft support bracket 644. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-like mounting portion 642a extending in the vertical and horizontal directions, and from the lower end of the mounting portion 642a to the front A plate-like front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 642c that penetrates in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted And a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end in a front view of the door 642a and which restricts the pivoting end of the door frame 5 to the opening side. The mounting portion 642a, the forward extension portion 642b, and the stopper 642d of the door frame shaft support fitting 642 are integrally formed by bending and forming a single metal plate.

  In addition, the main frame support bracket 644 in the lower shaft support 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main frame base 600 and extends from the lower end of the mounting portion 644a to the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. A front extension portion 644b extending forward and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 644b are provided. Also in the body frame shaft support bracket 644, the mounting portion 644a and the front extension portion 644b are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  In the lower shaft support 640 of this example, the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body shaft support bracket 644 overlap (contact) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame The front extension portion 642b of the pivot support 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support bracket 644 are attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 with a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It is supposed to be.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are mounted on the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and a body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support bracket 640. Are coaxially positioned, and the main frame support hole of the main frame support 644 in the lower support 640 is fitted and inserted into the support projection 21 d of the lower support 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, after the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support bracket 21, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is By inserting the upper support fitting 20 into the support hole 20 c of the upper support fitting 20, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

  Further, when the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support bracket 640 The bracket 642 c is coaxially located, and the door pin of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642 c of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640. After the lower shaft support portion 158 of the frame 5 is mounted on the front extension portion 642 b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. In this example, the upper shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when inserting the upper shaft support fitting 630 into the door frame shaft support hole 634, the shaft pin 155 is Once the upper pivot support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper pivot support member 630 vertically overlap by sliding downward, the door is slid upward by sliding the pivot pin 155. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[1-3C. Hitting device]
Next, the hitting and launching apparatus 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. 70 is a front perspective view of the ball striking device launcher in the main body frame. FIG. 71 is a rear perspective view of the ball striking and launching apparatus in the main body frame. This ball striking device firing device 650 can strike the gaming balls supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 with the strength according to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

  In the hit and fired device 650 of the present embodiment, a firing base 652 of a metal plate attached to a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the body frame base 600 and a rotational drive shaft 654 a project forward on the lower rear surface of the launching base 652 , A hitting ball 656 fixed so as to be integral with the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hitting ball 656, and a movement locus of the tip 658 Between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 attached to the front end of the launch rail 660 extending from the predetermined position at the top to the base end as the base end at the base end A ball stop that holds the game ball at the base end of the firing rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball can not pass at the same time as the 658 is made passable. The ball 662 (the tip 658) is controlled to rotate to the side of the firing rail 660 from the hitting position where it is possible to hit the game ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 by the piece 662 and the ball stopper 662 And a stopper 664.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 in the bat firing device 650 reciprocates and rotates the drive shaft 654a at a strength (speed) according to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. The hitting rod 656 of the hitting and launching apparatus 650 has a fixing portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, a gentle arc extending from the fixing portion 656a, and a tip end with respect to the axial center of the driving shaft 654a. It has a collar portion 656b with the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can contact the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side of the collar portion 656b with the fixing portion 656a interposed therebetween. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting ball 656 abuts against the stopper 664, the tip of the tip end 658 is pivoted toward the firing rail 660 than the hitting position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view) It is supposed to be regulated.

  In addition, the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 has a loose circular arc shape in which the lower part is recessed along the lower end extension of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 98). On the other hand, the center is in a V-shaped recessed shape, and the game ball hit by the hit ball 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the firing rail 660. The firing rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  In addition, the hitting and firing apparatus 650 has a stopper cover 666 covering the front surface of the stopper 664 capable of restricting the rotation end of the hitting ball 656 to the hitting position side, and rotation of the hitting ball 656 at a position away from the hitting position. And a stopper 668 for restricting an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction in a front view). The hitting and firing apparatus 650 of this example has the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 covered with rubber, and can absorb the impact when the hitting ball 656 abuts, and suppresses the generation of noise due to the abutment. It can be done.

  When the hitting and launching apparatus 650 of this embodiment is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 as shown in FIG. 63, FIG. 98, etc. It is positioned below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the gaming board placement portion 606 (the lower side of the gaming board holding port 601), and the outside of the gaming board 4 held in the gaming board holding port 601 Between the lower end of the rail 1111 and the lower end, a far space 626 which is downwardly extended with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed. The ball hitting and firing device 650 of this example is to hit the gaming ball into the gaming area 1100 of the gaming board 4 by firing the gaming ball so as to jump over the far space 626 on the left side in front view than the firing rail 660. It is possible to As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball entry 542e of the far cover unit 540 is positioned at the lower part of the far space 626. A game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven in is dropped into the foul space 626, received into the foul ball inlet 542e, and discharged to the lower tray 302.

  In addition, the striking launcher 650 is configured such that the launch solenoid 654 is driven by the launch control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle unit 500 and the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. It is designed to be driven in synchronization with the driving of the Specifically, in the ball feed unit 580 for supplying the game balls to the hit ball firing device 650, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball, and from that state the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven. When the ball feed member 584 receives the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 to the hit ball launch device 650 side when it is released (OFF), the shooting solenoid 654 is driven substantially simultaneously with the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580 By turning on (ON), the game balls can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the firing rail 660, and the game balls can be reliably fired by rotation of the hitting ball 656. ing.

[1-3D. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 79. FIG. 72 is a front perspective view of a winning ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 73 is a rear perspective view of the winning ball unit in the main body frame. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the winning ball unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the winning ball tank and the tank rail unit in the winning ball unit, as viewed from the rear. FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of a winning ball device in the winning ball unit, as disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 78 is a rear view showing the relationship among the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. Further, FIG. 79 is a cross-sectional view showing a flow passage of balls in the winning ball unit.

  The prize ball unit 700 in the main unit frame 3 of the present embodiment stores predetermined gaming instructions after storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facilities in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Based on the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1. The prize ball unit 700 is provided with a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600, and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and receiving and storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side. And a tank rail unit 730 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and aligning the gaming balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sending it downstream, and a predetermined payout of the gaming balls aligned by the tank rail unit 730. A payout device 740 that pays out based on the instruction and a gaming ball paid out by the payout device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit and the game ball paid out when the upper plate 301 is full with the gaming ball Mainly comprises a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching to the lower plate 302 side.

  In addition, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage cover 780 for closing the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth metal fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. The external terminal board 784 attached to the rear surface of the award ball base 710 and the external terminal board cover 786 covering the rear side of the external terminal board 784 are provided. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 has a back cover engagement groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 on its rear surface and a back cover 900 fastened to the left side of the back cover engagement groove 780a in a back view. And a back cover fastening hole 780b (see FIGS. 73 and 75).

  In the prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 in a front view, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are provided on the upper side. As well as being disposed, a vertically extending prize ball device 740 is disposed on the left side, and a full tank branching unit 770 is disposed below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal board 784 and an external terminal board cover 786 are disposed immediately above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

  Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a front view reverse L shape substantially corresponding to the upper side of the main body frame base 600 and the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view. It is integrally molded of transparent synthetic resin. The award ball base 710 extends inward from the rear end of the circumferential wall 710a extending inward from the rear end of the circumferential wall 710a and is disposed substantially in the same plane. And a back wall 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75, the upper side of the peripheral wall 710a is formed to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 is located at a position where the back wall 710b is recessed from the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, it can form a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 ing.

  In addition, the prize ball base 710 is provided with a tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a, and a lateral terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate An external terminal plate attachment portion 712 for attaching the cover 786, a plurality of attachment locking portions 713 for attaching the tank rail unit 730 to the upper end lower end rear side of the rear wall 710b, and a vertical side rear side of the rear wall 710b A prize ball device mounting portion 714 for attaching the prize ball device 740 to the ball, a prize ball passage 715 for guiding the gaming ball dispensed from the prize ball device 740 downward adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and a rear wall And a mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branching unit 770 at the lower end of the portion 710b.

  Furthermore, the prize ball base 710 is penetrated in the back and forth direction at the position of the prize ball device attachment portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b, and a relief hole 717 for releasing the dispensing motor 744 etc. And a back cover engagement groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. In addition, although detailed description is omitted in the award ball base 710, an attachment hole, an attachment boss, etc. for attaching the award ball tank 720, the award ball device 740, etc. to the main body frame base 600, etc. Is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 76, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a laterally elongated box shape whose upper side is opened, and the bottom wall portion having a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view of a horizontally elongated 721 and an outer peripheral wall 722 which rises upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall 721 and which protrudes in a rectangular shape only rearward on the right rear (the rear on the open side) from the bottom wall 710 in plan view; An outlet port 723 formed by a portion projecting rearward than the bottom wall portion 721 of the right rear at 722 and opened downward, and a plate shape from the left side (axial support side) of the outlet port 723 in plan view to the left end of the award ball tank 720 , A rod-like shaft portion 725 extending rearward from the lower end of the flange portion 724 in plan view, a base portion of the shaft portion 725 near the base end and outer circumferential wall 722 on both front sides Awarded at 720 Ball Base 710 An attachment portion 726 for attachment to the spherical tank mounting portion 711, and a.

  An outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of gaming balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the winning ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723 so that the gaming balls on the bottom wall 721 roll toward the discharge port 723 It has become.

  Further, the prize ball tank 720 is provided with two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 in a rotatable manner. As shown in the figure, the ball straightening member 727 has one end pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight therein so that the other end hangs down by its own weight. . The ball straightening member 727 is suspended in a tank rail unit 730 described later, and the game balls flowing in the tank rail unit 730 can be leveled and aligned. The bowl portion 724 of the award ball tank 720 is formed to cover approximately the upper half of the tank rail unit 730 and can prevent the game ball from overflowing from the tank rail unit 730 and the tank It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the award ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) is lower toward the right in plan view, The right side (closer to the outlet 723) is formed to be inclined toward the rear outlet 723 in plan view. As a result, the flow of gaming balls can be made smooth, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

  Next, as shown also in FIG. 76, the tank rail unit 730 in the prize ball unit 700 is provided with a tank rail 731 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 and elongated in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a bowl-like shape with a predetermined depth open at the top, and has a width (depth) in which the game balls can be aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction. The bottom is sloped so that The tank rail 731 has a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 79) opened downward at the left (axially supported) end, a partition wall 731b extending upward from the bottom substantially at the center in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the front end And a plurality of locking projections 731c (see FIG. 74) which are further downwardly protruded and are locked from the upper side to the attachment locking portions 713 of the award ball base 710.

  The tank rail 731 is arranged such that the end on the right side (open side) in a front view is positioned directly below the discharge port 723 in the prize ball tank 720, and the gaming ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is After being received, it can be rolled to the left and can be delivered from the outlet 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. In addition, by locking the locking projection 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the award ball base 710, the tank rail 731 that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be attached to the award ball base 710. ing.

  The tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported at the upper portion of the discharge port 731 a of the tank rail 731, a gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in front view. A ball retainer plate 734 for closing the upper portion of the tank rail 731 and a ball stopper which can be moved into and out of the tank rail 731 to stop the game balls in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. And an earth plate 736 disposed in the tank rail 731 and capable of contacting the gaming balls in the tank rail 731. As shown in the drawing, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the gaming balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. The ball holding plate 734 has an attachment portion 734a to which the ball stopper 735 is attached at the top, and two slits 734b which are vertically penetrated and through which the projection 735a of the ball stopper 735 can be inserted.

  In the tank rail unit 730, two ball straightening members 727 pivotally supported by the winning ball tank 720 are inserted from the upper side to the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls discharged into the tank rail 731 from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 by the ball leveling member 727 are leveled and aligned in two rows along the partition wall 731b. It can be done. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball which has not been made one step higher by the ball straightening member 727 one more step, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower as it goes to the discharge port 731a side. Is attached to the tank rail 731.

  As illustrated, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on its outer periphery, and is supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is shifted by half a pitch. Thus, when the upper portion of the gaming ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 732 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the gaming balls arranged in two rows alternately receive prize balls one by one It is sent to the device 740.

  In the bottom portion of the tank rail 731 is formed a narrow groove penetrating vertically, so that foreign substances such as dust rolling in the tank rail 731 together with the gaming balls fall downward from the narrow groove. It has become. Further, although the ground plate 736 disposed on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is not illustrated in detail, it is to be grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply substrate 851 via the grounding fitting 782 When the gaming ball contacts the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

  In addition, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stopper 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734a of the ball holding plate 734, passes the projection 735a of the ball stopper 735 through the slit 734a, and is inside the tank rail 730. By inserting it, the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731 can be closed by the projecting pieces 735a, and the supply of gaming balls to the prize ball device 740 can be stopped. There is.

  Furthermore, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the state of the game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

  Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 delivers the gaming balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. The prize ball device 740 includes a vertically extending unit base 741 attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710, as shown in FIGS. As shown, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage which opens at the upper end on the rear side and extends slightly to a position slightly lower than the vertical center with a width slightly wider than the outline of the gaming ball. 741a, a distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a and having a space of a predetermined size, and a lower end of the distribution space 741b communicating with the lower end on the left side (open side) of the distribution space 741b A prize ball passage 741c opened on the left side, and a ball extraction passage 741d communicating with the lower end of the distribution space 741b in the rear view right side (axial support side) and extending downward and opening on the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state of being opened rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 of this example is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a back cover 742 whose length in the vertical direction is shorter than the unit base 741 and a plate-like motor support disposed below the back cover 742 Dispensing motor 744 disposed on the front side of the plate 743 and the motor supporting plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotating shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor supporting plate 743, and is integral with the rotating shaft 744a of the dispensing motor 744 The first gear 745 rotatably fixed and disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate 743, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745, and the second gear 746 meshed with the second gear 746 The third gear 747 pivotally supported by the unit base 741 and the payout rotation integrally rotating with the third gear 747 and disposed in the distribution space 741 c of the unit base 741 The body 748 and the dispensing rotating body 748 are integrally rotatably supported on the opposite side across the third gear 747, and have a plurality of (three in this example) detection slits 749a at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. And 749.

  In addition, the winning ball device 740 is attached to the unit base 741 and detects the presence or absence of the gaming ball in the supply passage 741a, and the number of gaming balls attached to the unit base 741 and circulating in the winning ball passage 741c. Sensor 751 for measuring the rotation angle, rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 which rotates integrally with the dispensing rotation body 748, and the rotation angle sensor 752 A sensor base 753 and a prize ball relay board 754 relaying the connection between the payout motor 744, the ball out switch 750, the count sensor 751, and the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110 and attached to the back surface of the back cover 742 Have.

  Furthermore, the award ball device 740 covers the award ball relay substrate 754 from the rear side, and a substrate cover 755 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742; a first gear 745, a second gear 746, and a third gear 747 (rotation detection board 749 And a gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the sensor substrate 753 covered from the rear side with the back cover 742 in between, and a supply channel earth that can contact gaming balls circulating in the supply channel 741 a of the unit base 741 A metal fitting 757, a screw 758 for fixing the dispensing motor 744 to the unit base 741 with the motor support plate 743 interposed therebetween and for grounding the dispensing motor 744, and a back cover 742 so as to be detachably supported on the unit base 741 A detachable button 759 is provided.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 so that the open rear end of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d. Is supposed to be closed. In addition, the unit base 741 has a position below the upper end of the supply passage 741a that is temporarily bulged backward, and the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be relaxed. It can be done. Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side (left side in rear view) below the position where the supply passage 741 a bulges rearward and is outside the cut-out position of the supply passage 741 a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball breakage switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the count sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a longitudinal direction below the prize ball passage 741a. And a motor insertion hole 741g through which the payout motor 744 can be inserted.

  By attaching the ball breakage switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the operation piece of the ball breakage switch 741e forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a, and is present in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball, the presence / absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a can be detected by the out-of-ball switch 741e. When the gaming ball in the supply passage 741e is not detected by the ball breakage switch 741e (ball breakage state), the payout motor 744 does not rotate and the player or the hole is that the ball breakage. It is reported to the side.

  Further, the unit base 741 is provided between a bearing portion 741h for supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (the payout rotating body 748), and the switch mounting portion 741e and the distribution space 741b in the supply passage 741a. Ground fitting attachment portion 741i for attaching the supply passage earth fitting 757, and a button support hole 741j disposed on the upper portion of the unit base 741 and having a detachable button 759 for mounting and demounting and supporting the back lid 742; Have. The unit base 741 is configured such that the rear surface of the supply passage earth fitting 757 can be in contact with the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a by attaching the supply passage earth fitting 757 to the ground fitting attachment portion 741i. The front surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped ground fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball circulating in the supply passage 741a via the supply passage ground fitting 757 is eliminated. It is possible to

  The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 is generally in the form of a vertically long plate, and the upper end is bulged rearward. At the top of the back cover 742 is a button insertion hole 742a for inserting the detachable button 759, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear face in the vertical direction A sensor substrate mounting portion 742c disposed below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor substrate 753, and a through hole 742d through which the dispensing rotating body 748 can pass. The relay substrate attachment portion 742 b of the back cover 742 is formed on the rear side of the earth metal fitting attachment portion 741 i of the unit base 741.

  Further, the motor support plate 743 of the award ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744 so that the heat generated by the payout motor 744 can be It is possible to make it easy to dissipate heat.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three concave portions 748 a of a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and the payout rotating body By rotating 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are accommodated one by one in the recess 748a, and can be paid out to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749, which rotates integrally with the dispensing rotating body 748, are formed at positions corresponding to between the concave portions 748a of the dispensing rotating body 748, respectively. By detecting, it is possible to detect the rotational position of the payout rotating body 748.

  In the prize ball device 740 of this example, a payout command from the main control substrate 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6, etc. is input to the payout control substrate 4110, or the ball withdrawal switch 860b is operated, or the like. By rotating 744, a predetermined number of gaming balls can be paid out to the player side (upper tray 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 meshed with the first gear 745 is rotated, and the second gear 746 is further rotated. The third gear 747 meshing with the gear is rotated. In the third gear 747, the delivery rotating body 748 is fixed on the front side, and the rotation detection board 749 is integrally rotatably supported on the rear side, and together with the third gear 747, the delivery rotating body 748 and the rotation detection board 749 are It is supposed to rotate.

  As shown in FIG. 78, in the prize ball device 740, the dispensing rotating body 748 is rotatably supported at substantially the center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated counterclockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the prize ball passage 741c, and the payout rotation is performed. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741 c by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the clockwise direction from the rear view by the payout motor 744, the gaming balls in the supply passage 741a are paid out toward the ball pulling passage 741d, and the payout rotating body 748 is The game balls paid out to the ball removal passage 741d side from the lower end of the ball removal passage 741d, the ball removal passage 778 of the full dispensing unit 770 described later, the body frame base ball removal passage 622 of the body frame base 600, the board unit The sheet can be discharged to the outside on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 at 800 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply substrate box holder 840.

  The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled on the main body frame 3, the award is made from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the award ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as a ball clog can be easily found. .

  Next, the full tank branching unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74, 75 and 79. The full-tank sorting unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the gaming balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c of the prize ball unit 740 to the dish unit 300. When the game balls are full on the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 can be distributed so as to pay out the game balls.

  The full-tan branch unit 770 is fixed to the lower end back surface of the award ball base 710 at the rear end upper portion and a locking portion 770 which is locked to the attachment locking portion 716 of the award ball base 710 substantially at the center top And a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is suspended from the rear side of the mounting lock portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a from the rear side to the mounting locking portion 716 of the winning ball base 710, and the winning ball base 770 By fixing the fixing portion 770b to a predetermined screw 710, the full-tan branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the winning ball base 710.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box-like shape that becomes lower as it goes from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward substantially at the center in the left-right direction in the upper rear end. Prize ball socket 771 for receiving gaming balls having flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and a branch space 772 disposed under the prize ball socket 771 and expanded in the left-right direction (see FIG. 79) The game ball having flowed through the normal passage 773 and the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game ball from directly under the prize ball receiving opening 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side The normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the view and the full passage 775 for guiding the game ball toward the front side from the position farther to the right in the rear view than directly below the prize ball receptacle 771 in the branch space 772 (see FIG. 79) A), a fill-up passage 775 game ball that has flowed through the discharge forward a full sphere outlet 776 which opens in a front view the left side of the normal ball outlet 774, a.

  Furthermore, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball outlet 777 that receives the game ball that opens upward at the left end in a front view at the upper end of the rear end and flows down the ball extraction passage 741d of the prize ball device 740; A ball removal passage 778 (see FIG. 79) for guiding the game balls received in the removal opening 777 to the front side, and the game balls distributed through the ball removal passage 778 are released forward to the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end in front view And a ball outlet 779 opened at a position rearward of the full ball outlet 776.

  In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 are the first of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The gaming ball discharged from the ball outlet 774, which is in opposite communication with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c, passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540, and The gaming balls supplied to the upper tray 301 and discharged from the full ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower tray 302 of the tray unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542 c of the far cover unit 540. Further, the ball outlet 779 is formed to communicate with the upper right end of the main frame base ball escape passage 622 in the main body frame base 600 in a back view, and the gaming ball released from the ball outlet 779 is the main frame base 600 The main body frame base ball removal passage 622 is to be delivered.

  In this full tank branching unit 770, the gaming balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 are received by the prize ball receiving opening 771 through the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the gaming ball having entered the prize ball receptacle 771 drops the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 disposed immediately below the prize ball receptacle 771. Then, the gaming ball which has flowed down into the passage 773 normally enters the first ball inlet 542a of the far cover unit 540 from the outlet 774, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and is placed on the dish unit 300 from the first ball outlet 544a. It will be supplied to the dish 301.

  By the way, when the game ball is further paid out from the winning ball unit 700 (the winning ball device 740) in a state where the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of gaming balls, the first ball outlet of the far cover unit 540 The game ball which can not go out to the upper plate 301 side from 544a stays in the first ball passage 542b of the far cover unit 540, and eventually, the inside of the normal passage 773 upstream through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full branch unit 770 is also full. become. In this state, the gaming ball entering the branch space 772 from the winning ball receptacle 771 can not normally enter the passage 773 and starts moving laterally in the branch space 772 and moves laterally. The game ball enters into the full tank passage 775, and from below the full ball outlet 776 through the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the far cover unit 540, under the dish unit 300. It is supplied to the dish 302.

  Note that the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be viewed from the outside. This makes it possible to easily find foreign substances such as dust and dirt that have entered the full tank branch unit 770, clogging of the ball, etc. without disassembling the full tank branch unit 7700. .

  As described above, when the game ball is full in the upper plate 301, the full tank branch unit 770 of this example automatically performs the game ball paid out from the winning ball device 740, until the full tank is cancelled. Since the lower tray 302 can be supplied to the lower tray 302, the upper tray becomes full and the ball release button of the upper tray is operated like the conventional pachinko machine, so that the game balls can not be supplied to the striking device. It is possible to avoid interruption of the hitting of the game ball, and it is possible to eliminate the inconvenience in the game and to suppress the decrease in the interest in the game.

  Further, as described above, when the upper plate 301 is full, the full-tan branch unit 770 of this example branches the passage of the gaming ball paid out immediately below the winning ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Because the game balls staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are paid out to the upper tray 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 hit the ball launching device The storage ball of the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so the game ball of the same amount as the conventional is stored in the upper plate 301 Can. Therefore, by making the upper tray 301 smaller, it is possible to make the game window 101 in the door frame 5 relatively large (wide), and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 provided with the wider game area 1100 and play a game A pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be provided, and the player can be entertained by the large game area 1100.

  Furthermore, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full ball outlets 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate so that the receiving port (first Even when the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c are only one, the game balls can be sent to the door frame 5 without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage trays without changing the flow path (full tank branch unit 770) of the game ball in the main body frame 3. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes.

  Further, as described above, even if the number of storage trays provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it is possible to cope without changing the main body frame 3, so the entire pachinko machine 1 according to the change of the door frame 5 The cost of the machine can be reduced, and various pachinko machines 1 can be provided at low cost.

  Furthermore, the game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 through the normal passage 773 is preferentially hit into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 having only one storage tray The game balls paid out from the winning ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage tray through the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from the payout to the storage can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being reduced due to a lack of game balls for throwing in, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frame 5 in which the number of storage dishes is different. .

  In addition, unless the upper tray 301 is full, since the gaming balls paid out from the winning device 740 are sent to the upper tray 301, the frequency of transferring the gaming balls stored in the lower tray 302 to the upper tray 301 is reduced. As a result, it is possible to concentrate the player on the operation of hitting the game ball and the like, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

  Further, even when the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side on the left and right and the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, the first ball The position of the lower end of the inlet corresponding to the inlet 542a etc. can be made the same height as the first ball inlet 542a etc corresponding to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage trays, so It becomes possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and the storage plate can be made deeper to secure a sufficient amount of storage for the game balls, and the player can be made to play without having to worry about the storage amount frequently. It is possible to correspond to the door frame 5 provided with different numbers of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the winning ball apparatus 740, and the upper tray 301 is full tank with game balls. Even if no game balls are released from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of game balls stored in the normal passage 773 from the normal ball outlet 774 to the branching position of the full passage 775 is increased as much as possible. It is possible to increase the storage amount of the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 as much as possible. In the case where only one storage tray is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage tray is filled with gaming balls and the gaming balls can not be ejected from the normal ball outlet 773 or the full tank ball outlet 776, Since the position where the full tank passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is disposed as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full tank passage 775. Can be stored, and the substantial storage amount of game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage dishes provided on the door frame 5 is different, the storage amount of gaming balls in each door frame 5 can be maximized without changing the main frame 3 (full tank branch unit 770). The pachinko machine 1 can be made as much as possible, and can cope with different door frames 5 sufficiently.

  Further, the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 have a size that allows the game balls to be distributed in a plurality of rows, and the retention amount of the game ball in the full tank branch unit 770 Even if the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 is different, the number of storage dishes provided in the door frame 5 may be different, so that the substantial storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branching unit 770 is reduced. The pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having different numbers of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game balls in the main body frame 3.

  In addition, since the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside by forming the full tank branch unit 770 with a transparent resin, the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. At the time, it is possible to easily find a clogged spot from the outside of the full tank branch unit 770, and it is possible to solve the problem early and to improve the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1.

[1-3 E. Ball outlet opening and closing unit]
Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 80 to FIG. FIG. 80 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. FIG. 81 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Furthermore, FIG. 82 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the fal cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to the attachment portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened, the regular ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the winning ball unit 700 are closed, and from the winning ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 Can block the flow of gaming balls.

  The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to the mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end in the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to project beyond the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. The plate-like opening / closing shutter 792 held slidably in the vertical direction by the shutter base 791, the opening / closing crank 793 for sliding the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 via the opening / closing crank 793 And an open / close spring 794.

  The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791 a for slidably holding the opening / closing shutter 792 vertically upward so that the opening / closing shutter 792 protrudes upward beyond the upper end of the shutter base 791; A rectangular opening 791b penetrating in the front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank disposed in front of the left end in front view and rotatably supporting an opening / closing crank 793 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction A support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d for locking one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794 are provided. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is disposed on the left side in a front view of the opening 791b, and the spring locking portion 791d is disposed in the vicinity of an upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction.

  Further, the open / close shutter 792 of the ball outlet open / close unit 790 is a flat shutter body 792a, and a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) which slide from the front of the shutter body 792 and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. And a laterally long rectangular drive hole 792b disposed in a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding projections and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

  Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a shaft 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by a crank support 791c of the shutter base 791; From the tip of the drive rod 793b extending rearwardly from the tip of the drive rod 793b and slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the open / close shutter 792 Drive pin 793c, an abutment portion 793d extending downward from the outer periphery of the shaft portion 793a in a front view and the tip end having a spherical shape, and the other end of the opening / closing spring 794 And the spring locking portion 793e for locking the

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening and closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and are disposed behind the opening and closing shutter 792 even when the opening and closing shutter 792 is lifted. The normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 etc. in the full tank branch unit 770 are visible.

  In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 of this example, the drive pin 793c of the opening and closing crank 793 rotates up and down like an arc at the same time as the opening and closing crank 793 rotates about the axis extending in the front and rear direction. The open / close shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction via the drive hole 792b into which is inserted. In the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790, the contact portion 793d of the opening and closing crank 793 contacts the opening and closing operation piece 542g of the door cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. The contact portion 793d is pivoted in the clockwise direction in front view against the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 can be lowered to open the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770.

  When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact between the contact portion 793c of the open / close crank 793 and the open / close operation piece 542g of the full cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is released. Is pivoted in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the biasing force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the opening / closing shutter 792 is lifted to close the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776. It can be done.

  Thus, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 automatically automatically sets the normal ball outlet 774 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 and the full tank outlet 776 in the winning ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game balls remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game balls are prevented from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank ball outlet 776 It can be done.

[1-3F. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 83 to FIG. FIG. 83 is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit after being disassembled and viewed. FIG. 87 is a perspective view for explaining the operation of the standing wall portion of the power supply substrate box in the substrate unit. FIG. 88 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 88 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 89 (A) is a front view of the firing power supply substrate box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A shown in (A).

  The substrate unit 800 in the body frame 3 includes a substrate unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall 604 of the body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 in front view, and the substrate unit base A firing power supply substrate box 830 attached to the right end rear surface of the front view 810, a power supply substrate box holder 840 attached to the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 so as to surround the firing power supply substrate box 830 from the rear side A power supply substrate box 850 attached to the rear surface and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control substrate box 860 attached to the power substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820. And the payout control board box A terminal board box 840 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the front view 860; and a main relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral relay terminal board 882 attached to the front of the board unit base 810; Have.

  The substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example is configured to extend in the left-right direction as shown in the figure, and the substantially central part in the left-right direction inclines gently upward as it goes down one step toward the left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall 811 projecting forward from the front, an opening 812 disposed on the upper side of the shielding wall 811 at a position one step lower than the middle in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction Board attachment portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end in front view and for mounting the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and in a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front and rear direction in front view left side of the board attachment portion 813 A plurality of longitudinally elongated slit-shaped through holes in the longitudinal direction at positions corresponding to the penetrating tubular duct portion 814 and the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface A hole 815, and a rear view left (front view on the right) box accommodation portion 816 capable of accommodating the front is open rearwardly and upwardly to the rear surface of the upper firing power board box 830, the.

  In the substrate unit base 810, the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the main body frame base 600. The gaming balls can be prevented from dropping downward from the base ball removal passage 622, and the strength of the substrate unit base 810 can be enhanced. In addition, the substrate base unit 810 sends the gaming balls having flowed down the main frame base ball escape passage 622 to the power supply substrate box holder 840 disposed on the rear side of the substrate unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. It can be done.

  Further, in the board unit base 810, the board attachment portion 813 for attaching the main side relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is disposed at a position corresponding to the opening 614 opened in a rectangular shape in the main body frame base 600. When the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 are on the front side from the opening 614 of the main frame base 600. It is supposed to come to Also, the substrate unit base 810 can transmit the sound from the speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side favorably by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

  Furthermore, the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box storage portion 843 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 in which the box storage portion 816 is disposed on the rear side, and the box storage portion 816 and the front box storage portion 843. And a receiving recess for receiving the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be formed.

  The speaker box 820 in the substrate unit 800 is literally provided with the speaker 821 mounted facing the front side. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the speaker 821 in a sealed manner, and at the same time, a horizontally long rectangular opening port 822 is formed on the left side of the speaker 821 in a front view. Although not shown in detail, the open port 822 communicates with the space on the rear side of the speaker 821 through a predetermined labyrinth-like passage, thereby reversing the phase of the sound on the rear side of the speaker 821 and moving forward. The speaker box is designed as a bass reflex type speaker box capable of emitting a deep bass to the aperture of the speaker 821. The duct portion 814 in the substrate unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound emitted from the opening 822 can be favorably transmitted forward. ing.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear, and includes a firing power supply substrate 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. In the firing power supply substrate box 830, various electronic components attached to the firing power supply substrate 831 are accommodated internally, and heat from the electronic components etc. is provided through the slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

  The firing power supply substrate box 830 is removed from above in the upwardly open accommodation recess formed by the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810 and the front box accommodation portion 844 of the power supply substrate box holder 840 described later. It is supposed to be accommodated. Thereby, in the assembled state of the main body frame 3, when a problem occurs in the firing power supply substrate box 830, the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily detached, replaced, or repaired from the front side of the main body frame 3. (See FIG. 63).

  Further, when the launch power supply substrate box 830 is described in detail, as shown in FIG. 89, the launch power supply substrate 831 is provided with a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 charging and discharging electric power from the DC / DC converter 831a. And a combined current combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is driven by causing a current to flow to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking and launching apparatus 650. In this firing power supply substrate box 830, slits 830a as heat dissipation holes are formed on the upper and lower surfaces in order to release the heat emitted from the DC / DC converter 831a mounted on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the outside. ing.

  Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply substrate box 830 on which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is disposed is a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, in the firing power supply substrate box 830, a partition wall 830b, which divides the internal space into two spaces of a space for housing the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, has an upper inner wall And the bottom inner wall are integrally formed from the bottom to the end opening edge. Thus, when the firing power supply substrate 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply substrate box 830 and the inner space of the firing power supply substrate box 830 is closed, the inner space of the firing power supply substrate box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Partition wall 830b for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and a housing space 830c for housing the electrolytic capacitor SC0, and a housing space 830d for housing the DC / DC converter 831a. The housing space 830 d for housing the DC / DC converter 831 a functions as a heat insulating wall that blocks the heat from entering and exiting.

  The heat in the housing space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is a slit as a heat dissipation hole formed on the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface for communicating the housing space 830c with the outside air. The released heat can be prevented from entering the storage space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is stored by being released to the outside through 830a. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transmitted to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the housing space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is housed, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a, is a heat radiation hole formed on the upper surface and the lower surface communicating the housing space 830d with the outside air. By being released to the outside through the slits 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the storage space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is stored. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transmitted to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In this embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for producing combined current to be supplied to the launch solenoid 654 of the striking launcher 650 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851, but are separately emitted from the power supply substrate 851. By being provided on the power supply substrate 831, the size of the launch power supply substrate 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply substrate 851. Therefore, the size reduction of the firing power supply substrate 831 facilitates handling, the replacement work of the firing power supply substrate 831 is facilitated, and the time spent on the replacement work can be shortened. In this replacement work, it is also possible to replace the firing power supply substrate box 830 while the firing power supply substrate 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply substrate box 830.

  Also, even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches its life, and even if the driving of the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power substrate 831 is Interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage by being able to be performed easily. Therefore, the impossibility of firing due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be eliminated very easily, interruption of the game due to the impossibility of firing can be resolved at an early stage, the game can be resumed, and the interest of the player decreases. Can be suppressed.

  The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831 is deteriorated by repeated charging and discharging, for example, at a frequency of 100 times per minute every time driving and firing by the firing solenoid 654 is performed, and reaches the life. On the other hand, although the power supply substrate 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of the island facility such as a game hall, charging and discharging are not repeated at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply substrate 831. The life is extremely long as compared with the firing power supply substrate 831. In other words, the power supply substrate 831 reaches its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply substrate 851 comes to life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are not provided on the power supply substrate 851 but are provided separately on the power supply substrate 851 and not on the power supply substrate 851 for producing combined current flowing to the emission solenoid 654. Can be concentrated on the power supply substrate 851. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electronic component associated with the long-term aging change from being replaced together with the short-lived electrolytic capacitor SC0.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for controlling the bat firing device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 for holding the game board 4, the capacity is changed to change the driving characteristics. It is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to detach the launch power supply substrate 831 even if the fraud is changed to different electrolytic capacitors SC0 different from each other, and replacement of the launch power supply substrate 831 is difficult It is possible to make it difficult to make fraud, and it is possible to suppress fraud that deliberately changes the impact strength that has been optimized by making unauthorized modifications to the launch power supply substrate 831 and to make it difficult to do fraud. The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of preventing a player who has learned frustration etc. from developing into injustice such as injustice.

  In addition, since the firing power supply substrate 831 is made removable so that it can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply substrate 831 is cheated, the firing power substrate 831 is immediately replaced to make cheating. It is possible to eliminate the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and it is possible to eliminate the feeling of frustration and feeling unhappy due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, the launch power supply substrate 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the launch control unit 4120 for controlling the strike launcher 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main frame 3 holding the game board 4 When replacing the game board 4 due to a model change, etc., the firing power supply substrate 831 (firing power supply substrate box 830) of the firing control unit 4120 can also be easily replaced, so it matched the concept of the new model to be replaced etc. By replacing the launch power supply substrate 831 with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a that can realize the launch characteristics, the launch characteristics of the bat striking launch device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 is a new game It can be matched to the board 4. Therefore, since the hit characteristics of the game ball can be easily matched to the concept of the game board 4, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the game by the game board 4 of the new model and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest can do.

  In addition, since the launch power supply substrate 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be detached from the front side, when replacing the launch power supply substrate 831, there is no need to open the main body frame 3 for island facilities such as game halls, While the effort required for replacement can be simplified, it can be replaced in a short time, and an increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed. Further, since the firing power supply substrate 831 (the firing power supply substrate box 830) is made removable so that it can be replaced, the change of the implantation characteristics is made as compared with the case where the entire firing control unit 4120 (the delivery control substrate 4110) is replaced. The cost of reducing the cost can be reduced, and the burden on the hole side can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when changing the model etc., only the game board 4 is replaced, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 etc. can be used as they are before. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply substrate 831 is degraded, as described above, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side, a defect occurs due to the degradation and the firing power supply substrate 831 is immediately replaced. And the problem can be resolved, and the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and at the same time, the interruption of the game can be quickly resolved to feel frustrating or to feel disappointing. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

  In addition, the shooting power supply substrate 831 (the shooting power supply substrate box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the game power holding board 601 is held by the game board holding port 601 Because it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for fraudulent action is made to enter from the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, an illegal tool reaches the firing power substrate 831 by the game board 4. While being able to prevent that a fraudulent act is performed with respect to the injection | emission electric power source board | substrate 831, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high defense power against a fraudulent act.

  Furthermore, since the firing power supply substrate box 830 is supported through the game board holding port 601 and the position for supporting the firing power supply substrate box 830 is on the rear side of the front surface of the main body frame 3, the firing power supply A space for supporting the substrate box 830 can be easily secured, and the pachinko machine 1 that supports the launch power supply substrate box 830 and achieves the above-described effects can be embodied with certainty.

  Also, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply substrate 831 and the firing power supply substrate 831 can be easily detached from the front side of the main body frame 3. Therefore, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is easily deteriorated, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (fired power supply substrate 831) can be easily replaced, so that the problem can be eliminated early and the game is interrupted. While being able to shorten time as much as possible, it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which reliably plays the effect mentioned above.

  In addition, the power supply substrate box holder 840 in the substrate unit 800 receives the gaming balls discharged upward from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the gaming board 4 to the upper left on the left front than the left and right center in front view. Ejecting ball receiving portion 841, Ejecting passage 842 for guiding the gaming ball received by Ejecting ball receiving portion 841 downward, and Ejecting passage 842 and the front of the side of Ejecting passage 842 and Ejecting ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) The front box accommodating portion 843 opened forward and upward to accommodate the rear side of the firing power supply substrate box 830, and the entire rear surface of the power supply substrate box holder 840 is formed to be recessed forward and the front end of the power supply substrate box 850 And a rear box accommodating portion 844 that can be accommodated.

  The power supply substrate box holder 840 is configured such that the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the substrate unit base 810 and the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 is in a position desired to the discharge passage 842 The back side of the substrate unit base 810 is formed and flows through the main frame base ball removal passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 through the opening 812 of the substrate base unit 810. The game balls flowed down and the game balls discharged from the out ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841, which will be described later in detail, pass through the discharge passage 842 behind the pachinko machine 1 Can be discharged into the

  In addition, the power supply substrate box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodation portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810, and the box accommodation portion 816 and the front box accommodation portion 843 accommodate the fired power supply substrate box 830. A recess can be formed.

  Furthermore, the power supply substrate box 850 in the substrate unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose front is open, and includes a power supply substrate 851 attached so as to close its front end opening. The power supply substrate box 850 is adapted to receive various electronic components attached to the power supply substrate 851, and externally transmits the heat from the electronic components through the plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released into the Here, as shown in FIG. 86, a power switch 852 attached to the power supply substrate 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850.

  In addition, power supply substrate box 850 is a standing wall projecting rearward along the lower side of the opening facing power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 84 and 86) mounted on the lower side of power supply switch 852 in power supply substrate 851. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protruding portion 850c protruding backward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b and the outer periphery of the power supply substrate box 850 And a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a gap. Although not shown in detail, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851 has a locking piece for locking with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece And the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

  The power supply board box 850 is slightly behind the rear end of the connector terminal 855 in a state where the standing wall portion 850b connects the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854 to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851 as shown in FIG. It is formed to project into In the power supply substrate box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 is hooked from the lower front side of the power supply substrate box 850 to the rear end of the upright wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

  By the way, after connecting the connector terminal which the wiring cord extended to the connection terminal attached to the substrate and then pulling the wiring cord to the substrate side, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since the connector terminal is pressed to the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply substrate box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the opposite side to the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853) is directed to the power supply substrate 851 side (front side with respect to the main frame 3). Since the wiring cord 854 is wound around (folded back) behind the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b that protrudes rearward relative to the connector terminal 855 even if it is pulled, the connector from the wiring cord 854 It is possible to prevent application of a force such that the terminal 855 is pressed to the power supply terminal 853 side, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 can be easily removed.

  In addition, since power supply substrate box 850 is provided with protruding portions 850c protruding backward on both sides of the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, even if wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of standing wall portion 850b, the rear end The projections 850c provided at both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and can prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the upright wall portion 850b.

  Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side. The wire cord 854 can be brought close to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d immediately after the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It is possible to make it possible to simplify the working process involved in the assembly.

  Power supply substrate box 850 and power supply substrate holder 840 are formed such that the dimensions in the front-rear direction in the assembled state are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of speaker box 820. When mounted, the rear surface of the power supply substrate box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially flush.

  Further, in this example, after connecting the connector terminal 855 to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851, the connector is formed by the standing wall portion 850 b projecting rearward than the rear end of the connector terminal 855 Since the wiring cord 854 extended from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension applied to the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is a power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It becomes possible to act in such a direction as releasing the connection with the 853 and can prevent the connector terminal 855 from becoming unremovable by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply substrate 851. Can be easily removed to easily perform maintenance such as substrate replacement.

  Also, the wiring cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850, and the degree of bending of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the standing wall portion 850b is not provided. Unreasonable force can be prevented from acting on the 854 itself, and disconnection of the wiring cord 854 due to the unreasonable force can be prevented from occurring.

  Furthermore, the standing wall portion 850b is provided in the vicinity of the opening of the power supply substrate box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853 and, since the standing wall portion 850b is adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, it is connected to the power supply terminal 853. It becomes possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extended from the connector terminal 855 as straight as possible backward with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken. It is possible to prevent the force from acting and to prevent the occurrence of problems such as disconnection.

  Further, since the power supply substrate box 850 covering the power supply substrate 851 is provided with the upright wall portion 850b, there is no need to provide the power supply substrate 851 with the upright wall portion 850b, and the assembly operation of the power supply substrate 851 can be facilitated. . In addition, since the power supply substrate 851 is covered with the power supply substrate box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dirt, and the like that cause the occurrence of defects from adhering to the power supply substrate 851, and it is mounted on the power supply substrate 851. Electronic components (eg, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) so that it is difficult to touch or replace them, and it is possible to increase the defense against fraud. It has become.

  The direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power terminal 853 in the power supply substrate 851 is substantially perpendicular (front-back direction) to the substrate surface, and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply substrate 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply substrate 851, shear force can be prevented from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent breakage of the power supply substrate 851 and breakage of the power supply substrate 851 and breakage of the power supply substrate 851. Thus, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention can be configured such that a defect does not easily occur.

  Furthermore, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means by the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850 b and the wiring cord 854 is Even when a force is applied to the connector terminal 855 in a direction to release the connection with the power supply terminal 853, the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be prevented from being released. The connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 can be reliably maintained to prevent the occurrence of problems such as contact failure and conduction failure.

  Further, since the protruding portions 850c that project backward are provided at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply substrate box 850 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even when sliding along the side, the protruding portions 850c provided at both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and the wiring cord 854 can not be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. A pachinko machine 1 that can be prevented and reliably exerts the above-described effects can be embodied.

  Further, since the wiring cord 854 folded at the standing wall portion 850b is brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply substrate box 850, the wiring cord 854 is made difficult to be detached from the standing wall portion 850b. While the wire cord 854 is turned back by the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved toward the standing wall portion 850b by the wiring guide portion 850d. Thus, a series of operations can be performed continuously, and the assembly process can be simplified to suppress an increase in cost.

  Further, the delivery control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a thin box-like box base 861 that is wide and open at the rear, and a thin box-like cover that fits into the box base 861 from the rear side and opens at the front. 862 and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 168) attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and covered by the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separation / cutting portions 863 that protrude outward from the left end in rear view and are formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are fixed by caulking. Thus, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, the separation and cutting portion 863 can not be separated without being cut off, and the trace thereof is left when the delivery control substrate box 860 is opened. . Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the dispensing control board box 860 has been improperly opened and closed. In this example, the delivery control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

  In this payout control board box 860, an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 are faced rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 62). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are arranged to face rearward through the cover 862.

  Furthermore, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear face of the speaker box 820, and the board attachment part 871a formed on the upper left rear face in rear view and the board cover attachment part 871b formed on the rear right end rear face A peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 mounted from the rear side to the substrate mounting portion 871a of the substrate base 871 and a peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and a substrate cover mounting portion 871b of the substrate base 871 A connection terminal board cover 873 attached from the rear side and having an opening 873b extending vertically in the rear wall 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a facing rearward from the opening 873a of the connection terminal board cover 873 are attached to the rear surface CR unit connection terminal board 8 supported in the connection terminal board cover 873 And 4, a substrate box cover 875 covering the rear side of the substrate base 871, together with the connection joint terminal plate cover 873.

  The peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 with a power indicator for displaying the operating state etc. of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island equipment side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as a CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The substrate base 871, the connection terminal plate cover 873, and the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 are respectively formed of transparent synthetic resin, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the CR unit connection terminal are provided from the outside. The plate 874 or the like can be visually recognized. In addition, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, if a problem such as ball clogged in the pachinko machine 1 occurs, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency indicator installed on the island equipment side or the CR unit 6 etc. The displayed condition display sticker 876 is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the substrate base 871 of the terminal substrate box 870, the substrate attachment portion 871a is formed in a thin box shape whose rear end is open. The substrate base 871 is formed on the inner upper portion of the substrate attachment portion 871a and fixed to the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 (not shown), and is formed on the lower inner portion of the substrate attachment portion 871a. A locking claw 871c for locking the lower end of the terminal plate 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 can be detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the locking claw 871c. ing.

  Further, the substrate base 871 is formed in a thin box shape with the substrate cover attachment portion 871b opened to the rear side, and the size of the inner periphery thereof is made such that the outer periphery of the connection terminal plate cover 873 can be inserted. The inner peripheral wall is made into the outer piece part 871c extended in the front-back direction. The substrate base 871 extends rearward from the bottom wall of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b and abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction, and a locking hole 871f disposed on the left outside of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b in a rear view in the back and forth direction. The protrusion 871e of the substrate base 871 has a rearward protrusion amount slightly smaller than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in FIG. It is arranged to be close to the

  Further, the substrate base 871 is disposed on the rear surface right rear surface of the substrate cover attachment portion 871b so as to be vertically separated, and has a pair of bearing portions 871g for pivotally supporting the substrate box cover 875; And a rectangular tubular locking portion 871h disposed on the rear surface near the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

  The connection terminal board cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal board 872 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting part 871b surrounded by the outer piece part 871c of the board base 871. A rear wall 873a closing the rear end of the outer wall 873c, a rectangular opening 873b extending vertically through the rear wall 873a, and a rear wall substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 873b The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the front end of the inner wall 873d extending from the 873a to the front (substrate base 871 side) and the front end of the inner wall 873d abut the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 And a pair of claw-like substrate holding portions 873 e formed in 873 c.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 is disposed at a position corresponding to the plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and substantially in the vertical direction. A box-shaped protection portion 873g which covers the rear side of the opening 873f disposed in the center and is open in the left side in a rear view, and extends outward (right direction) from the rear end in the outer wall portion 873c A pair of fixing pieces 873h which can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d, and an elastic claw-like engagement formed at the left end portion of the outer wall portion 873c in the rear view and lockable to the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871. And a hooking piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall 873d extending forward is formed above and below the inner periphery of the central opening 873f having the protective portion 873g.

  The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape whose front side is opened by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. In addition, the connection terminal plate cover 873 may restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 backward by the front end of the inner wall 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. While being able to control the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 to move forward by the pair of substrate holders 873e, it is possible to detachably hold the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 inserts the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871, and then the locking claw 873i is locked to the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871 to obtain the substrate. The base cover mounting portion 871b of the base 871 can be detachably mounted.

  CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 In addition to the above, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360 and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as illustrated, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. There is.

  Further, the substrate box cover 875 in the terminal substrate box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size substantially covering the entire rear surface of the substrate base 871 and opened entirely to the front, and disposed on the right side surface in rear view. A pair of shaft portions 875a pivotally supported by the bearing portions 871g, a through hole 875b corresponding to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and front from both left and right ends of the through hole 875b An abutment wall 875c extending to the end and a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871 are provided.

  The substrate box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the substrate base 871 together with the connection terminal plate cover 873 so as to be capable of opening and closing by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft portions 875a on the bearing portion 871g of the substrate base 871. There is. The board box cover 875 has a length such that the partition wall 875c on the side closer to the shaft portion 875a (the side supported by the shaft) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871, and the partition wall on the side far from the shaft portion 875a The length 875 c extends to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the substrate box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the partition walls 875c substantially abut on the rear surfaces of the substrate base 871 and the connection terminal plate cover 873. It is supposed to be.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is used as a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is exposed to the outside also on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The internal connection terminals 874b of the CR unit connection end plate 874 are square two-piece connectors, and are attached so as to be able to be fitted and connected from the rear as illustrated.

  In the terminal board box 870 of this example, as shown in FIG. 88, in the assembled state, the outer wall 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer rim 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal cover 873 and the shaft 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since each side has an opposing wall 875c, a multiple-layered barrier is constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape It has become. Therefore, even if an unauthorized flexible tool is introduced between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary), the tool is not bent along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal An unauthorized tool can be reliably prevented from entering from the direction along the surface of the plate 874, and the unauthorized action on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be surely prevented. It has become.

  Further, in the terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a. Even with the D-sub connector having a gap formed with the connection terminal plate 874, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, which can prevent the fraudulent act from being performed. It is supposed to be.

  The terminal board box 870 has a pair of shaft parts 875a on the shaft part 875a side of the through hole 875b where the CR unit connection terminal 874a faces the substrate box cover 875 pivotally supported rotatably on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. Since the partition wall 875c has a length extending between them, and the partition wall 875c can increase the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875, a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871. Even if it is attempted to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the substrate box cover 875 from being distorted and to prevent the gap from being formed, making it difficult to conduct fraudulent action and suppressing It can be made expensive.

  Furthermore, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b in the vicinity of the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate box cover 875. Therefore, with the connection terminal on the wiring cord fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b, which is a two-piece connector, insert a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even in this case, the insertion of the electrode can be prevented by the protection portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875, and an illegal act on the internal connection terminal 874b can also be prevented.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the terminal board box 870 accommodating the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if the incorrect tool is inserted through the gap etc. and the tip of the incorrect tool is made to enter the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the CR board connection terminal plate 874 housed is protected by the terminal board box 870. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874.

  When CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is accommodated in terminal substrate box 870, outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate extend in the direction along the front surface (rear surface of the substrate) of CR unit connection terminal plate 874. In the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the ridges 871e and the outer piece portion 871c of the base 871 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the outer wall 873c and the inner wall 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate Since the partition walls 875c of the box cover 875 exist, respectively, the multiple barriers will be constructed, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 will be a crank shape meandering. In addition, an attempt is made to infiltrate a flexible tool having an excellent flexibility between the connection terminal board cover 873 and the substrate base 871 (boundary). Also, since the tool does not bend along the boundary, it is possible to reliably prevent unauthorized tool entry from the direction along the surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR provided in the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 The pachinko machine 1 can be configured to be capable of reliably preventing fraudulent acts on the unit connection terminals 874a and the internal connection terminals 874b.

  Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as a CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer periphery of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and it is possible to reliably prevent the fraudulent act.

  Further, one end of the terminal base box 870 is pivotally supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 so as to rotatably cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and to open and close the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873 And the board box cover 875 having a plate-like partition wall 875c extending forward from the side end on the pivotally supported side of the through hole 875b to the rear surface of the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to insert a screwdriver or the like between the parts of the box cover 875 pivotally supported to the substrate base 871 to form a gap and allow an unauthorized tool to enter, the incorrect tool is a connection terminal by the partition wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side, and to prevent fraudulent acts being performed. Kill.

  Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal substrate box 870, the connection terminal plate cover 873 must be opened after opening the substrate box cover 875, making it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. And can increase deterrence against fraud. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the substrate box cover 875 can be enhanced by the partition wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the substrate box cover 875 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap, the substrate box cover 875 Can be prevented from being distorted to prevent the formation of a gap, and it is possible to make it difficult to conduct fraud and to have high deterrence.

  Furthermore, even if it is attempted to insert a needle-like electrode through the gap between the connector main body and the wiring cord in the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the C internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, Since the rear side of the corresponding opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector main body is covered with the protective portion 873g and the substrate box cover 875, the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 The needle-like electrode can not be inserted into the gap of the main body of the connector from the (rear side), and it is possible to prevent the fraudulent act on the terminal of the connected wiring cord, and the crime prevention capability is high. It can be

  Further, the outer wall 873 c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873 e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall 873 c is extended to the front side relative to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate base 871 to form a gap to perform an improper action, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves backward with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). CR unit connection terminals on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be kept protected by Can not be performed spamming like 74a, it is possible to prevent illegal acts targeting CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and CR unit connection terminals 874a and the like.

  Furthermore, since the terminal substrate box 870 is formed of a transparent resin, and the inside of the terminal substrate box 870 can be viewed from the outside, the terminal substrate box 870 can be viewed from the outside of the terminal substrate box 870 without disassembling. Is an illegal tool inserted into CR unit connection terminal board 874, peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, etc. housed inside, or CR unit connection terminal board 874, etc. has not been replaced with an illegal one? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether the electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, etc. are replaced with unauthorized ones, etc. Can make it easier to detect cheating, and it also makes it easier to detect cheating. Is to be able, it can increase the deterrent to fraud.

  In addition, since terminal board box 870 is mounted on the back surface side of main body frame 5 such that the front surface of CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like is directed to the rear side, the outer frame 2 can be When the main body frame 5 is pivoted to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 5 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like accommodated in the terminal substrate box 870 face the worker side (player side). The unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like and the terminal board box 870 can be easily checked.

  A main side relay terminal board 880 and a peripheral side relay terminal board 882 in the board unit 800 are a door control and a peripheral control unit 4140 provided on the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, a payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. It is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, the decoration substrate, the operation unit 400 and the like provided in the fifth embodiment. The main side relay terminal boards 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal boards 882 have a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and a substrate formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810 By attaching them to the attachment portion 813, the connection terminals face the front side from the front face of the main body frame base 600.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 and 63, main side relay terminal board 880 and peripheral side relay terminal board 882 are covered on the front side by relay terminal board cover 692 attached to the front of main body frame base 600. As well as connecting terminals for connecting with the door frame 5 side only through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692, the wiring cord 196 is connected to those connecting terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 30).

  In addition, main side relay terminal board 880 is the ball position button 361 of return ball unit 360 of ball storage unit 360 in dish unit 300 which is arranged on the door frame 5 side, return button 362, remaining display portion 363 and rotational position detection sensor of handle device 500. A relay 512 is used to relay the connection between the touch sensor 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full detection sensor 550 of the far cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 disposed on the main body frame 3 side. In addition, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 is used for the decoration units 200, 240 and 280 disposed on the door frame 5 side, the decoration substrates 430 and 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. It is for relaying the connection between the provided dial drive motor 414 and sensors 432a, 432b and 432c and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 disposed on the main body frame 3 side.

[1-3 G. Back cover]
Subsequently, the back cover 900 of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. FIG. 90 (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. FIG. 91 is an enlarged sectional view showing a part of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover disassembled and viewed from the rear side. The back cover 900 in this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and can visually recognize the inside of the main body frame 3 from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The back cover 900 in the main unit frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (game unit 4 attached to the main unit frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main unit frame 3 so as to be opened and closed. . The back cover 900 includes a plate-like main portion 902 closing the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 extending forward from the right side of the main portion 902 in a front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of support pins 906 arranged in the vertical direction and protruding downward and pivotally supported by the back cover support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600 and formed in the upper and lower portions of the left side of the main portion 902 in front view An engagement piece 908 engaged with the back cover engagement groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engagement groove 780a of the prize ball passage cover 780, and a back cover 900 near the lower engagement piece 908 3 and a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening in an unopenable manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, etc., the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the left side in a rear view of the lower locking piece 908 in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. 921 and a longitudinally long rectangular lock port 922 disposed at a predetermined distance on the left side in the rear view of the insertion hole 921 and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lock that is elastically locked from the rear side with respect to the lock port 922 A plate-like guide member 923 having a piece 923a at one end and a laterally elongated long hole 923b corresponding to the insertion hole 921 at the other end, and the long hole 923b of the guide 923 are inserted from the rear side. A fastening member 924 having an external thread 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 through the insertion hole 921 and a guide member 923 on the external thread 924a of the fastening member 924. Includes a retaining member 925 attached so as to sandwich, the. In addition, the guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is formed of a soft synthetic resin and is easily bent.

  The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is loosely fitted to the locking port 922 of the main body 902, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It is possible to play at In the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the long hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and along the long hole 923b. While being slidable in the left-right direction, it does not drop out of the long hole 923 b. The fastening mechanism 920 is configured such that when the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked from the rear side to the locking port 922 of the main body portion 902, the locking member 924 of the fastening member 924 projecting forward through the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924 a is in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

  The back cover 900 in this example can open and close the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main frame 3 by pivoting the pivot pin 906 to the back cover pivot 623 of the main frame base 600. By engaging the engagement piece 908 with the main frame base 600 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be achieved. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the prize ball passage cover 780 are substantially in agreement.

  When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted from the rear side to the front side into the insertion hole 921 is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the front end of the male screw portion 924a stops at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923 in which the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900 is locked, the fastening member 924 does not fall off the back cover 900. A state of being positioned behind the main body 9002 is maintained.

  Then, by inserting the end of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 into the back cover fastening hole 780b from this state and rotating the fastening member 924, the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed). Note that the fastening mechanism 920 of the present example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 supporting the fastening member 924 is oblique to the main body 902, the fastening member 924 is Since it is supported by the long hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male screw portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axial center of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be favorably transferred to the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

  Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, fastening or fastening can be performed easily simply by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released, and the time and effort for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified to improve the maintainability.

  In addition, the back cover 900 has a connecting notch 910 which is notched upward in a rectangular shape at the lower right end of the main body 902 in a rectangular shape, and a confirmation opening which passes through in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the connecting notch 910. 912 and a confirmation notch 914 notched in a rectangular shape at the lower left corner of the main body 902 in a front view.

  The back cover 900 is, as shown in FIG. 5, closed with respect to the main frame 3, through the connection notch 910, the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4, the test terminal 4100f, etc. Is supposed to be on the back side. In addition, the back cover 900 is configured such that the board management seal 1178 (see FIG. 101) attached to the back surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the back side through the confirmation opening 912 and the back cover 900 The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 is exposed through the notch portion 914. As a result, even if the back cover 900 is not opened relative to the main body frame 3, operation check, appearance check, control state check, etc. of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 can be performed.

  Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 penetrating thinly in the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through the slits 916 is of the main frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the rear outside. As shown in the drawing, a plurality of through holes 918 arranged at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction that are wide and elongated in the vertical direction are provided at a position slightly leftward in a front view from the center. The through holes 918 close the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 and accommodate and hold the game board 4 in the main body frame 3, the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. Located on the rear side of a cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 included in the unit so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be exhausted well. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is smaller than the outer diameter of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

  Thereby, in the present example, a fastening member 924 for fastening the back cover 900 closing the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 with respect to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900 When the game board 4 is held by the main unit frame 3, the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main unit frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game unit 4. Even when the fastening member 924 fastening and fixing the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released to separate the fastening member 924 from the back cover fastening hole 780 b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is the guide member 923 Can be prevented from losing the fastening member 924 or leaving it in the pachinko machine 1 from the back cover 900. 4 can be pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing falling off.

  Further, as described above, since it is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from falling off from the open back cover 900, there is no need to store the fastening member 924 whose fastening has been released at a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. The rear cover 900 can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

  Further, since the long hole 923 b of the guide member 923 is extended at least to the opposite side to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is inclined to the surface of the back cover 900, The male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 923 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a is assuredly correct with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be concluded. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect by the back cover 900 can be reliably exhibited.

  Furthermore, since the holding member 925, which cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 and holds the fastening member 924 in a movable manner with respect to the guide member 923, is attached to the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 is The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head portion and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off the long hole 923b of the guide member 923. Thus, the fastening member 924 can be movably held with respect to the guide member 923 due to the gap between them and the long hole 923 b.

  In addition, an accommodation recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924 a of the fastening member 924 passes through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900. When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodation recess, so the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are in close contact. Protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility of other members coming into contact with the protruding portions of the guide member 923 and the fastening member 924 is reduced to reduce the occurrence of problems. It can be done and it can look good.

  In addition, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is screwed to the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924 with the female screw portion, the screw is fastened only by pulling compared with the engagement by the simple locking claw. The back cover 900 can be made difficult to remove, and the security effect by the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  Furthermore, since the guide member 923 has flexibility, and the guide member 923 can be bent, it is possible to further increase the freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921). It is easy to position the male screw 924a of the fastening member 924 in a straight position with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 or to move the male screw 924 straight against the back cover fastening hole 770b. Thus, the male screw portion 924a can be reliably fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

  Further, in a state where the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 abuts along an inner wall extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking opening 922 of the back cover 900, the locking opening Since it is elastically locked to 922, an axis extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the distal end side (long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 attached movably to the insertion hole 921 It can be moved so as to turn around the center, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported relative to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held by the long hole 923b on the tip end side of the guide member 923 may be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Since this can be performed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening operation by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

  Furthermore, after further providing a plurality of back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a at a position different from the back cover fastening hole 780b in the main body frame 3, the back cover 900 resiliently engages with the back cover engagement grooves 718, 780a, respectively. In addition, a plurality of engagement pieces 908 are provided, and by engaging the engagement pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engagement grooves 718 and 780 a of the main body frame 3, fastening by the fastening member 924 is Since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 separately, the number of fastening operations can be reduced as much as possible with only one fastening portion using the fastening member 924, and work such as assembly and maintenance Can be enhanced. Further, as described above, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by the engagement between the engagement piece 908 and the back cover engagement groove 718, 780a separately from the fastening member 924, a wide closed range is provided. Even with the back cover 900, the rear side (the rear side of the game board 4) of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening portions by the fastening members 924.

  In addition, the back cover 900 can be pivotally supported relative to the body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the pivot pins 906 of the back cover 900 on the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the body frame 3 (body frame base 600). Since the rear cover 900 is turned in the closing direction and the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 is closed, the insertion hole 921 of the rear cover 900 and the rear cover fastening of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The holes 780b can be easily aligned with each other, and the fastening members 924 held by the back cover 900 can easily be fastened to the back cover fastening holes 780b through the insertion holes 921. Further, since the back cover 900 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 3, the back of the back cover 900 is released even when the fastening by the fastening member 924 is released and maintenance is performed. The cover 900 can be kept in the state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, there is no need to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[1-3H. Side crime prevention board]
Next, the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 66 and FIG. The side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms a left side surface of the main body frame 3 in a front view as shown in the figure, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side crime prevention plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 extruded in a shallow U shape in plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 fixed to the upper and lower portions near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 And a positioning member 956 fixed inside the main body 952 and engaged with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4.

  The main body 952 of the side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction with substantially the same length as the height of the main body frame 600 and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a front end right from the front end of the side plate 952a Front end piece 952b extending in the direction, a middle piece 952c disposed so as to form a predetermined gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and having a smaller amount of projection than the front end piece 952b, and a front face from the rear end of the side plate piece 952a And a rear end piece 952d extending longer in the rightward direction than the front end piece 952b (see FIG. 106). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U shape by the side plate piece 952a, the front end piece 952b, and the rear end piece 952d, and the front component 1110 of the game board 4 is interposed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d. The left side in a front view with the game panel 1150 is inserted (see FIG. 106).

  In the side security plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 600. When the side crime prevention plate 950 is in a state in which the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952 b of the main body 952 is the axial support side of the axial support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5. To be inserted into the U-shape of the U-shaped protruding piece 166, and to prevent insertion of a tool for cheating between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side in front view (See FIG. 106). In addition, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion type material, and a front end piece 952b, a middle piece 952c, and a middle piece arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 are enhanced, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 can be enhanced to support the game board 4 and the door frame 5 etc. favorably. It has become.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, when the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is formed between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side plate 950. The rear side piece of the substantially U-shaped axially supported U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the case is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952 b In this state, the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 is in contact with the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3 even if the door frame 5 is forced open with respect to the main body frame 3. It becomes possible to abut and prevent the pivotal support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 from moving away from the main body frame 3 and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being opened up Can be used to open the door frame 5 against the main frame 3 It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be stopped.

  Further, since the crime prevention side plate 950 formed of metal in the body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, the space between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is The strength and the rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by the unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. Also, after the main frame base 600 supporting the game board 4 is formed of a synthetic resin, the crime prevention side plate 950 on the side (axial support side) on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported is formed of metal, The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared to the case where the entire body frame 3 is formed of metal.

  Furthermore, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 for locking the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one position between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by the three door frame hook portions 1041 so as to be stopped, the open side is improper such as a bur Even if it is scolded by such a tool, it can be favorably prevented that the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is expanded, and the door frame 5 can be prevented from being forcibly opened.

  In addition, the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is made to extend backward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, so that the dimension in the front-rear direction of the side piece 952a becomes long. Since the bending rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction becomes stronger, the strength and rigidity of the whole of the crime prevention side plate 950 can be further enhanced, and the crime prevention side plate 950 can be prevented from being bent forcibly and cheating .

  Further, since the crime prevention side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal extrusion type material, the crime prevention side plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined sectional shape with the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily While being able to form, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost even if the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced, and defects such as strength reduction that occur during processing as compared to the case where the metal plate is bent It can be reduced as much as possible, and a security side plate 950 having high durability and strength can be obtained.

[1-3 I. Lock device]
Subsequently, the lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 93 to FIG. FIG. 93 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and FIG. 93 (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. FIG. 94 (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and FIG. 94 (B) is a sliding door for a glass door and a sliding door for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a rear perspective view which shows these, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the lock device disassembled and seen from the rear, and FIG. 96 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding door for glass door and the sliding door for main body frame in the locking device. FIG. 97 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the tamper-proof member in the lock device.

  The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from the substantially upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface on the open side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3. A door hook hole 620 formed at the top of the right side (open side) of the front end frame portion 602 of the main frame base 600 and a lock retaining hole 621 formed at the lower portion, and a peripheral wall of the main frame base 600 It can be attached to a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the portion 605 in a front view.

  As shown in FIGS. 93 to 95, the lock device 1000 includes a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding wedge 1040, the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding slide 1050 for the main frame can not be illegally slid. And tamper-proof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the base body 1001.

  The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and the sliding frame 1040 for the door frame and the sliding frame 1050 for the main body frame are formed therein. And are arranged slidably. The U-shaped base 1001 is extremely thin in comparison with a lock device integrated in a conventional L-shaped cross section. This makes it possible to make the size in the left and right direction of the lock device 1000 as thin as possible, and the size in the left and right direction of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be relatively enlarged. It is possible to provide a large 1,400 game board 4.

  The U-shaped base 1001 can be attached in a state where the open side of the U-shaped cross section faces the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and in the state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame The open side of the base 1001 is closed to the main frame base 600. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001 form the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065. It is in a completely covered state, and has an anti-tampering structure that makes it difficult for an external user to tamper with the lock device 1000.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 has a rectangular shape in which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can penetrate up and down on the closed side (front side) up and down opposite to the open side (rear side). A hook through opening 1002 and a screw fixing portion 1003 protruding outward in the middle and the upper portion of a side surface 1001b (see FIG. 95) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side Protruding forward from the lower end of the upper end and the middle part of the open side (front side) of the side 1001a (see FIG. 95) opposite to the side 1001b where the 1003 is provided and the lower side of the open sides 1001a and 1001b And a locking projection 1004.

  The screwing portion 1003 and the locking projection 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking projection 1004 is a hook hole 620 for the door of the main body frame base 600. The screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attaching portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 coincide with each other when inserted upward from the rear side into the lock locking hole 621 and moved upward. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (the main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the same.

  The lock device 1000 is attached with screws not only at the upper and middle screw stop portions 1003 but also in the vicinity of the screw lock portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 The lock mounting portion 625 is also fixed to the main frame base 600 with a screw (not shown), and the lower side of the lock device 1000 can also be mounted.

  In addition, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the lock projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front side) of the U-shaped base 1001, the hook hole 620 for the door in the upper and the lock lock hole 621 is inserted and positioned and locked, and the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock attaching portion 625 with a screw. It can be fixed firmly to (body frame 3).

  In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated into a very thin U-shaped base 1001 having a very small width, the lock device 1000 is firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 by the locking and fixing on the front and back sides of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, after the locking projections 1004 constituting the front locking structure (which may be the fixing structure) project from the side surface 1001 a not in contact with the peripheral wall 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the rear side fixing structure protrudes from the side surface 1001 b in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605 side, the front locking structure is the peripheral wall portion 605 The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed dense.

  Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left and right direction at the upper part, middle part, and lower part of both side faces 1001 a and 1001 b, By inserting a rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and caulking the main frame sliding gutter 1050, the door frame sliding gutter 1040 and the main frame sliding gutter 1050 can be inserted into the U-shaped base 1001. Can be mounted slidably in the vertical direction.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), while the rivet 1006 penetrates the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 formed at three places at the top, middle, bottom of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. As shown in (B), a rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end portion of the rivet elongated holes 1055 and 1061 respectively formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 can be moved upward, and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be moved downward.

  Furthermore, the U-shaped base 1001 protrudes laterally from the front end of the side surface 1001b in contact with the side wall portion 605 in the tamper-proof notch 1007 formed in the lower closed side surface and the open side main body frame base 600. A lock attachment piece 1008 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring engagement piece 1021, and a relief horizontal hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention notch portion 1007 of the U-shaped base 1001, which will be described in detail later, advances and retracts the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001 b below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009, which is projected laterally from the front end, through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and an attachment hole 1013 formed on the lock attachment substrate 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 with two screws 1012 An attachment hole 1014 is formed in the lower case, and a screw stop 1003 is formed in order to attach the lower portion of the lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion longitudinal opening 1020 in which the first engagement protrusion 1017 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 for urging the second fraud preventing member 1032 upward, and a relief lateral hole 1022 for forming a relief hole so as not to disturb the movement of the connecting pin 1034; Is equipped.

  The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting substrate 1011 for mounting to the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock main body, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock main body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting substrate 1011. An engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engagement cam 1016 is formed into a boomerang shape, and one end side thereof is a first engagement protrusion 1017 engaged with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 at the time of rotation, The end side is a second engagement protrusion 1018 that engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 when it is rotated.

  The cylinder lock 1010 has a cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion inserted from the rear side into the lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and then mounting holes 1013 formed at two upper and lower positions of the lock mounting substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008 through the above.

  The tamperproof members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 do not rotate the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key, for example, with a piano wire, a wire, etc. To prevent lowering of the As shown in FIG. 95, the fraud preventing members 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which a first fraud preventing member 1023 and a second fraud preventing member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is a vertically long plate-like member and is swingably supported by the U-shaped base 1001 around a swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. More specifically, the first tamper resistant member 1023 is the highest through the swinging shaft hole 1025 together with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 disposed inside the U-shaped base 1001. The lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006 are attached.

  Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is opened longitudinally at a position overlapping the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the plate-like surface, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. Provided with the projecting piece insertion hole 1026. The second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 passes through the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 to slide the door frame sliding wedge 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. The second engaging protrusion 1018 is engaged with the second engaging protrusion 1018. In addition, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is inclined obliquely to be able to abut the rear surface side of the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates on the outer side of the front upper side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026. Provided with the inclined portion 1024, and the inclined portion 1024 abuts on the first engagement protrusion 1017 when the engagement cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 centers on the swing shaft hole 1025. As shown in FIG. 97 (B), it swings (clockwise direction in FIG. 97).

  Furthermore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece 1027 that protrudes toward the U-shaped base 1001 from the outer lower side of the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and a position where the stopper piece 1027 protrudes. A downward projecting control protrusion 1031 and a pin hole 1029 and a connection hole 1030 which are penetrated in the left-right direction on the front side of the control protrusion 1031 and are vertically disposed are provided. The stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is engaged with and engaged with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 when the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is locked. Thus, the main frame sliding rod 1050 can be prevented from sliding improperly. In addition, the control projection 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the second fraud prevention member 1032 biased upward by the spring 1035 so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (biasing direction). It is possible to regulate movement.

  Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first tamper resistant member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud protective member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is The first anti-corrosion member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001 b of the U-shaped base 1001 by being engaged with the horizontal opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001. It is possible to Further, the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for pivotally connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connection pin 1034.

  On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "-" shaped plate material, a connection hole 1033 at its upper end, and a spring engagement hole 1036 at its upper other end. And are provided with abutments 1037 at their lower ends. The second fraud prevention member 1032 may be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be rotatable relative to the first fraud prevention member 1023 by inserting the connection pin 1034 after aligning the connection hole 1033 with the connection hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. It can be done. Further, the second tampering prevention member 1032 causes the spring locking hole 1036 to lock the lower end (other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001. Thus, the spring 1035 is biased upward. Furthermore, the second tampering prevention member 1032 is configured such that the abutment portion 1037 abuts on the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

  Next, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped base 1001, and is formed of a vertically long metal plate member. The sliding door 1040 for a door is provided with a hook portion 1041 for a door frame that protrudes toward the front at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of one longitudinal side thereof. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door sliding wedge 1040 protrudes forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 in a state where the door sliding wedge 1040 is accommodated in the U-shaped base 1001. When the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame 5 protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 63 and 68) formed in the main body frame base 600. Can be locked to a hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the. The door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging hook shape as shown in the figure, whereby the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover are raised by raising the door frame sliding lever 1040. The locked state with 165 can be released.

  In addition, the sliding frame for door frame 1040 is provided at the bottom of the longitudinally long rivet long hole 1042 which is drilled at the center of the side in the upper, middle and lower and through which the rivet 1006 is inserted and the bottom of the rivet long hole 1042 at the top The lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040 is provided with a guide protrusion 1043 which protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sliding door 1040 for a door frame. The rivet long hole 1042 of the door sliding wedge 1040 is configured such that a rivet 1006 inserted through the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is a sliding door wedge. It is formed to be vertically long so as not to disturb the lifting operation of 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 passing through the upper end portion of the rivet long hole 1042 is in contact with the upper end portion. In the door frame sliding wedge 1040, the guide projection 1043 is inserted into the projection moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050. The sliding movement between the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be guided.

  Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed at its upper end with a spring hook portion 1046 for locking one end of the spring 1048. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the main frame sliding rod 1050, and the spring 1048 slides the door frame. The wedges 1040 are biased downward, and the main frame sliding wedges 1050 are biased upward, respectively. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 by press molding It is formed in a convex shape. The abutting elastic piece 1047 abuts against the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and it is possible to suppress rattling of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is supposed to be.

  Furthermore, the sliding door for a door frame 1040 is provided with a vertically-long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 does not interfere with the rotational movement of the engagement cam 1016 when the first engagement projection 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, and the tip end of the first engagement projection 1017 The unit constitutes a movable space. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the raising engagement hole 1045 causes the sliding rim 1040 for the door frame to ascend by the turning operation of the engagement cam 1016 To engage. The door frame sliding wedge 1040 is provided with a relief notch 1049 that is cut out in the vertical direction at the lower part of the lower side of the vertical side in the vertical direction. In the escape notch portion 1049, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is in the way so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 reliably engages with the fraud prevention notch portion 1007 and the engagement notch portion 1066. In order not to do so, the relevant part is cut off.

  On the other hand, the main frame sliding weir 1050 includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire weir 1052 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052; Is equipped. In other words, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is not constituted by one metal longitudinal plate as in the prior art, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material is formed by a press, and the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 made of metal are connected by a thin metal connection wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can be efficiently stored in the space of the narrow U-shaped base 1001.

  The upper hook member 1051 of the body frame sliding wedge 1050 has a hook portion 1054 formed rearward at the upper end portion, and a rivet long hole 1055 penetrating in the left-right direction in a plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 A protrusion moving hole 1056 penetrating in the left and right direction below the rivet elongated hole 1055; a spring hook portion 1057 formed at a lower end of a front longitudinal side of the protrusion moving hole 1056; and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057 And a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook through opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided at the upper inside of the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw is formed upward.

  The rivet elongated hole 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is disposed at a position corresponding to the rivet elongated hole 1042 formed on the upper portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040. In a normal state where the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lower end of the rivet long hole 1055, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. The projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051 is configured such that the guide projecting piece 1043 on the upper side of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 is inserted, and the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the 1050.

  Further, the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to be engaged with the other end of the spring 1048. Further, the upper end of the connecting wire wedge 1053 is bent and inserted into the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051. Furthermore, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 is adapted to contact the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding action of the upper hook member 1051 It can slide smoothly without rattling.

  On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is for a rivet which penetrates in the lateral direction in the vicinity of the upper end of the hook portion 1065 projecting backward from the lower end and the plate surface of the lower hook member 1052 A long hole 1061, a downward engaging hole 1062 disposed below the long hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the downward engagement hole 1062, and a downward direction of the idle hole 1063 A protrusion moving hole 1064 formed in the vicinity of the lower end, a connection hole 1060 bored on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and an engagement formed in the lower lower side of the rear side of the lower hook member 1052. It has a joint portion 1066 and an abutting portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052.

  The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the lower hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed at the lower portion on the open side of the outer frame 2. The locking claw is formed upward. Further, the rivet long hole 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet long hole 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding wedge 1040, and the rivet long hole 1061 is riveted In a normal state where the through hole 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating through the lowermost end of the rivet elongated hole 1061. Thus, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

  In addition, when the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted into the lower engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052 and rotated, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is lowered by the rotation operation. To engage. In addition, when the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 does not interfere with the pivoting operation of the second engagement protrusion 1018. The tip of the can form a movable space. In addition, the guide piece 1043 under the sliding door 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the moving part 1042 of the lower hook member 1052, and the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide for the main frame are inserted. It is possible to guide mutual movement with the torso 1050.

  In addition, the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the abutting portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when being stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can slide smoothly without rattling.

  Next, assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are connected by the connecting wire ridge 1053, and in that state, the guide protrusion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 The pieces 1043 are inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the rivet long holes 1042 and the rivet long holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned with each other and overlapped. In a state where the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are penetrated through the hook through opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the sliding of the main frame After inserting the wedge 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted from the insertion hole 1005

  When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet long holes 1055, 1061 and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 also into the swinging shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. In addition, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is a pin hole. It is necessary to further insert a guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020 after fixing it to the opening 1029 with a screw (not shown).

  Furthermore, with the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the body frame sliding wedge 1050 housed and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is bridged between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door The frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are biased in opposite directions from each other, and the spring 1035 is stretched over the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud The member 1032 is in contact with the restriction projection 1031. Thereafter, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock attachment piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the attachment hole 1014 with the screw 1012. At this time, the tip end portion of the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 is slightly inserted into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020 outside the inclined portion 1024 and the second engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 such that the tip end of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

  As described above, in order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting it, the hooking protrusion 1004 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the locking hole 621 of the body frame base 600 and moved upward, and the screwing portion 1003 projecting horizontally in that state is moved in that state. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by aligning the lock mounting portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed to protrude from the side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. The screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to protrude in the horizontal direction from the side surface 1001 b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped base 1001. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so that rattling does not occur as compared with the case where the side surface 1001 b is formed.

  Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97. As shown in FIG. 96, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. Of the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the door frame 5 in which the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and The hook cover 165 is in a locked state. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engagement protrusion 1017 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in a direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the first engagement projection piece 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 to push down the lower hook member 1052 against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and connect it The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and descended. Thereby, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 is released, and the main frame 3 is pulled out by pulling the main frame 3 to the front side. The frame 2 can be opened.

  When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054, 1065 are in a state of being lifted by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same elevated position as shown in FIG. 96A). Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outer side, the upper side inclined portions of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the closing plates 24 and 25 are forcedly pressed against the outer frame 2. Since it abuts on the lower end, the main frame sliding wedge 1050 descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054, 1065 are engaged again with the closing plates 24, 25 and the main frame sliding The wedge 1050 is raised to return to the locked state.

  On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engagement protrusion 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 pivots in the direction to enter the insertion longitudinal opening 1020, as shown in FIG. The tip end of the two-engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the rising engagement hole 1045 of the sliding door 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up the sliding door 1040 for the door frame against the biasing force of the spring 1048 and raises it. Therefore, since the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 are released from the locked state, the door frame 5 can be released by pulling the door frame 5 to the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

  When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the biasing force of the spring 1048 (the same position as shown in FIG. 96A). Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 is inclined upward toward the outside, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is the hook cover 165 by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3. The sliding lid 1040 for the door frame ascends upward by coming into contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are locked again The pivot 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding weir 1040 in this embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the entire length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the side surface of the main body frame 3 in the longitudinal direction. A door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and which is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three places of an upper end portion, a central portion and a lower end portion of the door frame sliding wedge 1040 Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the entire length of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the vertical direction, and forcefully open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert illegal equipment such as a piano wire from the interval. I can not do the act.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 3 of the present embodiment unlocks the lock of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction. The locking of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released by rotating. In addition, the lock device 1000 of this example performs a fraudulent action such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the main frame sliding rod 1050 without inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and lowering the same. Can not be The first of the structures for preventing such fraudulent action is a lock mechanism constituted by the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the sliding door 1050 for the main frame are housed in the closed space of the above.

  First, the operation of the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure will be described with reference to FIG. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 abut It is in a state of In this state, the biasing force of the spring 1035 causes the first fraud prevention member 1023 to rotate in the counterclockwise direction, and the stopper piece 1027 intrudes into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch An engagement notch portion 1066 formed on the lower hook member 1052 of the main frame slide lever 1050 at a position corresponding to 1007 is engaged. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked to the main frame sliding rod 1050 and pulled down, the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 are engaged with each other. It is impossible to unfairly pull down (unlock) and it is not possible to conduct an unfair act of opening the main body frame 3.

  On the other hand, when inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 and unlocking the main body frame 3 properly, as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is rotated by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is pivoted to penetrate into the insertion longitudinal opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 abuts on the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a pivot shaft hole. The rotation of the stopper piece portion 1027 starts to move in the clockwise direction in the drawing around 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 is also moved so as to withdraw from the tamper-proof notch portion 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece 1027 and the engagement notch 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is at a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engagement cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engagement protrusion 1017 as well, the leading end of the first engagement protrusion 1017 engages with the downward engagement hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding frame 1050 for the main frame is lowered, the locked state between the hooks 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main frame 3 is released to the outer frame 2. It can be done.

  In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a state of being in contact with the control projection 1031, so the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member The positional relationship with the position 1032 is substantially the same as that shown in FIG. When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud preventing member 1032 abut from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 97 (A) is obtained. Thereby, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when closing the main body frame 3. Further, in the present embodiment, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 prevent only the lowering operation of the main frame sliding wedge 1050 from being performed illegally, the main body If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened illegally, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to cheat the sliding rod with a piano wire etc. For this reason, it is devised that unauthorized operation on the main frame sliding wedge 1050 can not be performed.

  Further, even with the lock mechanism which is the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is impossible to invalidate the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, in the case where the lock function of the lock mechanism is incapacitated by an unauthorized action, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (the main body frame base 600), the inside The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided in the housing are completely covered by being enclosed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the respective hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065. Since it is in the state, even if it is attempted to pull down the main frame sliding wedge 1050 provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 by inserting a piano wire etc., both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Prevents unauthorized devices from entering the enclosed space, making it a structure that can not be easily tampered with.

  As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment has the sliding door 1040 for the door frame and the slide frame 1040 inside the U-shaped base 1001 which is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The attachment position of the cylinder lock 1010 to the U-shaped base 1001 for operating the lock device 1000 with the main frame slide lever 1050 slidably set to a position below the lower edge of the game board 4 Therefore, even if the size in the horizontal and vertical directions of the game board 4 is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is made large, It can be attached firmly.

  In addition, the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so that the open side of the U-shaped cross section of the U-shaped base 1001 faces the back surface of the main body frame 3. Therefore, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) The door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, and 1065, respectively. It is possible not to easily carry out an unauthorized action such as pulling a piano wire or the like and pulling down the main frame sliding rod 1050 provided inside.

  Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook holes 620 and the lock locking holes 621. The structure is such that the positioning and locking is performed and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at three places on the upper, middle and lower of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with screws. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with the above structure.

  In the lock device 1000 of this example, the lower part of the U-shaped base 1001 is screwed to the screw mounting portion 1003 formed in the lock mounting piece 1008 and in the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3. The structure in which the formed lock attachment portion 625 is screwed is shown, but instead of this, the tip of the screw 1012 is attached using the screw 1012 for attaching the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock attachment piece 1008. It is good also as a structure which forms the lock attachment hole screwed by penetrating the piece 1008 in the upper and lower sides of the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, the locking device 1000 can be used as the main body frame 3 (the main body frame only by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 at the rear portion of the locking device 1000 and the lock attaching portion 625 without screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001). It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back of the base 600).

  In the lock device 1000 of this embodiment, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the door frame sliding wedge 1040 and the main frame sliding wedge 1050 are slidably attached to the opposite side surface 1001a not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. A sliding door 1040 for a door frame and a sliding door for a main body frame in a closed space formed by an L-shaped base (lock base) and the side surface 1001a of the L-shaped base (lock base) and the first side wall 540 It is good also as a structure which accommodates 1050, and can exhibit the same effect as lock device 1000 mentioned above.

  As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment, the transparent award ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710 a extending rearward (front-rear direction) on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the upper side of the award ball base 710 The prize ball tank 720 for storing gaming balls supplied from the island equipment side of the gaming hall on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the gaming balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720 are aligned to form a prize ball base rear wall portion 710b. Transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of the game machine and gaming balls discharged from the tank rail unit 730 to the upper tray 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction And a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main frame base 600, the rear surface of which is behind the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. And the transparent back cover 900 disposed substantially in the same plane, the rear of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. A pachinko machine capable of visually recognizing the side and the back side, and easily checking the back side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 covering the back side of the game board 4 It can be one.

  In addition, since the rear side of the game board 4 as well as the rear side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent award ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. When you remove the game board 4 from the front to the 601, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, etc. It is easy to find out from and can prevent the occurrence of any failure due to the residue.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be viewed from the outside, an unauthorized device, tool, etc. for performing cheating on the rear side or the side of the game board 4 are attached Even if it has been, it can be easily found, and it is possible to prevent fraud from being conducted, and it is also possible to easily find an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to make the installation of an unauthorized device or the like hesitate, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made highly effective in deterring fraud.

  In addition, since the back side of the game board 4 is covered with the award ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facilities where the game machine 4 is installed may contact the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side of the game board, and to maintain the gaming board 4 in a good state and to suppress the occurrence of problems.

  In addition, the rear surface of the award ball tank 720 is positioned approximately twice as deep as the depth D of the main body frame base 600 from the front end of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is approximately half the depth of the main body frame 3, so the rear side and rear side of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. be able to. In addition, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half of the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to make a flat shape. The mounting operation can be facilitated by attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740 and the like to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

  Furthermore, the rear surface (main body 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. Therefore, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made substantially flat, and it is possible to catch or abut on other members in the installed island equipment by eliminating the protrusion to the rear. It can prevent and it can prevent that a failure generate | occur | produces. In addition, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, when transporting the pachinko machine 1, a buffer material with a simple shape can be used, and the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency) can be increased. The cost of the machine 1 can be reduced.

  Also, the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, and the rear side and the rear side of the game board 4 can be directly viewed through the slits 916 etc. The rear side of 4 and the like can be further easily viewed, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. Further, even if the back side of the game board 4 held by the main frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slits 916 of the back cover 900 and the like. The heat from the game board 4 can be prevented from being accumulated, and the control of the game becomes unstable due to the heat, or the member such as the synthetic resin is deformed or the occurrence of a problem is suppressed. be able to. Furthermore, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that the game ball can not pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, It is possible to prevent the game ball from intruding into the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect due to the intrusion of the game ball.

[1-4. Basic configuration of the game board]
Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 98 to FIG. FIG. 98 is a front view showing the game board attached to the main frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. FIG. 99 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the back FIG. Further, FIG. 102 (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit on the game board in a state of being attached to a pachinko machine, and FIG. 102 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. Further, FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the gaming board using the gaming panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 100 etc., and FIG. 104 is a gaming viewed from the rear of FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the gaming panel in the gaming board of FIG. 103 cut in the vertical direction.

  The gaming board 4 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, is a front configuration in which the outer circumference of the gaming area 1100 where the gaming ball is struck by the player operating the handle device 500 is partitioned and the outer shape is substantially rectangular in front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1150 disposed on the rear side of the front component 1110 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100, a substrate holder 1160 disposed on the rear lower portion of the game panel 1150, and a substrate holder 1160 And a main control board box 1170 for containing a main control board 4100 for controlling a game content to be played by putting a game ball into the game area 1100 and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. A function display unit 1180 capable of displaying a game situation and visibly attached to the player at a predetermined position of the front component 1110; To have. Although this game board 4 is not shown in FIGS. 98 to 105 and will be described in detail later, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1150 and a back unit 3000 attached to the back of the game panel 1150 It is further provided (see FIGS. 108 to 114 and the like).

  The basic configuration of the game board 4 of this embodiment is formed by the front component 1110, the game panel 1150, the substrate holder 1160, the main control board box 1170, and the function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1150. The detailed configuration characterizing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4) is formed by the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170. Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

1-4A. Front component]
Subsequently, the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape whose outer shape can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front and rear direction in a substantially circular shape The inner periphery of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 1100. The front component 1110 is an outer rail 1111 extending in a circular arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower end toward the left from the center in the lateral direction in front view, and extending to the upper right corner passing the upper end in the lateral direction in the front view. The inner rail 1112 is disposed inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower portion in the front view left and right direction to the upper left diagonal upper portion, and smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112 Inner circumferential rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position lower than the end (upper end) of outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise in a front view, the end (upper end) of inner circumferential rail 1113 and outer rail 1111 A stop 1114 that allows the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 to connect with the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 and the inner rail 1113 And is rotatably supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and closed between the outer rail 1111. Thus, it is possible to rotate only between the closed position extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and the open position where it is pivoted in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front and opened between the outer rail 1111 A backflow prevention member 1116 biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side.

  In this front component 1110, when the game board 4 is attached to the main frame 3, as shown in FIG. 98 and the like, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 An extension of the firing rail 660 in the device 650 is located. A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the firing rail 660, and the game ball launched along the firing rail 660 of the bat firing device 650 is Over the space, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball inserted between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls up along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 By turning the opening position side against the biasing force, it is possible to enter into the game area 1100.

  In addition, when the game ball is hit hard in the ball firing device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 abuts on the stopper 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. The rolling direction of the gaming ball can be compulsorily changed by bringing the gaming ball into contact with the stopper 1114, and the gaming ball is continuously rotated from the outer rail 1111 to the inner circumferential rail 1113. It is possible to prevent movement. In addition, even if the game ball that has entered (entered into) the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 is returned to the closed position by the biasing force before that. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents backflow of the gaming balls.

  In addition, when the game balls driven into the game area 1100 are not accepted by the start ports 2101 and 2102 and the winning openings 2103, 2104 and 2201 of the front unit 2000 described later, they flow to the lower end of the game area 1100. Are guided to the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150 by the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 and discharged from the out port 1151 to the lower side of the back of the game board 4. ing.

  On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the hit ball launcher 650 can not enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the end of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the roll of the space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is performed. It falls and is received by the ball entry 542 e of the far cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the far space 626 and discharged to the lower tray 302 in the pan unit 300.

  A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110, so that the wear resistance due to the rolling of the gaming ball is enhanced and the gaming ball rolls smoothly. ing. In addition, elastic members such as rubber and synthetic resin are arranged on the surface of the stopper 1114, and even if the game balls roll vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and make a collision, the shock is mitigated. As well as being able to repel the gaming ball inward.

  In addition, the front component 1110 has a wall-like security projection 1117 projecting forward from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 and a substantially central portion in the vertical direction along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from the lower side of the out-out guide surface 1115 A groove-like rail security groove 1118 which extends up to the front end and is recessed by a predetermined amount from the front end. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the crime prevention protrusion 1117 in the front component 1110 overlaps vertically with the crime prevention rear end projection 183 of the crime prevention cover 180 in the door frame 5. Therefore, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the pivot support side (left side in front view), the illegal tool can be made to reach the game area 1100. Can not be

  Further, in the front component 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the protrusion 182 of the crime prevention cover 180 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail crime prevention groove 1118. To be inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so that the protrusion 182 after crime prevention substantially contacts the outer surface of the inner rail 1112 (opposite to the game area 1100). Even with the inner rail 1112 and the rail crime prevention groove 1118 and the post-crime projection piece 182, illegal equipment such as a piano wire which is made to enter from between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reaches the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

  In addition, the front component 1110 is vertically spaced at the left end in the front view and recessed from the front to the rear and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 opened at the left end, and spaced apart in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view A pair of game board fasteners 1120 arranged in a row, a fixed recess 1121 disposed on the left side in front view from the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and opened downward and having an upper side formed in an arc and recessed from the front side; In the vicinity of the left end portion of the lower end, there is provided a rectangular-shaped notched ball passage cutout portion 1122 which extends in the left-right direction upward from the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is engaged with the positioning member 956 attached to the inner side of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 so that the front end of the game board 4 inserted in the game board holding port 601 However, it is possible to regulate movement in the back and forth direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably engaged with the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be used as a game board By locking the locking portion 608, the front end right end of the gaming board 4 inserted into the gaming board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. .

  Also, with the fixed recess 1121 of the front component 1110 inserted in the gaming board holding port 601 of the main frame 3, the gaming board fixture 690 pivotally supported on the front of the main frame 3 can be viewed from the front When turned clockwise, the fixed piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board fixture 690 restricts the lower end of the game board 4 from moving forward. It is supposed to be. Further, the ball passage cutout portion 1122 of the front component 1110 is formed with the same ball passage cutout portion 1152 at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the inserted state, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152.

  Furthermore, the front component 1110 has a laterally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front and rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end portion and a thickness in the front and rear direction from the center in the left and right direction at the lower side of the through hole 1123 A fastening portion 1124 thinly formed, and a stamped paper sticking portion 1125 which is disposed on the left side in a front view of the through hole 1123 and to which a certificate stamp for certification confirmation is stuck. Although the fastening portion 1124 in the front component 1110 is not shown in detail, when the game board is attached to the previous main frame, a predetermined fastening band is fixed to the fastening hole formed in the previous main frame. The game board 4 can be made difficult to remove by winding and fastening each other, and unauthorized removal of the game board 4 can be prevented.

  Further, in the front component 1110, a display portion 1181 of a function display unit 1180 described later is disposed on the lower right of the front view on the outside of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner circumferential rail 1113. The front component 1110 also includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 that project rearward from left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning protrusions 1127 that project rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1150 and engages with the fixing boss 1162 of the substrate holder 1160, and screws a predetermined screw from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160 through the fixing boss 1162 to the mounting boss 1126. By being worn, the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160. Further, the positioning projection 1127 can be fixed to the predetermined position of the game panel 1150 by fitting it to the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1150.

[1-4 B. Game panel]
Subsequently, the game panel 1150 in the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1150 of this example is formed of a wood plate material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and the outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1110. The game panel 1150 has an out port 1151 penetrating in the front and rear direction at a position corresponding to the out port guiding surface 1115 in the front component member 1110 at the lower center of the front view in the left and right direction. And a ball passage notch 1152 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and a rear projection of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the lower right corner in a front view And an insertion hole 1153 into which the 1182 is inserted.

  Further, in the game panel 1150, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component 1110 near the left and right ends of the lower part and the positioning projections 1127 of the front component 1110 are inserted and fixed A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155, and a groove-like out-ball discharge groove 1156 which is recessed downward from the rear surface by a predetermined amount on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and the lower end side is opened downward (see FIG. 101) And a notch 1157 which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component 1110 and which penetrates in the front-rear direction from the right end of the front view. In addition, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  The gaming panel 1150 in the gaming board 4 of this example is capable of partitioning the rear end of the gaming area 1100 whose outer periphery is partitioned by the front component 1110, and although illustration is omitted, Within the corresponding range, a plurality of obstacle nails are to be implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a front unit 2000 is to be attached. In addition, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1150. In addition, the gaming panel 1150 is formed such that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the gaming area 1100 in the front component 1110 when assembled to the gaming board 4. The game ball guided backward by the out-out guide surface 1115 is made to enter the out-port 1151 and be discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[1-4C. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape whose upper and front sides are open. The substrate holder 1160 has an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed to penetrate in the vertical direction at the front end of the bottom wall substantially at the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and the upper surface of the bottom wall is an out-ball The game ball which is formed to be lower toward the discharge unit 1161 and is discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1150, the front unit or the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the substrate holder 1160 is The ball is discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion 1161. When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge section 1161 is positioned immediately above the discharge ball receiving section 841 of the substrate unit 800 in the main body frame 3. The game balls discharged from the above are all discharged downward to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the substrate unit 800.

  Further, the substrate holder 1160 is provided with a plurality of fixing bosses 1162 projecting forward from the front ends of the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are adapted to be fitted with the rear end of the mounting boss 1126 of the front component 1110 after the tip is inserted into the boss insertion hole 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 11520 With the boss 1126 fitted, the inside of the fixing boss 1162 is penetrated from the rear side of the substrate holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed to the mounting boss 1126, whereby the substrate holder 1160 with respect to the front component 1110 is It can be assembled, and the game panel 1150 can be held between the front component 1110 and the substrate holder 1160.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 101, the substrate holder 1160 has a fixing portion 1163 and a fixing portion capable of fitting the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 from the side at the left end portion of the rear surface in the rear wall in a rear view. An elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170 disposed so as to face the portion 1163; and a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear. The main control board box 1170 can be detachably supported on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1160 by the fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

[1-4D. Main control board box]
Subsequently, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control substrate box 1170 is a thin horizontal box-shaped substrate base 1171 open on the rear side, and a thin horizontal box-like shape covering the rear surface of the substrate base 1171 open on the front side and fitted into the substrate base 1171 from the rear side. And a main control board 4100 having electronic components, terminals and the like mounted on the rear side of the front end of the board cover 1171. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end of the substrate base 1171 in a rear view, and a fixing piece 1174 which fits with the fixing portion 1163 of the substrate holder 1160, and the right end of the substrate cover 1172 from a rear view. And a resilient fixing piece that is resiliently engaged with a locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160 that protrudes rearward.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the main control board box 1170 is disposed at the right end portion of the rear view two at a time, with the elastic fixing piece 1175 in between, sealing the opening and closing of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 Seal (not shown) which is applied across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower end of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal covering the surface of the sealed seal A protective cover 1177 and a substrate management seal 1178 attached to the rear surface of the substrate cover 1172 are provided. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control substrate box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation and cutting portion 863 of the delivery control substrate box 860 in the substrate unit 800, and caulking fixation is performed on any one of the four sealing portions 1176. It is done. In order to separate the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, the main control substrate box 1170 needs to cut the caulked fixed sealing portion 1176 so that the trace of the opening and closing of the main control substrate box 1170 remains. It has become. Thus, whether or not the main control board box 1170 is improperly opened can be clearly determined visually from the outside.

  In addition, since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed three times. Further, in the main control substrate box 1170 of this example, a hermetic seal is attached across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and when the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 are separated, the hermetic seal is cut. It is necessary to peel off, and even in this hermetic seal, a trace of opening and closing remains. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally remodeled or replaced with an incorrect main control board (or a ROM storing a game content program or the like). Even if it can be confirmed visually from the outside, it can be prevented that those fraudulent acts are performed.

  In the main control board box 1170, an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction of the board cover 1172 is formed at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c or the test terminal 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening. Various connection terminals and the like for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, and the like come to the rear side. Incidentally, by connecting a predetermined measuring device to the test terminal 4100 f facing from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170, Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 or the sealing seal is cleverly worked, the presence or absence of an unauthorized modification to the main control board 4100 can be confirmed other than by visual observation, and a pachinko machine 1 with high crime prevention performance is provided. It can be done.

[1-4 E. Function Display Unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component 1110, and the display unit 1181 is disposed on the front of the front component 1110 so as to be visible from the player side, and the front component 1110. And a rear protrusion 1182 protruding rearward than the rear surface.

  In the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 102A, the game state changed by the game balls driven into the game area 1100 is displayed at the left end in front view Play status indicator 1183 consisting of a single LED and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the game status indicator 1183 to display the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 For the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 and for the first special lottery result which is placed on the right side of the first special symbol memory indicator 1184 and received by the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 The first special symbol display 1185 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying as and the second starting opening 210 disposed on the upper right of the first special symbol display 1185 To the right of the second special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the second special lottery results drawn by the acceptance of the game ball to the second special symbol, and the right side of the second special symbol display 1186 And a second special symbol memory display 1187 for displaying the number of reservations regarding the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 and comprising two LEDs lined up and down.

  Further, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in an arc substantially along the inner circumferential rail 1113 from immediately above the second special symbol display 1186, and the number of reservations regarding passage of the gate 2107 by the game ball is An ordinary symbol storage indicator 1188 consisting of four LEDs for displaying, and an ordinary lottery result which is arranged under the ordinary symbol storage indicator and the gaming ball passes through the gate portion 2107 is displayed as an ordinary symbol For the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED for the purpose and the diagonal upper right side of the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 arranged in line, illegal gaming is detected (for example, illegal using a magnet or the like by the magnetic detection sensor 3523) The fraud detection indicator 1190 which consists of two LEDs for displaying as an information to the outside when a game is detected is provided.

  The game state indicator 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a red, green, orange, and color LED capable of changing its light emission color, and the light emission color to be emitted and the on / off blink By the combination, various game states (for example, probability fluctuation state, time shortening state, positive short time state, big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state, etc.) can be displayed.

  In addition, when the first special symbol storage indicator 1184 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the first special symbol in the first special symbol indicator 1185, the gaming ball is received in the first starting opening 2101 In this case, the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the first special symbol whose start of the variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. -The number of reservations can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a, 1184b Lights together, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a flashes and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights when the number of reservations is three, and the number of first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both when the number of reservations is four It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  In addition, when the second special symbol memory display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 1186, the gaming ball is received in the second starting opening 2102 In this case, the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the second special symbol whose start of the variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a consisting of predetermined LEDs and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned on. -The number of reservations can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of reservations is one, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b is extinguished, and when the number of reservations is two, the second special symbol memory display lamp 1187a, 1187b lights together, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights when the number of reservations is three, and the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b when the number of reservations is four It blinks together. In this example, up to four are reserved.

  Furthermore, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are drawn by the reception of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, the first special lottery The result and the second special lottery result are displayed, and after the 7 segment LED fluctuates for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, it stops after the change and the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7 segment LED The player can recognize the special lottery result and the second special lottery result.

  The normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a red, green, orange, and color LED capable of changing its light emission color, and is a combination of the light emission color to be emitted and the light on / flashing. Thus, it is possible to display an ordinary lottery result which is drawn by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2107. In addition, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed with the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after being variably displayed for a predetermined time as in the special symbol.

  Further, when the gaming ball passes through the gate portion 2107 when the normal symbol storage indicator 1188 in the function display unit 1180 can not variably display the normal symbol in the normal symbol indicator 1189, the start of the variation display is suspended It is to display the number of reservations (the number of memories) of the stored standard symbols. This ordinary symbol memory display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom according to the number of holdings. The number of reserved symbols can normally be displayed by sequentially turning on 1188 d. In the present example, up to four variable symbols of normal symbols are reserved (stored).

  Further, the fraud detection indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 is provided with fraud detection display lamps 1190a and 1190b consisting of predetermined LEDs, and the respective lamps are simultaneously turned on to indicate that a fraud game has been detected. It can be done.

  As shown in FIG. 102 (A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 in a state where the game board 4 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 It has become. In addition, the game state indicator 1183 of the function display unit 1180, the first special symbol memory indicator 1184, the first special symbol indicator 1185, the second special symbol indicator 1186, the second special symbol memory indicator 1187, the ordinary symbol memory The display 1188, the normal symbol display 1189, and the fraud detection indicator 1190 are attached to the front of the function display board 1191 (see FIG. 168). A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

  In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component 1110 of the game board 4, the function is compared with the case where it is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 300 attached to the game panel 1150. The display unit 1180 can be used as a basic configuration of the game board 4, and the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent an increase in cost, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 which can be embodied by the back unit 3000 and which can characterize the model of the pachinko machine 1 is different, the position of the display portion 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change. The store clerk or the like in the hall can be made to recognize the position of the display portion 1181 without confusion To have.

  Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may have a form as shown in FIG. 102 (B). In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 configured by seven-segment LEDs are each configured by eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 are each constituted by four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol memory display 1188 is constituted by two LEDs.

  Since the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are composed of eight LED groups in addition to the same function and effect as described above can be achieved by the function display unit 1180 as well. It is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player as compared with the case of using the segment LED. Therefore, since the contents displayed on the function display unit 1180 are hard to understand, it is possible to prevent the display on the function display unit 1180 from being concerned during the game and making it difficult to concentrate on the game, the movement of the game ball, The game can be made more enjoyable by concentrating on movable effects, effect images and the like.

1-4F. Second embodiment of game panel]
Subsequently, a game panel 1200 having a form different from the game panel 1150 in the above-described game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. The front component 1110, the substrate holder 1160, and the main control substrate box 1170 in FIGS. 103 to 105 have the same configuration as described above, and the detailed description thereof is omitted here. The game panel 1200 of this embodiment is thinner than the above-described game panel 1150, and has a plate shape capable of dividing the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer periphery is divided by the front component 1110, according to the outer shape of the front component 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1220 attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110 and detachably holding the panel plate 1210 from the front side.

  The outer shape of the game panel 1200 panel plate 1210 is a polygonal shape slightly larger than the game area 1100, and the synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, methacrylic resin, glass, metal, etc. It is formed of an inorganic board. The thickness of this panel board 1210 is thinner than the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1150), and it is necessary minimum that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail (not shown) is planted on the front or the table unit 2000 is attached. The thickness (8 to 10 mm) is considered. In this example, the panel board 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin board.

  The panel plate 1210 has a plurality of fitting holes 1211 formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery and made up of circular holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a long hole 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left part and penetrating the front-rear direction Is equipped. The fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 are disposed outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engagement steps 1213 having a front side recessed at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engagement step 1213 is cut out to about half of the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is disposed outside the game area 1100, like the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

  Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing a positioning projection 1127 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 in the inner rail fixing hole 1214.

  On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the gaming panel 1200 has a size including the panel plate 1210 and a substantially rectangular outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the gaming panel 1150 made of wood described above (in this example, about 20 mm) and made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). In the panel holder 1220, a holding step 1221 detachably holding a panel plate 1210 and recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and a size substantially equal to that of the game area 1100 inside the holding step 1221 It mainly comprises a through hole 1222 penetrating in the direction.

  The depth of the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210 from the front surface, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220 It becomes almost the same plane as. The front inner circumferential surface of the holding step portion 1221 is sized so that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer circumferential surface of the panel plate 1210. By this clearance, even if the panel board 1210 relatively expands and contracts due to a temperature change and a temporal change, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. The clearance may be filled with an elastic member such as rubber.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the long hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. A plurality of projecting pins 1223 which can be extended and fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210 are provided. By fitting and inserting these projecting pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the long holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engagement claw 1224 and an engagement piece 1225 which engage with the engagement step 1213 at a position corresponding to the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claws 1224 are disposed on the upper holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, correspond to the upper engaging step 1213 on the panel plate 1210, and extend from the front of the holding step 1221 to the front. It protrudes toward and resiliently engages with the engagement step 1213. The engagement claw 1224 is sized such that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engaging piece 1225 is disposed in the lower holding step 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is between the front surface of the holding step 1221 and the panel In a state in which a predetermined gap having a size that allows the engagement step 1213 of the plate 1210 to be inserted is formed, the plate 1210 is configured to extend a predetermined amount toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. The panel plate 1210 is detachably held on the panel holder 1220 by engaging the engagement step 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engagement claws 1224 and the engagement pieces 1225.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 penetrating in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided on the front component 1110 can be inserted. The boss insertion hole 1226 is a mounting boss of the front component 1110 By inserting 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component 1110 are positioned relative to each other.

  As shown in FIG. 104, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 in a form recessed on the front side by a predetermined amount so as to leave an outer peripheral edge lower than the center slightly below in the vertical direction. ing. The rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end by a predetermined range from the lower end by the attachment support portion 1227 so that the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface protrudes rearward, and the amount of depression ( The depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) which can accommodate the flange-like fixing portion 3001 b (see FIG. 164 etc.) of the back box 3001 in the back unit 3000 attached and fixed to the mounting support 1227. And preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By attaching and fixing a predetermined member to the attachment support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3001a from projecting rearward beyond the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, ie, the game board 4 is used as the main unit frame 3 It can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding port 601 of (pachinko machine 1).

  Furthermore, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 which are disposed in the rear side of the mounting support 1227 and above the housing recess 630h and into which predetermined screws can be screwed. ing. In addition, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be attached and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning protrusion (shown in the figure, projecting forward from a fixing portion 3001 a formed in a flange shape on the front surface of the back box 3001). Is omitted)) is inserted. In the present example, the positioning hole 1229 is a blind hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in a rear view.

  An attachment hole of an appropriate diameter according to the size, weight, etc. of a predetermined member to be attached and fixed such that the inner diameter of the hole is a mixture of a large diameter and a small diameter with respect to the attachment hole 1228 1228 may be used.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and the weight of the panel holder 1220 is reduced by the lightening portion 1230 It has become. As shown in FIG. 103, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed within a predetermined range from the lower end of the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to a predetermined height from the front side of the accommodation recess 630h. In this case, since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is a substantially flat surface, the back surface of the front component 1110 disposed on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the gaming ball is fired from the bat firing device 650 But they are guided smoothly. Further, as shown in the figure, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a lightening portion 1230 so that the mounting hole 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 1220 is maintained. The box-like rib is formed for the purpose of

  The panel holder 1220 is provided with a positioning portion 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) or an assembly jig, and the game panel 1150 is held by the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set in the state of In the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 penetrating in the front and back direction at a position corresponding to the out port guiding surface 1115 of the front component 1110 And a ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and a rear projection 1182 of the function display unit 1180 inserted in the front-rear direction through the lower right corner in front view And an insertion hole 1234.

  Further, the panel holder 1220 is a groove-like out-ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 104) which is recessed by a predetermined amount from the rear surface toward the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and open at the lower end side. A notch 1236 is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and is cut away so as to penetrate from the right end in the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

  When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharging groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is formed on the main body frame 3 (upper surface of the game board placement portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). It is adapted to be fitted with the provided positioning projection 607, and by the out ball discharging groove 1235 being fitted with the positioning projection 607, the game board 4 is moved relative to the main frame 3 in the left and right direction. It is supposed to be regulated.

  In the game panel 1200 of this embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engagement claw 1224 and the engagement piece 1225 engage with the engagement step portion 1213. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front sides of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 become substantially flush, and a conventionally used obstacle nail planting It is possible to set the panel board 1210 in the conventional obstacle nail implanting apparatus while holding the panel plate 1210 in the panel holder 1220 without remodeling the installation apparatus, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost for implanting the obstacle nail It can be done.

  In addition, although the game panel 1200 of this example is not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel board 1210. And the front unit 2000 can be attached. In addition, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. Thereby, in the thin panel board 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that the panel board 1210 can be prevented from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

  Furthermore, since the gaming panel 1200 is configured to be divided by the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, an increase in weight of the entire gaming panel 1200 can be suppressed even when the panel plate 1210 is a transparent plate, and a transparent panel The pachinko machine 1 which can be seen by the player from the rear side of the game area 1100 can be embodied through the board 1210, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to attract the player's attention strongly.

  Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel board 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel board 1210 whose position such as the obstacle nail or the winning opening changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part The panel holder 1220 can be a common part, and by replacing only the panel plate 1210, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with the game board 4 compatible with various models.

  Further, since a plurality of mounting holes 1228 are provided in advance in the panel holder 1220 in a predetermined arrangement, mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 and the like mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 The panel holder 1220 can be a common part of the pachinko machine 1 which does not depend on the model by designing the fixing portions of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228 even if they are at different positions. It has become.

[1-5. Security structure of pachinko machine]
Subsequently, the crime prevention structure in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 106 and FIG. FIG. 106 is a partial cross-sectional view showing the crime prevention structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. FIG. 107 is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the gaming board housed.

  First, as shown in FIG. 106, the crime prevention structure on the pivotal support side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a side surface on the pivotal support side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 formed of synthetic resin in the main body frame 3. And a metal reinforcing unit 150 mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 made of synthetic resin in the door frame 5. As shown in FIG.

  As described above, the crime prevention side plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of a metal (for example, aluminum alloy) extrusion type material, and the dimension in the vertical direction is substantially the same as the dimension in the vertical direction of the main body frame base 600 In addition, the dimension in the front-rear direction is larger than the dimension in the front-rear direction of the front component 1110 and the game panel 1150 in the game board 4. The side crime prevention plate 950 extends in the vertical direction and extends in the front and rear direction. A plate-like side piece 952a which forms a side of the main body frame 3 and a front end which extends inward in a substantially perpendicular direction (open side) from the front end of the side piece 952a. A piece 952b, a middle piece 952c extending along the front end piece 952b from the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of clearance on the rear side of the front end piece 952b And a rear end piece 952d. Thus, the front end of the security side plate 950 is formed in a substantially U-shaped cross section opening inward (open side) by the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c.

  The side crime prevention plate 950 (main body 952) has strength and rigidity of the side crime prevention plate 950 by the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d disposed in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side plate piece 952a. It is enhanced, and the strength of the entire body frame 3 can be enhanced to support the game board 4 and the door frame 5 and the like well.

  On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 using spot welding, rivets, etc. In the outer side of the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the support side, a support U-shaped protruding piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened to the outside (the support side) is provided. In the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the strength of the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further enhanced by the axially supporting U-shaped projecting piece 166, and the axially supporting reinforcing sheet metal 152 is less likely to bend. .

  By the way, in this example, the door frame 5 is mounted and supported only at the upper and lower two points of the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3. If an incorrect tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the main frame 3 and the main frame 3, the support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main frame 3 becomes large. There is a risk of fraud. On the other hand, in the crime prevention structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952 b and the middle piece 952 c formed inside the front end of the crime prevention side plate 950. A rear-side piece of the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U-shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (enters), and the front end piece 952a is axially supported. It is in a state of being sandwiched by the side U-shaped projecting pieces 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcedly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the pivotally U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 abuts on the rear surface side of the front end piece 952 b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the pivoting side U-shaped projecting piece 166 from moving away from the main body frame 3, so that it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being broken open. It is possible to prevent the fraudulent action such as opening the door frame 5 against 3 being performed.

  Further, since the crime prevention side plate 950 formed of metal in the body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted together, the space between the body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is The strength and the rigidity of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the security performance can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, since the rear end of the side piece 952a in the crime prevention side plate 950 is extended rearward than the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is tentatively Even if is destroyed, illegal tools such as a piano wire can not penetrate into the game area 1100 on the front of the game board 4 (game panel 1150) from the rear end of the side piece 952a, and an illegal action is performed. Can be reliably prevented. In addition, as shown in FIG. 106, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the outside of the crime prevention side plate 950 so as to cover the outside of the crime prevention side plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It is possible to sufficiently fight against the vandalism of Also, in general, in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1. From the (front) side, it is almost impossible to allow the unauthorized tool to enter behind the rear end of the side piece 952c, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

  Subsequently, as a crime prevention structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 107, a prize ball base 710, a tank rail 731 and a prize ball device 740 in the main frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the game board 4 can be used as the rear or side of the game board 4 housed in the main frame 3. It is possible to visually recognize from the rear side of the main body frame 3 without removing it from the main body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an illegal device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4 or the like, it can be easily found, and it can be prevented that an illegal act is performed. In addition, since an unauthorized device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to make the installation of the unauthorized device fooling, and it becomes possible to increase the deterrence against fraud. ing.

  Further, since the rear side and the side of the game board 4 can be viewed through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. from the rear side of the main body frame 3, the main body frame for maintenance or model change. When you remove the game board 4 against 3, even if tools such as a screwdriver or pliers, cleaning waste, dust or dirt, etc. remain between the main unit frame 3 and the game board 4, those should be outside. As a result, it is possible to prevent any trouble from occurring and to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[2. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 108 to 113. FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the game board viewed obliquely from the left front, FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the diagonal right front, and FIG. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board obliquely viewed from the left rear, and FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the game board disassembled into main component members and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. It is the perspective view seen from.

  As illustrated, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a frame-shaped front component 1110 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 1100 into which the game ball is impacted. The game panel 1200 is arranged to close the game area 1100 on the rear side of the front component 1110 and the front side of the game panel 1200 is arranged on the upper side of the out port 1151 substantially at the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction. A supported prize device unit 2100, a side decoration unit 2300 disposed along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 on the left side of the prize apparatus unit 2100 and supported on the front of the game panel 1200, and disposed substantially at the center of the game area 1100 Frame-shaped center character 2400 supported by the game panel 1200 and the back of the game panel 1200 Liquid crystal display device 1900 as effect display means which can be attached so as to be visible from the player side through the frame of the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1200 and the center character 2400 and can display predetermined effect images and notification information And mainly. Here, the game panel 1200 corresponds to the game board of the present invention, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponds to the effect display means of the present invention. Hereinafter, the configuration of each device attached to the game panel 1200 will be described in detail.

[2-1. Winning device unit]
First, the winning device unit 2100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 127. FIG. FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the gaming panel and members attached thereto disassembled and seen from diagonally front, FIG. 115 is a front view of the winning device unit, and FIG. 116 is an oblique view of the winning device unit. 117 is a perspective view of the winning device unit as seen obliquely from the rear, and FIG. 118 is an exploded perspective view of the winning device unit as disassembled and viewed from the front, FIG. Is a front view of the base member of the winning apparatus unit, FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the mechanism of the winning apparatus unit as viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 121 is a main configuration of the mechanism of the winning apparatus unit. FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view disassembled into each member and viewed obliquely from the front; FIG. 122 is an exploded perspective view disassembled from the opening / closing drive mechanism of the second start opening; Opening and closing drive machine of the opening and closing winning device Fig. 124 is an exploded perspective view of the opening / closing drive mechanism cut vertically and seen obliquely from the front, and Fig. 125 is an operating state of the opening / closing drive mechanism. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the second opening and closing winning device disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 127 is an oblique front view of the lower portion of the second opening and closing winning device It is a perspective view.

  As shown in FIG. 114 and FIG. 115, the winning device unit 2100 of this example is inserted from the front to the opening 1200e formed at the lower part in the middle in the left-right direction of the gaming panel 1200, It is fixed to the front of the. The winning device unit 2100 is provided with a plurality of receiving openings (winning openings) through which the gaming balls driven into the gaming area 1100 can be received. As a plurality of receiving ports, a first starting port 2101 disposed substantially at the center in the left-right direction, a second starting port 2102 disposed on the right side of the first starting port 2101, and disposed immediately below the first starting port 2101 The first opening and closing winning device 2103, the second opening and closing winning device 2104 disposed immediately below the second starting opening 2102, and the first starting opening 2101 and the first opening and closing winning device 2103 There are three general winning openings 2105, a general winning opening 2106 disposed immediately above the second starting opening 2102, and a gate unit 2107 disposed on the right of the general winning opening 2106.

  As shown in FIGS. 114 to 117, the winning device unit 2100 includes a base member 2110 fixed to the front of the game panel 1200, and the base member 2110 is provided with a first starting opening 2101 and a second starting opening 2102, A first opening and closing winning device 2103, a second opening and closing winning device 2104, general winning openings 2105 and 2106, and a gate unit 2107 are disposed. Also, as shown in FIG. 118, the light transmitting main lens portion 2112 and the right side lens portion 2113 are disposed on the rear side of the base member 2110, and the cover member 2114 is disposed on the rear side of the main lens portion 2112. It is set up.

  As shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, the base member 2110 has a thin plate-like plate-like portion 2111 disposed along the front surface of the game panel 1200, and the plate-like portion 2111 is provided with a first starting opening 2101, The general winning openings 2105 and 2106 and the gate portion 2107 are integrally formed. The first starting opening 2101 and the general winning openings 2105 and 2106 have a box-like shape that protrudes in the front play area 1100 (see FIG. 109) and the upper surface is open, and can always receive game balls. It has become. Further, the rear end portion of the first starting opening 2101 and the general winning openings 2105 and 2106 is extended beyond the plate-like portion 2111 so as to guide the winning game ball. The gate unit 2107 has a gate-like shape through which game balls can always pass, and an arc-shaped guide unit 2110h for guiding the game balls having passed through the gate unit 2107 obliquely downward to the left at the lower right side is a gate It is integrally molded with the part 2107.

  Further, the base member 2110 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating the plate-like portion 2111 in the front-rear direction. Specifically, the first opening 2110a located below the general winning opening 2106 and through which the game ball that has won the second starting opening 2102 passes and the first opening and closing winning device 2103 located below the first starting opening 2101 The second opening 2110b through which the game ball that has won a prize passes and the third opening of a horizontally long rectangular shape located below the first opening 2110a and communicating with the special winning opening 2153 (described later) of the second opening and closing winning device 2104 A second opening 2110e located between the gate portion 2107 and the third opening 2110c and into which the obstacle nail K (see the two-dot chain line in FIG. 115) implanted in the game panel 1200 is inserted; It is formed. In addition, although the plate-like portion 2111 has a reflective surface formed on the entire surface by plating, the light irradiated through the main lens portion 2112 and the cover member 2114 disposed on the rear side of the base member 2110 Has a plurality of windows so that the player can be projected to the player side. Specifically, a plurality of polygonal large window portions 2110 f having a relatively large opening area and a circular small window portion 2110 g having a smaller opening area than the large window portions 2110 f are respectively formed.

  Furthermore, in the plate-like portion 2111, a notch 2110d is formed between the portion where the first starting opening 2101 and the second opening 2110b are formed and the portion where the first opening 2110a and the third opening 2110c are formed. The obstacle nail K (see FIG. 115) implanted in the game panel 1200 is inserted through the notch 2110d. In addition, on the front surface of the plate-like portion 2111 between the second opening 2110 b and the third opening 2110 c, a dividing line 2011 i including vertical grooves is provided so as to divide the gaming area 1100 left and right.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the front decoration 2121 having the seal member 2120 attached thereto is attached to the front surface of the first starting opening 2101 and the seal member 2170 is attached to the front surface of the general winning opening 2105. A front decoration 2171 is attached, and a seal member 2170 is attached to the front of the general winning opening 2106. Further, the gate unit 2107 is provided with a gate sensor 2176 for detecting the passing game ball.

  The second starting port 2102 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 115, the second starting opening 2102 is disposed below the general winning opening 2106 and is capable of entering the game ball through the first opening 2110a (see FIG. 119) of the base member 2110. It has become. The second start opening 2102 is provided with a pair of blades 2125 which can be expanded between the second start opening 2102 and the general winning opening 2106, and in a state in which the pair of blades 2125 rise almost vertically (state shown in FIG. 115) While the game ball can not be received to the second starting opening 2102 by the winning opening 2106 and the pair of blades 2125, in a state where the pair of blades 2125 are expanded in the left-right direction by the opening / closing drive mechanism 2126 described later. The game ball can be received into the starting opening 2102. That is, the second start opening 2102 is a variable winning opening by the pair of blades 2125. The pair of blades 2125 is opened and closed based on the detection of passage of the game ball by the gate sensor 2176 (see FIG. 118). In addition, as shown in FIG. 118, the pair of blades 2125 are disposed on the left and right sides of the first opening 2110a (see FIG. 119) formed in the plate-like portion 2111, and the entrance is closed at the front. The lower side is covered by 2124, and the game ball winning a prize in the second starting opening 2102 is guided by the ball entry unit 2124 and sent to the first opening 2110a. A through hole 2125a penetrating in the front and rear direction is formed in the lower end portion of the blade 2125, and a rotary shaft portion 2124a provided in the ball entering portion 2124 is connected to the plate-like portion 2111 through the through hole 2125a. Is rotatably supported about the rotation shaft 2124a.

  The open / close drive mechanism 2126 of the blade 2125 is disposed on the rear side of the base member 2110, and as shown in FIGS. 121 and 122, a box-like holder 2127 whose front is open and a housing portion 2127a of the holder 2127. And a link member 2130 which is connected to the plunger 2129 of the solenoid 2128 and converts movement of the plunger 2129 in the back and forth direction into rotational (opening and closing) movement of the pair of blades 2125. . The link member 2130 is a solenoid 2128 which protrudes from the left and right sides of the link member 2130, and a pair of rotary shaft portions 2130a which are inserted from the inside into the bearing holes 2127b provided on the left and right sides of the holder 2127. The pair of locking portions 2130b to be locked to the plunger 2129, and formed on both the left and right sides, can be engaged with the eccentric claw 2125b that has an arc shape and protrudes backward from the rear surface of the blade 2125 (see FIG. 118) And a pair of hooking portions 2130c. That is, when the plunger 2129 is retracted by energization of the solenoid 2128, the link member 2130 is rotated about the rotation shaft 2130a so that the hook 2130c is lifted, so that the pair of blades 2125 are in a vertical state (the game ball can not be received) State) is changed to an expanded state (a state where the gaming ball can be received).

  Next, the first opening and closing winning device 2103 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 115, the first opening and closing winning device 2103 is disposed below the first starting opening 2101 and allows the game ball to enter through the second opening 2110 b (see FIG. 119) of the base member 2110. It is possible. As shown in FIG. 118, the first opening and closing winning device 2103 protrudes from the plate-like portion 2111 of the base member 2110 to the game area 1100 in front and allows the game ball to pass through; It is configured to include an opening / closing drive mechanism 2136 which can be arranged and which can receive the game ball passing through the ball entering portion 2135 in the second opening 2110 b, and a prize sensor 2137 (see FIG. 123) which detects the received game ball. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 118, the ball receiving portion 2135 is formed in a gate shape through which the game ball can pass in the vertical direction, and on the upper surface on both left and right sides A pair of guide portions 2135a for guiding into 2135 are respectively formed.

  As shown in FIGS. 123 and 124, the opening / closing drive mechanism 2136 includes a front side base member 2139 and a rear side base member 2140, a solenoid 2141 disposed in the rear side base member 2140, a tongue-shaped protrusion 2142, and a link. And a member 2144. The front side base member 2139 has a support hole 2139a which penetrates in the front and rear direction and slidably supports the tongue shaped protrusion 2142 in the front and rear direction, and the front end of the support hole 2139a has a second opening 2110b (FIG. 119). It connects to the back surface of the plate-like part 2111 so that it may face (refer). The rear side base member 2140 is connected to the rear side of the front side base member 2139, and accommodates the housing portion 2140a communicating with the support hole 2139a, and the support portion 2140e slidably supporting the rear side of the tongue-like projecting and retracting piece 2142. It is equipped. In addition, the bottom of the rear base member 2140 has a sensor mounting portion 2140b into which the winning sensor 2137 is inserted from the front, and the top end of the upper surface of the sensor mounting portion 2140b corresponds to a half of the passing hole 2137a of the winning sensor 2137. A circular notch 2140 d is formed. In addition, on the left and right walls of the rear base member 2140, a notch-shaped bearing portion 2140c whose front surface is opened is formed.

  The solenoid 2141 is accommodated in the accommodation portion 2140 a of the rear base member 2140 with the plunger 2143 facing forward. The tongue part 2142 has a rectangular frame-like frame portion 2142a elongated in the front-rear direction, a ball receiving portion 2142b formed at the tip of the frame portion 2142a and having a downward slope toward the rear, and a frame A rear guide portion 2142c formed on the rear side of the portion 2142a and slidably supported by the support portion 2140e of the rear base member 2140, and disposed between the frame portion 2142a and the rear guide portion 2142c And a pair of groove portions 2142d formed in the shape of a groove. The link member 2144 is connected to the plunger 2143 of the solenoid 2141 and converts the movement of the plunger 2143 in the front-rear direction into linear movement of the tongue-like projecting and retracting piece 2142 and is formed to project on both the left and right sides. A pair of rotary shaft portions 2144a inserted from the front side into the bearing portions 2140c provided on the base member 2140 and extending inward from both upper and lower sides of the upper surface, and a pair of locking members held by the plunger 2143 of the solenoid 2141 A locking portion 2144b and a locking portion 2144c that protrudes inward from both left and right ends of the lower end and is locked to a pair of groove portions 2142d of the tongue-shaped projecting and retracting piece 2142 are provided. That is, when the plunger 2143 retracts due to the energization of the solenoid 2141, the link member 2144 rotates around the rotation shaft 2144a, and the tongue-shaped protrusion 2142 is projected from the retracted position (the state shown in FIG. 124). State shown).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 124, when the tongue-shaped projecting part 2142 is in the retracted position, the ball receiving portion 2142b of the tongue-shaped part 2142 is accommodated in the support hole 2139a of the front base member 2139. The gaming balls having entered the ball receiving portion 2135 (see FIG. 118) pass through without being received by the tongue-shaped projecting and retracting pieces 2142. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 125, when the tongue part 2142 moves to the projecting position, the ball receiving part 2142b of the tongue part 2142 protrudes from the support hole 2139a of the front base member 2139 to the front game area 1100, It becomes possible to receive the game ball which entered the ball entry part 2135. Then, the gaming ball received by the ball receiving portion 2142b of the tongue part 2142 is guided to the rear according to the gradient of the ball receiving portion 2142b and dropped from the frame portion 2142a. In addition, a prize sensor 2137 is disposed below the rear side base member 2140, and it is possible to detect a falling gaming ball.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, in the normal gaming state, the tongue-shaped salient piece 2142 is accommodated at the retracted position, and the gaming ball is received to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 (starting winning ) According to the special lottery result selected by lottery (when the special lottery result is "small hit") to move to the protruding position.

  Next, the second opening and closing winning device 2104 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 115, the second opening and closing winning device 2104 is disposed below the second starting opening 2102, and allows the game ball to enter through the third opening 2110c (see FIG. 119) of the base member 2110. It is possible. As shown in FIG. 121 and FIG. 126, the second opening and closing winning device 2104 has a large winning opening 2153 on the front and a case unit 2152 comprising an upper case 2150 and a lower case 2151 in which passages for gaming balls are formed inside. The large winning opening 2153 is disposed to face the horizontally long rectangular third opening 2110 c formed in the base member 2110. The special winning opening 2153 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular winning door 2154 (see FIG. 118) which can close the opening. In this winning door 2154, a door shaft 2154a formed at the lower left and right ends is pivotally supported by a pair of bearing portions 2150c formed on the front left and right sides of the upper case 2150, thereby closing the large winning opening 2153 And a substantially vertical state (the state shown in FIG. 115) which makes the game ball unreceivable, and a tilt state in which the upper side is turned to the front side and the large winning opening 2153 is opened and the game ball can be received. It is possible to rotate between and. Although details will be described later, the winning door 2154 is in a state in which the large winning opening 2153 is closed in the normal gaming state, and the gaming ball can be received to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 ( According to the special lottery result which is drawn by starting prize winning) (when the special drawing result is "big hit") it is opened.

  To describe the second opening and closing winning device 2104 in more detail, the upper case 2150 has a passage for gaming balls inside (on the lower side), and on the upper surface is formed a sensor accommodating portion 2150b in which the second starting opening sensor 2166 is accommodated. It is done. Further, on the upper surface side of the lower case 2151, a passage 2151a for guiding a gaming ball that has won a prize in the big winning opening 2153, and a mechanism accommodating portion 2151c for accommodating an open / close drive mechanism 2155 for opening and closing the prize door 2154 are formed. On the lower surface side of the lower case 2151, a sensor accommodating portion 2151b is formed in which a count sensor 2160 for detecting a winning game ball is accommodated. Further, below the lower case 2151, a light emitting substrate 2162 for emitting light by emitting light near the special winning opening 2153 is disposed.

  The open / close drive mechanism 2155 is composed of a solenoid 2156 horizontally provided so that the plunger 2157 points to the right, and a link member 2158 for converting linear motion of the plunger 2157 in the left-right direction into rotational motion of the winning door 2154. The link member 2158 sandwiches a rotary shaft portion 2158a inserted in a bearing hole 2150d formed on the right front of the upper case 2150 and a claw portion 2154b which protrudes rearward from the right end side of the winning door 2154 (see FIG. 118). And a locking portion 2158 d locked to the plunger 2157 of the solenoid 2156. That is, when the plunger 2157 moves leftward by energization of the solenoid 2156, the link member 2158 rotates clockwise about the rotation shaft 2158a and pushes up the hook 2154b of the winning door 2154 by the hook 2158b. Thus, it is possible to change the winning door 2154 from the closed state to the open state. In addition, when energization of the solenoid 2156 is stopped, the biasing force of a spring (not shown) causes the plunger 2157 to move rightward, and the link member 2158 rotates counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 2158a. The hook portion 2154b of the winning door 2154 can be pressed down by the hooking portion 2158c, and the winning door 2154 can be changed from the open state to the closed state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 120 and 121, the winning device unit 2100 is provided with a cover member 2168 which covers the second open / close winning device 2104. The cover member 2168 is substantially U-shaped in a side view, and is formed at a first attachment portion 2168a formed on the upper left side and to which the opening / closing drive mechanism 2126 of the second starting port 2102 is attached A second mounting portion 2168b on which the second opening and closing winning device 2104 is mounted, and a third mounting portion 2168c which is formed upright from the upper right of the upper stage and supports the rear end portion of the gate sensor 2176. In addition, a relay substrate 2164 is attached to the rear surface of the cover member 2168, and the opening / closing drive mechanism 2126 of the second start port 2102, the opening / closing drive mechanism 2136 of the first opening / closing prize device 2103, and the second opening / closing prize device 2104 Drive signals to the solenoids 2128, 2141, 2156 respectively provided, detection signals from the sensors 2137, 2160, 2166, 2176 respectively provided in the opening / closing drive mechanism 2136, the second opening / closing winning device 2104, and the gate unit 2107 Are relayed by a common board. That is, a harness (not shown) connected to the solenoids 2128, 2141, 2156 and a harness (not shown) connected to the respective sensors 2137, 2160, 2166, 2176 are disposed behind the second opening / closing winning device 2104. The relay substrate 2164 is electrically connected to a control substrate disposed outside via the relay substrate 2164.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 118, the main lens portion 2112 disposed on the rear side of the base member 2110 is formed of a transparent resin, and is formed on the plate-like portion 2111 of the base member 2110 on the front surface. A plurality of large fitting portions 2112f and a plurality of small fitting portions 2112g, which are respectively inserted from the rear side into the large window portion 2110f (see FIG. 119) and the small window portion 2110g, are formed to project forward. In addition, the rear cover member 2114 disposed on the rear side of the main lens portion 2112 has light transmissivity, and light emitting substrates 3503, 3506, 3507 provided separately from the winning device unit 2100 (the details will be described. It is possible to transmit light emitted from FIG. 162 (described later). However, as shown in FIG. 117, the back surface of the rear cover member 2114 is a portion 2114 g facing the small window portion 2110 g of the base member 2110 (that is, a portion matching the small fitting portion 2112 g of the main lens portion 2112) The light transmittance is different in the remaining portion (including the portion facing the large window portion 2110 f) 2114 f. Specifically, the portion 2114 g facing the small window portion 2110 g is transparent, but the remaining portion 2114 f has a irregular reflection surface formed by unevenness.

  As described above, according to the winning device unit 2100 of this example, the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the second opening and closing winning device 2104 are attached to the common base member 2110 and configured as one winning device unit 2100. Therefore, it becomes possible to assemble the winning device unit 2100 together with the game panel 1200, thereby facilitating the assembling operation and reducing the working time and the labor of the operator at the time of assembling. Become.

  In addition, since all the harnesses are put together in one relay board 2164, the harnesses can be wired together well and the number of harnesses drawn out from the entire winning device unit 2100 (ie, drawn out from the relay board 2164 to the outside) To reduce the number of harnesses) and to facilitate the wiring operation.

  The first open / close winning device 2103 and the second open / close winning device 2104 are different in structure from each other, and the first open / close winning device 2103 is long in the front-rear direction, that is, the game ball entrance is relatively small. The second opening and closing winning device 2104 is long in the left-right direction, that is, since the large winning opening 2153 is formed relatively large, when the large winning opening 2153 is opened, a large amount of games compared to the first opening and closing winning device 2103 The player can be given the impression that the ball can be won, and the player's expectation for the large winning opening 2153 can be enhanced. Further, since the relay substrate 2164 is attached to the rear surface side of the horizontally-long second opening and closing winning device 2104, it becomes easy to pull out the harness toward the rear of the winning device unit 2100. In addition, since the relay board 2164 is disposed using the space on the rear side of the second opening and closing winning device 2104 that is caused by the difference in depth between the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the second opening and closing winning device 2104, the winning device unit 2100 The layout space of the relay substrate 2164 can be secured without increasing the

  By the way, although the opening and closing control of the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the opening and closing control of the second opening and closing winning device 2104 are executed as providing different benefits, respectively, the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the second opening and closing winning combination When the device 2104 is attached to the common base member 2110, the two opening and closing winning devices 2103 and 2104 have a sense of unity, as if to give two types of benefits using one opening and closing winning device. It may be recognized. In other words, despite having two types of opening and closing winning devices 2103 and 2104, there is no great difference from changing the opening time and opening number of one opening and closing winning device based on the lottery result, which may reduce interest. There is.

  On the other hand, in this example, since the notch 2110d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed between the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the second opening and closing winning device 2104, a divided impression is produced, and they are respectively different. It is possible to give the player the recognition that the player is the open / close winning device. That is, although the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the second opening and closing winning device 2104 are put together in one unit, the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the second opening and closing winning device 2104 The presence can be enhanced, which in turn can suppress the decline in interest.

  In particular, since a plurality of obstacle nails K implanted in the game panel 1200 are disposed through the notch 2110 d, the rolling direction of the game ball is determined between the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the second opening and closing winning device 2104 It is possible to change the behavior of the gaming ball. Therefore, the recognition that the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the second opening and closing winning device 2104 are separate opening and closing winning devices can be further enhanced.

  In addition, since the lower game area 1100 of the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the lower game area 1100 of the second opening and closing winning device 2104 are separated by a dividing line 2110i formed on the front surface of the base member 2110, The two opening and closing winning devices 2103 and 2104 can be visually separated including the game area 1100 around each other, and the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the second opening and closing winning device 2104 are respectively separate opening and closing winning devices It can further raise the recognition that

  In addition, since the base member 2110 has a reflective surface formed on the entire front surface, it makes the entire front surface bright and brightens the lower part of the game panel 1200, and makes the entire winning device unit 2100 stand out, the first opening and closing The operations of the winning device 2103 and the second open / close winning device 2104 can be noticed.

  In addition, the winning device unit 2100 includes a main lens portion 2112 and a cover member 2114 that transmit light emitted from the rear light emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507, and a large window portion 2110f and a small portion formed in the base member 2110. It is possible to project light on the player side through the window 2110g. For this reason, the large window portion 2110 f and the small window portion 2110 g can be decorated by emitting light, and the base member 2110 can be further enhanced. In addition, since the light emitting substrates 3503, 3506, 3507 are disposed separately from the winning device unit 2100, the number of harness drawn from the winning device unit 2100 can be made the minimum necessary number, and the winning device It is possible to suppress a decrease in workability when assembling the unit 2100.

  By the way, since the main lens portion 2112 is transparent, when light is emitted from the light emitting substrates 3503, 3506, 3507, the stored items disposed behind the winning device unit 2100 are the large window portion 2110f and the small window portion 2110g. There is a possibility that it may be viewed through, which may impair the appearance. In addition, if irregular reflection surface is formed in the cover member 2114 arrange | positioned at the rear side of the main lens part 2112, although it can be made hard to recognize an accommodation thing according to this, the light quantity which passes the main lens part 2112 will fall. In particular, in the small window portion 2110 g, it becomes difficult to make it bright and it becomes inconspicuous.

  On the other hand, in the present example, the irregular reflection portion is formed in the portion 2114f which is transmitted toward the large window portion 2110f in the rear surface of the cover member 2114, but the portion 2114g which is transmitted toward the small window portion 2110g. The irregular reflection portion is not formed and is transparent. Therefore, by making the light irradiated from the light emitting substrates 3503, 3506 and 3507 diffusely reflected while transmitting to the large window portion 2110f, it is difficult to see the contents behind the winning device unit 2100, while small By transmitting the light emitted from the light emitting substrates 3503, 3506, and 3507 to the window portion 2110g without diffuse reflection, it is possible to send sufficient light to the small window portion 2110g to make it bright. In addition, since the small window portion 2110 g has a small opening area, even if the main lens portion 2112 and the cover member 2114 are transparent, it is difficult to see the contents, and even if it is visible, it is extremely difficult to grasp the appearance of the contents It becomes. Therefore, the appearance of the small window portion 2110 g is not impaired.

  In addition, since the first starting port 2101 is further provided in the base member 2110 of the winning device unit 2100, the first starting port 2101 is assembled as a component separate from the winning device unit 2100, It is possible to reduce the working time and effort when assembling to the game panel 1200. In addition, since the first starting opening 2101 can be disposed close to the first opening and closing winning device 2103, the first starting opening 2101 can be used to maintain the closed state of the first opening and closing winning device 2103, etc. And the first open / close winning device 2103 can be arranged in association with each other. In particular, since the first starting opening 2101 is integrally formed with the base member 2110, the work of assembling the first starting opening 2101 with respect to the base member 2110 is unnecessary, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In addition, since the second starting port 2102 is further provided in the base member 2110 of the winning apparatus unit 2100, the second starting port 2102 is assembled as a separate component from the winning apparatus unit 2100, It is possible to reduce the working time and effort when assembling to the game panel 1200. In addition, the second start port 2102 can be disposed close to the second opening and closing winning device 2104.

  Further, since the gate portion 2107 and the gate sensor 2176 are further provided on the base member 2110 of the winning device unit 2100, compared to the case where the gate portion 2107 is assembled as a component different from the winning device unit 2100, It is possible to reduce the working time and effort when assembling to the game panel 1200. In addition, it becomes possible to put together the harness connected to the gate sensor 2176 and the harnesses of the two opening and closing winning devices 2103 and 2104 through one opening 1200e, which makes the arrangement and wiring work of the harness complicated. Can be suppressed. In addition, since the gate portion 2107 is integrally formed with the base member 2110, the work of assembling the gate portion 2107 with respect to the base member 2110 becomes unnecessary, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  Further, the base member 2110 is provided with a guide portion 2110 h for guiding the game ball having passed through the gate portion 2107 to the second opening and closing winning device 2104 side, so when the second opening and closing winning device 2104 is opened, the gate portion It becomes easy to win the big game winning opening 2153 the gaming ball which has passed 2107. Therefore, for passing through the gate portion 2107, a sense of expectation other than the lottery can be generated. Further, since the guide portion 2110 h is integrally formed with the base member 2110, the work of assembling the guide portion 2110 h with respect to the base member 2110 is not necessary, and the structure of the guide portion 2110 h is simplified.

  Also, in the base member 2110, a fourth opening 2110e is formed between the gate 2107 and the second opening and closing winning device 2104, and the obstacle nail K implanted in the game panel 1200 is distributed through the fourth opening 2110e. Because it is provided, it is possible to change the rolling direction of the gaming ball from the gate unit 2107 to the second opening and closing winning device 2104 and make the behavior of the gaming ball notice.

  Furthermore, since the general winning opening 2105, 2106 is disposed in the base member 2110, the gaming panel 1200 can be compared to one in which the general winning opening 2105, 2106 is assembled as a separate component from the winning device unit 2100. It is possible to reduce the working time and labor when assembling. In particular, since the general winning openings 2105 and 2106 are integrally formed with the base member 2110, the work of assembling the general winning openings 2105 and 2106 with respect to the base member 2110 becomes unnecessary, and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

[2-2. Side decoration unit]
The side decoration unit 2300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 128. FIG. 128 is an exploded perspective view of the side decoration unit disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front. The side decoration unit 2300 is inserted from the front with respect to an opening 1200e formed on the left side of the opening 1200e in which the winning device unit 2100 is inserted and fixed at the lower left side from the center in the left-right direction in the game panel 1200 Above, it is fixed to the front of the game panel 1200. The side decoration unit 2300 includes a base member 2301 which is formed in an arc shape in a front view and is fixed to the game panel 1200, and a lens body 2304 disposed on the rear side of the base member 2301 and housed in the back cover 2305. Have. Further, a display sheet 2302 and a diffusion sheet 2303 are interposed between the base member 2301 and the lens body 2304.

  Specifically, the base member 2301 includes a substantially triangular effect display portion 2301 a protruding in the game area 1100 and a thin plate-like decorative portion 2301 b extended above the effect display portion 2301 a. The effect display portion 2301a has a window portion 2301c penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an accommodation portion 2301d is formed inside, and further, on the upper surface of the effect display portion 2301a, a game ball rolling on the game area 1100 is a winning device unit A guide rolling surface 2301 e for guiding toward the 2100 side is formed. Further, two openings 2301 f and two notches 2301 g are formed in the decorative portion 2301 b, and it is possible to visually recognize the lens body 2304 through these.

  On the other hand, the lens body 2304 is formed of a transparent resin, and is fitted into the accommodation portion 2301 d of the base member 2301 from the rear side to hold the display sheet 2302 and the diffusion sheet 2303, and the decorative portion 2301 b And an upper lens portion 2304b disposed on the rear side of the upper lens portion 2304b, and a lower transmitting portion 2304c inserted from the rear side into the lower opening 2301f of the base member 2301; An upper transmitting portion 2304 d which is fitted into the opening 2301 f from the rear side and which also protrudes rearward is formed, and a flat light emitting surface portion 2304 e which is fitted from the rear side into the notch 2301 g of the base member 2301.

  The back cover 2305 is formed of a light transmitting member, and includes a lower accommodation portion 2305 a for accommodating the sheet holding portion 2304 a of the lens body 2304 and an upper accommodation portion 2305 b for accommodating the upper lens portion 2304 b of the lens body 2304. Have. Further, a cylindrical insertion portion 2305c is formed in the upper housing portion 2305b, and a portion of the upper transmission portion 2304d that protrudes to the rear is fitted. A reflector 2306 is provided between the lower transmitting portion 2304c of the lens body 2304 and the back cover 2305 for efficiently illuminating the lower transmitting portion 2304c by the light irradiated to the rear surface of the back cover 2305. There is.

  A light emitting substrate 3206 (see FIG. 147) that emits light to the lower accommodation portion 2305a from behind and a light emitting substrate 3205 that irradiates light to the upper accommodation portion 2305 b from behind on the rear of the back cover 2305 (see FIG. 147). And reference) are provided, and it is possible to emit light separately. In particular, the light emitting substrate 3206 emits light to the display sheet 2302, and can emit light of a plurality of colors including blue which is at least one of three primary colors and red which is one other color of the three primary colors. Equipped with a full-color LED.

  Further, the display sheet 2302 is made of a color filter, and has a first transmitting unit and a second transmitting unit. The first transmitting means displays the first pattern by passing only the first color (specifically, red) light projected from the light emitting substrate 3206, while the second transmitting means By passing only the light of the second color (specifically, blue color) emitted from the light emitting substrate 3206, the second pattern different from the first pattern is displayed. By providing the display sheet 2302 in this manner, it is possible to change the pattern visually recognized through the window 2301 c of the base member 2301 as necessary, and it is possible to suppress the monotony of the effect. In particular, since the pattern to be displayed can be changed only by changing the color of light projected from the light emitting substrate 3206, the configuration can be extremely simplified. In addition, since the light transmitting substrate 3206 includes the first transmitting unit and the second transmitting unit by the display sheet 2302, the size of the display unit is larger than that of the display unit such as a liquid crystal display. It can be miniaturized.

  In addition, by providing the diffusion sheet 2303, light which has passed through the sheet pressing portion 2304a of the lens body 2304 can be uniformly irradiated on the entire surface of the display sheet 2302, and the first pattern and the second pattern can be clearly viewed. Becomes possible.

[2-3. Center features]
Next, the configuration of the center product 2400 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 and 129 to 134. FIG. 129 is a perspective view of the center character viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the center character disassembled and viewed from the diagonal front, and FIG. 131 is a base frame of the center character Fig. 132 (a) is an enlarged front view of the essential part of the upper left portion of the game board, and Fig. 132 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the member, the warp passage, the shelf board, and the shelf back cover. b) is a main part enlarged front view which expanded the right side central part of the game board, and FIG. 133 (a) is a cross-sectional perspective view which looked the AA cross section in FIG. 132 (a) from diagonally front, 133 (b) is a cross-sectional perspective view of the B-B cross section in FIG. 132 (b) seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 134 is a longitudinal cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the base frame member and the game panel.

  As shown in FIG. 114, the center character 2400 is fixed to the front of the game panel 1200 after being inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 1200 e formed large so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1200. It is formed in a frame shape with a size that occupies most of the game area 1100. As shown in FIGS. 129 and 131, the center accessory 2400 includes a frame-shaped base frame member 2401 and a warp passage 2402 disposed on the left side of the base frame member 2401 and communicating the outside and the inside of the base frame member 2401; A shelf plate 2403 having a stage 2403a disposed inside the lower edge of the base frame member 2401 and rolling game balls taken in via the warp passage 2402 in the left-right direction, the back and up of the stage 2403a, and the warp passage And a shelf back cover 2404 that covers the back side of 2402. In addition, as shown in FIG. 129, a right side protection member 2406 which covers the passage of the game ball located on the right side of the base frame member 2401 is disposed on the lower right side of the base frame member 2401 from the front. Further, as shown in FIG. 130, the center character 2400 is provided with a plurality of decorative bodies 2410 arranged along the inner edge of the opening window 2400a, thereby enhancing the decoration effect of the center character 2400, The concept of pachinko machine 1 is impressed. Each component will be described in detail below. Here, the base frame member 2401 corresponds to the center frame of the present invention.

  As shown in FIGS. 131 to 133, the base frame member 2401 protrudes forward (to the player) from the front of the gaming panel 1200 and the insertion portion 2401a inserted into the opening 1200c from the front of the gaming panel 1200, The partition wall portion 2401c for partitioning the gaming area 1100 and the internal space of the base frame member 2401 and the partition wall portion 2401c are formed at right angles to the partition wall portion 2401c and project radially outward from the insertion portion 2401a. And a thin plate-like flange portion 2401 b attached to the front surface. That is, the insertion portion 2401a supports the base frame member 2401 in a state where the base frame member 2401 is positioned with respect to the opening portion 1200a, and the dividing wall portion 2401c divides the internal space of the base frame member 2401 from the gaming area 1100. It prevents the game ball from entering.

  By the way, since the plurality of decorative bodies 2410 provided on the center character 2400 are disposed inside the section wall portion 2401c, the larger decorative body 2410 should be disposed as the size of the section wall portion 2401c is larger. Is possible. In other words, in order to make the decorative body 2410 appear large, it is necessary to make the radial size of the partition wall portion 2401c, that is, the size of the opening window 2400a (see FIG. 129) relatively large. However, if the base frame member 2401 is enlarged to increase the size of the opening window 2400a of the center character 2400, the area of the game area 1100 for rolling the game balls in the game panel 1200 becomes relatively narrow, and thus the game balls The behavior may be monotonous or it may be difficult to secure a space for passing the game ball.

  On the other hand, in the present example, the base frame member 2401 is formed of a transparent resin member, and the game area extension portion 2401d is provided to extend radially inward from the flange portion 2401b. That is, by arranging at least a part of the dividing wall portion 2401c at a predetermined position radially inward of the inner edge of the opening 1200e in front view, the game area 1100a expanded in front of the opening 1200e is transparent. It is formed of a member.

In order to explain in detail the configuration and operation of the game area extension part 2401d, for convenience, the following two pachinko machines are shown as pachinko machines for comparison in FIGS. 134 (b) and (c). FIG. 134 (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the upper left portion (that is, a portion corresponding to FIG. 132 (a)) of the game board 4 in this example, and FIGS. 134 (b) and (c) are comparison pachinko It is sectional drawing which shows the part corresponded to the same area | region of a machine.
First Comparative Pachinko Machine 5001: As shown in FIG. 134 (b), the size and position of each of the opening 5200a of the game panel 5200 and the flange 5401b of the base frame member 5401 are (a) It is the same as this example shown in and does not have the game area extension.
Second comparative pachinko machine 6001: As shown in FIG. 134 (c), a gaming machine in which the size and arrangement position of the dividing wall portion 6401c are the same as those of the present invention and does not include the game area expansion portion.

  First, comparing the pachinko machine 1 of the present example with the first comparison pachinko machine 5001, in the present example, by providing the gaming area extension 2401 d, the section wall 2401 c is radially inward of the inner edge of the opening 1200 e. (The lower side in FIG. 134) is disposed apart. That is, the game area 1100a is formed in front of the opening 1200e, and the game area is wider than the first comparison pachinko machine 5001 by that amount. By the way, according to this configuration, the size of the opening window 2400a surrounded by the partition wall portion 2401c is smaller than the size of the opening window 5400a of the first comparison pachinko machine 5001. However, in this example, since the partition wall portion 2401c and the game area extension portion 2401d are formed of light transmitting members, the size of the opening window 2400a is smaller than the opening window 5400a of the first comparison pachinko machine 5001. You can try not to make them feel. That is, when the entire base frame member 2401 does not transmit light, the boundary between the base frame member 2401 that does not transmit light and the open window 2400a (that is, the portion through which light passes), that is, the inner edge of the section wall portion 2401c. A portion is emphasized, and this portion is recognized as the opening window 2400a and the outer edge, but the section wall portion 2401c and the game area extension portion 2401d are formed of a light transmitting member, so that the light transmitting portion and the light transmitting portion are not transmitted. The boundary with the part can be made the boundary between the flange part 2401b and the game area extension part 2401d (that is, the inner edge part of the opening 1200e formed in the game panel 1200), and the boundary part is made to stand out. It can be recognized as the outer edge of 2400a. In addition, since light leaks from the section wall portion 2401c and the game area extension portion 2401d to the player side, it is possible to make the base frame member 2401 itself appear large. Therefore, by expanding the game area 1100, even if the size of the opening window 2400a is smaller than that of the first comparison pachinko machine 5001, it is possible to make it difficult to give a smaller impression.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 of this example is compared with the second comparative pachinko machine 6001 shown in FIG. 134 (c), the flange area 2401b of the base frame member 2401 is provided in this example by providing the game area extension part 2401d. And the opening 1200e of the game panel 1200 is expanded radially outward (upper side in FIG. 134) (compare with the flange 6401b of the base frame member 6401 shown in FIG. 134 (c) and the opening 6200a of the game panel 6200 if you did this). By the way, when the opening 1200 e of this example becomes larger than the opening 6200 a of the second comparison pachinko machine 6001 in this way, the game area 1100 on the game panel 1200 becomes relatively narrow, but in front of the opening 1200 e Since the game area 1100a is also formed on a certain game area extension part 2401d, an area equivalent to that of the second comparison pachinko machine 6001 can be secured as the entire game area. Further, in the present example, since the section wall portion 2401c and the game area extension portion 2401d are formed of light transmitting members, as described above, they are the boundaries between the light passing portion and the light not passing portion. The boundary between the flange portion 2401b and the game area extension portion 2401d (that is, the inner edge portion of the opening 1200e formed in the game panel 1200) can be highlighted and recognized as the outer edge of the opening window 2400a. In addition, since light leaks from the section wall portion 2401c and the game area extension portion 2401d to the player side, it is possible to make the base frame member 2401 itself appear large. Therefore, in this example, compared with the second comparison pachinko machine 6001, it is possible to make the opening window 2400a of the base frame member 2401 appear larger without narrowing the entire game area.

  Further, in the area shown in FIGS. 132 (a) and 133 (a) of this example, a light emitting substrate 3182 provided in the upper character product unit 3100 described later is disposed behind the game area extension 2401d. The light is irradiated toward the game area extension part 2401d. For this reason, the amount of light passing through the game area extension part 2401d increases, and the difference in brightness between the flange part 2401b where light is blocked by the game panel 1200 and the game area extension part 2401d where light is irradiated through the opening 1200e It becomes clear and can make their boundaries more noticeable. Further, since the base frame member 2401 including the game area extension part 2401d is formed of a transparent resin member, light can be allowed to pass through the entire game area extension part 2401d, and the amount of passing light can be increased. Therefore, the boundary between the flange portion 2401 b and the game area extension portion 2401 d is further emphasized and noticeable. In particular, the color of the transparent game area extension part 2401 d is light purple, and is almost the same as the color (purple) of the game panel 1200 around the base frame member 2401. For this reason, the tip of the flange 2401b also becomes inconspicuous, and the boundary between the flange portion 2401b and the game area extension 2401d can be made relatively conspicuous.

  In addition, although game area expansion part 2401d may be formed over the perimeter of base frame member 2401, in this example, it is required to change the rolling direction of a game ball complicatedly, and it is center character article 2400. 132 (refer to FIG. 132 (a) and FIG. 133 (a)) and the right play area 1100 (refer to FIG. 132 (b)) of the center character 2400 which needs to secure the rolling path of the game ball. , The game area extension part 2401d is formed only with respect to FIG. 133 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 131, the warp passage 2402 has a warp inlet 2402a opened to the outside of the base frame member 2401 and a warp outlet 2402b opened to the inside of the base frame member 2401, and has a substantially L shape in front view. It is That is, it is possible to take in the game balls rolling on the game area 1100 on the left side of the base frame member 2401 from the warp inlet 2402a and to guide it to the warp outlet 2402b.

  By the way, since the warp passage 2402 is provided in the base frame member 2401, as described above, when the partition wall portion 2401c and the game area extension portion 2401d are formed of a light transmitting member, the warp passage 2402 is present. In particular, it gives the impression that the warp passage 2402 protrudes largely toward the inside of the opening window. That is, there is a possibility that the opening window 2400a may be felt small. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the warp passage 2402 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin, the outer contour of the warp passage 2402 becomes inconspicuous, and it can be suppressed that the opening window 2400a feels small. Although the details will be described later, the warp passage 2402 is designed to be illuminated and decorated by light emitted from the rear.

  The shelf plate 2403 has a substantially arc-shaped stage 2403a for rolling the gaming balls having flowed into the base frame member 2401 through the warp passage 2402 in the left and right direction. In the stage 2403a, the rolled gaming balls are rolled. Can be made to flow from the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2403a or in the vicinity thereof to the game area 1100 above the first starting opening 2101. In particular, at the central portion of the stage 2403a, a ditch-shaped chance inlet 2403b is formed in a downward slope toward the rear, and a chance outlet 2403c penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed below the chance inlet 2403b. It is done. That is, when the momentum of the game ball passing in the left and right direction is weakened, the game ball is rolled backward along the chance entrance 2403b and sent to the chance passage 2404d formed in the shelf back cover 2404 and further the chance passage It is possible to discharge from the chance outlet 2403c through 2404d.

  The shelf rear cover 2404 includes a rear wall 2404 a covering the far side of the stage 2403 a, an upper wall 2404 b covering the upper side of the stage 2403, and a warp wall 2404 c closing the rear surface of the warp passage 2402. Further, in the rear wall portion 2404a, a chance passage 2404d for communicating the chance inlet 2403b and the chance outlet 2403c of the shelf plate 2403 is formed.

  By the way, since the shelf plate 2403 and the shelf back cover 2404 are disposed inside the lower edge of the game area extension 2401 d, when the base frame member 2401 is formed of a transparent resin as described above, the shelf plate The presence of the numeral 2403 and the shelf back cover 2404 stand out and give the impression that they are greatly projected toward the inside of the opening window 2400a. That is, there is a possibility that the opening window 2400a may be felt small. On the other hand, in this example, since the shelf board 2403 and the shelf back cover 2404 are formed of a colorless and transparent resin, the outer shell of the shelf board 2403 and the shelf rear cover 2404 becomes inconspicuous, and the opening window 2400a feels small. It can be suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, when the gaming ball rolling (falling) on the right playing area 1100 of the base frame member 2401 collides with the projection 2401e, the right side protection member 2406 is repelled to the player side And a rolling direction guiding portion 2406b extending rightward from the lower end of the protecting portion 2406a to change the rolling direction of the game ball, and formed below the rolling direction guiding portion 2406b. And a decoration attachment portion 2406c to which the lower right plating ornament 2447 is attached on the front surface. The protrusions 2401e are formed in the right game area extension 2401d, and project in the front game area 1100a, and are arranged vertically at predetermined intervals, and the right side of the center character 2400 By causing the game balls rolling on to sequentially collide with the projection 2401 e, the momentum of the rolling game balls is suppressed.

  As shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the center character 2400, as a plurality of decorative bodies 2410, decorates the upper left decorative unit 2411 disposed on the upper left of the base frame member 2401, and a warp passage 2402 disposed therebelow. A warp passage decoration unit 2412, an upper right decoration unit 2413 disposed at the upper right of the base frame member 2401, and a right decoration unit 2414 disposed below the upper right decoration unit 2412 are provided. The upper left decoration unit 2411 includes a light transmitting logo front decoration 2420 representing a predetermined character, a light diffusion sheet 2421 which is disposed behind the logo front decoration 2420 and diffuses passing light, and a light diffusion sheet 2421. It is configured to include a light-transmissive sheet presser 2422 that is supported from the rear side, and the light emitting decoration is performed by light (details will be described later) emitted from the rear side. This logo front decoration 2420 corresponds to the specific character part of the present invention, is disposed adjacent to the left side of the logo display unit 3400 described later, and is combined with a series of characters in the logo display unit 3400 to One character language (a logo indicating the model name and title of the pachinko machine 1) is formed (see FIG. 160a). A decorative lens 2423 is attached to the upper end portion of the logo front decoration 2420.

  The warp passage decoration unit 2412 includes a colorless and transparent warp lens 2426 mounted so as to cover the upper part of the warp passage 2402 from the front side, and a warp decoration 2425 mounted on the front side of the warp lens 2426. The warp decoration 2425 has a reflective surface formed on the entire surface by plating, and has a plurality of windows 2425 a where the warp lens 2426 can be partially viewed. The lower part of the warp passage 2402 is not covered by the warp decoration 2425 and is exposed. The light emission decoration of the warp passage decoration unit 2412 will be described later.

  The upper right decoration unit 2413 is disposed on the light transmitting right side base 2430 disposed on the entire right side of the base frame member 2401 and extends from the annular decoration main body 2431 a and the upper and lower portions thereof A decorative frame 2431 formed of an arc-shaped ornament 2431b, a logo lens 2432 fitted from the front side into the upper opening 2430a of the right side base 2430 and having a predetermined character embedded therein, and a rear side of the base frame member 2401 A light emitting substrate 2433 for emitting light from behind to the base 2430 and light emitted from the upper side of the light emitting substrate 2433 are efficiently radiated to the vicinity of the upper opening 2430 a (ie, a portion corresponding to the inside of the decoration body 2431 a of the decoration frame 2431) And a reflector 2434. Further, smoke ball-shaped ornaments 2435 into which a plurality of protrusions 2430 b formed on the right side base 2430 are inserted are disposed respectively above and to the right below the decorative frame 2431.

  The right side decoration unit 2414 is externally fitted from the front side to a disk-like projection 2430c formed on the lower part of the right side base 2430, and has a plating ornament 2437 plated on the surface and a rear side inside the projection 2430c. And a smoke-shaped decoration 2439 which can be arranged to be incorporated into the plating decoration 2437 and capable of producing effects such as smoke rising, and is irradiated from the light-emitting substrate 2433. It is possible to make the light emitting decoration of the protrusion 2430 c and the smoke shape decoration 2439 of the right side base 2430 by the illumination light.

  A seven-segment display 2441 is disposed on the left lower end of the front surface of the right side base 2430 so as to protrude to the left side of the right side base 2430. The 7-segment display 2441 includes a front decoration 2442 having a circular window portion 2442a, a half mirror 2443 housed in the front decoration 2442 and visible through the window portion 2442a, and light disposed behind and passing through the half mirror 2443 And a reflector 2445 having slits 2445a corresponding to segments of numerals, and disposed on the left side of the reflector 2445. The diffusion sheet 2444 diffuses the light and the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 2433 is efficiently projected toward the diffusion sheet 2444 And a red lens 2446 for projecting red light through the window of the 7-segment display 2441. That is, of the LEDs on the light emitting substrate 2433 disposed opposite to the 7-segment display 2441, the LED corresponding to the two-digit number to be displayed is selected to emit light, and the diffusion sheet 2444 is passed through the predetermined slit 2445a. It is possible to project light to the half mirror 2443 and project an image (that is, an image of numerals) of the slit 2445a on the back surface of the half mirror 2443. Further, by providing the half mirror 2443, a portion not facing the slit 2445 a and a portion facing the slit 2445 a but not irradiated with light become a reflecting surface as viewed from the player side, and the inside of the 7 segment indicator 2441 The structure is made invisible to the player.

[2-4. Back unit]
Next, the configuration of back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 135 is a perspective view of the back unit obliquely viewed from the front, and FIG. 136 is an exploded perspective view of the back unit disassembled into main component members and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. FIG. 138 is a perspective view of the upper character product unit in the unit seen obliquely from the front, and FIG. 138 is an exploded perspective view of the upper character product unit disassembled into the large unit portion and the small unit portion and seen from the oblique front, FIG. 139 is an exploded perspective view of the large unit part disassembled into main component members and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary unit in the large unit part disassembled and viewed from the oblique front FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the large-side light emission rotary unit and the small-side light emission rotary unit in the rotation unit disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 142 (a) is a small-side light emission rotary unit And its drive section in the longitudinal direction and viewed obliquely from the front FIG. 142 (b) is a perspective view of the small-side cover member as viewed obliquely from below; FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the small-side light emitting rotary part and its drive part as viewed obliquely from behind FIG. 144 is an exploded perspective view of the rotating decorative body in the small unit section disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 145 is a cross-sectional perspective view of the rotating body decorative body cut in the longitudinal direction and seen from the front FIG. 146 is an exploded perspective view of the enclosure unit of the small unit part, as viewed obliquely from the front.

  Also, FIG. 147 is a perspective view of the left-side combination unit in the back unit as viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 148 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the left-side combination unit, and FIG. Fig. 150 is an exploded perspective view of the main components disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front; Fig. 150 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the left-hand character unit disassembled and viewed from the oblique front; It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the movable decoration in a left-hand item unit, and was seen diagonally from the front.

  FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the right-side accessory unit in the back unit as viewed obliquely from the front, FIG. 153 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the right-side accessory unit, and FIG. 154 is a right-hand accessory unit Fig. 155 is an exploded perspective view of the main components disassembled and viewed from the front, and Fig. 155 is a perspective view of the movable decorative body in the right side symbol unit viewed from the rear, and Fig. 156 is a movable decoration FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the body disassembled into main component members and viewed obliquely from the front; FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the movable portion main body of the movable decorative body disassembled and viewed from the oblique front; 158 is an exploded perspective view of the movable arm in the movable decorative body disassembled and seen from the oblique front, and FIG. 159 is an exploded perspective view of the drive mechanism in the right hand piece unit disassembled and seen from the oblique front .

  FIG. 160 (a) is a perspective view of the center character provided with the logo display unit in the back unit as viewed from the lower front, FIG. 160 (b) is a cross-sectional view of FIG. FIG. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the logo display unit disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 163 is an oblique front view of the back decoration unit in the back unit. FIG. 164 is an exploded perspective view of the other components in the back unit disassembled into main component members and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 165 is an exploded view of the display unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen diagonally from the front.

  As shown in FIG. 112, FIG. 135 and FIG. 136, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200, and is mainly away from the game panel 1200 by a predetermined distance back in the back box 3001. Position-supported liquid crystal display device 1900 (not shown in FIGS. 135 and 136), an upper character object unit 3100 disposed in the upper space of the back box 3001, and a left character object disposed in the left space of the back box 3001 A unit 3200, a right side character unit 3300 arranged in the right space of the back box 3001, a logo display unit 3400 arranged below the upper side character unit 3100, and a shelf back arranged in the lower space of the back box 3001 A decoration unit 3502 is provided.

  First, the back box 3001 will be described. As shown in FIG. 164, the back box 3001 is formed in a box shape having an open front side, and is provided with a plurality of flange-like fixing portions 3001a projecting outward at the front end, and the fixing portions 3001a Is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (see FIG. 114). In the back box 3001, a rectangular opening 3001c is formed substantially at the center of the back wall 3001b, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side can be viewed through this opening 3001c. . Furthermore, in the back box 3001, mounting portions for mounting and fixing the upper character item unit 3100, the left character item unit 3200, the right character item unit 3300, the logo display unit 3400, the shelf decoration unit 3502 and the like are appropriately positioned. Is formed.

  Next, the upper service unit 3100 will be described in detail. Upper part product unit 3100 is disposed on the upper side of liquid crystal display device 1900, and the length in the horizontal direction is substantially equal to the width of display screen 1900a of liquid crystal display device 1900, and is closer to the player than display screen 1900a (ie Forwardly placed in a large push.

  As shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, the upper character service unit 3100 is roughly divided into a large unit portion 3101 and a small unit portion 3102. As shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, the large unit portion 3101 is disposed on a thin box-like base member 3110 whose upper surface is opened, a base cover 3111 which covers the upper surface of the base member 3110, and a base member 3110. The light is emitted from the rear to the rotation unit 3112, the enclosing member 3113 covering the rear half of the rotation unit 3112 from the rear side, the back side lens member 3114 disposed on the back side of the closing member 3113, and the back side lens member 3114 A light emitting substrate 3115 and a lower decorative member 3116 fixed to the base member 3110 and disposed so as to cover the lower part of the rotation unit 3112 from the front side are provided.

  The rotation unit 3112 will be described in detail based on FIGS. 139 and 140. The rotation unit 3112 includes a large-side light emission rotary unit 3120 capable of changing the light emission direction while emitting light, a small-side light emission rotary unit 3121 smaller than the large-side light emission rotary unit 3120, and a large-side light emission rotary unit 3120. A large-side cover member 3122 that covers and rotates integrally with the large-side light emission rotary unit 3120, a small-side cover member 3123 that covers the small-side light emission rotary unit 3121 and rotates integrally with the small-side light emission rotary unit 3121; A large side upper decoration member 3124 and a small side upper decoration member 3125 attached to the top of the side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123, and a large side light emission rotating portion 3120 and a small side light emission rotating portion 3121 respectively. A large side drive means 3126 and a small side drive means 3130 for applying a rotational force are provided. Here, the large side drive means 3126 and the small side drive means 3130 correspond to the drive means of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 139 to FIG. 141, the large-side light emission rotating portion 3120 is disposed in the large-side accommodation portion 3110a of the base member 3110, and a rectangular center disposed in the central substrate accommodation portion 3110c of the base member 3110. A light emitting substrate 3135, an arc-shaped peripheral light emitting substrate 3136 disposed around the central light emitting substrate 3135, a lens 3137 attached to the base member 3110 so as to cover the central light emitting substrate 3135, and a large side of the base member 3110 A rotary ring 3138 rotatably supported with a cylindrical support cylinder 3110d projecting from the rear housing 3110a as a rotation axis, and a reflecting mirror 3139 connected to the rotary ring 3138 and integrally rotated with the rotary ring 3138 And a photo sensor 3140 that detects the rotational position (origin position) of the rotational ring 3138. Here, the support cylindrical portion 3110 d corresponds to the support portion of the present invention, and the central light emitting substrate 3135 corresponds to the light emitting portion of the present invention.

  The rotary ring 3138 has a through hole 3138 a that is fitted around the support cylindrical portion 3110 d of the base member 3110 as a center, and is disposed so as to surround the central light emitting substrate 3135 disposed in the central substrate housing 3110 c. Further, three cylindrical connecting portions 3138 b for connecting the reflecting mirror 3139 are provided upright on the upper surface of the rotating ring 3138. In addition, teeth 3138 c are provided on the outer circumferential surface of the rotating ring 3138 along the circumferential direction.

  The lens 3137 has a disk-like shape and is disposed on the upper side of the rotating ring 3138. The outer diameter of the lens 3137 is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the through hole 3138 a of the rotary ring 3138. Further, a plurality of protrusions 3137a are formed on the upper surface of the lens 3137, and it is possible to converge the light emitted from the central light emitting substrate 3135 and to irradiate the light to the reflecting mirror 3139.

  The reflecting mirror 3139 has a spherical appearance with the front side and the bottom opened, and the inner surface reflects the light emitted from the central light emitting substrate 3135 through the lens 3137, that is, the light emitted from the lower side. And a reflecting surface 3139a that emits light in the horizontal direction (forward). In addition, the reflecting mirror 3139 includes three connected parts 3139 b disposed at predetermined intervals along the outer periphery, and is connected to the connecting part 3138 b of the rotating ring 3138 with a screw (not shown), It is integrally assembled to the rotating ring 3138. In addition, three columnar connecting portions 3139 c for connecting the large-side cover member 3122 are provided upright on the top and rear surface sides of the reflecting mirror 3139.

  On the other hand, the small-side light emission rotating portion 3121 is disposed in the small-side housing portion 3110 b of the base member 3110, and covers the light-emitting substrate 3142 and the light-emitting substrate 3142 disposed in the substrate housing portion 3110 f of the base member 3110. A lens 3143 attached to the base member 3110, a rotation ring 3144 rotatably supported with the lens 3143 as a rotation axis, a reflecting mirror 3145 connected to the rotation ring 3144 and integrally rotating with the rotation ring 3144, rotation And a photo sensor 3146 that detects the rotational position (origin position) of the ring 3144. Here, the light emitting substrate 3142 corresponds to the light emitting portion of the present invention, and the lens 3143 corresponds to the support portion of the present invention.

  The rotating ring 3144 has a through hole 3144 a that is fitted around the outer peripheral surface 3143 b of the lens 3143 as a center, and is disposed so as to surround the light emitting substrate 3142. In addition, a cylindrical connection portion 3144 b for connecting the reflecting mirror 3145 is provided upright on the top surface of the rotating ring 3144. In addition, teeth 3144c are provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating ring 3144 along the circumferential direction.

  The lens 3143 has a disk-like shape, and a leg 3143 c for attachment to the base member 3110 is suspended from the bottom. In addition, a plurality of protrusions 3143 a are formed on the top surface of the lens 3143 so that light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3142 can be converged and irradiated to the reflecting mirror 3145.

  The reflecting mirror 3145 has a spherical appearance with the front side and the bottom open, and reflects the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3142 through the lens 3143, that is, the light emitted from the lower side on the inner surface. It has a reflecting surface 3145a that emits light in the horizontal direction (forward). In addition, the reflecting mirror 3145 includes two connected portions 3145 b disposed at predetermined intervals along the outer periphery, and is connected to the connecting portion 3144 b of the rotating ring 3144 with a screw (not shown), It is integrally assembled to the rotating ring 3144. Further, on the top of the reflecting mirror 3145, a connection portion 3145c for connecting the small-side upper decorative member 3125 is formed.

  As shown in FIG. 139 and FIG. 140, the large side cover member 3122 is made of a semispherical light transmitting member, covers the large side light emitting rotary portion 3120 from the upper side and is screwed to the connecting portion 3139c of the reflecting mirror 3139 Not shown). Further, the small side cover member 3123 is formed of a semi-spherical light transmitting member like the large side cover member 3122 and covers the small side light emission rotating portion 3121 from the upper side and is screwed to the connection portion 3145 c of the reflecting mirror 3145 Not shown).

  By the way, since the conventional rotary lamp decoration only changes the light projection direction and can not visually recognize a dynamic change like a movable decoration, the effect content is monotonous and pale. It had become. For this reason, even if the rotating lamp decorative body is sufficient as a notification means, it is insufficient as a rendering device, and there is a risk of reducing visual interest in rendering.

  On the other hand, in this example, since the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 are connected to the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145, respectively, the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 are combined with the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145. It can be rotated integrally. Therefore, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the rotational operation of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 with the change of the light projection direction, and enhance the visual interest as a rendering device by the dynamic change. Becomes possible. In addition, since the large side drive means 3126 and the small side drive means 3130 for turning the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145 are used as motive power for rotating the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123, new The large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 can be rotated without providing any driving means, and the structure can be simple and inexpensive. Furthermore, since the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145 and the large side cover member 3122 or the small side cover member 3123 integrally rotate, light is projected from the inside of the large side cover member 3122 or the small side cover member 3123. Instead, the surface of the large side cover member 3122 or the small side cover member 3123 can be made to look as if light is emitted, and it is possible to draw more attention of the player by the light emission effect of an aspect different from the conventional one. Become.

  In the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123, the structures of the large side light emission rotating portion 3120 and the small side light emission rotating portion 3121 are not exposed through the light transmitting large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123. As such, it has a turbidity means for suppressing transparency. In addition, since the turbidity means of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 have the same structure, hereinafter, the turbidity means of the small side cover member 3123 will be described based on FIG. The description of the turbidity means is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 142, the turbidity means of the small side cover member 3123 is formed by the first uneven portion 3150 and the second uneven portion 3151 formed on the outer surface and the inner surface of the small side cover member 3123 respectively. Therefore, the transparency can be suppressed with a relatively simple configuration, and the light is dispersed by the uneven shape, so that a relatively wide range on the surface of the small-side cover member 3123 can be illuminated.

  In particular, the small-side cover member 3123 is an irradiated area 3123a where light is irradiated facing the inner surface (reflection surface 3145a) of the reflecting mirror 3145 and a non-irradiated area 3123b where light is not irradiated facing the outer surface of the reflecting mirror 3145 In the non-irradiated area 3123b, the turbidity is higher than in the irradiated area 3123a. Specifically, the first uneven portion 3150 formed on the outer surface of the small side cover member 3123 has a predetermined pattern (for example, unevenness in the vertical direction by the horizontal groove) over the entire outer surface of the small side cover member 3123 On the other hand, the second uneven portion 3151 formed on the inner surface of the small-side cover member 3123 is formed only for the non-irradiated area 3123 b and has a pattern different from the first uneven portion 3150 (for example, vertical direction Horizontal unevenness due to the grooves). That is, unevenness in the vertical direction is formed by the first uneven portion 3150 in the irradiated area 3123a, and in the non-irradiated area 3123b, latticed unevenness is formed by both the first uneven portion 3150 on the outer surface and the second uneven portion 3151 on the inner surface. It is formed.

  For this reason, in the irradiated area 3123a, the small side cover member 3123 can be made bright by increasing the light transmittance, while in the non-irradiated area 3123b, the internal structure can be reduced by decreasing the light transmittance. It can be made hard to visually recognize. Further, since the turbidity means formed on the outer surface of the small-side cover member 3123 is only the first uneven portion 3150 and is formed over the entire surface, the irradiated area 3123a and the non-irradiated area 3123b are viewed from the outside. The border with can be obscured.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 140, the large side upper decorative member 3124 is attached to the top of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side upper decorative member 3125 is attached to the top of the small side cover member 3123. . These upper decorative members 3124 and 3125 are formed of a member that does not transmit light, and the surface is plated. For this reason, the upper decorative members 3124 and 3125 can be highlighted, and the decorative properties of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 can be enhanced. Further, since the upper decorative members 3124 and 3125 are disposed at the tops of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123, that is, in the vicinity of the rotation axis, they do not block the light projection to the player side. Even if the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 rotate, the fluctuation of the upper decorative members 3124 and 3125 is kept small, and the rotation of the upper decorative members 3124 and 3125 rotates the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 It is possible to suppress that the operation is too noticeable, that is, the change in the light projection direction becomes relatively inconspicuous.

  As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the large-side drive unit 3126 for applying a rotational force to the rotary ring 3138 of the large-side light emission rotary unit 3120 includes the motor 3127 attached to the upper surface of the base cover 3111 and the base cover 3111. The inner gear 3128a is supported by the motor gear 3128 housed inside and connected to the rotational shaft of the motor 3127 and the bearing 3110e of the base member 3110, and is meshed with the motor gear 3128 And transmission gear 3129 having an outer tooth 3129b meshing with FIG. 141). That is, when the motor 3127 rotates in a predetermined direction, a rotational force is transmitted to the rotating ring 3138 via the motor gear 3128 and the transmission gear 3129, and the reflecting mirror 3139 and the large side cover member 3122 rotate together with the rotating ring 3138. It has become.

  In addition, the small-side drive means 3130 for applying a rotational force to the rotation ring 3144 of the small-side light emission rotary portion 3121 is attached to the upper surface of the base cover 3111 (see FIG. 139) as shown in FIGS. A motor 3131 and a motor gear 3132 accommodated in the base cover 3111 and connected to the rotation shaft of the motor 3131 are connected, and the teeth of the motor gear 3132 are engaged with the teeth 3144 c of the rotation ring 3144 . That is, when the motor 3131 rotates in a predetermined direction, the rotational force is transmitted to the rotating ring 3144 via the motor gear 3132, and the reflecting mirror 3145 and the small-side cover member 3123 rotate together with the rotating ring 3144. .

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 138 and FIG. 139, the enclosing member 3113 is disposed to surround the rear half of the large side cover member 3122 from the rear side, and the inner surface thereof is plated with a light reflecting surface 3113a. Is formed. That is, when the light projection direction of the light emitted from the large side cover member 3122 is directed to the rear side (that is, the opposite side to the player), the light is reflected to the player by the light reflection surface 3113 a of the enclosure member 3113 It is possible to Therefore, even when the light emitted from the large side cover member 3122 is directed to the rear side, the light is reflected from the large side cover member 3122 by the light reflecting surface 3113 a of the enclosing member 3113 being reflected to the player side. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is illuminated and to further enhance the visual interest and decoration.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 139, the back side lens member 3114 is disposed at the rear of the enclosing member 3113, and it becomes possible to guide the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3115 to a predetermined part of the enclosing member 3113. ing. Specifically, the back side lens member 3114 protrudes forward from the front surface of the support portion 3114 a supporting the enclosure member 3113 and the light emitting substrate 3115 and the front surface of the support portion 3114 a, and from the rear side to the through hole 3113 c formed in the enclosure member 3113 A rod-like light guiding portion 3114 b to be inserted is provided, and light can be emitted to the large side cover member 3122 by projecting light from the tip of the light guiding portion 3114 b. As a result, the large side cover member 3122 can be made bright and raised, and it becomes possible to draw more attention of the player.

  By the way, since the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 rotate integrally with the reflecting mirrors 3139 and 3145, the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 are supported in a floating state from the base member 3110 so as not to generate sliding resistance. However, according to this, the base member 3110 and the rotation unit 3112 may be exposed from the lower side of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123, and the appearance may be impaired. On the other hand, in this example, the lower decorative member 3116 is provided to cover the lower side of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123. The lower decorative member 3116 has an attachment portion 3116a attached to the bottom surface of the base member 3110, and a decorative portion 3116b covering the lower end outer periphery of the large side cover member 3122 and the small side cover member 3123 from the front. For this reason, exposure of the base member 3110 or the rotation unit 3112 can be prevented, and a reduction in appearance can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 138, the small unit portion 3102 is composed of a rotating body decorative body 3162 and an enclosure unit 3163 disposed on the rear side. As shown in FIGS. 144 and 145, the rotating body decorative body 3162 has a thin box-like base member 3165 whose upper surface is open, a base cover 3166 which covers the upper surface of the base member 3165 and has an opening 3166 a, and a base. A light emitting and rotating portion 3167 disposed on the member 3165 is provided. The light emission rotating portion 3167 is externally fitted to the light emitting substrate 3171 housed in the housing portion 3165 a of the base member 3165, the lens 3168 attached to the base member 3165 so as to cover the light emitting substrate 3171 from above, and the lens 3168 And a reflecting mirror 3170 having a reflecting surface 3170a connected to the upper surface of the rotating ring 3169 and horizontally reflecting the light emitted from below through the lens 3168. There is. In addition, the rotating body decorative body 3162 covers the lens 3168 and the reflecting mirror 3170 of the light emitting and rotating unit 3167 from the upper side, and is attached to the cover member 3172 connected to the connecting portion 3170 b of the reflecting mirror 3170 and the top of the cover member 3172 And the lower decorative member 3174 attached to the bottom surface of the base member 3165 and covering the lower part of the light emission rotating portion 3167 from the front side, and driving means 3175 for applying a rotational force to the light emission rotating portion 3167 And a photo sensor 3178 for detecting the rotational position (origin position) of the rotational ring 3169. The driving means 3175 is disposed in the motor 3176 attached to the bottom surface of the base member 3165 from the lower side, the left accommodation portion 3165 b of the base member 3165, and a motor gear 3177 connected to the rotation shaft of the motor 3176. And consists of The motor gear 3177 is in mesh with a tooth 3169 a formed on the outer peripheral surface of the rotating ring 3169, and can transmit the rotational force of the motor 3176 to the rotating ring 3169. In addition, since each of these structures are the same as each structure in the large unit part 3101, detailed description is abbreviate | omitted here. Here, the lens 3168 corresponds to the support portion of the present invention, and the light emitting substrate 3171 corresponds to the light emitting portion of the present invention.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 146, the enclosing unit 3163 is composed of an enclosing member 3180 and a back side lens member 3181 and a light emitting substrate 3182 disposed on the rear side. The enclosing member 3180 is a spherical left concave portion 3180a and a right concave portion respectively covering the cover member 3172 (see FIG. 145) of the light emitting and rotating portion 3167 and the small side cover member 3123 of the small side light emitting and rotating portion 3121 (see FIG. 139). A light reflecting surface is formed on the left concave portion 3180 a and the right concave portion 3180 b by plating. A plurality of through holes 3180c penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed in the left concave portion 3180a and the right concave portion 3180b. On the other hand, the back side lens member 3181 is provided with a plurality of columnar light guiding portions 3181 a which are inserted into the through holes 3180 c of the enclosing member 3180 from the rear side. That is, it is possible to emit light to the cover member 3172 and the small-side cover member 3123 by projecting the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3182 from the tip of the light guiding portion 3181 a.

  As described above, in this example, by providing a plurality of cover members 3122, 1233, and 317 having substantially the same external shape and different sizes, powerful effects can be provided, and the contents of notification information It is possible to associate (for example, the height of the degree of expectation) with the sizes of the cover members 3122, 1233, and 3172 to be rotated, and it is possible to further enhance the rendering effect in the upper character service unit 3100.

  In addition, the winning device unit 2100 of the present example has stop control means for stopping the rotation at a predetermined position after rotating the cover members 3122, 1233, 1722, and the cover members 3122, 312, 3172. The irradiation area is stopped at a position (a position shown in FIG. 142 (a)) facing the player as an origin position. Therefore, when the light emitting operation is started simultaneously with the rotating operation of the cover members 3122, 1233, 3172 and the reflecting mirror 3139, 3145, 3170, or even when the light emitting operation is started earlier than the rotating operation, the light is thrown toward the player. The effect can be started from a lighted state, that is, a state in which the user feels the brightest, which in turn makes it possible to increase the stimulus to the player and to increase the impact.

  Next, the left side item unit 3200 will be described. The left-hand item unit 3200 is provided with a movable decorative body 3202, and as shown in FIGS. 108 and 148 (a), at least most of the movable decorative body 3202 is shielded by the game panel 1200 and the center character 2400. As shown in FIGS. 166 and 148 (b), it is possible to move between a standby position and an effect position where at least a large part can be visually recognized through the opening window 2400a of the center character 2400.

  As shown in FIGS. 147 and 149, the left side product unit 3200 includes a base plate 3201, a movable decorative body 3202 movably supported relative to the base plate 3201, and a movable decorative body 3202 mounted on the base plate 3201. And a drive unit cover 3204 that covers the base plate 3201 from the front side. In addition, two light emitting substrates 3205 and 3206 for irradiating light to the above-mentioned side decoration unit 2300 (see FIG. 128) are attached to the front surface of the drive unit cover 3204.

  As shown in FIG. 150 and FIG. 151, the movable decorative body 3202 has a movable portion decoration 3210 whose upper side simulates the shape of a lamp and a lower side imitates a shape of a pedestal, and a lens disposed on the rear side of the movable portion decoration 3210 A back cover 3213 that covers the rear surface in a state in which the lens member 3211 and the light emitting substrate 3212 are accommodated between the member 3211, the light emitting substrate 3212 that irradiates light to the lens member 3211 from behind, and the movable member decoration 3210; A gear 3214 attached from the rear side is provided at the lower part of 3210.

  The movable part decoration 3210 has a through hole 3210a at the bottom, which matches the center hole 3214a formed at the rotation center of the gear 3214, and one large window 3210b and three small windows 3210c into which the lens member 3211 is inserted. Is formed penetrating in the front-rear direction. The large window portion 3210 b is disposed at the central portion of the lamp shape formed on the upper side, and the small window portions 3210 c are arranged vertically at the right end portion of the pedestal shape formed on the lower side. In addition, a screw hole P is formed on the lower left side of the movable portion decoration 3210.

  The lens member 3211 is formed of a light transmitting member, and has a disk-shaped first light emitting portion 3220 inserted into the large window portion 3210 b of the movable portion decoration 3210 and three second light emitting portions inserted into the small window portions 3210 c. And a light emitting unit 3221. In addition, the third light emitting portion 3222 is provided on the lens member 3211 at a position projecting from the tip of the lamp shaped portion of the movable portion decoration 3210 so that the third light emitting portion 3222 is viewed in the state of protruding from the tip of the movable portion decoration 3210 It has become.

  The light emitting substrate 3212 irradiates light to the lens member 3211 from behind, and is disposed at a position facing the first light emitting unit 3220, the second light emitting unit 3221, and the third light emitting unit 3222 of the lens member 3211. A plurality of light emitting diodes 3212a, 3212b, 3212c are mounted.

  In the back cover 3213, a through hole 3213a is formed in a portion corresponding to the screw hole P of the movable portion decoration 3210, and the bush 3215 is inserted from the rear. That is, as shown in FIG. 150, while the movable decorative body 3202 is disposed on the front side of the base plate 3201, the bush 3215 is inserted from the rear into the arc-shaped guide hole 3201a formed on the top of the base plate 3201; The bush 3215 is attached to the back surface of the movable decorative body 3202 by bringing the bush 3215 into contact with the screw hole P through the through hole 3213a of the back cover 3213 and further fastening the bush 3215 with a screw (not shown). . Here, since the diameter of the flange 3215a of the bush 3215 is larger than the groove width of the guide hole 3201a, the movable decorative body 3202 is restricted by the bush 3215 in the moving direction and slides along the guide hole 3201a. There is. The guide hole 3201a is formed along an arc centered on a bearing portion 3201b described later.

  The gear 3214 is fan-shaped, and a center hole 3214 a is externally fitted to an annular bearing portion 3201 b formed in the base plate 3201. That is, it is possible to rotate around the bearing portion 3201b. Further, a tooth portion 3214 b is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the gear 3214, and is meshed with the transmission gear 3232 of the drive mechanism 3203. The base plate 3201 is also formed with a pair of stoppers 3201g for limiting the rotation range of the gear 3214 when the gear 3214 abuts. In addition, a detection piece 3214 c for detecting an origin position of the gear 3214 by the photosensor 3233 is formed at an outer peripheral end of the gear 3214.

  Drive mechanism 3203 is a motor 3230 attached to the rear surface of base plate 3201 with rotation shaft 3230a inserted through through hole 3201d of base plate 3201, and motor gear 3231 connected to rotation shaft 3230a from the front side of base plate 3201. A transmission gear 3232 is supported by a rotating shaft portion 3201c formed slightly lower left than the central portion of the base plate 3201 and is engaged with a motor gear 3231 and a gear 3214. That is, when the motor 3230 operates, the rotational force is transmitted to the gear 3214 through the motor gear 3231 and the transmission gear 3232, and the gear 3214 and the movable decorative body 3202 rotate around the bearing portion 3201 b.

  By the way, at the standby position, the movable decorative body 3202 of the left side character unit 3200 is disposed behind the center character 2400 (see FIG. 108), particularly behind the warp passage 2402, and can not be seen from the player side, It becomes difficult to see. On the other hand, although the details of the warp passage 2402 are as described above, since the general warp passage is incorporated in the center character 2400 in a hidden state, even if the game ball is taken into the warp passage, It was not possible to notice that, and in turn could not draw attention to the warp passage. Therefore, if the warp passage is formed of a transparent member, the inside of the warp passage can be visually recognized, and it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the game ball has been taken into the warp passage. Furthermore, it is possible to make the warp passage conspicuous if the transparent warp passage is irradiated with light from behind to make the warp passage emit light. That is, although formed of a transparent member, the warp passage can be made to have a decorativeness and presence.

  However, in order to adopt the above configuration, it is necessary to provide a light emitting means behind the warp passage, which complicates the configuration around the warp passage and increases the manufacturing cost. Further, in a gaming machine provided with a movable character (for example, left character unit 3200) in the back unit, the space on the rear side of the center character 2400 is used as a storage space for the character, so It may be difficult to secure.

  On the other hand, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 148 (a), the movable decorative body 3202 at the standby position is disposed behind the warp passage 2402, and the first light emitting portion 3220 provided in the movable decorative body 3202 The second light emitting portion 3221 emits light not only when the movable decorative body 3202 is at the effect position (see FIG. 148B) but also when it is at the standby position (see FIG. 148A). Therefore, the light emitted from the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 when the movable decorative body 3202 is in the standby position is irradiated to the rear surface of the warp passage 2402 and is transmitted to the player through the transparent warp passage 2402 It is projected. That is, the light emitted from the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 enables the warp passage 2402 to emit light and be decorated. Thus, by using the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 at the standby position, the warp passage 2402 can be illuminated without providing a dedicated light emitting means, and the warp passage 2402 is simple and inexpensive. Can be enhanced in

  In particular, in this example, since the warp passage 2402 is formed of a transparent member, it is possible to make the game ball passing through the warp passage 2402 more clearly visible. In addition, the transmittance of light in the warp passage 2402 is increased, and even if the sizes of the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 are relatively small, or the light intensities of the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 are compared. Even if the distance is too low, the light emitted from the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 can make the warp passage 2402 bright.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, a warp decoration 2425 having at least one window 2425a and not transmitting light is provided on the front side of the warp passage 2402 so as to cover a part of the warp passage 2402. It is done. That is, in the portion where the warp decoration 2425 is provided, the light passing through the warp passage 2402 is projected to the player side through the window portion 2425a. Therefore, the light emitting decoration by the warp passage 2402 and the decoration by the warp decoration 2425 can be combined, and the decorative property can be further enhanced. In addition, by providing the warp decoration 2425, a portion that can be viewed in the warp passage 2402 is limited, so that it is difficult to grasp the appearance of the movable decorative body 3202. That is, visual recognition of the movable decorative body 3202 as the background of the warp passage 2402 can be suppressed. In addition, when the movable decorative body 3202 is in the standby position, the window 2425a of the warp decoration 2425 and the first light emitting portion 3220 of the movable decorative body 3202 overlap in the front-rear direction. For this reason, it is possible to efficiently light up a part of the warp passage 2402 which is visible through the window 2425a.

  Further, three second light emitting parts 3221 are provided, and they are arranged in a line along the warp passage 2402 when the movable decorative body 3202 is in the standby position (see FIG. 148 (a)). ). Therefore, even if the movable decorative body 3202 and the warp passage 2402 are disposed close to each other, the entire warp passage 2402 can be brightly and uniformly lighted. In addition, since the light reflecting portion is formed on the front surface of the movable decorative body 3202, the portion other than the first light emitting portion 3220 and the second light emitting portion 3221, that is, the portion which does not emit light, can be made to glow. This can further enhance the decorativeness of the warp passage 2402.

  Moreover, in this example, when the movable decorative body 3202 moves from the standby position to the rendering position or moves from the rendering position to the standby position, the light emission state of the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 is temporarily interrupted. Control, i.e., once turned off. For this reason, the continuity between the light emission control at the standby position and the light emission control at the rendering position is lost, and the first light emitting portion 3220 and the second light emitting portion 3221 of the movable decorative body 3202 as light emitting means for irradiating the warp passage 2402 with light. It can be made difficult for the player to recognize that he is using. Therefore, it is possible to prevent raising the unnaturalness or raising the suspicion of "If it does not move due to a failure" against the light emission of the movable decorative body 3202 at the standby position.

  By the way, the movable decorative body 3202 has a constantly exposed portion which can be visually recognized through the opening window 2400a of the center piece 2400 even at the standby position. A third light emitting portion 3222 is also provided as a light emitting decoration portion also at this constantly exposed portion, and it is possible to perform light emitting decoration at the time of rendering operation. However, in the present example, the light emission limiting means is provided, and when the movable decorative body 3202 is in the standby position, the light emission of the third light emitting portion 3222 always arranged at the exposed portion is prohibited. That is, the third light emitting portion 3222, which is not located behind the warp passage 2402 at the standby position and can be directly viewed from the player side, is maintained in the unlit state without emitting light. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize that the movable decorative body 3202 is used as light emitting means for irradiating the warp passage 2402 with light, and to avoid raising unnaturalness or suspicion. it can.

  Next, the right side item unit 3300 will be described. The right-hand item unit 3300 includes a movable decorative body 3302, and as shown in FIGS. 108 and 153 (a), at least most of the movable decorative body 3202 is shielded by the game panel 1200 and the center character 2400. As shown in FIGS. 167 and 153 (b), it is possible to move between the standby position and the rendering position where at least a large part can be visually recognized through the opening window 2400a of the center character 2400.

  As shown in FIGS. 152 and 154, the right side accessory unit 3300 is disposed on a base member 3301 having a U-shaped front view, a movable decorative body 3302 movably supported relative to the base member 3301, and the base member 3301. And a drive mechanism 3303 for operating the movable decorative body 3302. A gear cover 3304 that covers the drive mechanism 3303 from the front side is provided on the upper front surface of the base member 3301, and a lower cover 3305 and a light emitting substrate 3306 are provided on the lower front surface of the base member 3301.

  As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the movable decorative body 3302 includes a movable portion main body 3310 that simulates the body and face of a character, and a movable arm portion 3311 that simulates an arm of a character. It is possible to rotate the movable arm 3311 with respect to this. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 156 and 157, the movable portion main body 3310 includes a light transmitting character base 3320, a body 3321 attached to the front side of the character base 3320, and a body 3321. A face 3322 attached to the upper attachment portion 3321b from the front side, and a light emitting substrate 3323 disposed on the rear side of the character base 3320 and irradiating the character base 3320 with light from the rear, the body 3321 and the face It is possible to make the light emission decoration of the portion 3322 possible.

  On the front right side of the character base 3320, there is provided a bearing portion 3320a that protrudes forward and is inserted into the opening 3321a of the body 3321. A central bush 3326 is inserted into the bearing portion 3320a from the front side. Further, an upper sliding portion 3320b having an L-shaped longitudinal section is formed at the upper end of the character base 3320, and the upper sliding portion 3320b is a guide formed on the back surface of the upper cover 3345 (see FIG. 159) described later. (Not shown), and a projection 3320d that protrudes rearward from the upper sliding portion 3320b is inserted into a guide groove 3301e (see FIG. 159) formed in the upper portion of the base member 3301. Thus, the upper end of the character base 3320 is slidably supported along the guide groove 3301e. A plate-like slide rib 3324 is attached to the rear surface of the upper sliding portion 3320b, and stable sliding is possible by bringing it into contact with the wall surface 3301b around the guide groove 3301e.

  In addition, a lower sliding portion 3320c having an L-shaped cross section is formed at the lower end of the character base 3320, and is engaged with a guiding portion (not shown) formed on the back surface of the lower cover 3305 (see FIG. 154). And by inserting a pair of bushes 3325 respectively connected to both ends of the rear surface of the lower sliding portion 3320c into two guide grooves 3301i and 3301h (see FIG. 159) formed in the lower portion of the base member 3301. The lower end of the character base 3320 is slidably supported along the guide grooves 3301i and 3301h. In the base member 3301, the partition wall 3301j forming the guide grooves 3301i and 3301h protrudes forward, and the lower surface of the partition wall 3301j is a panel presser 3327 attached to the center of the lower sliding portion 3320c in the left-right direction. By sliding contact, stable sliding is possible.

  As shown in FIGS. 156 and 158, the movable arm 3311 includes an armrest 3330, a light transmitting lens portion 3331 disposed on the rear side, and a light emitting substrate 3332 for irradiating the lens portion 3331 with light from behind. It consists of In the arm decoration 3330, two windows 3330a are provided, and a light emitting unit 3331b formed in the lens unit 3331 is inserted from the rear side. Further, on the rear surface of the lens portion 3331 corresponding to the bearing portion 3320 a, two protruding portions 3331 b protruding rearward are formed, and these protruding portions 3331 b are arranged on the rear side of the movable portion main body 3310 It is inserted into the through hole 3313 a of the member 3313 and connected to the bush 3314. That is, as shown in FIG. 155, the movable arm 3311 is supported by the stopper 3313, and the two bushes 3314 project rearward from the back surface of the stopper 3313.

  As shown in FIGS. 154 and 159, the drive mechanism 3303 has a motor 3340 attached to the upper rear surface of the base member 3301 and a rotation shaft 3340a of the motor 3340 inserted through a through hole 3301f formed in the base member 3301. A motor gear 3341 connected from the front side of the base member 3301 and a movable link 3342 connected to a rotary shaft portion 3301 g formed on the base member 3301 via a bush 3343 and rotatably supported about the rotary shaft portion 3301 g And a photo sensor 3346 that detects that the pivoting position of the movable link 3342 has reached the home position.

  The movable link 3342 is extended in a centrifugal direction from a central hole 3342b externally fitted to the bush 3343, a gear portion 3342c formed on a circular arc centered on the central hole 3342b and meshed with the motor gear 3341, and a central hole 3342b And a connecting portion 3342 d connected to a pair of bushes 3314 (see FIG. 155) formed at the tip of the arm 3342 a and protruding from the back surface of the movable arm 3311. .

  According to this, when the rotational force of the motor 3340 is transmitted to the movable link 3342 via the motor gear 3341, the movable link 3342 rotates around the center hole 3342b, and from the state shown in FIG. 153 (a) It changes to the state shown in FIG. 153 (b). At this time, the pair of bushes 3314 slide in the linear guide groove 3342e formed in the connecting portion 3342d, and the inclination of the guide groove 3342e changes with the rotation of the movable link 3342 in the clockwise direction. Thus, the movable arm 3311 rotates clockwise. On the other hand, the movable portion main body 3310 slides along the arc-shaped guide groove 3301e on the upper end side and slides along the arc-shaped guide grooves 3301i and 3301h on the lower end side, as shown in FIG. As the center of rotation is located below the accessory unit 3300, the upper side fluctuates largely. For this reason, the movable decorative body 3302 performs an operation to push the body forward while raising the fist to the height of the shoulder like a guts pose, greatly enhancing the dynamic feeling and the realism of the character, It can enhance interest. In particular, since such a movement is performed by one movable link 3342, the configuration of the drive mechanism 3303 can be made simple and inexpensive.

  A pair of stoppers 3345 a is provided on the front surface of the upper cover 3345, and the rotation range of the movable link 3342 is restricted by contacting the arms 3342 a of the movable link 3342. Further, a spacer 3344 is provided on the rear side of the arm 3342a, and the distance between the arm 3342a and the base member 3301 is kept constant.

  Next, logo display unit 3400 will be described. As shown in FIG. 160, the logo display unit 3400 is visible through the opening window 2400a of the center accessory 2400 and is disposed below the upper accessory unit 3100 (see FIG. 135). Logo display unit 3400 has a plurality of three-dimensionally shaped character portions (first character portion 3400a to sixth character portion 3400f), and a logo indicating a model name, a title name, etc. is to be displayed. ing. Explaining in detail, as shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, the logo display unit 3400 includes, in order from the left, the first character portion 3400a, the second character portion 3400b, the third character portion 3400c, the fourth character portion 3400d, and the fifth character. A horizontally long logo decoration portion 3401 having a portion 3400e and a sixth character portion 3400f is configured. In addition, the logo decoration portion 3401 is arranged to be pushed out to the player side, and as shown in FIG. 160 (a), grasping the protrusion amount of the logo decoration portion 3401 by looking up the logo decoration portion 3401 from the lower side. Is possible. Here, the logo display unit 3400 corresponds to the character decoration of the present invention, and the logo decoration portion 3401 corresponds to the character decoration of the present invention.

  By the way, it is difficult to give a three-dimensional impression even if the front side is configured to protrude toward the player side if the entire front side is flatly formed like a generally known character decorative body, As a result, the player could not have a great impact. In addition, the character part displayed by the character decoration is a design like a logo, and when adjacent characters are close to each other, the division between the character parts becomes unclear and each character It was difficult to grasp the appearance of the characters accurately.

  On the other hand, in the logo display unit 3400 of this example, the amount of forward protrusion (push-out amount) in the logo decoration portion 3401 is different for each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f. For this reason, it becomes possible to capture the logo decoration part 3401 in three dimensions for every character part 3400a-3400f, and it becomes possible to improve the three-dimensional effect of the logo decoration part 3401. Further, since the front face of the logo decoration portion 3401 is formed in a step shape, the division of each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f becomes clear, and the appearance of each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f can be accurately grasped It becomes. Furthermore, it is possible to evoke an image in which the entire character part jumps out to the player side with the character part 3400a on the left end side as the head, and the impact given to the player can be enhanced by the powerful decoration.

  In the logo decoration portion 3401, overlapping portions 3400w (see FIG. 161) are provided between adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f, and parts of the respective character portions 3400a to 3400f overlap in the front-rear direction. There is. For this reason, it becomes possible to arrange several character parts 3400a-3400f in block form, and to intensify a sense of unity. Further, in the overlapping portion 3400 w, since the larger character portion (character portion on the left side) of the protrusion amount is extended, which is pushed to the player side between the adjacent character portions 3400 a to 3400 f It becomes possible to grasp also from the front shape of each character part 3400a-3400f.

  Further, the logo decorative portion 3401 is different not only in the amount of forward projection but also in the size (area of the front surface) of the respective character portions 3400a to 3400f, and the front surface gradually increases from the right end toward the left end. It is formed to be large. That is, the size of the characters is larger as the character part is pushed to the player side. Therefore, perspective can be generated depending on the size of the character portions 3400a to 3400f, and the difference in level between adjacent character portions 3400a to 3400f can be felt larger than in actuality, and a three-dimensional impression can be further enhanced. .

  Further, the protrusion amount of the logo decoration portion 3401 is smallest at the sixth character portion 3400f corresponding to the last character, and largest at the first character portion 3400a corresponding to the first character. In other words, among the plurality of character parts 3400a to 3400f, the character part that most attracts the player's attention, that is, the most prominent first character part 3400a, is the first character. Therefore, the player can naturally grasp the character language (model name, title name, etc.) consisting of a series of characters by visually recognizing the character portions 3400a to 3400f one by one in the order of drawing attention. Become.

  By the way, as described above, in the case where the logo display unit 3400 is disposed on the rear side of the center character 2400, the logo decoration 3401 is viewed through the opening window 2400a of the center character 2400. The entire size is a size that fits into the opening window 2400a when viewed from the player side. Therefore, even if the amount of protrusion is changed among the character parts 3400a to 3400f, the pushing toward the player side is insufficient, which may cause a lack of force. In particular, when the number of the character parts 3400a to 3400f included in the logo decoration part 3401 is relatively large, the size of each of the character parts 3400a to 3400f becomes small, giving a sense of materiality.

  On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. 160, the logo front decoration 2420 (described above based on FIG. 130) is attached to the front upper left side of the center character 2400, and the logo front decoration 2420 is the logo decoration It is disposed adjacent to the left end side of the portion 3401. One character language (model name, title name, etc.) is formed by combining the logo front decoration 2420 and a series of character parts 3400 a to 3400 f in the logo decoration part 3401. Therefore, the character language can be displayed by protruding the opening window 2400a of the center character 2400, and the three-dimensional effect and the force can be further enhanced.

  Further, as described above, the center character 2400 is provided with the upper right decoration unit 2413, and the right end side of the logo decoration portion 3401 is located behind the upper right decoration unit 2413. For this reason, the right end side of the logo decoration portion 3401 can give the impression of being disposed further rearward, and thus the push-out degree of the logo front decoration 2420 can be made relatively large. Here, the upper right decoration unit 2413 corresponds to the decoration member of the present invention.

  In particular, since the amount of protrusion of the upper right decoration unit 2413 is substantially equal to the amount of protrusion of the logo front decoration 2420, the portion with the smallest amount of protrusion between the sixth character portion 3400f at one end and the upper right decoration unit 2413 As a result, the depth of the sixth character portion 3400 f can be greatly increased, because the portion suddenly changes to the portion where the amount of protrusion is the largest.

  Further, as described above, since the logo lens 2432 inscribed in the character is also provided in the upper right decoration unit 2413, the plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration portion 3401 are associated with the upper right decoration unit 2413, It can give the impression that these are composed of one unit. Therefore, the level difference between the sixth character portion 3400 f and the upper right decoration unit 2413 can be emphasized to further enhance the overall three-dimensional effect. Here, the logo lens 2432 corresponds to the decorative character portion of the present invention.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 110, since the upper character object unit 3100 visible through the opening window 2400a of the center character 2400 is provided on the upper side of the logo display unit 3400, these are integrally visible. Thus, it is possible to give the logo display unit 3400 a dynamic feeling, and it is possible to make a more powerful decoration. In addition, a three-dimensional effect can be generated in the upper character object unit 3100 and the effect area thereof by the three-dimensionally shaped logo decoration portion 3401. Here, the upper character item unit 3100 corresponds to the movable decorative body of the present invention.

  In particular, in upper part product unit 3100, a plurality of decorative parts having the same or similar appearance shape (specifically, large-side light emission rotating part 3120, small-side light emission rotating part 3121, rotating body decorative body shown in FIG. Since 3162) is arranged along the direction in which the character portions 3400a to 3400f are arranged, it is possible to further enhance the sense of unity between the upper character product unit 3100 and the logo display unit 3400 and to give a large impact. In addition, the larger the protrusion amount of the character parts 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration part 3401, the smaller the size of the upper decoration part (large side light emission rotating part 3120, small side light emission rotating part 3121, rotating body decoration 3162) Since the character parts 3400a to 3400f are all equal in size (the size of the front face), they are displayed relatively large as the first character part 3400a on the left end by visually recognizing together with these decorative parts. This makes it possible to make the level difference between the character parts 3400a to 3400f adjacent to each other smaller than the actual size.

  By the way, when arranging a plurality of decorative parts (large-side light emitting and rotating part 3120, small-side light emitting and rotating part 3121 and rotating-body decorative body 3162) different in size from each other in this manner, their centers are aligned in the horizontal direction In the side-by-side arrangement, the smaller the decorative portion (rotary body decorative body 3162), the smaller the amount of forward projection. In other words, the amount of protrusion of the plurality of decorative parts gradually decreases from the right end toward the left end, and the opposite direction to the shape of the logo decorative part 3401 (that is, the shape in which the amount of forward protrusion gradually increases) In the form of Therefore, according to this, there is a possibility that the sense of unity between the logo display unit 3400 and the upper character product unit 3100 may be lost.

  On the other hand, the decorative portions (large-side light emission rotary portion 3120, small-side light emission rotary portion 3121, and rotary body decorative body 3162) of this example are arranged so that the positions of the front ends in the front-rear direction become equal to each other, Therefore, the sense of incongruity is eliminated between the logo display unit 3400 and the upper character service unit 3100, and the unit can be recognized as an integral unit.

  In addition, as described above, the cover member (specifically, as shown in FIG. 139, etc., the large side of each of the decorative portions (the large side light emitting and rotating portion 3120, the small side light emitting and rotating portion 3121 and the rotating body decorative portion 3162). Since the cover member 3122, the small-side cover member 3123, and the cover member 3172 rotate, the depth of the logo display unit 3400 can be made extremely large. In particular, a cover member (large side cover member 3122, small side cover member 3123, cover member 3172) on the rear side of the decorative body (large side light emission rotating portion 3120, small side light emission rotating portion 3121, rotating body decorative body 3162) Because the enclosing members 3113 and 3180 surrounding the rear side from the rear side are provided, the space behind the decorative portion (the large side light emitting and rotating portion 3120, the small side light emitting and rotating portion 3121 and the rotating body decorative body 3162) It becomes possible to impress the size of the depth direction on the logo decoration portion 3401 of the logo display unit 3400 disposed on the lower side thereof.

  Furthermore, since the logo display unit 3400 of this example is disposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect image displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the three-dimensional logo decoration portion 3401 It piles up in the direction and is recognized visually. Therefore, while making the logo decoration part 3401 conspicuous, the three-dimensional effect of the logo decoration part 3401 can further be heightened.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 162, the logo display unit 3400 of this example is disposed behind the logo decoration 3401 with the light diffusion sheet 3403 disposed behind the logo decoration 3401 and the light diffusion sheet 3403. And a left light emitting substrate 3405 and a right light emitting substrate 3406 for irradiating the light diffusion sheet 3403 with light from the rear through the sheet holder 3404. Further, a horizontally long rectangular upper window 3401 b penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided on the upper right side of the logo decoration portion 3401, and a lens-shaped logo portion 3402 is fitted from the front. Here, the left side light emitting substrate 3405 and the right side light emitting substrate 3406 correspond to the light emitting means of the present invention.

  In addition, the sheet presser 3404 includes a character frame portion 3404a corresponding to the logo decoration portion 3401, a window frame portion 3404b corresponding to the upper window 3401b, and a support portion 3404c corresponding to the upper left decoration unit 2411 (see FIG. 130). The light emitted from the left side light emitting substrate 3405 and the right side light emitting substrate 3406 is efficiently irradiated to the rear surface of the light diffusion sheet 3403, the lens shaped logo portion 3402, and the light diffusion sheet 2421 (see FIG. 130). It has become so. As described above, since the logo decoration portion 3401 is decorated to emit light by the light emitted from the left side light emitting substrate 3405 and the right side light emitting substrate 3406, the logo display unit 3400 can be made more conspicuous. In particular, since light is diffused by the light diffusion sheet 3403, each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f can be illuminated without unevenness, and although it is flat, it appears that there is a difference in level due to light and dark, that is, It can prevent that the level | step difference of adjacent character part 3400a-3400f becomes relatively inconspicuous.

  In particular, in the left side light emitting substrate 3405 and the right side light emitting substrate 3406, by separately controlling the plurality of light emitting sources (LEDs), it is possible to cause the plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f to emit light separately. For this reason, it becomes possible to attract the attention of the player as well as the division of each character portion 3400a to 3400f becomes clearer. In particular, it is possible to light each of the character parts 3400a to 3400f in order from the first character part 3400a on the left end side to the sixth character part 3400f on the right end side, according to this, the respective character parts 3400a to The order in which 3400 f should be grasped (that is, the order of reading) is further clarified, and it is possible to reliably impress the player with the concept and the like of the pachinko machine 1.

  Next, the shelf back decoration unit 3502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 163, the shelf back decoration unit 3502 is disposed behind the transparent shelf back cover 2404 in the center article 2400 (see FIG. 129), and is visible through the shelf back cover 2404. There is. Shelf back decoration unit 3502 includes a base member 3530, an annular large frame portion 3531a attached to central opening 3530a of base member 3530, and left and right recessed portions 3530b of base member 3530 extending outward from both left and right sides. , 3530c, and a decorative frame 3531 consisting of small-frame contiguous portions 3531b attached respectively. Further, the shelf back decoration unit 3502 is inserted into the jewel-shaped decorative portion 3532 fitted in the large frame portion 3531a from the back side of the decorative frame 3531 and the small frame continuation portion 3531b and performs display according to the number of times of big hit lottery The left side holding lens 3534 and the right side holding lens 3535, the diffusion lens 3533 arranged on the rear side of the gemstone decoration 3532, and the rear side of the base member 3530, the gemstone decoration 3532 through the base member 3530, the left holding The lens 3534 and the right side holding lens 3535 are provided with a light emitting substrate 3536 for irradiating light. A reflector 3537 is disposed between the light emitting substrate 3536 and the depressed portion 3530 b of the base member 3530 so that the left storage lens 3534 can be efficiently irradiated with the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 3536. ing.

  The upper character unit 3100, the left character unit 3200, the right character unit 3300, the logo display unit 3400, and the shelf decoration unit 3502 housed in the back box 3001 have been described in detail above, but they are shown in FIG. As described above, the ball guiding unit 3501 is further accommodated in the lower portion in the back box 3001, and the left relay substrate 3508 is accommodated in the upper left side in the back box 3001. Further, on the rear surface of the back box 3001, a display unit 3511 having a lower relay substrate 3509, a right relay substrate 3510, and a liquid crystal display device 1900 is disposed. Hereinafter, these configurations will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 164, the ball guiding unit 3501 includes the left guiding portion 3520 and the right guiding portion 3521 for guiding gaming balls having won in the general winning opening 2105 and 2106 (see FIG. 115) and the first starting opening 2101 and the like. Have. In addition, the left guidance section 3520 and the right guidance section 3521 have a general winning opening sensor 3522 for detecting gaming balls that have won in the general winning openings 2105 and 2106, and a first for detecting gaming balls that have won in the first starting opening 2101. A start port sensor 3524 is provided. In addition, a magnetic detection sensor 3523 is also provided in the left guiding unit 3520 and the right guiding unit 3521, and it is possible to detect an unauthorized game using a magnet or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 164, three light emitting substrates, that is, a left light emitting substrate 3503, a lower light emitting substrate 3506, and a right light emitting substrate 3507, are disposed around the ball guiding unit 3501. These light emitting substrates 3503, 3506 and 3507 cause the winning device unit 2100 (FIG. 115) disposed in front to emit light, and the large window portion 2110f and the small window portion 2110g of the base member 2110 (FIG. 119) are lighted and decorated It is Further, although details will be described later, the left relay board 3508, the right relay board 3510, and the lower relay board 3509 relay drive signals of a motor or the like provided in the back unit 3000.

  As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the display unit 3511 has the liquid crystal display device 1900 visible through the opening 3001c of the back box 3001, and a protective plate 3540 is provided on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. There is. In addition, mounting members 3542 are provided on both left and right side surfaces of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and are detachably mounted on the back surface of the back box 3001 and fixed by a lock member 3512. In addition, a liquid crystal back cover 3544 having a liquid crystal power supply substrate 3545 is disposed on the back side of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and further, on the back side of the liquid crystal back cover 3544, a peripheral control board 4010 housed in a substrate cover 3547 is provided. It is mounted via a control board set plate 3546. A harness cover 3549 is also attached to the substrate cover 3547.

[3. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the logo display unit 3400 has different amounts of forward projection in the character portions 3400a to 3400f, each character portion 3400a to 3400f is three-dimensionally The three-dimensional effect of the entire logo decoration portion 3401 can be enhanced. Further, since the front surface of the logo decoration portion 3401 is formed in a step shape, the division of each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f becomes clear, and the appearance of each of the character portions 3400a to 3400f can be accurately grasped. . Furthermore, it is possible to evoke an image in which the entire character part jumps out to the player side with the character part 3400a on the left end side as the head, and the impact given to the player can be enhanced by the powerful decoration.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the overlapping portion 3400 w is provided between the adjacent character portions 3400 a to 3400 f in the logo decoration portion 3401, a plurality of character portions 3400 a to 3400 f are in series. It can strongly impress that it represents the logo of. Further, in the overlapping portion 3400 w, since the larger character portion of the protrusion amount is extended and formed, which of the adjacent character portions 3400 a to 3400 f is pushed to the player side is indicated respectively. It can grasp also from the front shape of character parts 3400a-3400f.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the logo decoration portion 3401, since the size of characters is larger as the character portion is pushed closer to the player side, the size of the character portions 3400a to 3400f is also increased. A sense of perspective can be generated, and the difference in level between adjacent character parts 3400a to 3400f can be felt larger than in actuality. Therefore, the three-dimensional impression of the logo decoration portion 3401 can be further enhanced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, among the plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f, the character portion that most attracts the player's attention, that is, the first character portion 3400a that is most prominent is the first character. Therefore, the player can naturally grasp the logo composed of a series of characters by visually recognizing the single character portions 3400a to 3400f in the order of drawing attention.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to combine the logo front decoration 2420 disposed on the front upper left side of the center character 2400 with a series of character parts 3400 a to 3400 f in the logo decoration part 3401. Since one logo is formed, the opening window 2400a of the center character 2400 can be extended to display the logo, which can further enhance the three-dimensional effect and the force.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by positioning the right end side of the logo decoration portion 3401 behind the upper right decoration unit 2413, the impression that the right end side of the logo decoration portion 3401 is disposed further backward It is possible to cause the appearance of the logo front decoration 2420 to be relatively large. In particular, since the amount of protrusion of the upper right decoration unit 2413 is substantially equal to the amount of protrusion of the logo front decoration 2420, the portion with the smallest amount of protrusion between the sixth character portion 3400f at one end and the upper right decoration unit 2413 As a result, the depth of the sixth character portion 3400 f can be greatly increased, because the portion suddenly changes to the portion where the amount of protrusion is the largest. Further, since the logo lens 2432 inscribed in the characters is also provided in the upper right decoration unit 2413, a plurality of character parts 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration portion 3401 are associated with the upper right decoration unit 2413, and these are one unit. Can give the impression of being composed of Therefore, the level difference between the sixth character portion 3400 f and the upper right decoration unit 2413 can be emphasized to further enhance the overall three-dimensional effect.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the upper character service unit 3100 visible through the opening window 2400a of the center character 2400 is provided on the upper side of the logo display unit 3400, these are integrated. The visual display can give a dynamic feeling to the logo display unit 3400, and a more powerful decoration can be performed. In addition, a three-dimensional effect can be generated in the upper character object unit 3100 and the effect area thereof by the three-dimensionally shaped logo decoration portion 3401. Further, in the upper character product unit 3100, a plurality of decorative parts (large side light emission rotary part 3120, small side light emission rotary part 3121, rotary body decorative body 3162) having the same or similar appearance shape are arranged in character parts 3400a to 3400f. Since they are disposed along the direction, the sense of unity between the upper character item unit 3100 and the logo display unit 3400 can be further enhanced and a large impact can be given. In addition, since the size of the decorative portion on the upper side is smaller as the protrusion amount of the character portions 3400a to 3400f in the logo decoration portion 3401 is larger, even if all the sizes of the character portions 3400a to 3400f are equal, By visually recognizing together with the decorative part, it is possible to make the first character part 3400a on the left end side appear relatively large, and consequently it is possible to make the step between the adjacent character parts 3400a to 3400f feel larger than it actually is.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the cover members (large side cover member 3122, small in the respective decoration parts (large side light emission rotating part 3120, small side light emission rotating part 3121, rotary body decorative body 3162) Since the side cover member 3123 and the cover member 3172 are rotated, the depth of the logo display unit 3400 can be made extremely large. In particular, a cover member (large side cover member 3122, small side cover member 3123, cover member 3172) on the rear side of the decorative body (large side light emission rotating portion 3120, small side light emission rotating portion 3121, rotating body decorative body 3162) Since the enclosure members 3113 and 3180 surrounding the rear side from the rear side are provided, the space behind the decorative portion becomes visible as a rendering space, and the logo decorative portion of the logo display unit 3400 disposed on the lower side The width in the depth direction can be impressed on the 3401.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the logo display unit 3400 is disposed in front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect image displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is three-dimensionally The logo decoration portion 3401 can be viewed in an overlapping manner in the front-rear direction, and the logo decoration portion 3401 can be highlighted and the three-dimensional effect of the logo decoration portion 3401 can be further enhanced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the logo decoration portion 3401 is decorated to emit light by the light emitted from the left side light emitting substrate 3405 and the right side light emitting substrate 3406, making the logo display unit 3400 more noticeable it can. In particular, in order to diffuse light by the light diffusion sheet 3403, the respective character portions 3400a to 3400f can be illuminated without unevenness. Therefore, it can be prevented that there is a step due to light and dark of the light, that is, the step between adjacent character parts 3400a to 3400f is relatively inconspicuous.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the plurality of character portions 3400a to 3400f are caused to emit light separately, the divisions of the respective character portions 3400a to 3400f become clearer and attract the attention of the player. Can be attached. In particular, in order to turn on the respective character parts 3400a to 3400f in order from the first character part 3400a on the left end side to the sixth character part 3400f on the right end side, the order in which the respective character parts 3400a to 3400f should be grasped (ie, The order of reading can be further clarified, and the concept of the pachinko machine 1 can be surely impressed.

  The present invention has been described above by way of preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as described below, various improvements can be made without departing from the scope of the present invention. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the above embodiment, although the logo display unit 3400 is provided with the left side light emitting substrate 3405 and the right side light emitting substrate 3406 to make the logo decoration portion 3401 emit light and decorate, it is composed only of the logo decoration portion 3401 and does not emit light. You may

  Further, in the above embodiment, the logo decoration portion 3401 is shown by arranging a plurality of character portions 3400 a to 3400 f in the horizontal direction (that is, a horizontally written logo), but the plurality of character portions 3400 a to 3400 f are arranged in the vertical direction You may do so. In this case, since the character part arranged at the top is the first character, it is preferable to arrange the character part so as to be the first to the player side.

[4. Various substrates]
Subsequently, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 168 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As illustrated, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main substrate 4000 and a group of the peripheral control substrate 4010, and various control is shared by these two groups. The group of main substrates 4000 is configured to include a main control substrate 4100 that controls a game operation (progress of a game), and a payout control substrate 4110 that controls payout of gaming balls and the like. In addition, the group of peripheral control boards 4010 has a peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects in the game based on commands from the main control board 4100 and a liquid crystal display device 1900 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[4-1. Main control board]
The main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game is, as shown in FIG. 168, a main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data. A main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), a main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid for driving various solenoids A drive circuit 4100g and a RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM 4100e") built in the main control MPU 4100a are provided. . In addition to its built-in ROM 4100 d (hereinafter also referred to as “main control built-in ROM 4100 d”) and main control built-in RAM 4100 e, main control MPU 4100 a monitors a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and prevents fraud. The function of etc. is also built in.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is a first start opening sensor 3524 for detecting gaming balls received in the first start opening 2101 and a second starting opening sensor for detecting gaming balls received in the second start opening 2102. Detection signals from the 2166 and some general winning opening sensors 3522 are input through the main control I / O port 4100 b, or attached to the gate sensor 2176, the general winning opening sensor 3522, the count sensor 2160 and the back unit 3000. A detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 3523 is input via the panel relay board 3012 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100 b.

  Main control MPU 4100a outputs control signals from main control I / O port 4100b to main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, so that each solenoid 2128, 2141, 2156 via panel relay board 3012. The first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the first special symbol memory via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay substrate 3012, and the function display substrate 1191 A drive signal is output to the display 1184, the second special symbol storage indicator 1187, the normal symbol indicator 1189, the normal symbol storage indicator 1188, the game state indicator 1183 and the fraud detection indicator 1190.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting opening sensor 3524, the second starting opening sensor 2166, the gate sensor 2176, and the count sensor 2160. A contact type ON / OFF mechanical switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3522. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2107, so the first starting opening sensor 3524, the second starting opening sensor 2166, and The detection of gaming balls by the gate sensor 2176 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch with a long lifetime is used for the first starting opening sensor 3524, the second starting opening sensor 2166, and the gate sensor 2176. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2153 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so the detection of the game ball by the count sensor 2160 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the proximity sensor with a long lifetime is also used as the count sensor 2160. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3522 does not frequently occur in the general winning opening 2105 where the gaming balls do not enter frequently. Therefore, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 3522.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information (game information) on gaming and various commands on payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands on the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. To Furthermore, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness not shown). Although the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, the detailed description thereof will be described later, shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 851, which will be described in detail later. The power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to the main control substrate 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control substrate 4100 for a predetermined time even when power is shut off. Describe) BC0 (see FIG. 169). The main control MPU 4100a can store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e by the capacitor BC0 in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100 c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

  In addition, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. The blackout monitoring circuit monitors the drops of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 851 and outputs a blackout notice signal as a blackout notice when the voltages become lower than the blackout notice voltage. The blackout notice signal is also input to the main control MPU 4100a through the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 or the like through a harness (not shown).

[4-2. Disbursement control board]
As shown in FIG. 168, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout and the like of the game balls performs the delivery control unit 4111 which performs various controls regarding the payout and the launch control by the launch solenoid 654, and A launch control unit 4120 for controlling, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an error release switch 860a for releasing an error displayed on the error LED display 4130, and a prize ball tank 720, a tank rail 731 and a ball removing switch 860b for discharging the gaming balls in the winning ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to start the ball releasing operation.

[4-2A. Payout control section]
As shown in FIG. 168, the payout control unit 4111 for performing various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. An external watchdog timer 4111c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4111c” for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU 4111a, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and the payout control MPU 4111a are operating normally. And a payout control input circuit 4111 e to which detection signals from various detection switches related to payout are inputted. The payout motor drive circuit 4111 d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740. And. In addition to the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in ROM”) and RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payment control built-in RAM”), the payout control MPU 4111 a is for preventing fraud. The function etc. are also built in.

  The payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (gaming information) on gaming from the main control board 4100 and various commands on payout via the payout control I / O port 4111b in a serial system, or the main control board In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100 c from 4100 being input through the payout control I / O port 4111 b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 may be input, or the ball out switch 750 The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input through the prize ball relay substrate 754 or the like.

  An out-of-ball switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of gaming balls in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a gaming ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the base unit 741 The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e via the winning ball relay substrate 754 of the winning ball device 740 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a via the payout control I / O port 4111 b. . The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed on the rotation detection board 749 of the award ball device 740 is firstly transmitted via the sensor substrate 753 of the award ball device 740 and the award ball relay substrate 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a through the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  Further, a detection signal from a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and a main frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 4111 e, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a via the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 which detects whether or not the storage space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is full is stored in the gaming ball, the handle device relay board 192 first, and the main side relay terminal It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111 e through the plate 880 and is input to the payout control MPU 4111 a through the payout control I / O port 4111 b.

  The payout control MPU 4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4120b and the prize ball relay board 754 or displays an error LED indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 The payout control I / O port 4111 b outputs a signal to be displayed on the dispenser 4130 to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111 b or a command for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The serial number is sent to the main control board 4100 via the serial interface, and the number of balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111 b. The external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game arcade (hall). The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the gaming balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that "normal" is displayed, and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100 Informing that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the dispensing control board 4110), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, the ball is out) Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, announcing that there is no gaming ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the winning ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, (Specifically, based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752, at the inlet of the distribution space 741b in communication with the supply passage 741a formed in the base unit 741 of the prize ball device 740, the payout rotating body 748 When Informs that it is difficult to rotate the payout rotating body 748) by meshing with the technical ball in the vicinity of the entrance, and indicates that it is a "counting switch error" when the number "3" is displayed (specifically, And, based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751, notifying that the counting sensor 751 has a problem), and when the number "5" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "retry error" (specifically, the payout Informing that the number of retries for the operation has reached the preset upper limit), and when the number “6” is displayed, it indicates that it is “full” (specifically, from the full detection sensor 550 Based on the detection signal, a notification is issued indicating that the storage space 546 of the fal cover unit 540 is full with the stored gaming balls), and when the number “7” is displayed, it is “CR not connected” (payout control Informing that the electrical connection is broken anywhere in the range from the plate 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number “9” is displayed, it indicates “in stock” (specifically, Informing that the number of balls of the game balls not yet paid out has reached a predetermined number of balls).

  The ball lending request signal of the gaming ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are firstly transmitted through the frequency display plate 365, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Is input to the CR unit 6. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the gaming ball to be lent according to the ball rental request signal to the payout control board 4110 in a serial system via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and this signal is the payout control I / O. It is received by the port 4111 b and input to the payout control MPU 4111 a. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining degree of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of lent gaming balls, and a signal for displaying the remaining degree on the remaining number indicator 365c is a CR unit connection terminal. The signal is output to the plate 874, the main relay terminal plate 880, and the frequency display plate 365, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c.

[4-2B. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 4120 performing launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and sphere feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585 is a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input as shown in FIG. 168. 4120a, an oscillating circuit 4120b outputting a clock signal at fixed time intervals, a firing timing control circuit 4120c outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 based on the clock signal, and A launch solenoid drive circuit 4120 d outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 654 based on the launch reference pulse, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120 e outputs the drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 based on the launch reference pulse. . The firing timing control circuit 4120 c generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120 b so that 100 gaming balls per minute can be shot toward the gaming area 1100 and outputs it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d. At the same time, the ball sending reference pulse generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball sending solenoid drive circuit 4120 e.

  A touch sensor 516 for detecting whether a palm or finger is touching the front of the rotating handle main body 506 and a firing stop switch 518 for detecting whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the intention of the player The detection signal is first input to the emission control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay substrate 192 and the main side relay terminal plate 880, and input to the emission timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input as a CR connection signal to the emission control input circuit 4120 a and input to the emission timing control circuit 4120 c. The signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 which electrically adjusts the strength to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 according to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body front 506 is the handle device relay board 192 first, and the main side relay terminal The signal is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d through the plate 880.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d emits a drive current for launching the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100 with a striking strength corresponding to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle main body 506 based on the signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512. In response to the input of the reference pulse, the signal is output to the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120 e receives a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 via the main side relay terminal board 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feeding reference pulse is inputted. The ball feed member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the dish unit 300 by outputting, and the constant current is triggered when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is finished. The game ball received by the ball feeding member 584 is sent to the ball striking device 650 side by stopping the output of the ball. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120 e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

  The power supply substrate 851 for supplying various voltages to the payout control substrate 4110 is provided with a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 169) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control substrate 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. . Due to the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4111a can store various information in the payout control internal RAM in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[4-3. Peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 4010, as shown in FIG. 168, performs peripheral control based on commands from the main control board 4100, and the liquid crystal display 1900 based on control data from the peripheral control 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control.

[4-3A. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 168, the peripheral control unit 4140 for effect control in the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality music performance. A sound source IC 4140c to be performed and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects to which the sound source IC 4140c refers are stored.

  Peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When various commands are received from main control board 4100, each decoration board of game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like, the blinking signal or the gradation lighting signal is transmitted from the lamp driving board serial I / O port to the lamp driving board 4170, or the game board Game board side drive data for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in 4 and color LED etc. of each decoration board provided on the game board 4 The game board side drive light emission data composed of the game board light emission data for outputting the turn-on signal, the blink signal, the gradation turn-on signal, etc. Transmit from the serial I / O port to each of the relay boards 3508, 3509, 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 or drive signals to an electrical drive source such as the dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5. It consists of door-side drive data to output, and lighting-side signals to the color LED etc. provided on each decoration substrate of the door frame 5, door-side light emission data to output flickering signals or gradation lighting signals. To the door frame base substrate 194 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 from the frame I / O port for the frame decoration drive board, or to the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition to transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed from the serial I / O port for liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the sound ROM 4140 d Control signal for extracting the rales information (sound command) and outputs to the sound source IC4140c.

  Detection signals from various original position detection sensors for detecting original positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are peripheral through the relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. It is input to the control MPU 4140a. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 A peripheral control MPU 4140 a is input through the peripheral relay terminal board 882 and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally, from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal. doing.

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a, and is provided to the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 Control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. matched to various effects flow from the speaker 821 and provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, the peripheral side relay terminal board 882, and the door frame base board 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control substrate 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control substrate box 1910.

  In addition to the watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) incorporated in peripheral control MPU 4140 a, peripheral control unit 4140 is an external watchdog timer not shown (hereinafter “peripheral control external”). The peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT in combination to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

  The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is issued by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, 19.2 kg (k for the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time)). B) Bits per second (hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side on / off blink command, game board side on / off blink command, movable body drive command, outputted from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the respective relay boards 3508, 3509, 3510 attached to the back surface of the back box 3001 This is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command, and in the present embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

  The relay boards 3508, 3509 and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 are lit on or off according to the received door frame lighting and blinking command, and are transmitted through the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 to the door frame 5 The lighted or blink signal is output to the LED of each decoration board 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided on the game board side based on the game board side light blink command. It outputs to LED of each light emission board | substrate 3115 grade | etc., With which the board | substrate 4 was equipped. Also, the relay boards 3508, 3509, 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 are provided with drive signals to the door frame 5 via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 based on the received drive command of the movable body. It outputs to the dial drive motor 414 and each drive motor 3127 etc. with which the game board 4 was equipped. In particular, in the present example, as described above, the movable decorative body 3202 is moved between the standby position and the rendering position with respect to the left side product unit 3200, and the rendering position also when the movable decorative body 3202 is at the standby position. Also in this case, the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 provided in the movable decorative body 3202 are output to emit light. In addition, when the movable decorative body 3202 moves from the standby position to the rendering position, or from the rendering position to the standby position, the light emission of the first light emitting unit 3220 and the second light emitting unit 3221 is temporarily stopped. It is outputting. The third light emitting unit 3222 disposed at the constantly exposed portion of the movable decorative body 3202 is output so as to forbid the light emission of the third light emitting unit 3222 when the movable decorative body 3202 is in the standby position.

  In the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the tray unit 300 in the door frame 5. Detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 and the back box. It is input through the relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the 3001.

  The sound source IC 4140 c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140 d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140 a and uses the relay boards 3508, 3509, 3510 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001. From the side speaker 130 and the top speakers 222 and 262 of the door frame 5 through the relay board 3508, 3509 and 3510 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 from the speakers 821 of the main frame 3 Control is performed so that the combined music and sound effects flow. In this example, as described above, the side speakers disposed on the left and right sides of the lower side of the gaming window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 disposed above the gaming window 101, and the lower portion of the main body frame 3 are provided. By sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2-channel stereo signal, a 4-channel stereo signal, a 2.1-channel surround signal or a 4.1-channel surround signal to which a lower speaker 391 described later is added, etc.) to a low-pitch speaker 821 It is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than ever before.

[4-4. Liquid crystal control unit]
Next, as shown in FIG. 168, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 for performing drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the peripheral control substrate 4010 stores a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands and various data. Liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c for display control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 described above, character ROM 4150d for storing various data of the screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900, and the character ROM 4150d And a character RAM 4150e to which various data stored are transferred and copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a incorporates a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP 4150 c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to draw the liquid crystal display 1900. I have control. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a operates normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150 a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives an in-execution signal, which will be described later, from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010, corresponding schedule data, and its control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the configuration of the screen in time series, and the order of the screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data defining the order of various data stored in the character ROM 4150 d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150 e in time series. In the non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150 d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150 e is defined in advance as the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 as the schedule data progresses.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150 b and output to the VDP 4150 c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the head screen data one by one from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. When the VDP 4150c does not receive screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs an in-execution signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150 c adopts a line buffer method. In this “line buffer method”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in a line buffer, and drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900. It is a method to output.

  The character ROM 4150 d stores a large amount of sprite data, and the capacity thereof is large. As the capacity of the character ROM 4150 d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150 d can not be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150 d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150 e having a high access speed, and sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150 e. Sprite data is basic data which is data before expanding a sprite into a bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150 d in a compressed state.

  Here, to describe “sprite”, “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit integrated on the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, data for drawing the respective persons is called "sprite". Thus, when displaying a plurality of persons on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a plurality of sprites are used. Besides the person, a house, a mountain, a road, etc. constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be one sprite. The sprites are drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 with the positions to be arranged on the screen and the upper / lower relationship (hereinafter referred to as “order of superposition of sprites”) when the sprites overlap with each other.

  The sprite is formed by bonding a plurality of rectangular areas each having 64 pixels in the vertical and horizontal directions. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it is expressed using a total of six characters arranged in, for example, 2 × 3. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be represented using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 repeats main scanning to set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixel sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front, and repeats main scanning in the direction intersecting the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the liquid crystal display device 1900 receives the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the main scanning is sequentially performed for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900. It outputs to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 shifts to the line immediately below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the pixels are output to pixels for one line sequentially from left to right.

[4-5. Power supply system]
Next, the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, the power supply substrate 851 will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control substrate etc. will be described. FIG. 169 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 170 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. Although not shown, the grounds of various substrates and the grounds of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground of the power supply substrate 851.

[4-5A. Power supply board]
The power supply substrate 851 is electrically connected to the power supply cord, and the plug of the power supply cord is plugged into the power outlet of the island facility. When the power supply switch 852 is operated, the power supplied from the island facility is supplied to the power supply substrate 851, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 169, the power supply substrate 851 is a full wave rectification circuit 851a, a power factor improvement circuit 851b, a smoothing circuit 851c, a + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, a + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, a + 12V creation circuit 851f, and + 24V creation. A circuit 851g is provided. The full-wave rectifier circuit 851a full-wave rectifies 24 volts AC (24V AC) supplied from the island facility and supplies it to the power factor correction circuit 851b. The power factor improvement circuit 851b improves the power factor of the full-wave rectified power, creates DC +37 V (DC +37 V, hereinafter, described as "+37 V"), and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 851 c. The smoothing circuit 851c removes + 37V ripples and smoothes + 37V by removing + 37V ripple. + 5.2V creation circuit 851d, + 5.25V creation circuit 851e, + 12V creation circuit 851f, + 24V creation circuit 851g, payout control board 4110 and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 are respectively supplied. The +5.2 V creation circuit 851 d creates from +37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851 c to DC +5.2 V (DC +5.2 V, hereinafter, described as “+5.2 V”).

  The + 5.25 V creation circuit 851 e creates a DC + 5.25 V (DC + 5.25 V, hereinafter, described as "+ 5.25 V") from + 37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851 c. The +12 V creation circuit 851 f creates a direct current +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter, described as “+12 V”) from +37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851 c. The +24 V production circuit 851 g produces a DC +24 V (DC +24 V, hereinafter, described as “+24 V”) from +37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 851 c. The voltages created by the +5.2 V creation circuit 851 d, the +12 V creation circuit 851 f, and the +24 V creation circuit 851 g are supplied to the payout control substrate 4110, and the +5.25 V creation circuit 851 e, the +12 V creation circuit 851 f, and the +24 V creation circuit 851 g. The generated voltage is supplied to the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872. The AC 24 V supplied from the island facility is also supplied to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 through the power supply substrate 851 in addition to the full-wave rectifier circuit 851 a.

  Further, the power supply substrate 851 is provided with the capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 is a backup power supply of the RAM (main control built-in RAM 4100e) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 in the payout control board 4110. It is a backup power supply of RAM (payment control built-in RAM).

  The +5.2 V created by the +5.2 V creation circuit 851 d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 and to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 as described later. The +5.2 V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. The +5.2 V supplied to the main control board 4100 is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e through the diode MD0.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 (hereinafter, referred to as "-terminal of the capacitor BC1") is connected to the ground and the positive terminal thereof (hereinafter, referred to as "+ terminal of the capacitor BC1"). Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control substrate 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the payout control substrate 4110. That is, the current from the +5.2 V production circuit 851d flows toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a, and the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode PD0 and the + terminal of the capacitor BC1; Current flows toward the

  As described above, the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected by +5.2 V by the electrical connection method in which +5.2 V created by the +5.2 V creation circuit 851 d returns from the payout control substrate 4110 to the power supply substrate 851 again. It can be charged by applying 2 V. As a result, when the power from the +5.2 V production circuit 851 d is no longer supplied to the payout control substrate 4110, the charge stored in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control substrate 4110 as a payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is blocked by the diode PD0 to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4111a and the payout control MPU 4111a does not operate, the stored content is held by applying the payout VBB to the power terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 (hereinafter, referred to as “− terminal of the capacitor BC0”) is connected to the ground and the positive terminal thereof (hereinafter, referred to as “+ terminal of the capacitor BC0”). ) Is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e of the main control substrate 4100 via the payout control substrate 4110, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control substrate 4100. That is, the electric power from +5.2 V generation circuit 851 d flows toward the power supply terminal of main control MPU 4100 a, and the power supply terminal of main control built-in RAM 4100 e in the forward direction by diode MD0 and the + terminal of capacitor BC0 Current flows toward the As described above, the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected such that +5.2 V created by the +5.2 V creation circuit 851 d returns from the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board 851 again. Depending on the connection method, +5.2 V can be applied for charging. As a result, when the power from +5.2 V production circuit 851 d is no longer supplied to main control substrate 4100, the charge stored in capacitor BC0 is supplied as main VBB to main control substrate 4100. Therefore, although the current is not blocked by the diode MD0 and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, the main VBB is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM 4100e to hold the memory contents It is supposed to be

[4-5 B. Voltage supplied to each control board etc.]
Next, an outline of the voltages supplied to the control boards and the like will be described, and subsequently, voltages supplied mainly to the payout control board 4110, the main control board 4100, and the firing power supply board 831 will be described.

  Three types of voltages of +5.2 V, +12 V, and +24 V created by the power supply substrate 851 are supplied to the payout control substrate 4110 as shown in FIG. 169, and the main control substrate via the payout control substrate 4110. It is also supplied to 4100. Also, four types of voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, +24 V, and +37 V created on the power supply substrate 851 are supplied to the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral control substrate via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 Among the four types of voltages, three types of voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, and +24 V are supplied to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 while being supplied to the 4010. The four voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, +24 V and +37 V supplied to peripheral control substrate 4010 are, as shown in FIG. 170 (a), +5.25 V, +12 V and of the four types of voltages. Three types of voltages of +24 V are supplied to the lamp drive circuits 4161 of the relay boards 3508, 3509 and 3510 mounted on the back surface of the back box 3001, and lighted from the lamp drive circuits 4161 to various decoration boards of the game board 4 and flickering Various signals such as signals and gradation lighting signals are output, and the four types of voltages are supplied to the drive source drive circuits 4162 of the relay boards 3508, 3509, and 3510 mounted on the back surface of the back box 3001 to drive the drive sources. A drive signal is output from the circuit 4162 to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid of the game board 4. Further, among the four types of voltages, two types of voltages of +24 V and +37 V are supplied to the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  The liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a liquid crystal module 1900a whose drawing is controlled and a backlight power source which is a power source for backlighting the liquid crystal module 1900a, +24 V is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900 a, and +37 V is a backlight. Power is supplied. On the other hand, three types of voltages of +5.25 V, +12 V, and +24 V supplied to the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to the door frame base substrate 194 as shown in FIG. 170 (b). Of the three types of voltages, +12 V is supplied to the +9 V creation circuit 194 a to create DC +9 V (DC +9 V, hereinafter referred to as “+9 V”). The door frame base substrate 194 supplies, to the various decoration substrates of the door frame 5 and the like, four types of voltages obtained by combining +9 V created by the +9 V creation circuit 194 a in addition to the three types of voltages.

[4-5 C. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
The payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 169, includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and a power failure monitoring circuit 4110b in addition to the payout control MPU 4111a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 4110 a is supplied with +5.2 V from the power supply substrate 851 and removes noise from the +5.2 V. The +5.2 V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 and the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 4110 b is supplied with +12 V and +24 V from the power supply substrate 851 and monitors the signs of the +12 V and +24 V power failure or a momentary power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 4110 b detects a +12 V and +24 V power failure or an indication of a momentary power failure, it outputs a power failure notification signal to the main control MPU 4100 a of the main control board 4100 as a power failure notification. The blackout notice signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 through the main control board 4100, and as shown in FIGS. 170 (a) and 170 (b), the liquid crystal display device 1900 is transmitted through the peripheral control board 4010. The power is transmitted to the backlight power supply 1900b, and transmitted to the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872, the peripheral relay terminal board 882, and the door frame base board 194, and the various decoration boards of the door frame 5 via the door frame base board 194. It is supposed to be transmitted to etc.

  Note that +12 V and +24 V are supplied to the power failure monitoring circuit 4110 b, and +12 V is also supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4111 e of the payout control unit 4111, and +24 V is, for example, the payout of the payout control unit 4111. It is also supplied to the motor drive circuit 4111 d and the like. Further, +37 from the power supply substrate 851 is supplied to the emission power supply substrate 831 as it is via the payout control substrate 4110 without being used in the payout control substrate 4110 at all. The firing power supply substrate 831 generates a predetermined voltage to be described later from the supplied +37 V and supplies it to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d of the firing control unit 4120.

[4-5D. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the main control board 4100 also includes a main control filter circuit 4100h in addition to the main control MPU 4100a and the like. The main control filter circuit 4100 h is supplied with +5.2 V from the payout control substrate 4110 and removes noise from this +5.2 V. The +5.2 V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 through the diode MD0 and, for example, to the main control MPU 4100a and the like. For example, +12 V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control input circuit 4100 f and the like, and +24 V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to the main control solenoid driving circuit 4100 g and the like.

[4-5 E. Voltage supplied to the launch power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the launch power supply substrate 831 includes a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 (in the present embodiment, a capacitance of 4700 microfarads (μF)). The DC / DC converter 831a steps down +37 V from the payout control board 4110 to create DC +35 V (DC +35 V, hereinafter referred to as "+35 V") and drives the firing solenoid of the firing control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 It is supplied to the circuit 4120 d.

  The negative terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (hereinafter referred to as "the-terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0") is connected to ground and its positive terminal (hereinafter referred to as the "+ terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC0"). Is electrically connected to the +35 V output terminal of the DC / DC converter 831a. That is, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is charged by applying +35 V output from the DC / DC converter 831a. In this embodiment, a combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 flows to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the payout control substrate 4110. It has become. The detailed description will be described later.

[4-6. Driving method of firing solenoid]
Next, a method of driving the firing solenoid 654 will be described. First, the drive system of the firing solenoid 654 will be described, and then the input / output current, the output voltage, the logic and waveform of the signal, and the like at a predetermined point of the drive circuit will be described. FIG. 171 is a block diagram showing a drive circuit of a launch solenoid, FIG. 172 is a circuit diagram showing a shunt regulator circuit, an amplifier circuit, and an operational amplifier circuit group, and FIG. 173 is a diagram showing characteristics of a DC / DC converter. 174 is a timing chart of predetermined points in the drive circuit of the launch solenoid of FIG.

[4-6A. Drive system of launch solenoid]
As shown in FIG. 171, the drive system of the emission solenoid 654 mainly includes the emission control input circuit 4120a, the oscillation circuit 4120b, the emission timing circuit 4120c, the emission solenoid drive circuit 4120d, and the ball of the emission control unit 4120 in the payout control substrate 4110. It comprises a transmission solenoid drive circuit 4120e, a DC / DC converter 831a of the firing power supply substrate 831, an electrolytic capacitor SC0, a power factor improvement circuit 851b of the power supply substrate 851, and a smoothing circuit 851c.

  In the firing control input circuit 4120a, when the CR unit 6 is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit 6 receives power (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko gaming machine 1 A signal indicating that there is an input is input and output as a CR connection signal to the emission timing circuit 4120c, and a detection signal from a touch sensor 516 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the rotary handle front 506 is input. When the detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 is output as the touch detection signal to the firing timing circuit 4120 c to detect whether or not the launch of the gaming ball is forcibly stopped by the player's intention, the shooting is triggered. It is output to the firing timing circuit 4120c as a stop detection signal.

  The launch timing circuit 4120 c permits or prohibits launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 based on the CR connection signal from the launch control input circuit 4120 a, the touch detection signal, and the launch stop detection signal. Specifically, the firing timing circuit 4120 c is a first one in which the CR connection signal is not input because the CR unit 6 is not electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The case, the second case that the touch detection signal indicates that the palm or finger is not touching the rotary handle front 506, and the release stop detection signal indicate that the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped. In the third case, the launch of the game ball by the launch solenoid 654 is prohibited when at least one falls, while the launch of the game sphere by the launch solenoid 654 is permitted when the launch solenoid does not fall under all.

  When the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120 b is input to the firing timing circuit 4120 c and the launch of the gaming ball by the firing solenoid 654 is permitted, 100 gaming balls per minute are played on the basis of the clock signal. A firing reference pulse is generated so as to be launched toward 1100 and output to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120 d, and a ball feeding reference pulse is generated by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number (five times in this embodiment) The signal is output to the transmission solenoid drive circuit 4120 e. Launch solenoid drive circuit 4120 d drives launch solenoid 654 of striking launcher 650 with a combined current combining the current from DC / DC converter 831 a and the current from the discharge of electrolytic capacitor SC 0. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit 4120 e drives the ball feeding solenoid 585 by +24 V from the power supply substrate 851.

  The emission solenoid drive circuit 4120 d mainly includes a shunt regulator circuit 4121 a, an amplifier circuit 4121 b, a voltage comparison circuit 4121 c, and a switching circuit 4121 d. The shunt regulator circuit 4121 a is supplied with +5.2 V created by the +5.2 V creation circuit 851 d of the power supply substrate 851, and stabilized from +5.2 V to +2.5 V DC (+2.5 V DC, hereinafter, “ Is written and supplied to the amplifier circuit 4121 b.

  As shown in FIG. 172 (a), the shunt regulator circuit 4121a mainly includes a shunt stabilized power supply circuit PIC0. The shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 has a reduced temperature drift due to the ambient temperature, and can create and supply a stabilized power supply which is maintained at a constant voltage with respect to the load. The REF terminal which is a reference voltage input terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 and the K terminal which is a cathode terminal are electrically connected via +5.2 V and a resistor PR2, and the resistor PR2 is connected to the REF terminal. The input current is limited. The K terminal outputs +2.5 V to the amplifier circuit 4121 b. The +2.5 V is smoothed by removing the ripple (AC component folded into a voltage) by the capacitor PC0 grounded and grounded (the capacitor PC0 also functions as a low pass filter). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt stabilized power supply circuit PIC0, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  Referring back to FIG. 171, the amplification circuit 4121 b amplifies +2.5 from the shunt regulator circuit 4121 a by 2 times to create +5.0 V DC (hereinafter, referred to as “+5.0 V”). The rotational position detection sensor 512 in the handle device 500 is supplied via the main relay terminal board 880 and the handle device relay board 192.

  As shown in FIG. 172 (a), the amplifier circuit 4121b mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC1. The operational amplifier PIC1 is configured as a non-inverting amplification circuit, and +2.5 V from the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 of the shunt regulator circuit 4121a is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC1. The other end of the resistor PR3 is electrically connected to the ground and the other end of the resistor PR3 whose one end is grounded and the other end of the resistor PR4 whose one end is electrically connected to the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1. And are electrically connected. The resistance values of the resistors PR3 and PR4 are set such that the amplification factor (flat loop gain) of the operational amplifier PIC1 is doubled. As described above, the output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1 is the main side relay terminal plate 880 and the handle as described above, which is +5.0 V obtained by doubling +2.5 V applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC1. The rotational position detection sensor 512 in the handle device 500 is supplied via the device relay board 192. The +5.0 V is smoothed by removing the ripple (AC component folded to a voltage) by the capacitor PC2 grounded and grounded (the capacitor PC2 also functions as a low pass filter). The +24 V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC1 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the ground and the capacitor PC1 connected to the ground.

  Referring back to FIG. 171, the rotational position detection sensor 512 is a three-terminal variable resistor, one fixed terminal at both ends is supplied with +5.0 V from the amplification circuit 4121 b described above, and the other fixed terminals at both ends are handle It is electrically connected to the resistance PR 0 of the emission solenoid drive circuit 4120 d in the payout control substrate 4110 through the device relay substrate 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880. The other end of the resistor PR0 is grounded. From a variable terminal which is a terminal different from the fixed terminals at both ends of the rotational position detection sensor 512, it is possible to take out the partial pressure of the voltage applied to both ends according to the variable resistance value. The voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is transmitted through the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal board 880 to the later-described resistances PR5 and PR6 in the discharge solenoid drive circuit 4120d of the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. The voltage divided by 172 (b) is received, and the voltage handled by the divided voltage of the resistor PR6 is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as a firing intensity target voltage.

  As described above, the voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500 is, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal board 880, Ripple (AC component folded to voltage) is removed and smoothed by the capacitor PC3 grounded and grounded (the capacitor PC3 also plays a role as a low pass filter), and the discharge solenoid of the payout control board 4110 The voltage is applied to an operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower of the drive circuit 4120 d. As shown in FIG. 172 (b), the operational amplifier circuit group mainly includes an operational amplifier PIC2 at the first stage and an operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage. The voltage from the handle device 500 is a voltage of the order of volts and is applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2 of the first stage. The inverting input terminal (− terminal) of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2. The output terminal of the first operational amplifier PIC2 multiplies the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2 by 1, and outputs the voltage as it is in the voltage order. Although this first-stage operational amplifier PIC2 simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage of voltage order, as it is, the first-stage input-side circuit for applying the voltage from the handle device 500 and the voltage are outputted to the subsequent-stage operational amplifier PIC3. The circuit separation between the first stage output side circuit and the first stage output side circuit is realized. Thus, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the first stage input side circuit to the first stage output side circuit, and the influence of the first stage output side circuit can be prevented from being applied to the first stage input side circuit. The +24 V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC2 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the ground and the capacitor PC4 grounded.

  The output terminal of the first operational amplifier PIC2 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor PR5 in addition to its own inverting input terminal (-terminal), and the other end of the resistor PR5 is the non-inverting input terminal It is electrically connected to the + terminal). The non-inverted input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR5 and to the other end of the resistor PR6 whose one end is grounded. Thus, as described above, the voltage from the output end of the first-stage operational amplifier PIC2 is simply the voltage of the volt order since it is simply outputting the input voltage which is the voltage of the volt order. The voltage held by this divided voltage-dividing resistor PR6 is applied to the non-inverted input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC3 of the latter stage as a millivolt voltage. The inverting input terminal (-terminal) of the subsequent operational amplifier PIC3 is electrically connected to the output terminal of the subsequent operational amplifier PIC3. The output terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 at the subsequent stage multiplies the voltage applied to the non-inverting input terminal (+ terminal) of the operational amplifier PIC2 by 1; Do. Although the operational amplifier PIC3 in the latter stage simply outputs the input voltage, which is a voltage handled by the resistor PR6 of the millivolt order divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6, the resistor of the millivolt order divided by the resistors PR5 and PR6 The circuit separation of the rear stage input side circuit for applying the voltage handled by the PR 6 and the rear stage output side circuit for outputting the voltage to the voltage comparison circuit 4121 c is realized. Thus, the voltage can be transmitted as a signal from the rear stage input circuit to the rear stage output circuit, and the influence of the rear stage output circuit can be prevented from being applied to the rear stage input circuit. The +24 V input to the power supply terminal of the operational amplifier PIC3 is smoothed by removing the ripple by the ground and the capacitor PC5 grounded.

  Referring back to FIG. 171, the current flowing to the launch solenoid 654 of the striking launcher 650 passes through the resistor PR1 whose one end is grounded and is grounded, and the millivolt voltage on the resistor PR1 serves as the launch control voltage. Applied to the 4121 c. The voltage comparison circuit 4121 c is also applied with a firing intensity target voltage which is a voltage on the order of millivolts described above. Thus, as described above, the discharge control voltage and the discharge intensity target voltage to be compared by the voltage comparison circuit 4121 c are resistance from voltage in the volt order to voltage in the millivolt order in the discharge control substrate 4110 (fire solenoid drive circuit 4120 d). It is designed to be stepped down by the voltage assigned to PR1 and PR6. That is, since the wiring pattern is hardly affected by noise because it is applied through the wiring pattern formed on the payout control substrate 4110, the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is a millivolt voltage and the firing control voltage and the firing intensity target voltage And between the substrate devices of the dispensing control substrate 4110 and the ball hitting and launching apparatus 650, and between the substrate devices of the dispensing control substrate 4110 and the handle device 500, through wiring. Because the wiring is easily affected by noise, the influence of noise between the substrate devices is suppressed by using a voltage in the order of volts.

  The voltage comparison circuit 4121 c is an inversion type circuit that compares the emission control voltage with the emission intensity target voltage and outputs the comparison result to the switching circuit 4121 d. The comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4121c is a logic output of HI or LOW, and becomes LOW (hereinafter referred to as "L") when the launch control voltage is higher than the launch intensity target voltage, while the launch control voltage Becomes HI (hereinafter referred to as "H") when the emission intensity target voltage is smaller than the target value. As described above, the output logic becomes H or L according to the comparison result by the voltage comparison circuit 4121 c, and thus the output signal is input to the switching circuit 4121 d as an ON / OFF signal.

  The switching circuit 4121 d receives the current from the DC / DC converter 831 a provided on the firing power supply substrate 831 according to the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121 c each time the emission reference pulse from the emission timing circuit 4120 c is input. The combined current combined with the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is supplied to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking launcher 650. Specifically, when the ON signal from voltage comparison circuit 4121 c is input, switching circuit 4121 d combines current resulting from DC / DC converter 831 a and current due to discharge of electrolytic capacitor SC 0. When the OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121 c is input, the current flowing to the emission solenoid 654 is cut off. In other words, switching circuit 4121 d receives the ON signal from voltage comparison circuit 4121 c, and combines the current from DC / DC converter 831 a and the current due to the discharge of electrolytic capacitor SC 0 into a combined current to firing solenoid 654. When flowing, when the voltage divided by the resistor PR1 becomes higher than the firing intensity target voltage as the firing control voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4121c becomes L, and the current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 is turned off. A signal is output to the switching circuit 4121 d, and the switching circuit 4121 d cuts off the constant current flowing to the firing solenoid 654. By this interruption, the current does not flow to the emission solenoid 654 and the emission control voltage becomes smaller than the emission intensity target voltage, the output logic of the voltage comparison circuit 4121c becomes H again, and the ON signal is output to the switching circuit 4121d. As described above, the 4121 d causes a combined current, in which the current from the DC / DC converter 831 a and the current due to the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC 0 are merged, to the firing solenoid 654. Thus, according to the ON / OFF signal from voltage comparison circuit 4121c, switching circuit 4121d combines the current from DC / DC converter 831a and the current from the discharge of electrolytic capacitor SC0 into a combined current, as shown in FIG. The switching circuit 4121d performs control to supply a current to the firing solenoid by self-oscillation in response to the ON / OFF signal from the voltage comparison circuit 4121c in order to cut off the constant current. That is, the switching circuit 4121 d functions as a “self-oscillation constant current circuit”, and brings the emission control voltage close to the emission intensity target voltage. As a result, the rotary handle body front 506 can be turned to drive the firing solenoid 654 with a firing strength corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle body front 506 to launch the game ball toward the game area 1100.

  When the player touches the rotary handle main body 506 and does not rotate the rotary handle main body 506 at the original rotational position, the voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512 is applied to the resistor PR0 The applied voltage is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as the voltage follower described above, and is applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121 c as the emission intensity target voltage. In this case, when the ON signal from voltage comparison circuit 4121c is output to switching circuit 4121d, switching circuit 4121d combines the current from DC / DC converter 831a with the current from the discharge of electrolytic capacitor SC0. The combined current is sent to the firing solenoid 654. The current output from the DC / DC converter 831a is the minimum output current. The firing strength of the firing solenoid 654 at this time is at least jumping over the firing rail 660. That is, when the voltage applied to resistor PR0 is the firing intensity target voltage, the current corresponding to the voltage (the minimum output current output from DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of electrolytic capacitor SC0 are merged) When the merged current (flowing current) flows to the firing solenoid 654, the gaming ball hit by the firing solenoid 654 reaches the playing area 1100 along the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4, even though it can jump over the firing rail 660. Because it can not be done, it will be collected by the foul cover unit 540 as a foul ball. In other words, when the voltage applied to the resistor PR0 is applied to the operational amplifier circuit group configured as a voltage follower and applied to the voltage comparison circuit 4121c as the emission intensity target voltage, the current flowing through the emission solenoid 654 is the minimum current However, even if this minimum current flows to the firing solenoid 654, all the launched game balls are collected as far balls. As a result, it is possible to prevent overlapping with the game ball sent out to the firing rail 660 by the ball feeding solenoid 585, and thus prevent the firing solenoid 654 from launching the overlapping game ball toward the game area 1100. It is possible to prevent the load on the firing solenoid 654 and to prevent the failure.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 as shunt regulator circuit 4121a, the firing intensity target voltage applied to voltage comparison circuit 4121c is +2.5 V, which is a constant voltage from shunt regulator circuit 4121a. As the +5.0 V amplified by the amplification circuit 4121 b is divided by the rotational position detection sensor 512 of the handle device 500, this divided voltage also causes the same rotational position of the rotational handle body front 506. When held in position, no change occurs and the voltage is held constant. As a result, the switching circuit 4121d causes the firing control voltage to approach the firing intensity target voltage by causing the merging current to flow to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking launcher 650, and rotation occurs when the firing control voltage becomes identical to the firing intensity target voltage. When the rotational position of the front handle body 506 is held at the same rotational position, the combined current flowing to the firing solenoid 654 does not change, and a constant current flows, so the firing solenoid 654 plays the game ball 1100 The launch strength toward the same is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the "unevenness" of the gaming ball due to the drive and the emission of the emission solenoid 654.

  In addition, on the island facility where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, a gaming ball circulation system is constructed in which gaming balls discharged from a plurality of pachinko gaming machines are polished and supplied to the pachinko gaming machine again. For this reason, the temperature in the island facility is extremely high due to the heat from the polishing of the game balls, the heat from collisions between the game balls and the friction, and the heat from the power board of the pachinko gaming machine and various electric decorations. In the present embodiment, as described above, by adopting the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit PIC0 as the shunt regulator circuit 4121a, +2.5 V can be stabilized even in an environment where heat is accumulated in the pachinko installation. It can be output. As a result, the fluctuation of +2.5 V due to temperature is suppressed, so that the “fluctuation” of the voltage extracted from the variable terminal of the rotational position detection sensor 512, that is, the emission intensity target voltage can be suppressed. The voltage comparison circuit 4121 c can output a control signal to the switching circuit 4121 d without including the voltage of the minute. That is, when the rotation position of the rotation handle main body front 506 is the same rotation position, the "unevenness" can be suppressed to the firing intensity for striking the gaming ball toward the gaming area 1100, so the "unevenness" of the gaming ball is suppressed. be able to.

[4-6 B. Input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter]
Next, the input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter 831a will be described with reference to FIG. 173 with respect to the input current at point TA and the output current and output voltage at point TB shown in FIG. The point TA is a point for referring to the input current Iin of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the point TB is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a. The output voltage Vout is a potential difference with the ground.

  First, as shown in FIG. 173A, the relationship between the output voltage Vout at point TB and the output current Iout is such that the output current Iout increases as the output voltage Vout decreases from + 35V. Specifically, in section A where the output voltage Vout is from +35 V to +30 V, the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, and in section B where the output voltage Vout is from +30 V to +20 V, the output voltage Vout decreases as the output voltage Vout decreases. In a section C in which the current Iout increases by approximately 40 mA from 360 mA to 400 mA and the output voltage Vout by +20 V to +10 V, the output current I out increases by approximately 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA as the output voltage Vout decreases, and the output voltage Vout by +10 V In a section D from か ら to +5 V, the output current Iout increases by approximately 350 mA from 660 mA to 1010 mA as the output voltage Vout decreases. In the vicinity of +5 V to zero V, the output current Iout is approximately 1010 mA.

  As the relationship between the input current Iin at the point TA and the output current Iout at the point TB is shown in FIG. 173 (b), as the output voltage Vout decreases from +35 V, the input current Iin decreases and the output current Iout increases It is a relationship. Specifically, in section A where the output voltage Vout is from +35 V to +30 V, while the output current Iout is constant at about 360 mA, the input current Iin decreases by about 80 mA from 400 mA to 320 mA. In this section A, when the input current Iin is larger than the output current Iout, a current corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body 506 flows to the firing solenoid 654, and the game ball launched toward the game area 1100 is still While it is difficult to reach the region 1100, when the current corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body 506 flows to the emission solenoid 654 and the input current Iin becomes smaller than the output current Iout The game ball launched toward the area 1100 has a firing strength to reach the game area 1100. In section B where the output voltage Vout is from +30 V to +20 V, the output current Iout increases by approximately 40 mA from 360 mA to 400 mA, while the input current Iin decreases by approximately 60 mA from 320 mA to 260 mA, compared to the output current Iout Thus, the input current Iin is completely reduced. In section C where the output voltage Vout is from +20 V to +10 V, the output current Iout increases by approximately 260 mA from 400 mA to 660 mA, while the input current Iin decreases by approximately 50 mA from 260 mA to 210 mA. The input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout. In the section D where the output voltage Vout is from +10 V to +5 V, the output current Iout is increased by approximately 350 mA from 660 mA to 1010 mA, while the input current Iin is decreased by approximately 35 mA from 210 mA to 175 mA. Similar to C, the input current Iin is completely smaller than the output current Iout.

  When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, the combined current in which this 360 mA and the current from the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 are merged is the minimum current, that is, the player is in front of the rotary handle main body. It is the current that flows to the firing solenoid 654 when it is in the original rotation position where the rotating handle body front 506 is not rotated by touching 506, while the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 1010 mA In some cases, the combined current combined with the 1010 mA and the current from the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the maximum current, that is, the player touches the rotary handle front 506 and turns the rotary handle front 506 clockwise. It is the current flowing to the firing solenoid 654 when it is at the limit rotation position. Thus, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a minimum output current value of 360 mA and a maximum output current value of 1010 mA. When the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a exceeds 1000 mA, the launch strength of the launch solenoid 654 is determined by the fact that the game ball, which has already jumped into the game area 1100 along the outer rail 1111, collides with the stop 1114 Then, it rolls toward the downstream along the inner circumferential rail 1113 and is strong to such an extent that the ball is collected at the out port 1151 without entering the various winning openings. Therefore, the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a when the player is playing by rotating the rotary handle front 506 clockwise is larger than 360 mA and smaller than 1000 mA. (360 mA <the value of output current Iout <1000 mA), the current is on the order of milliamps.

[4-6 C. Relationship between input / output current and output voltage of DC / DC converter and emission reference pulse from emission timing circuit]
Next, at a constant rotational position in front of the rotary handle main body 506, the output current Iout and output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a at point TB shown in FIG. 171, and the emission reference pulse T0 from the emission timing circuit 4120c, Will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the point TB is a point for referring to the output current Iout and the output voltage Vout (the potential difference with the ground) of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the point TC is the emission reference pulse from the emission timing circuit 4120c. It is a point to refer to T0.

  As described above, when the launch reference pulse T0 from the launch timing circuit 4120c permits launch of the gaming ball by the firing solenoid 654, 100 gaming balls per 60000 ms per minute toward the gaming area 1100 per minute. Since it is set to be fired, as shown in FIG. 174 (a), its pulse width is 30 ms, and its cycle T is 600 ms.

  Here, when the player touches the rotary handle main body 506 and rotates the rotary handle main body 506 to the limit rotation position and when the original rotation position is not rotated, DC / DC The waveform of the output voltage Vout of the converter 831a will be described.

  When the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d when the front handle 506 is at the limit rotation position, as shown in FIGS. 174 (b) and (c). Thus, the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 starts flowing to the emission solenoid 654 as the maximum current described above (timing t0 ). When this maximum current is flowing to the emission solenoid 654, the voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a (voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0) falls to +5 V according to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. The value of the output current Iout of 831a becomes 1010 mA which is the above-mentioned maximum output current. Then, 30 ms after the input of the emission reference pulse T0, when the input is stopped, the discharge proceeds until the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches near zero V (timing t1). By cutting off the maximum current to the emission solenoid 654, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 173, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases while the output voltage Vout decreases. Immediately after the maximum current is cut off, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is near zero V, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is at the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a. When charging starts with a current of 1010 mA and the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a recovers to around +35 V, charging continues with a current of 360 mA, and then charging is completed. This charging is already completed until the next emission reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, the charging is completed within a 570 ms period from the input of the current emission reference pulse T0 to the input of the next emission reference pulse T0 after 30 ms.

  On the other hand, if the firing reference pulse T0 from the firing timing circuit 4120c is input to the switching circuit 4121d of the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d when the front handle 506 is in the original rotation position, as shown in FIG. As shown in (d), the combined current obtained by combining the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge of the charge stored in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes the above-described minimum current, and It starts to flow (timing t0). While this minimum current is flowing to the emission solenoid 654, according to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a shown in FIG. 174, the voltage of the DC / DC converter 831a (the voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0) is slightly decreased. Belongs to the section A, and the value of the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a is 360 mA, which is the above-described minimum output current. When 30 ms elapses after the input of the emission reference pulse T0 and the input is stopped, the discharge of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 proceeds a little (timing t1). By cutting off the minimum current to the emission solenoid 654, the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a gradually recovers to + 35V. Accordingly, charging of electrolytic capacitor SC0 is started according to the characteristics of DC / DC converter 831a. Specifically, as described above, the output current Iout of the DC / DC converter 831a has a characteristic that the output current Iout increases while the output voltage Vout decreases. Immediately after the minimum current is cut off, although the output voltage Vout of the DC / DC converter 831a, that is, the output voltage of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 drops slightly, it belongs to the section A, and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is the output of the DC / DC converter 831a The charging is started by the current of 360 mA which is the current Iout, and then the charging is completed. This charging is already completed until the next emission reference pulse T0 is input (timing t2). That is, the charging is completed within a 570 ms period from the input of the current emission reference pulse T0 to the input of the next emission reference pulse T0 after 30 ms.

  As described above, even if the maximum current and the minimum current flow in the discharge solenoid 654, the discharge reference pulse T0 of this time is input according to the characteristics of the DC / DC converter 831a, and the charge discharged in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 within the discharge time of 30 ms. The charging can be completed within the remaining 570 ms charging time until the next emission reference pulse T0 is input.

  Here, a case is considered in which the DC / DC converter 831a alone adopts a control method of causing a current to flow to the firing solenoid 654 in a state where the electrolytic capacitor SC0 does not exist within a period of 30 ms after the emission reference pulse T0 is input. In this control method, the DC / DC converter 831a alone supplies a current of about 2 A to 3.5 A to the discharge solenoid 654, so this current is supplied from the power supply substrate 851. When driving the firing solenoid 654, a large current larger than 2A to 3.5A instantaneously flows. Then, whenever the emission reference pulse T0 of 30 ms is generated at a cycle T of 600 ms, the load on the power supply substrate is also increased at each cycle T. That is, in addition to the instantaneous large current that flows when the emission solenoid 654 is driven, the power supply substrate supplies a predetermined current to the electronic components, the illumination used for decoration, etc. If the power supply upper limit is exceeded, the power supply will be cut off for safety.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the firing reference pulse T0 is input and then the pulse width is 30 ms, the DC / DC converter 831a alone drives the firing solenoid 654 in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The ampere order current supplied from the DC power supply of +37 V of the power supply substrate 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a is extended for a period of 600 ms until the next emission reference pulse T0 is input after the emission reference pulse T0 is input. , The “first current” of milliampere order supplied to the DC / DC converter 831a from the DC power supply of +37 V of the power supply substrate 851 when the firing solenoid 654 is driven by the combined current of the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 And the electrolytic conde When the SC0 charges the power from the DC / DC converter 831a, it is dispersed into the millisecond order “second current” supplied from the DC power supply of +37 V of the power supply substrate 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a it can. As a result, the amperage supplied from the DC power supply of +37 V of the power supply substrate 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a in the period of 30 ms which is the pulse width of the emission reference pulse T0 in the absence of the electrolytic capacitor SC0. Current is supplied from the DC power supply of +37 V of the power supply substrate 851 to the DC / DC converter 831a in a period of 600 ms until the emission reference pulse T0 is input with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 present and the next emission reference pulse T0 is input. It can be averaged by the supplied "first current" and "second current" of milliampere order. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the load on the power supply substrate 851 for supplying a momentary large current by driving the emission solenoid 654. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the time spent designing the operating condition of the safety device when the power supply substrate 851 is overloaded.

[4-6 D. Relationship between launch reference pulse from launch timing circuit and ball feed reference pulse]
Next, the emission reference pulse T0 from the emission timing circuit 4120c and the ball transfer reference pulse T1 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the point TC is a point for referring to the emission reference pulse T0 from the emission timing circuit 4120c, and the point TD shown in FIG. 171 refers to the ball transmission reference pulse T1 from the emission timing circuit 4120c. It is a point to do.

  The ball sending reference pulse T1 is set to 150 ms (= T0 (30 ms) × 5) which is five times 30 ms that is the firing reference pulse T0. When the emission reference pulse T0 is input to the switching circuit 4121 d of the emission solenoid drive circuit 4120 d, as shown in FIGS. It is input to the circuit 4120 e (when the timing t 0, 150 ms elapses, the input is stopped (timing t 3). Thus, the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven to perform the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585. Thus, the setting of the gaming ball to be launched next can be completed while the next firing reference pulse T0 is input, and each time the firing reference pulse T0 is input, the gaming ball is displayed in the game area 1100. Can be launched continuously toward the

  As described above, in this example, after the game ball is driven in by the firing solenoid 654, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654 and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply substrate 831. Therefore, it is possible to change the current (maximum current) supplied to the firing solenoid 654 by replacing the firing power supply substrate 831 provided with electrolytic capacitors SC0 of different capacities, and to play the driving characteristics of the bat firing device 650. The characteristics can be changed according to the board 4.

  Also, since power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654, the power from the power supply substrate 851 is stored in the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and fired between the firing of the game ball and the subsequent firing. Supplying to the solenoid 654 makes it possible to avoid a large current being consumed instantaneously directly from the power supply substrate 851, and the light emission and movement of the LED of the light emission decorative substrate, the motor for driving the effect, the solenoid, etc. It is possible to prevent the instability and the occurrence of uneven flying of the game ball.

  Furthermore, the power supply substrate 851 creates and supplies DC power (+5.2 V, +5.25 V, +12 V, +24 V, and +37 V) from the AC power supply (AC 24 V) of the island facility, and the ball striking device 650 has a handle The rotating handle main body front 506 of the device 500 can be turned to drive the firing solenoid 654 with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotational position of the rotary handle main body 506 to launch the game ball toward the game area 1100.

  In addition, as for the firing intensity target voltage applied to voltage comparison circuit 4121 c, +5.0 V, which is a constant voltage from shunt regulator circuit 4121 a and amplified by amplification circuit 4121 b, corresponds to rotational position detection sensor 512 of handle device 500. When the rotational position of the rotary handle main body 506 is held at the same rotational position, the divided voltage is also held at a constant voltage without any fluctuation. Become. As a result, the switching circuit 4121d causes the firing control voltage to approach the firing intensity target voltage by causing the merging current to flow to the firing solenoid 654 of the ball striking launcher 650, and rotation occurs when the firing control voltage becomes identical to the firing intensity target voltage. When the rotational position of the front handle body 506 is held at the same rotational position, the combined current flowing to the firing solenoid 654 does not change, and a constant current flows, so the firing solenoid 654 plays the game ball 1100 The launch strength toward the same is the same. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the "unevenness" of the gaming ball due to the drive and the emission of the emission solenoid 654.

[5. Game content]
Next, the game contents by the main substrate 4000 provided with the main control substrate 4100, the payout control substrate 4110 and the like will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is operated by the player rotating the handle device 500 disposed at the lower right of the door frame 5. The game ball is started to be launched into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged on the front of the game machine. The game balls driven to the upper part in the game area 1100 are made to flow down the upper left side or the right side of the game area 1100 according to the hitting strength.

  It should be noted that the hitting strength of the gaming ball is determined by detecting the amount of rotation of the handle device 500 with the rotational position detection sensor 512 and then using the detection signal from the rotational position detection sensor 512 by the launch control unit 4120. The drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 at the time of (4) is controlled, and it is possible to drive more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. In addition, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in the front of the game panel 1150 with a predetermined gauge arrangement at an appropriate position, and the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails to cause the game balls to flow down. While the speed is suppressed, various motions are given to the game ball and the motions can be enjoyed.

  When the game ball thrown into the upper part of the center character 2400 flows down from the approximate center in the left-right direction to the right of the center character 2400, it is guided to the right area of the center character 2400. Then, when the game ball flowing down the right side of the center character 2400 enters the gate unit 2107 disposed at the lower right of the center character 2400 and is detected by the gate sensor 2176, the ordinary random number as a regular lottery result is It is extracted. Then, based on the ordinary random number, the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variably displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED emits light alternately in red, green and orange), Extract after a predetermined time (for example, 60 to 600 seconds at short time (when the number of changes has not been reached), 7.23 to 7.77 seconds at short time (when the number of changes has been reached, 0.5 seconds at short time) The normal symbol based on the executed normal random number (normal lottery result) is displayed as a stop (normal symbol indicator 1189 emits either red or green). The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the common drawing fluctuation pattern selected from the predetermined common drawing fluctuation time determination table.

  Specifically, in the case where the drawn normal random number is a "normal hit" random number, stop display is made with a normal symbol that suggests a hit (normal symbol indicator 1189 emits green light), and the drawn normal random number is a "normal loss" random number In this case, the stop display is made with a normal symbol that suggests a loss (normal symbol display 1189 emits light in red). Then, when the normal symbol suggesting a hit is stopped and displayed, the pair of blades 2125 closing the second start port 2102 opens a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.5 seconds in non-short time, 1 second in time) The operation is repeated a predetermined number of times (e.g., twice in non-short time, three times in short time). By the operation of such a pair of blades 2125 (movable member), the game ball can be easily received in the second starting opening 2102.

  The variation time of the normal symbol and the expansion time and expansion number of blades 2125 at the second start opening 2102 are changed according to the first special random number and the second special random number (special lottery result). There is. For example, when a special random number (special lottery result) and a symbol random number “a short time per hour (normal time short per hour, including a high probability time per short, etc. included)” is extracted, the probability of hitting a normal pattern is increased, or By changing the expansion time of the pair of blades 2125 of the two starting openings 2102 to a long time or the like, the average total impact amount of the game balls to the game area 1100 required to obtain a big hit is usually a normal game It generates an advantageous gaming state that can be played so as to be relatively smaller than when in the state.

  On the other hand, as long as being controlled to the normal gaming state, the probability of hitting the symbol normally is not increased, and the time-saving function operates even as the expansion time of the pair of blades 2125 of the second starting opening 2102 By setting it as only a relatively shorter time than the state (a time when it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting opening 2102), in the normal gaming state, the game required to obtain a big hit The average total impact of the balls is maintained as a relatively large value. However, although it will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the average total hit number of game balls required to obtain a big hit is maintained as such a relatively large value. However, if the number of changes in the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 800 times), the common drawing provided for the determination process for the common pattern fluctuation pattern By replacing the fluctuation time determination table with a different table, the easiness of accepting the gaming ball to the second start port 2102 is adjusted and changed to the side advantageous to the player.

  Incidentally, in the normal gaming state according to this embodiment, neither the so-called probability changing function nor the time saving function is activated which is enabled on the condition that at least a hit with the activation of the condition device is won. It is a game state (except the big hit game state). In addition, the average total impact amount of game balls required to obtain a big hit is an average value of the total number of game balls required to be hit into the game area 1100 before a big hit is obtained. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, since the probability of winning the big hit is set relatively low compared to the gaming state in which the probability change function operates, the average hit of the game ball required to obtain the big hit by that amount. Compared to the gaming state in which the total number (inset into the game area 1100) increases and the time saving function operates, the probability of entering the starting opening (first starting opening 2101, second starting opening 2102) is relative. Since the value is set to be low, the average total impact amount of game balls required to obtain a big hit (the amount hit into the game area 1100) increases by that amount. In this sense, when the game state in which one of the probability change function and the time reduction function is activated requires an average total hit amount of game balls to the game area 1100 required to obtain a big hit when the normal game state is in the normal game state It can be said that it is an advantageous gaming state where it is possible to play a game relatively smaller than it is.

  By the way, in this example, when passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2176 while the normal symbol is variably displayed in the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol in the variation is stopped and generated and extracted earlier. Until the result of the ordinary random number is determined, the ordinary random number extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2176 is temporarily stored and its display is suspended, and the stored ordinary random number is stored. The number of characters (also referred to as the number of reservations) is normally displayed on the symbol storage display 1188. This ordinary symbol memory display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and is adapted to indicate the number of memories according to the number of each lighted LED, and in this example, the number of memories is displayed up to four and the number of reservations is displayed. It is supposed to be. When the number of reservations exceeds four, the normal random number extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2176 is discarded.

  In addition, the game balls driven into the game area 1100 and flowing down the left side of the center character 2400 are brought closer to the center side of the game area 1100 below the center character 2400 by the guide rolling surface 2301 e of the side decoration unit 2300 It is supposed to be. Then, when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 2105 of the winning device unit 2100 disposed below the center character 2400 and is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3522, the main control board 4100 is detected based on the detection signal. Then, a predetermined payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the winning ball device 740 according to the payout command, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are played. Is to be dispensed to the upper plate 301.

  In addition, the game ball driven into the game area 1100 wins in any of the general winning opening 2105, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the second opening and closing winning device 2104 If not, it is provided at the center lower end in the left-right direction of the game area 1100, and is discharged from the out port 1151 to the rear lower side of the game board 4. In addition, even if the game ball wins any of the general winning opening 2105, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, the first opening and closing winning device 2103 and the second opening and closing winning device 2104 (big winning opening 2153), The winning game balls are discharged to the lower rear side of the game board 4 without being returned to the game area 1100.

  On the other hand, when the game ball flowing down the left side of the center character 2400 enters the warp entrance 2402a opened on the left side surface of the center character 2400, it is supplied to the stage 2403a in the shelf 2403 of the center character 2400. It has become. Then, the gaming balls supplied onto the stage 2403a roll in the left-right direction.

  When the gaming ball rolling on the stage 2403a passes through the chance entrance 2403b formed at the center in the left-right direction and enters the chance passage 2404d formed in the shelf back cover 2404, the game ball is disposed immediately above the first starting opening 2101 It is released into the game area 1100 from the chance exit 2403c, and the game balls can be received to the first start opening 2101 with high probability. Then, when the gaming ball is received by the first starting opening 2101 and detected by the first starting opening sensor 3524, a predetermined number (for example, three) of gaming balls from the winning ball device 740 via the main control board 4100 etc. Is to be dispensed to the upper plate 301.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the first starting opening 2101 and the first opening and closing winning device 2103 are arranged in the vertical direction, the gaming ball released from the stage 2403a has a high probability of having a high probability One start opening 2101 and the first opening and closing winning device 2103 can be received.

  By the way, when the game ball enters the gate unit 2107 and is detected by the gate sensor 2176 and a "normal hit" is drawn as a normal lottery result, as described above, the pair of blades 2125 closes the second starting opening 2102 When the game ball is received by the second starting opening 2102 and detected by the second starting opening sensor 2166 when it becomes possible to win by expanding for a predetermined time, the main control board 4100 etc. A predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 301 from the winning ball device 740.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, and detected by the first starting opening sensor 3524 and the second starting opening sensor 2166, the first starting Extraction of a predetermined first special random number is performed at the opening 2101, and extraction of a predetermined second special random number is performed at the second starting opening 2102. Then, after the variation display of the special symbol displayed on the corresponding first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 is started based on the extracted special random number, The special symbol corresponding to the special random number is stopped and displayed as the special lottery result. In the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, among the "big hit" in a mode that suggests "10R positive variation B big hit", "10R positive variation C big hit", "10R positive variation D big hit" When the special symbol is stopped and displayed, a special advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit game) occurs in which the winning door 2154 of the second opening and closing winning device 2104 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, during which the second opening and closing winning device 2104 By winning the game ball to (big winning opening 2153), more game balls can be obtained. In addition, when one game ball wins the first open / close winning device 2103 or the second open / close winning device 2104 (large winning opening 2153), a predetermined number (for example, 11) of game balls from the winning ball device 740 is the upper plate 301 It is supposed to be paid out.

  In addition, also in these 1st starting opening 2101 and 2nd starting opening 2102, the 1st special symbol indicator 1185 and the 2nd special symbol indicator are similar to the fluctuation indication of the normal symbol due to the game ball entering to the gate section 2107 When it is not possible to display a special symbol such as a special hit during a special winning game state while the special symbol is being changed and displayed at 1186, the game ball wins in the starting openings 2101 and 2102, and the first starting opening sensor 3524 The second extraction detected based on the detection signals from the first starting opening sensor 3524 and the second starting opening sensor 2166 until the variation display of the special symbol becomes possible when detected by the second starting opening sensor 2166 The first special symbol and the second special random number are stored and the display thereof is suspended, and the number of reserved stored random numbers for hitting determination is stored in the first special symbol storage display It is adapted to display at 184 or the second special symbol memory indicator 1187. Each of the first special symbol memory display 1184 and the second special symbol memory display 1187 consists of two LEDs, and the combination of the light-emitting states of the light-off, light-on, and blinking LEDs indicates the number of memories. In this example, up to four of each are stored and displayed. If the number of reservations exceeds four, the extracted special random number is discarded.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, the first special random number extracted based on the detection of the first start opening sensor 3524 and the second start opening sensor 2166 and the special random number of the second special random number are predetermined random numbers determined in advance. By collating with the determination table (also referred to as a big hit determination table), it is determined whether the special random number is “lost”, “small hit” or “big hit (hit when the condition device operates)”, For "big hit", the first symbol random number extracted based on the detection of the first start opening sensor 2011 and the second start opening sensor 2349 and the symbol random numbers of the second symbol random number are predetermined random number determination tables determined in advance. (Also referred to as a symbol determination table), it may be one of "10R positive variation A big hit", "10R positive variation B big hit", "10R positive variation C big hit", and "10R positive variation D big hit" It is adapted to be another (winning species of discrimination).

  Then, when the first special random number (special lottery result) extracted (lottery) triggered by the start winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102, the main control board 4100 The opening / closing pattern for retracting the tongue-shaped projecting / retracting piece 2142 of the first opening / closing winning device 2103 as a projecting state for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.05 seconds) is repeated a plurality of times (for example, 10 times) It is difficult to win the game ball on the first open / close winning device 2103.

  On the other hand, when the extracted first special random number and second special random number are "big hit", "10R positive variation B big hit", "10R positive variation C big hit", "10R positive variation D big hit", the main control board 4100 After the winning door 2154 of the second opening and closing winning device 2104 is opened, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of gaming balls are used for the second opening and closing winning device 2104 If any condition of winning is satisfied in the mouth 2153), the opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is referred to as one round) for closing the winning door 2154 is repeated 10 times as a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) It is designed to generate an advantageous gaming state (long open big hit gaming state) which is advantageous to the player. Further, in the case of "10R probability variation A big hit" of "big hit", the main control board 4100 is a predetermined short time (for example, 0.05) after making the tongue-shaped projecting part 2142 of the first opening and closing winning device 2103 project. Opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern) for retracting the tongue-shaped tab 2142 when a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls satisfy the first prize winning device 2103 Is called as one round) a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds) and repeated for 10 rounds, making it difficult to win the game ball to the first opening and closing winning device 2103 as in the case of "small hit" It has become. Thus, in the case of "big hit", the open time per round is long open (for example, about 30 seconds) using the second opening and closing winning device 2104 (large winning opening 2153) while being the same 10 rounds. If you control to)) (long open big hit gaming state), using the first opening and closing winning device 2103 the opening time per round extremely short open state (for example, 0.05 seconds) than the long open state When it is controlled to (in the big hit gaming state of short opening), it is controlled to either. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, after the big hit gaming state according to the big hit at the low probability time is over, the types ("10R positive variable A big hit", "10R positive variable B big hit" Regardless of "10R probability variation C big hit" and "10R probability variation D big hit", the big hit determination table is changed to a high probability table (high hit big hit determination table) according to the extracted symbol random number (probability fluctuation Control to the state). However, although it will be described later, whether or not to change to the fluctuation pattern table in the time saving state (whether to control the time saving game state or not) is determined according to the type of the hit.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first special random number and the second special random number (special lottery result) extracted with the starting winning combination of the game ball to the first starting opening 2101 and the second starting opening 2102 Accordingly, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 of the function display unit 1180 are variably displayed, and also on the display screen 1900 a of the liquid crystal display device 1900, special random numbers (special lottery results) A corresponding effect image is displayed. Specifically, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, a series of symbol rows composed of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows; left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol) When the display is started and then sequentially stopped and finally displayed all symbol rows are stopped, the special extracted by the combination of the stopped symbols (left symbol, middle symbol and right symbol) The determination result of the random number is suggested to the player. That is, according to the special lottery result by the starting winning combination, after the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed, the effect image to be stopped and displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result is displayed. In addition, since the symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 are larger in size than the special symbols on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186, the player generally uses the liquid crystal display 1900. Attention will be focused on the displayed symbols.

  A combination of the symbols stopped and displayed leaving one varying symbol row as one of the effect images on which the plurality of symbol rows are variably displayed is a specific condition (reach; the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed with the same symbol) There is a "reach effect image" displayed so as to satisfy the condition in which the middle symbol is still fluctuatingly displayed, and as a special lottery result in which this "reach effect image" is displayed, "per reach", " There is "reach loss". In addition, there is also a "reach development effect image" which is displayed so as to be connected to the "reach effect image" and emphasizes and displays the remaining symbol rows variably displayed after reach display. In addition to the effect display related to the start winning, the liquid crystal display device 1900 can also display a "big hit game effect image" displayed during the "big hit" game.

  The variation display of the special symbols on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 168). The variation display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on the command according to the lottery result transmitted from the main control substrate 4100 to the peripheral control substrate 4010. ing. In this manner, since the peripheral control unit 4140 or the like controls the variation display of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 1900 that the player pays particular attention to, a certain one of the lottery results transmitted from the main control board 4100 For one command, a plurality of variation patterns of symbols can be prepared in advance to increase the variation patterns of symbols in the liquid crystal display device 1900. The "big hit game effect image" and the like displayed in the "big hit" game and the like are also controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 etc., and effect images of various patterns are prepared in advance. As a result, the display pattern of the effect image to be displayed can be increased without increasing the load of the arithmetic processing on the main control board 4100, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made more entertaining to the player and less likely to get bored. It has become.

  In the display area 1900a of the liquid crystal display device 1900, the number of special random numbers displayed on the first special symbol memory display 1185 and the second special symbol memory display 1186 (ie, the first special random number and the second special random number The number of pending displays corresponding to the number of pending requests) is displayed as notification information. While the first special symbol memory display 1185 and the second special symbol memory display 1186 suggest the number of memories by the combination of the light emission states of the respective LEDs, the display area 1900 a of the liquid crystal display device 1900 stores the information. Since the number of pending displays matches the number of displayed pendings, the player can generally easily grasp the number of pendings from the on-hold display, and is displayed in the display area 1900 a of the liquid crystal display device 1900. Pay attention to the pending display.

[6. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 4100 (in particular, the main control MPU 4100a) will be described. FIG. 175 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (a), the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment first performs various registers and RAMs as the process of step S1 on condition that the RAM clear switch 4100c is operated. Initialize the stored data. The RAM clear switch 4100 c is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and can not be operated unless the main body frame 3 is opened. Further, the RAM clear switch 4100 c outputs a clear signal to the main control board 4100 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses from the power on, and the main control MPU 4100 a receives the clear signal at the power on. If it is determined that there is, the initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, backup processing is executed to save information (for example, various flags etc.) indicating the progress of the game in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, if the RAM clear switch 4100c is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the information stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). And execute recovery processing to recover the state according to the information. Further, when the RAM clear switch 4100 c is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the pachinko machine 1 is set in the initial state by executing the initialization process without executing the recovery process.

  Next, as the process of step S2, the update of the random number which is the number updated within a predetermined numerical range is performed. That is, in the main control board 4100 according to this embodiment, the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) to be subjected to the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol The reach effect is executed as a game effect to be executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 in response to the fluctuation random number provided for the lottery process for the predetermined time (the fluctuation time) required for the fluctuation display control of, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The reach random number to be subjected to the lottery process of whether or not, the symbol random number to be subjected to the lottery process for determining the type of the big hit when it is determined to be the big hit based on the special random number (first symbol random number A random number counter for holding random numbers such as two symbol random numbers), a normal random number to be subjected to a lottery process according to a hit which is a trigger for operation of the pair of blades 2125, and so on That.

  In this example, the first random symbol common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is used, that is, even when the first start opening 2001 is started, the second start opening 2002 is started. Even if the reach random number is configured to be acquired from the same counter that updates reach random numbers, the reach randomization execution ratio can be obtained by acquiring from different counters where the range of random numbers to update reach random numbers is different. The first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol may be different as the reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number, and may be different from the first reach determination table corresponding to the second special symbol. The execution ratio of the reach effect may be made different by providing a second reach determination table in which the determination value is set.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random number (variation random number) which is not related to the drop of the random number is updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, the following timer interrupt control is performed, for example, every 4 ms.

  FIG. 175 (b) is a flow chart showing the procedure of timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the processing of step S12, detection signals from various switches such as the gate sensor 2176, the first starting opening sensor 3524, the second starting opening sensor 2166, the count sensor 2160, and the general winning opening sensor 3522 It is input. Then, next, in step S13, random number update processing for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the above-mentioned random numbers, random numbers (special random numbers, ordinary random numbers) relating to the display mode at the time of the stop of the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol are updated Counter operation is performed.

  And after updating the random number in this way, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs a special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the above special symbol as the process of step S14. Run. In addition, although this special symbol process processing will be described later, here, basically, the special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, the first special symbol process flag, which indicates the progress of the game stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a) Corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on (2) special symbol process flag).

  Then, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 executes, as the process of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process according to a hit when the pair of blades 2125 is triggered. Also in this normal symbol process processing, basically, the corresponding processing is selectively executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, when the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is controlled to the short time state after the end of the big hit gaming state, the operation mode during the short time of opening time of the second starting opening 2102 is longer than that in the normal gaming state. The open time of the pair of blades 2125 is extended so that the blade 2125 (movable member) operates. However, in the time-saving state (when the time-saving function is activated) according to this embodiment, not only the opening time is extended, but the winning probability of the normal symbol is made higher than that in the normal gaming state. The opening frequency of the blades 2125 is also increased.

  In addition, in the time saving state of this example, the control to increase the winning probability of the above normal symbol than the non time saving state, the control to shorten the time required for the variable display control of the above normal symbol than the non time saving state, the second starting opening 2102 Is controlled to extend the opening time when the second opening is made more than in the non-short time state, control to increase the number of times the second starting port 2102 is opened in the open state than in the non-short time state, the first special symbol indicator 1185 or the first It is configured to execute all of the control for shortening the time required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol in the two special symbol display 1186 (the time required for the fluctuation display control of the decoration symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900) compared to the non-short time state It is desirable to be done.

  When the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next performs the special symbol process process as a process of step S16. A command set in a predetermined area of the RAM 4100 e of the main control MPU 4100 a is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010 or the like. Next, in step S17, a command set in a predetermined area of the RAM 4100e in the normal symbol process processing is transmitted to, for example, the peripheral control board 4010 or the like.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs information output processing for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hole management computer, for example, as processing of step S18.

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs the processing of step S19, such as the first start opening sensor 3524, the second start opening sensor 2166, the count sensor 2160, and the general winning opening sensor 3522 When the detection signal is in the on state, a payout control command is output to the payout control board 4110 so that a prize ball corresponding to the signals is paid out to the player. As a result, the payout control MPU 4111a of the payout control unit 4111 mounted on the payout control board 4110 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4111d to the payout motor 744 to pay out the winning balls to the player.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 next executes a storage process of checking the increase and decrease of the number of starting memories as the process of step S20. Next, test terminal processing, which is processing of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine, is executed as the process of step S21. After that, while performing drive control of the actuator which always operates (step S22), the contents of the above register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt enabled state is set (step S24), this control ends. It becomes.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag may be set to indicate that an interrupt has occurred. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that random numbers provided for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 176, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first uses the first starting opening sensor 3524. Under the condition that the detection signal is in the on state (with the ball entering the first starting opening 2101) (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is acquired from the above random number counter A first starting opening passage process such as storing in one special symbol hold storage area is executed (step S32). In addition, the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number under the condition that the detection signal by the second starting opening sensor 2166 is in the on state (the second starting opening 2102 is present) (step S33) The second starting opening passage processing such as storing it from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the RAM 4100 e is executed (step S34).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled is set (step S35), and if the big hit execution flag is set, control of the big hit game state is performed A big hit control process (step S40) is performed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the stop of the change display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) becomes the mode that suggests "10R probability variation big hit A" According to the embodiment, the first open / close winning device 2103 is controlled to the open state according to the short open 10R big hit gaming state, suggesting “10R positive variation big hit B”, “10R positive variation big hit C”, “10R positive variation big hit D” When it becomes, according to the 10R big hit game state of long opening, the processing which controls the 2nd open / close winning device 2104 (large winning a prize opening 2153) according to 10R big hit game state is executed.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the stop of the variation display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the low probability state (low probability time short state or low probability non-short state) When the result is a mode that suggests the definite variation big hit (10R definite variation big hit A, 10R definite variation big hit B, 10R definite variation big hit C, 10R definite variation big hit D), after the big hit gaming state according to the type of the hit is executed , Activate the probability change function. In addition, a big hit (10R positive variation big hit A, 10R positive variation big hit B, 10R positive variation big hit C in a lottery according to the special symbol in the high probability state (high probability time short state or high probability short time state) in which probability change function was activated in this way Even when the 10R certainty variation big hit D) is won, basically, after the big hit gaming state according to the type of the particular situation is executed, the probability variation function is operated.

  However, as described later, as a result of repeated games in such a high probability state (may be controlled to a low probability state during a big hit gaming state), a big hit in the high probability state (10R probability variation big hit A, 10R probability variation big hit B, 10R probability variation big hit C, 10R probability variation big hit D) When the number of wins of the predetermined number (here, 9 times) has been reached (9 times controlled to the big hit gaming state), the ninth big hit gaming state is executed After that, the probability change function is controlled again to a low probability state (low probability time short state, low probability short time short state) where the probability change function is not activated.

  On the other hand, the operating conditions of the time saving function will be described later, but first, the operating conditions differ depending on which special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is the lottery result. There is.

  For example, when a big hit (special lottery result) is obtained as a lottery result for the second special symbol, a big hit game is performed according to the type of the hit (here, 10R positive variation big hit D) (big hit) After the game state is over), the time saving function is always operated. And, with regard to the time saving function thus activated, basically, it is continued until the next big hit is obtained. However, although a big hit was obtained as a lottery result for the second special symbol, the big hit in the high probability state (10R positive variation big hit A, 10R positive variation big hit B, 10R positive variation big hit C, 10R positive variation big hit D, by the big hit of the relevant big hit) When the number of wins of) becomes a predetermined number (here, 9 times), after a big hit game is played according to the type of the hit (here, 10R probability variation big hit D) (big hit gaming state has ended After that, the time saving function is to be activated only until 100 variations of the special symbol finish.

  On the other hand, when a big hit (special lottery result) is obtained as a lottery result for the first special symbol, the category (here, 10R positive variation big hit A, 10R positive variation big hit B, or 10R positive variation big hit C) After the corresponding big hit game is played (after the big hit gaming state ends), basically, it is determined whether to activate the time saving function based on the type of the hit. In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the time saving function is activated after the big hit game according to “10R positive variation big hit C” is performed. And, even for the short function activated in this way, basically, it is continued until the next big hit is obtained. However, although "10R probability variation big hit C" was obtained as a lottery result for the first special symbol, the big hit in high probability state (10R probability variation big hit A, 10R probability variation big hit B, 10R probability variation big hit C) When the number of winnings of 10R probability variation big hit D) becomes a predetermined number (here, 9 times), after a big hit game is played according to the type of hit (here 10R probability variation big hit C) After the game state is over), the time saving function is activated only until the variation of the special symbol for 100 times is over.

  Also, although this will be described later, even if a big hit is obtained as a lottery result for the first special symbol, if a big hit is obtained while the time saving function is in operation, the type of the hit (Here, regardless of 10R probability variation big hit A, 10R probability variation big hit B, or 10R probability variation big hit C), after the big hit game is played (after the big hit gaming state is over), be sure to activate the time saving function ing. And, even for the short function activated in this way, basically, it is continued until the next big hit is obtained. However, the number of winnings of the big hit (10 R probability variation big hit A, 10 R probability variation big hit B, 10 R probability variation big hit C, 10 R probability variation big hit D) in the high probability state becomes a predetermined number (here nine times) by the winning of the big hit. When the jackpot game is played (after the jackpot gaming state is over), the time saving function is activated only until the variation of the special symbol for 100 times is over.

  Further, in the big hit control process, after performing such opening control of the first open / close winning device 2103 and the second open / close winning device 2104, each set process of a high probability flag, a time saving flag, and a time saving counter is executed. The high probability flag is a flag indicating that the high probability state (state in which the probability change function is activated), and the counter value of the big hit counter used in the big hit determination process shown in FIG. 181 described later is “1 to 9”. If it is not the last big hit among the 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state (high probability short status, high probability non short status) (if it is a big hit that shifts to or continues to the high probability status) ) The jackpot is set after the end of the gaming state, when the counter value of the jackpot counter is "10", that is, the last big hit out of 10 jackpots from the start of the high probability state to the end (from high probability state to low probability) If it is a state (a big hit transitioning to a low probability non-short state, a low probability low state), it is reset after the big hit gaming state ends, and opens control of each big hit gaming state It is reset when (Second special symbol stop processing without first special symbol stop processing or illustrated shown in FIG. 186 described later) to be. In addition, the time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving state (the state in which the time saving function is operated), and a big hit for controlling the time saving state (high probability time short state, low probability time short state) (details will be described later) Based on the fact that the time reduction counter becomes “0” in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 184 or the second variation pattern setting process (not shown) shown in FIG. The process is reset in the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 186 or the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  On the other hand, if the big hit execution flag is not set, it is determined whether the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being controlled is set (step S36), the small hit execution flag If is set, the small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit gaming state is executed. In addition, in the small hitting control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) becomes the mode that suggests "small hit", A process of controlling the first open / close winning device 2103 in the open state is executed according to the small hit gaming state in which the same release mode as the short open 10R big hit gaming state is defined.

  Further, if neither the big hit running flag nor the small hit running flag is set, the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is “ The first special symbol process processing including the lottery processing according to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is executed (step S38) on condition that it is "0" (step S37) (second special symbol hold) On the condition that the value of the second special reserve number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the storage area is not "0" (step S37), it depends on the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol The second special symbol process process including the lottery process is executed (step S39). Thus, by continuing to play the game so that the number of withdrawals of the lottery process concerning the second special symbol does not become “0”, the first special symbol concerned regardless of the suspension situation of the lottery process concerning the first special symbol It is possible to avoid execution of the lottery process according to the above, and to execute only the lottery process according to the second special symbol continuously (priority control).

  FIG. 177 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S32).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S31 that the first starting opening sensor 3524 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 2101, as shown in FIG. 177. In step S41, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of holdings of the above-mentioned first special symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S41, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put variable display control of the first special symbol into a state of suspension Processing of S42 to S44 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S42, the first special hold number counter is counted up (one added). Next, as the process of step S43, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, as the process of step S44, the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a in the respective random numbers thus acquired Store in

  However, when it is determined in the process of step S41 that the number of reservations of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variation display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of steps S42 to S44.

  FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S34).

  Now, if it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 2166 is in the on state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2102, as shown in FIG. 178. In step S51, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of reservations of the above-mentioned 2nd special symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S51, when it is determined that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the following steps are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol into a state of suspension Processing of S52 to S54 will be performed. That is, first, in the process of step S52, the second special hold number counter is counted up (one added). Next, as the process of step S53, the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, next, as the process of step S54, the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a as each random number thus acquired Store in

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S51 that the number of reservations of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold by terminating the process without executing the process of steps S52 to S54.

  FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing and the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing are program modules similar to each other, and random numbers used for determination Since only the tables are different, only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S38 of the special symbol process processing will be described here. In the first special symbol process processing, one of the following five process treatments will be selectively executed according to the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag.

1. First special symbol normal processing in which the first special random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read and determination processing for the big hit is performed based on the read first special random number (step S80)
2. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process in which the determination process of the mode at the time of the fluctuation control stop of the first special symbol is performed based on the result of the judgment processing concerning the big hit in the first special symbol normal processing (step S81)
3. A lottery process for the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the special symbol First variation pattern setting process (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation processing to stand by until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 is stopped (step S83)
5. The first special symbol display mode 1185 is displayed as the first special symbol display 1185 when the first special symbol variation control is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process about the display mode at the time of the variation control suspension of the first special symbol. First special symbol stop processing to stop the variation display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed in the process of step S1 described above (see FIG. 175).

  FIG. 180 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal processing (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 180, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S101. As processing of, it is judged whether there is fluctuation display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension based on the counter value by the first special suspension number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is variable display control of the first special symbol in the state of suspension, it is stored in the first special symbol suspension storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a as the processing of step S102 next. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol being read is read from the same RAM 4100e . Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special holding number counter is counted down and the first special symbol storage area of the first special symbol holding storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is stored. A shift operation is performed on a random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol in a first-in first-out mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol hold storage area has four storage areas of 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning from the first (first) area in order. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the start winning is generated, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the variable display start condition based on the random numbers stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. Thus, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). become.

  After that, as the process of step S105, the big hit determination process which is a lottery process for the above big hit is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Thereafter, when the above first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above first special symbol stop symbol setting processing (step S81), this processing is ended.

  FIG. 181 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol jackpot determination process (step S105).

  If the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is in the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability non-short time state) at the present gaming state (step S111), the high probability time shown in FIG. The jackpot determination table is selected (step S112), and if the current gaming state is the low probability state (step S111), the jackpot determination table for low probability shown in FIG. 182 (A) is selected (step S113). The determined big hit determination table is compared with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S114).

  The big hit determination table shown in FIG. 182 (A) is stored in the ROM 4100 e of the main control MPU 4100 a, and when the gaming state is low probability (low probability non-time short) for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number) The jackpot determination table for low probability used in the case of the state and the low probability time reduction state, and the jackpot determination at high probability used when the gaming state is high probability (high probability non-short state, high probability time short state) And a table. Then, in the jackpot determination table at low probability to be compared with the first special random number, the 51 types of first special random numbers coincide with the jackpot judgment value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 81 kinds of first The first special random numbers are associated so that the special random numbers coincide with the small hit judgment value indicating that the small random hit is won, and the 20217 first special random numbers coincide with the loss judgment value indicating that the above is a loss. It is done. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, the small hit judgment value is set in the low probability big hit judgment table to be compared with the second special random number. It has not been won and there is no chance to win a small hit. In this low probability big hit determination table, it is matched with a big hit determination value indicating that 51 types of second special random numbers are winning in a big hit, and a loss determination value indicating that 20298 types of second special random numbers are the above-mentioned loss The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the above.

  In the high probability big hit judgment table to be compared with the first special random number, 399 kinds of first special random numbers identical to the first special random number set in the low probability big hit judgment table are included. The first special random number coincides with the big hit judgment value, the small hit judgment value which indicates that the 81 types of the first special random numbers are elected as the small hit, and the 19869 first special random number coincide with the loss judgment value As described above, the first special random numbers are associated with one another. In the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, the small hit judgment value is set in the high probability big hit judgment table to be referenced to compare with the second special random number. It has not been won and there is no chance to win a small hit. In the high probability big hit determination table, a big hit indicates that 399 kinds of second special random numbers including the second special random number identical to the second special random number set in the low probability big hit determination table are won as a big hit The second special random numbers are associated with each other such that the second special random numbers match the determination value and the second special random number of the 19950 type matches the loss determination value indicating the loss. Thus, in this embodiment, the winning probability of the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is set to 1/399 at a low probability time (low probability time short state, low probability non-time short state) On the other hand, at the time of high probability (high probability time short state, high probability non-short time state), the big hit judgment value which shows that it wins the above big hit by setting the winning probability of the above special symbol to 1/51 It is higher than low probability.

  As described above, in this example, it is difficult to determine whether it is a small hit or 10R probability variation big hit A among 10 R probability variation big hits when opening and closing control of the first opening and closing winning device 2103 according to the determination result based on the first special random number There is. In addition, when the opening and closing control of the second opening and closing winning device 2103 (big winning opening 2153) is controlled according to the determination result based on the first special random number, it can be specified that it is 10R probability variation big hit B, 10R probability variation big hit C among 10R probability variation big hits According to the determination result based on the second special random number, when the second opening and closing winning device 2104 is controlled to open and close, it can be specified that it is 10R probability variation big hit D out of 10R probability variation big hit.

  If the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 compares the selected big hit determination table with the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, it determines that it is a big hit (step S115) ), The big hit flag which shows that the fluctuation is hit big hit is set (step S116), it moves to step S122, the first which it reads out in step S102 of the selected big hit decision table and the 1st special symbol normal processing As a result of comparison with the special random number, when it is determined to be a small hit (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the change is won in the small hit is set (step S118), and the process proceeds to step S125. And the selected jackpot determination table and the first special symbol read in step S102 of the normal processing Results of the comparison of a special random number, if it is determined that the loss compares the reach random read Reach determination table and step S102 shown in FIG. 182 (B) (step S119).

  The reach determination table shown in FIG. 182 (B) is stored in the ROM 4100 e of the main control MPU 4100 a, and is used when the gaming state is high probability non-short state, reach determination table in high probability non-short state, and gaming state Determination table in high probability time short state used when high probability time short state, and low probability state used when gaming state is low probability state (low probability short time state and low probability time short state) And the reach determination table of Then, in the reach determination table in the high probability time reduction state, it is matched with the reach determination value indicating that one kind of reach random number reaches the reach, and matched with the reach determination value indicating that the 71 reach random numbers do not reach The reach random numbers are associated with one another.

  In the reach determination table in the low probability state, one reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time short state are reached The above reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher than in the high probability time reduction state.

  Furthermore, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-short state, six types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time short state and the low probability state are reached The above reach random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the 66 random numbers reach, and the reach determination value indicating that the 66 types of reach random numbers do not reach. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high probability non-short state, the reach determination value indicating reaching is higher than in the high probability low state and the low probability state (low probability low state, low probability non-short state). Be enhanced.

  If the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102 are the reach loss (step S120), the change is the change (step S120). A reach flag indicating that it will be reach is set (step S121).

  Next, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 subtracts "1" from the counter value of the big hit counter (step S122), and determines whether the counter value of the big hit counter is "0" (step S122) S123). When the initialization process (step S1) is executed when the power is turned on, the gaming state is controlled to the low probability non-short state and the counter value "10" which is the initial value is set in the big hit counter. Then, if the counter value is not "0" in step S123, that is, it is not the last big hit among the 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state (high probability non-short state, high probability short state) If it is a big hit that transitions or continues to the probability state), the big hit determination process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the counter value is "0" in step S123, that is, the last big hit among the 10 big hits from the start of the high probability state to the end thereof (from the high probability state to the low probability state (low probability non-short time state, In the case of a big hit) (transition to the low probability time-short state), "10" is set to the counter value of the big hit number counter (step S124), and the big hit determination processing is ended. In addition, you may make it perform processing which sets counter value "10" to such a big hit frequency counter by special symbol stop processing.

  FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 183, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the process of FIG. As a result of the big hit determination process for the first special symbol, that is, the result of the first special symbol big hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the result of the lottery process is performed by determining whether the big hit flag or the small hit flag is set (steps S131 and S134).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 selects the symbol determination table according to the gaming state (the state of the high probability flag and the short time flag) (step S132a). By comparing the first symbol random number read out in step S102 of the special symbol normal processing with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 182 (C) (step S132 b), the mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol (first symbol Determine the big hit symbol as the stop symbol of the special symbol) (step S133a), according to the determined big hit symbol, the type of big hit, the presence of time saving control after the end of the big hit gaming state, and the number of times variable display that can execute time saving control Determines the type of jackpot gaming state (presence or absence of winning balls), and the presence / absence of reset of the fluctuation counter. (Step S133b). In addition, although the determined number of times is set in the time counter in the first special symbol stop process (step S84), it may be set when the control of the big hit gaming state is ended in the big hit control process. .

  As shown in FIG. 182 (C), in the symbol determination table, the determination results (10R positive variation big A, 10R positive variation big B, 10R positive variation big C, 10R positive variation big D), gaming state (low probability non-short time state low) The symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) are stored in association with each other according to the probability time short state, the high probability non-time short state, and the high probability time short state).

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the type of the jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of the jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the type of the jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different.

In particular,
1. It is difficult to obtain a prize ball by controlling the 10R big hit gaming state (short opening and closing pattern opening and closing pattern 2103 repeated 10 times (10 rounds)) of the short opening, and the counter value of the fluctuation number counter The first big hit state (big hit counter) that triggers the start of a low probability short time state or a low probability time short state (in this case, high probability state (high probability short time state, high probability time short state) without resetting When it occurs in the state of "9") is controlled to the high probability non-short state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, 10 in the high probability non-short state and from the start to the end of the high probability state If it occurs in the last non-big hit state (big hit number counters “1” to “8” states) of the big hit (except for the first big hit that triggers the start of the high probability state) Next, the game is controlled to the high probability non-short state until the big hit gaming state occurs, and it is generated in the high probability non-short state and 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state If it occurs in the last big hit state (with the big hit counter “10”) among the big hits of the (2), then control to the low probability non-time short status until the big hit gaming state occurs next, high probability A state that is not the last big hit out of 10 big hits (except for the first big hit that triggers the start of the high probability state) from the start to the end of the high probability state (big hit number counter is “1”) When it occurs in the state of "8", it is controlled to the high probability time short state until the big hit gaming state occurs next, and it occurs in the high probability time short state and 10 times from the start to the end of the high probability state Jackpot (high probability If it occurs in the last big hit state (with the big hit counter “10”) among the first big hits that trigger the start of the state, it will be controlled to the low probability time short state 100 times short 10R probability variation big hit A which controls to low probability short time state

  2. By controlling the long open 10R big hit gaming state (10 times (10 rounds) the opening and closing pattern to open and close the second opening and closing winning device 2104) by controlling the number of winning balls (for example, the number of winning balls that can be obtained) Expected value is 1000 possible to obtain, reset the counter value of the fluctuation number counter, low probability short time state or low probability time short state (in this case, high probability state (high probability non short state, high probability) If it occurs in the first big hit state (big hit number counter is "9")) which triggers the start timing of the short time state), it controls to the high probability non-short time state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, A state that is not the last big hit out of the 10 big hits (except the first big hit that triggers the start of the high probability state) that occur in the high probability short time state and occur from the start to the end of the high probability state When the number counter is generated in the state of “1” to “8”, it is controlled to the high probability non-short state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and is generated in the high probability non-short state and high probability state If it occurs in the last big hit state (big hit number counter is “10” state) of the 10 big hits from start to finish (except the first big hit that triggers high probability state start) Control the low probability non-short state until the big hit gaming state occurs, occurs in the high probability time short state and 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state (the first big hit that triggers the start of the high probability state If it occurs in the last non-big hit state (with the big hit counter “1” to “8”) of the above, it is controlled to high probability time short state until the next big hit gaming state occurs, and high Occurred in short time and In the case of the last big hit state (big hit number counter is "10" state) out of 10 big hits from start to finish of probability state (except the first big hit which becomes the start of high probability state) 10R probability variation big hit B to control to low probability non-time short state after control to low probability time short state 100 times

  3. By controlling the long open 10R big hit gaming state (10 times (10 rounds) the opening and closing pattern to open and close the second opening and closing winning device 2104) by controlling the number of winning balls (for example, the number of winning balls that can be obtained) Expected value is 1000 possible to obtain, reset the counter value of the fluctuation number counter, low probability short time state or low probability time short state (in this case, high probability state (high probability non short state, high probability) If it occurs in the first big hit state (big hit number counter is "9")) which triggers the start timing of time saving state), it controls to high probability time short state until the next big hitting gaming state occurs, high In the last big hit of the 10 big hits (except the first big hit that triggers the start of the high probability state) that occur in the probability short time state or the high probability time short state and from the start to the end of the high probability state If it occurs in the absence state (big hit number counter '1'-'8' state), it controls to high probability time short state until next big hit gaming state occurs, high probability non time short state or high probability time short state Of the 10 big hits (except for the first big hit that triggers the start of the high probability state) from the start to the end of the high probability state (with the big hit counter being "10") 10R probability variation big hit C to control to low probability non-time short state after controlling to low probability time low state 100 times time

  4. By controlling the long open 10R big hit gaming state (10 times (10 rounds) the opening and closing pattern to open and close the second opening and closing winning device 2104) by controlling the number of winning balls (for example, the number of winning balls that can be obtained) Expected value is 1000 possible to obtain, reset the counter value of the fluctuation number counter, low probability short time state or low probability time short state (in this case, high probability state (high probability non short state, high probability) If it occurs in the first big hit state (big hit number counter is "9")) which triggers the start timing of time saving state), it controls to high probability time short state until the next big hitting gaming state occurs, high In the last big hit of the 10 big hits (except the first big hit that triggers the start of the high probability state) that occur in the probability short time state or the high probability time short state and from the start to the end of the high probability state If it occurs in the absence state (big hit number counter '1'-'8' state), it controls to high probability time short state until next big hit gaming state occurs, high probability non time short state or high probability time short state Of the 10 big hits (except for the first big hit that triggers the start of the high probability state) from the start to the end of the high probability state (with the big hit counter being "10") 10R probability variation big hit D to control to low probability non-time short state after controlling to low probability time low state 100 times time

  According to the type of such a hit, the second special symbol is more than the expected value of the total number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player when the big hit is obtained in the big hit determination processing for the first special symbol. The expected value of the total number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player when the big hit is obtained in the big hit judgment processing of Also, when a big hit is obtained in the big hit determination process for the second special symbol, a lottery mode is adopted in which the big hit determination process for the second special symbol is more advantageous for the player, even in the point that the time saving function always operates. It can be said that

  In this example, the opening time of the first opening and closing winning device 2103 per round in the short opening 10R big hit gaming state and the second opening and closing winning device 2104 per round in the long open 10R big hit gaming state The opening time of the winning opening 2153) is made different. For example, in the case of 10R probability variation big hit B, 10R probability variation big hit C, 10R probability variation big hit D, the open time of the second open / close winning device 2104 per round is controlled to 28.5 seconds. On the other hand, when it becomes 10R probability variation big hit A, it controls to the short open state which makes the open time of the above-mentioned first opening and closing winning device 2103 per round extremely short 0.05 seconds than the long open state. ing. In the case of a small hit, as in the short open 10R big hit gaming state, a short open state in which the opening time of the first opening and closing winning device 2103 per round in the small hit gaming state is 0.05 seconds. Control. Thus, when the 10R probability variation big hit A or the small hit, because the opening time of the first opening and closing winning device 2103 per round in the short open 10R big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state is too short, Even if the opening control of the first open / close winning device 2103 is recognized, it is difficult to make the first open / close winning device 2103 win a game ball. That is, in the long open 10R big hit gaming state, the game balls are successively won in the second open / close winning device 2104 by firing (so-called “right-handed”) game balls aiming at the right side of the center role 2400. It can be expected to obtain many game balls. On the other hand, in the short open 10R big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state, even if you hit left, the game ball hardly wins the first opening and closing winning device 2103, unlike the long open 10R big hit gaming state , Can not expect to win many gaming balls.

  In the left-handed state, the gaming ball does not pass through the gate portion 2107, and the pair of blades 2125 of the second start port 2102 is not opened or closed. Therefore, in the left-handed state, winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2102 does not occur, only winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 2101 occurs, and there is a holding ball of the second special symbol Only the variation display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1185 is executed except in the case, the big hit (10R positive variation big hit A, 10R positive variation big hit B, 10R positive variation big hit C) related to the first special symbol occurs It will be. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the gaming ball does not win in the first starting opening 2101. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 will occur, and the second special symbol of the second special symbol display 1186 except when there is a holding ball of the first special symbol Only the variable display is executed, and a big hit (10R positive variation big hit D) associated with the second special symbol will be generated. Also, if you keep hitting the right while the time saving function is activated, the gauge configuration can be maintained so that the number of pending lottery processing for the second special symbol does not become "0". Therefore, even if there is a holding ball for the first special symbol, combined with the above-mentioned priority control, execution of the lottery process for the first special symbol (10R positive variation big hit A, 10R positive variation big hit B, 10R positive variation big hit C won It is possible to execute only the lottery process (10R positive variation big hit D) pertaining to the second special symbol continuously by avoiding the possibility of being played.

  In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, if it is decided to be 10R probability variation big hit A, it is decided to be 10R probability variation big hit A symbol as big hit symbol, and if 10R probability variation big hit B is decided as big hit symbol 10R probability variation big hit B If it is decided to be a symbol and it is decided to be 10R probability variation big hit C, it will be decided to be a 10 hit probability variation big hit C symbol as a big hit symbol. In addition, although not shown, when it is decided to be 10R certain variation big hit D in the second special symbol stop symbol setting processing, it is decided to be 10R certain variation big hit D symbol as big hit design.

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S134), and if the small hit flag is set, the variation stop of the first special symbol The small hit symbol is determined as an aspect of (step S135), and if the small hit flag is not set, the lost special symbol is determined as a variation stop state of the first special symbol (step S136).

  And in the pachinko machine 1 concerning this embodiment, after the decision processing about a stop pattern is performed in this way, "1" is added to the counter value of the fluctuation number counter (step S137a), and then 10R definite variation big hit It is determined whether or not B, 10R probability variation big hit C is determined (step S137b). And, if it is decided to be able to obtain many winning balls by controlling the long open 10R big hit gaming state among the hits, if it is decided to be the type (10R positive variation big hit B, 10R positive variation big hit C), Assuming that a specific reset condition (a condition that requires at least a big hit) is satisfied, the count value of the fluctuation number counter is reset (step S137c). On the other hand, even if it is determined to be a loss, or even if a hit is obtained, a type (10R probability variation) in which it is not possible to obtain a large number of winning balls by controlling to the short open 10R big hit gaming state If it is determined that the big hit A) or small hit, it does not reset the count value of the fluctuation number counter, assuming that a specific reset condition (a condition requiring at least a big hit) is not satisfied. In addition, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S39 of the special symbol process processing, when it is decided to be 10R probability variation big hit D, that is, by controlling to long open 10R big hit gaming state Also, when it is decided to be a big hit that can be acquired, the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is reset. On the other hand, when there is a loss, the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is not reset. In addition, you may make it perform processing which resets the counter value of such a fluctuation | variation number counter by special symbol stop processing.

  Then, main control MPU 4100a of main control board 4100, as the processing of step S137, indicates the lottery result (type of big hit, small hit, small hit, reach lost, or lost) (instruction of stop symbol of first special symbol) And the judgment result notification command according to each of the lottery results is set so as to send the peripheral control board 4010). And after that, this process is complete | finished when the above-mentioned 1st special symbol process flag is updated so that a process may be transfered to said 1st fluctuation pattern setting process (step S82) as a process of step S138.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a performs display control of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the received determination result notification command, variation pattern command, and current gaming state. That is, although described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, “10,000” according to the type (10R probability variation big hit C, 10R probability variation big hit D) only when the current gaming state is in the low probability state It is possible to obtain a large number of prize balls.

  Therefore, when the current gaming state is the low probability state and the gaming state in which the right-handed game is not performed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 displays a numeric symbol consisting of blue characters and a special character symbol. It is considered to be variable as a decorative pattern. And as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the fluctuation stop, when 10R certainty variation big hit A among the big hit is specified from the received judgment result notification command, 10R certain variation big hit A symbol (a combination of decorative symbols which become reach loss) A combination of decorative symbols that do not become (but the left and right symbols are the same)) and the 10R positive variation of the big hit B is specified, the 10R positive variation big hit B symbol (the same number symbol of the number symbol consisting of blue letters) If the 10R probability variation big hit C is specified, the 10R probability variation big hit C design (combination in which special character symbols are displayed in a row) is decided, 10R probability variation big hit D When it is specified, it is decided to be 10R probability variation big hit D symbol (a combination in which special character symbols are displayed in line). In addition, when small hitting is specified, it decides to small hitting design (combination of the decorative design which becomes reach loss), when it specifies the reach losing, it decides to the lost design with the reach (combination of the decorative designs which becomes reach losing) If a loss is identified, it is determined that the lost design without reach (combination of decorative designs that are not identical, and the left and right decorative designs are not identical), and the elapsed time of fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command At the time (the end of the game effect), display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  However, even if the current gaming state is the low probability state, the gaming state in which the right-handed game is executable (the gaming state after exceeding a predetermined number of rotations described later, the time saving function is activated When it is in the gaming state), since it is possible to play so that only 10R probability variation big hit D (10000 winning balls won) can be won, the number pattern consisting of blue letters is erased and the special character pattern and A blank pattern that fills the space between the character patterns is made variable as a decorative pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. And as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the change stop, when the 10R positive variation big hit C or 10R positive variation big hit D among the big hit is specified, it decides on the combination which the special character design is displayed in a row, If a hit of any other type is obtained, it is decided to be a combination in which blank symbols are displayed in a uniform manner, and if reach loss is specified, it is decided to be a lost design with reach (combination of decorative symbols serving as reach reach). If a loss is identified, it is determined that the lost design without reach (combination of decorative designs that are not identical, and the left and right decorative designs are not identical), and the elapsed time of fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command At the time (the end of the game effect), display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when a hit other than 10R certainty big hit C, D is obtained, after the blank symbols are aligned and stopped, only 10R certainty big hit D (10,000 balls won) can be won. An effect image indicating that the playable gaming state has ended appears. However, if a small hit is won, the game is in such a game state that it is possible to play a right-handed game after this, and only the 10R probability variation big hit D (10000 winning balls won) can be won It will be returned again to the display mode of the effect and the decorative symbol shown to be possible.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is a high probability state and in the gaming state in which a right-handed game is not performed, it is necessary to obtain 10000 balls regardless of what type of hit is obtained. Can not. Therefore, special character designs are not displayed, and numeric symbols made of blue letters and numeric symbols made of red letters are made variable as decorative symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900. And as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the fluctuation stop, when 10R certainty variation big hit A among the big hit is specified from the received judgment result notification command, 10R certain variation big hit A symbol (a combination of decorative symbols which become reach loss) A combination of decorative symbols that do not become (but the left and right symbols are the same)) and the 10R positive variation of the big hit B is specified, the 10R positive variation big hit B symbol (the same number symbol of the number symbol consisting of blue letters) If the 10R probability variation big hit C is specified among the big hit, it is decided to be 10R probability variation big hit C design (combination of the same number symbols of the number designs consisting of red letters), 10R probability variation big hit among the big hit When D is specified, it is decided to be 10R probability variation big hit D design (combination of the same number design of the number design consisting of red letters). In addition, when small hitting is specified, it decides to small hitting design (combination of the decorative design which becomes reach loss), when it specifies the reach losing, it decides to the lost design with the reach (combination of the decorative designs which becomes reach losing) If a loss is identified, it is determined that the lost design without reach (combination of decorative designs that are not identical, and the left and right decorative designs are not identical), and the elapsed time of fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command At the time (the end of the game effect), display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  However, even if the current gaming state is the high probability state, when it is in the gaming state in which the right-handed game is executable (the gaming state in which the time saving function is activated), the hit of any type is obtained Even if you can not get 10000 prize balls, you can play so that only 10R probability variation big hit D (you can get the prize balls) can be won, and if any hits are obtained Even if there is no time-saving function will end immediately after a big hit game. Therefore, the number pattern consisting of blue letters is extinguished, and the number pattern consisting of red pattern and the blank pattern filling in between the number patterns are made variable as a decorative pattern displayed on the crystal display device 1900. And as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of the fluctuation stop, when the 10R positive variation big hit B, 10R positive variation big hit C, or 10R positive variation big hit D among the big hit is specified, the number symbols consisting of red symbols are aligned and displayed If it is decided to be the combination to be done, and hit of the other type is obtained, it is decided to be the combination in which the blank symbol is aligned and displayed, and if the reach loss is specified, the lost pattern with reach (becomes reach loss) When it is determined to be a combination of decorative symbols and a loss is identified, it is determined to be a lost symbol without reach (a combination of decorative symbols that are not identical and the left and right decorative symbols are not identical). At the time of elapse of the specified fluctuation time (at the end of the game effect), display control of the determined stop symbol is performed on the liquid crystal display device 1900.

  FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 184, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S141), the type of jackpot determined in step S123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing, and the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of jackpot according to the current gaming state is selected (step S142) If the small hit flag is set (step S143), select the small hit variation pattern table (not shown) according to the current gaming state (step S144), and the reach flag is set. (Step S145), the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach according to the current gaming state If no big hit flag, small hit flag, or reach flag is set (ie, normal lose (no reach effect is to be performed)), the variation pattern table at the time of loss is selected. (Not shown) is selected (step S147).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is to be started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 4010 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S150). As a result, the fluctuation control is performed in the first special symbol display 1185 and the liquid crystal display device 1900 for the fluctuation time determined in this way.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, in the fluctuation patterns set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for fluctuation display control of the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is It is stored in a form associated with each of the variable random numbers. Thus, main control MPU 4100a selects a variation pattern table selected from among a plurality of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing. Are compared, and fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is acquired from this table to determine the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the ROM 4100 e of the main control MPU 4100 a.

  In addition, when the variable display control of the first special symbol is started, it is next determined as the process of step S151 whether or not the count value of the time counter is "0" when the number of continuations of the time saving state is set. Do. Then, if the counter value is not "0", after counting down the time counter (step S152), it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous short counter is "0" (step S153). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving end flag indicating that the control of the time saving state is ended is set (step S154).

  If it is determined in the process of step S151 that the counter value of the time reduction counter is "0", if it is determined in the process of step S153 that the time reduction counter is not "0", Then, the process proceeds to step S155. Then, when the above first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above first special symbol variation processing (step S83) (step S155), this processing is ended.

  FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 185, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S171. As a process of (1), the fluctuation timer for which the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the fluctuation pattern is set is decremented by one. Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the above-mentioned lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the above-mentioned first special symbol stop processing (step S84) in the processing of step S173, this processing is ended.

  FIG. 186 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 186, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs step S181. The display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing on the first special symbol display 1185 is performed as the processing of the first special symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1900. A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol according to the stop symbol of is set as the command to the peripheral substrate 4010 (step S182).

  Next, when the time reduction end flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 resets the time reduction end flag (step S184) and resets the time reduction flag (step S185). Thus, the control of the short time state is ended and the control of the non short time state is started.

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is to be started (step S187). The standby time until the start of the state (the time for displaying a message to start the big hit gaming state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the above-mentioned time saving flag is set. The short time flag is reset (step S189), and it is determined whether the counter value of the big hit number counter is "10" (step S193a). Then, if the counter value is not "10" in step S193a, that is, it is not the last big hit among the 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state (high probability non-short state, high probability short state) Big hit if it is a big hit to control to the above time saving state (high probability time short state, low probability time short state) while setting the high probability flag after the big hit gaming state end if it is a big hit transitioning to the probability state or continuing) When the time saving flag is set after the end (step S193 b) and the first special symbol process flag is updated to be process transition to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step S194), this processing is performed finish. As a result, after the end of the big hit gaming state, the control of the high probability state will be started, and if it is a big hit to control to the above time shortening state (high probability time short state, low probability time short state), control of the time short state will be started .

  On the other hand, if the counter value is "10" in step S193a, that is, the last big hit of the 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state (from the high probability state to the low probability state (low probability untimely state, If it is a big hit) (transition to a low probability time-short state), it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to control to the time short state (high probability time short state, low probability time short state) (step S193c). And if it is a big hit to control to the above time saving state (high probability time short status, low probability time short status) in step S193c, while setting "100" to the counter value of the time saving number counter (step S193c), after the big hit gaming state end When the time saving flag is set and the first special symbol process flag is updated so as to be process transition to the first special symbol normal processing which is an initial value (step S194), this processing is ended. As a result, after the big hit gaming state ends, if it is a big hit controlled to the above time saving state (high probability time short status, low probability time short status), control of time saving state of 100 times saving time will be started.

  The jackpot start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4010, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a big hit start command (10 R positive variation big hit A start command, 10 R positive variation big hit B start command, 10 R according to the big hit type (10 R positive variation big hit A, 10 R positive variation big hit B, 10 R positive variation big hit C, 10 R positive variation big hit D) Set the definite variation big hit C start command, 10R definite variation big hit D start command). As a result, the effect of the big hit gaming state according to the type of big hit instructed by the big hit start command is executed by the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, and the speakers 130, 222, 262, 821 and the like.

  On the other hand, when the small hit flag is set (step S195), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a small hit start command indicating start of the small hit gaming state (step S196). The standby time until the start of the small hit gaming state (the time for displaying the small hit gaming state to be displayed, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S 197). Then, the small hit in progress flag indicating that the small hit game state is being executed is set (step S198), and the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag (Step S194), this process ends. The small hit start command is a command to be transmitted to the peripheral substrate 4010, and in step S196, by setting the small hit start command, the effect of the small hit gaming state instructed by the small hit start command is a liquid crystal display It is implemented by the apparatus 1900, the lamp / LED and the speakers 130, 222, 262, 821 and so on.

  FIG. 187 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol process (step S15).

  Now, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2176 is in the on state in the process of step S801 and it is determined that the game ball has passed to the gate unit 2107, as shown in FIG. 187, the main As the processing of step S802, the main control MPU 4100a of the control board 4100 first acquires the counter value by the above-mentioned normal holding number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. And based on this counter value, it is judged whether the number of holdings of a normal symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  If it is determined in the process of step S802 that the number of reserved normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S803 to S805 are performed in order to newly put the variable display control of the normal symbols on hold status. It will process. That is, first, as the process of the step S 803, the normal hold number counter is counted up (one added). Next, as the process of step S804, the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned common variable random number are acquired from the above-mentioned random number counter. Then, next, in the process of step S805, each random number acquired in this way is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter among the storage areas of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S802 that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processing of step S803 to step S805, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

  Then, in the normal symbol process processing, one of the following five process operations is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. The ordinary random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read, and the ordinary symbol judgment processing for the ordinary symbol is performed based on the read ordinary random number (step S806)
2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination processing in which lottery processing or the like for the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 is performed based on the common pattern fluctuation random number (step S807)
3. Normal symbol variation processing to stand by until the variation display of the above normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped (step S808)
4. The pattern at the time of the variation control stop of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the normal hitting judgment processing in the normal symbol normal processing is displayed on the above-mentioned normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol which stops the fluctuation display of the above-mentioned normal symbol Stop process (step S809)
5. When the result of the lottery process about the mode at the time of fluctuation control stop of the normal symbol becomes the mode which suggests “per common drawing”, the process of controlling the pair of blades 2125 to the open state is executed. Process (step S810)

  The normal symbol process flag is manipulated to indicate that the normal symbol normal processing (step S806) should be performed in the process of step S1 described above (see FIG. 175).

  FIG. 188 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal processing (step S806).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 188, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the processing in step S821. Based on the counter value by the normal holding number counter, it is determined whether or not there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the holding state. As a result, when it is determined that there is fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the state of suspension, the processing of step S822 next, the normal stored in the normal symbol storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers (for example, ordinary random number, common drawing random number) related to the display mode of the symbol is read out from the same RAM 4100 e. Then, next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, while counting down the above-mentioned normal number-of-holds counter, at the time of the fluctuation display stop of the above-mentioned normal symbol stored in each storage area of the ordinary storage area of RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. The shift operation is performed in a first-in first-out mode for random numbers (normal random numbers, common drawing random numbers) related to the display mode in.

  Specifically, the normal symbol storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2107 are sequentially from the first (first) area Remember. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2107, the random number extracted to the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is When the variable display start condition stored based on the random number stored and stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) -th (N = 2 to 4) -th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs is stored so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension occurring first). .

  Next, if the current gaming state is the short time state (low probability time short state, high probability time short state) (step S826), the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the spread table per time judgment table (not shown) ) Is selected (step S826), and if the current gaming state is the non-short state (low probability non-short state, high probability non-short state) (step S825), the non-short time per common drawing determination table (not shown) Is selected (step S827), and the selected common drawing determination table is compared with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing (step S828).

  In addition, the determination table for the common drawing is stored in the ROM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a, and the determination table for the common drawing in the short time to be used when the gaming state is short (low probability time short status and high probability time short status), It has a non-time-shorting popular map determination table used when the gaming state is non-time-short (a low probability non-short condition, a high probability non-short condition). Then, in the common time-per-diagram determination table, which is referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, the two types of normals coincide with the common-per-diagram determination value indicating that 500 types of normal random numbers have been selected per common diagram. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with a common drawing loss determination value indicating that the random number is a common drawing loss.

  Further, in the non-short time common drawing determination table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, 251 kinds of normal random numbers match the common drawing determination values, and the 251 kinds of normal random numbers are common drawing loss determination values. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are respectively associated so as to match each other. As described above, in this embodiment, the judgment value per common drawing indicating that the common drawing is won in the short time is higher than that in the non-short time. Also, although this will be described later, in this embodiment, even when non-short time, when a normal hit determination process (normal lottery) is performed, as a result a high probability of 50% or more (probability of not falling below at least the appearance ratio of normal loss) The average hit is obtained in the game, the playability after the number of times (the number of changes) of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, the second special symbol) exceeds 800 times It can be enhanced.

  If the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the selected common drawing is the common drawing as a result of comparison between the selected common drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S115) ), After setting the flag per common drawing showing that the fluctuation is won per common drawing (step S116), per common drawing as a mode (stop symbol of normal design) at the time of change control stop of the normal symbol A symbol is determined (step S831). On the other hand, when it is determined to be lost as a result of comparison between the selected common drawing determination table and the normal random number read out in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing, the mode (normal symbol A common figure lost symbol as a stop symbol) is determined (step S832). Then, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation time determination processing (step S808), this processing is ended.

  FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S807).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation time determination process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 189, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has the time saving flag set. (Step S841), select the common drawing fluctuation time determination table (not shown) when time is short (step S842), and if the count value of the fluctuation number counter is less than "800", ie, the first special symbol big hit judgment Number of times (1st special) the variation display of the special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) after resetting the counter value of the variation number counter in step S127 of processing or step S227 of 2nd special symbol big hit judgment processing If the total value of the number of variations of the second special symbol does not exceed 800 (step S843), the number of variations When the arrival time non-short time common drawing fluctuation time determination table (not shown) is selected (step S844) and the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is "800" or more, that is, step S127 of the first special symbol big hit judgment processing Or the number of times (the number of times of fluctuation) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) after resetting the counter value of the fluctuation number counter in step S227 of the second special symbol big hit judgment processing is 800 times If it exceeds (step S 843), a common drawing variation time determination table (not shown) is selected (at step S 844).

  Then, the common drawing fluctuation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected common drawing fluctuation time determination table with the common drawing fluctuation random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S148), and the normal symbol display 1189 is selected. The variation display of the normal symbol displayed on the screen is started (step S847). Further, the main control MPU 4100a sets the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set corresponding to the common drawing fluctuation pattern determined to determine the common drawing fluctuation pattern in the common drawing fluctuation timer (step S847). As a result, symbol control is performed on the normal symbol display 1189 only for the variation time of the normal symbol determined in this way. Then, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation processing (step S808), this processing is ended (step S849).

  In addition, as for the common drawing fluctuation time decision table of this example, the number of times (number of fluctuation) of fluctuation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) after resetting the counter value of fluctuation number counter is 800 times If the fluctuation number of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) and the above special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is more than 800 times It has a common drawing fluctuation time determination table at the time of non-time short at the time of fluctuation number arrival used for. In addition, in the common drawing fluctuation patterns set in each common drawing fluctuation time determination table, fluctuation time information of a plurality of normal symbols indicating the predetermined time (the fluctuation time of the normal symbol) required for the fluctuation display control of the above normal symbols It is stored in a form associated with each of the above-described map random numbers. Thus, main control MPU 4100a selects a common drawing fluctuation time determination table selected from among a plurality of common drawing fluctuation time determination tables according to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). The fluctuation of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is made by comparing from the table the fluctuation time information of the ordinary symbol which is related to the common drawing fluctuation random number which is read out in step S822 of the symbol normal processing Determine the pattern. As a result, the lottery process for the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is performed. The common drawing fluctuation time determination table is stored in the ROM 4100 e of the main control MPU 4100 a.

  That is, in a pachinko machine equipped with such a time saving function or a probability changing function, the burden on the hole side in an advantageous gaming state (a gaming state in which at least one of the time shortening function and the probability changing function is activated) often increases. . For this reason, in the normal gaming state (a gaming state in which neither the time saving function nor the probability changing function is activated), a game (low probability and low) in which consumption of relatively large game balls is required By playing the game at the starting rate), a balance is placed on the burden on the hall side and the player side as a whole of the pachinko machine.

  However, since the burden on the player side is increased in the normal gaming state by the amount of balance achieved in this manner, the game continues if the jackpot is not won despite the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time The motivation for this will eventually be lost, which may adversely affect the operation rate of pachinko machines.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the average total number of game balls hit on the game area 1100 required to obtain a big hit (special lottery result) is maintained as a relatively large value. It is controlled so that this relatively large average total impact amount is made variable to a smaller side within a predetermined specific adjustment range. In addition, as a timing for performing such control, it is assumed that a time when many gaming balls are consumed in the normal gaming state where the burden on the player side is large, that is, a time when a specified amount of profit is given to the hall side. ing.

  According to such a configuration, from the viewpoint of the hall side, after acquiring a certain amount of profit first, the range in which the gaming characteristics as a normal gaming state (the balance between the hall side and the player's side) is not broken Since only adjustment is made to reduce the burden on the player side a little, the burden in the normal gaming state does not increase. On the other hand, from the player's side, such an adjusted gaming state is generated on the condition that oneself has consumed many gaming balls, so the game is stopped in the gaming state. Being (a vacant platform) can also be a form of self-sacrifice and help other players at no cost. In addition, if it is possible to play the game under any advantageous conditions, the motivation to continue the game will be maintained. As a result, while suppressing that the burden on the hall side in the normal gaming state becomes large, improvement of the operating rate as the pachinko machine 1 is achieved through the formation of a gaming situation which makes it difficult for the player to stop the game. Will be able to

  More specifically, in the normal gaming state, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) from the last big hit end (more exactly, when the long open big hit gaming state ends) In the general drawing fluctuation time determination table used in a period before the number of fluctuations exceeds a specific number of adjustments (for example, 800 times), the period of 60 seconds to 10 seconds in the range of 60 to 600 seconds The fluctuation time information (the fluctuation pattern of the ordinary symbol) of 55 types of ordinary symbols set in the step is stored in the form of being associated with each of the random number values that can be acquired as the common pattern fluctuation random number. That is, in this common drawing fluctuation time determination table, the time (average value) required for the fluctuation display control of the above-mentioned normal symbol is lengthened, and the fluctuation is intentionally made large, whereby the operation of the pair of blades 2125 It is made difficult to hit the game ball at the timing when the second starting opening 2102 is opened.

  In addition, during the non-hourly non-shortening period of the fluctuation number, in order to achieve the above-mentioned balance with the advantageous gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is relatively low probability of normal time (for example, 1/1 2) and the pair of blades 2125 have a relatively low entry probability even when the lottery result of the normal symbol is hit, the normal operation mode (for example, 0) It is possible to operate only when the opening and closing pattern of .5 seconds is repeated twice. Therefore, during the relevant period, even if the game ball is shot to hit the right side of the center character 2400 (so-called "right-handed"), the game ball is not nearly entered into the second starting opening 2102 so that a big hit occurs. Can not expect. For this reason, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol is in the non-short time state before the predetermined number of times (specific adjustment number of times), the player is not the second start opening 2102 but the first start opening The game ball is fired (so-called “left-handed”) by aiming at the left side of the center character 2400 so that many game balls win in 2101.

  By the way, in the corresponding period when the variation count is not reached, the above pair is only with the normal operation mode (for example, the opening and closing pattern of 0.5 seconds is repeated twice) which is considered to have a relatively low entering probability. Since the wing 2125 of the second wing 2125 is made operable, even if it is possible to strike the gaming ball aiming at the timing at which the second starting opening 2102 is opened (although this can not be realized), a game in which the time saving function is activated. The probability of entering the starting opening is increased only by the "normal ideal entering probability" that can not reach the "time to time entering probability" (the probability of being able to play a game without almost reducing possession) of the state. Absent.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when so-called "left-handed" 250 game balls, in any game state, an average of 20 games at the first starting opening 2101 The ball is supposed to enter the ball (normal probability of entering the ball normally). In this sense, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the probability that the game ball is inserted into the starting opening (the first starting opening 2101 or the second starting opening 2102) does not matter even the type of the starting opening If it does not exist, it can be said that the "normal real ball entry probability" is guaranteed as the lower limit value.

  On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the time saving function is activated, when 250 game balls are so-called "right-handed", 80 game balls are entered on average in the second starting opening 2102 (Hourly entry probability). In this respect, since three game balls are paid out when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2102, 240 so-called “right-handed” 250 game balls averages 240 Each game ball will be paid out. Therefore, in the gaming state in which the time saving function is activated, although the burden on the hole side is large, it is possible for the player side to play the game without reducing the number of gaming balls until the big hit is obtained.

  As a more specific control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the above normal symbol is set to 250/251, and the time required for the variable display control of the above normal symbol is shorter than the non time saving state (for example, 0. 5 seconds). Then, when the lottery result of the normal symbol is hit, the pair of blades 2125 of the second start port 2102 is closed as an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) longer than the non-short time state. The opening and closing pattern is repeated more times (for example, three times) than the non-short time state. That is, during the control of the time saving state, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will hit is extremely higher than that in the non-time saving state, and the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol The average value of A) is constant and short, and the open state time of the pair of blades 2125 is long, etc., making it easy to win the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 significantly more than the non-short time state, It is more efficient to aim the game ball more effectively by aiming at the second starting opening 2102 than the first starting opening 2101. In addition, as described later, when the game ball wins in the second starting opening 2102, the number of winning balls as the type of big hit when the lottery process of the special symbol becomes a big hit than the first starting port 2101 There is a high probability of deciding on a jackpot set to control to a large jackpot gaming state (long open jackpot gaming state). Therefore, during the control of the time saving state, the player passes the right of the center character 2400 so that many game balls pass through the gate unit 2107 and many game balls win the second start opening 2102. To shoot the game ball (so-called "right-handed").

  On the other hand, in the non-short time period when the variation count is not reached in the normal gaming state, the normal operation mode (for example, the opening / closing pattern of 0.5 seconds is set to 2 relatively low pitch probability) Since the pair of blades 2125 can be operated only when the operation is repeated, it is possible to provisionally so-called "right-hand" 250 game balls aiming at the timing at which the second starting opening 2102 is opened. Even though it is impossible (almost impossible), taking into consideration the passage of the gate section 2107 and the need to win a normal hit, only 26 game balls can be entered on average in the second starting opening 2102 ( Normal entry probability).

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) exceeds a specific number of adjustments (for example, 800 times), the above-mentioned relative The upper limit of the average total number of shots required for a big hit to be obtained when the game is played under the "normal time of entering the ball" is the upper limit of the average number of average hits. The side where the average total number of hits required to get a big hit when playing under the ball entry probability is smaller than the lower limit of the specified adjustment range (the “normal ideal ball entry probability”) It is controlled to be variable to the side that approaches).

  More specifically, in the normal gaming state, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) from the last big hit end (more exactly, when the long open big hit gaming state ends) In the common drawing fluctuation time determination table used in a predetermined period (when the fluctuation frequency is not reached when the fluctuation frequency is reached) after the fluctuation frequency exceeds a specific adjustment frequency (for example, 800), the range of 7.23 to 7.77 seconds And 55 kinds of fluctuation time information (variation pattern of ordinary symbol) of 55 kinds of ordinary symbols set in 0.01 second steps are stored in the form of being corresponded to each of the random number values that can be acquired as common drawing fluctuation random numbers ing. That is, in this common drawing fluctuation time determination table, the time required for the fluctuation display control of the above-mentioned normal symbol as compared to the common drawing fluctuation time determination table used in the period before the specific adjustment number of times (for example, 800 times) By reducing the (average value) and minimizing the variation, the second starting opening 2102 can be achieved with an entry probability close to the “normal ideal ball entry probability” simply by continuing the so-called “right strike”. Game balls will be allowed to enter (for example, when 250 game balls are hit “right”, an average of 25 game balls will be entered in the second starting opening 2102 ). However, for the time (average value) required for the fluctuation display control of the above-mentioned normal symbol determined by the common drawing fluctuation time determination table when the fluctuation number is not short, the time reduction state (general drawing fluctuation time determination table when time is short It is set to be longer than).

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as long as the gaming state is normal, the number of times of variation of the special symbol (the total value of the number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is a specific number of adjustments Whether the game ball passes through the gate 2107 regardless of whether it exceeds (for example, 800 times), the probability at the normal time (for example, the winning probability "1/2" of the normal symbol), and the operation at the normal time By allowing the pair of blades 2125 to be operable only with an aspect (for example, a pair of blades 2125 repeating an opening and closing pattern of 0.5 seconds twice), the above-mentioned fluctuation number reaching time is not working. Even when control using the common drawing fluctuation time determination table is executed, the average total hit amount of game balls to the game area 1100 required to obtain a big hit is a relatively large value. This is to be maintained.

  However, even in the case of performing control in such a way to perform adjustment in such a way as to slightly reduce the burden on the player side, in the normal gaming state, after all, relatively many game balls are consumed ( If the player does not launch the game area 1100, the burden on the player can not be alleviated a little, as well as winning the jackpot. In other words, in the normal gaming state, although the consumption of a relatively large number of gaming balls (the launch to the gaming area 1100) is required until the big hit is obtained, the gaming balls that are consumed in this way are Since the game is often wasted without creating any value, the game's interest also falls due to regret over having consumed many game balls in the game up to the specified number of adjustments I have a concern.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the jackpot determination process for the second special symbol (lottery on the second starting opening 2102 side) in the non-short time period when the number of fluctuations does not reach the normal gaming state A game that can be acquired by the player when a big hit is obtained in the big hit determination process (lottery process on the first starting port 2101 side) for the first special symbol when a big hit is obtained in the processing). At least a portion of the average total number of game balls impacted on the game area 1100 required to exceed the specified number of adjustments when compared with the expected number of balls relative to the expected number of items to be compared. It is controlled so that the player can acquire the game ball of the quantity expectation value which has been increased as a premium portion of the game.

  That is, as described above, in this embodiment, when 250 game balls are hit to the left, on average, 20 game balls enter the first starting opening 2101, so The number of gaming balls required to perform the jackpot determination process (lottery process on the first starting opening 2101 side) for the special symbol 800 times is “10000”. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the lottery process on the side played by the player (second starting port 2102) when in the predetermined period after the specific adjustment number of times (800 times) is exceeded. When a big hit is obtained in the lottery process on the side, a part of the “10000” consumed (the hole side has won) by the player before the adjustment count is exceeded is increased as a premium. The game ball of the quantity expectation value is made to be able to be acquired. In addition, when a big hit is obtained in the big hit determination process (lottery process on the second starting opening 2102 side) for the second special symbol, even when the time saving function is always operated, the game is performed until the adjustment frequency is exceeded. It can be said that at least a part of the "10000" consumed by the consumer (acquired by the hall) contributes as a premium. As a result, it is avoided that the gaming balls consumed during the time before the specific adjustment count (800 times) in the normal gaming state is wasted without producing any value. As a result, the decline in gaming interest will be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
-In the normal gaming state, the expected value of the total number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player when the big hit is obtained in the big hit determination process (lottery process on the first starting port 2101 side) for the first special symbol The difference between the expected value on the first side) and the average total hit amount when playing for the first starting opening 2101 is "A", and · · in the normal gaming state, the big hit judgment processing for the second special symbol When the jackpot is obtained in the (lottery processing on the second starting opening 2102 side), the expected value (second side expected value) of the total number of winning balls that can be obtained by the player when the big hit is obtained and the second starting opening 2102 are aimed. The difference with the average total number of hits when playing a game "B"
When assuming that the number of changes in the special symbol (total value of the number of changes in the first special symbol and the second special symbol) exceeds a specific number of adjustments (for example, 800), the game ball 2107 is played Change the setting to shorten the length of the game cycle (normal symbol fluctuation time) from when it passes through to the operation of the pair of blades 2125. The above difference is changed from the relationship “A> B” (before 800) to the relationship “A <B” (after 800).

  In such a configuration, even if the consumption of gaming balls has increased to the extent of exceeding a specific number of adjustments (800 times) without a big hit being won, the hall side is large. Anxiety about continuing the game without burdening the burden will be alleviated, and a drop in gaming interest will be suppressed.

  However, on the other hand, as long as it is in the normal gaming state, the number of variations of the special symbol (the total of the number of variations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) has exceeded a specific number of adjustments (for example, 800) Regardless of whether or not the game ball passes through the gate portion 2107, the probability at the normal time (for example, the probability of winning the normal symbol "1/2"), and the operation mode at the normal time (for example, the pair of blades 2125 0 As described above, the pair of blades 2125 is made operable only when the opening and closing pattern of 5 seconds is repeated twice. Therefore, even if the above difference is changed from the relationship “A> B” (before 800) to the relationship “A <B” (after 800), the jackpot is The average total consumption of gaming balls required to be obtained can be maintained as a relatively large value.

  In addition, the average total consumption of gaming balls required to obtain a big hit in each gaming state, the winning probability of the normal symbol set in each gaming state, the variation display pattern of the normal symbol (variation time), It includes the influence of the operation mode of the pair of blades 2125 when the player wins the hit with the normal symbol.

  As described above, during control of the non-time-short state after the number of times of variation of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be hit, or the open state of the pair of blades 2125 The time is the same as during the control of the non-short time before the number of times the variation of the special symbol exceeds a predetermined number, but the average value of the time required for the variation display control of the normal symbol is significantly shortened Although the variation is also reduced, it is possible to win the gaming ball to the second starting opening 2102 although it is not as short as the above time saving state, and the number of times of variation display of the second special symbol per unit time is increased. For this reason, during control of the non-time-short state after the number of times of variation of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number, a relatively large number of games are played in the second starting opening 2102 by passing the gaming ball to the gate 2107 Combined with the fact that the ball is able to win and the lottery process of the second special symbol is more preferential to the lottery process of the second special symbol than the lottery process of the first special symbol, the game is aimed at the right side of the center character 2400 to play a game It is useful for the player to play the ball so as to fire (so-called "right-handed").

  And although this is also mentioned above, in this embodiment, when hitting the gaming ball of 250 times to the left, although 20 gaming balls are entered on average in the first starting opening 2101 On the other hand, during control of the non-time-short state after the number of times of variation of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number of times, the non-time-short time non-time-shorting common drawing variation time determination table and the gauge configuration on the right of the game area 1100 When 250 game balls are hit to the right, an average of 25 game balls are made to enter the second starting opening 2102 on average. In this way, during the control of the non-time-short state after the number of times the variation of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number, the number when the ball is hit to the right than the ball entering probability to the first starting opening 2101 when the ball is hit to the left Since the probability of entering the second starting opening 2102 is slightly higher, the consumption of the player's balls can not be sufficiently suppressed as in the time saving.

  However, during the control of the non-time-short state after the number of times the variation of the special symbol has exceeded the predetermined number, although consumption of the ball of the player can not be sufficiently suppressed as in the time-short time, It is possible to execute the lottery process of the second special symbol in which the lottery content is more favored than the lottery process of the special symbol. In particular, in the lottery process of the second special symbol according to this embodiment, only "10R probability variation big hit D" is obtained as the type of hit. Therefore, if a hit is obtained in the second special symbol lottery process during the control of the non-short time state after the number of times of variation of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number, the remaining nine times until the high probability state ends It is possible to perform a lottery for winning a ball, and when the consumption of holding balls is suppressed, it is possible to perform the short function while operating, and it becomes possible to obtain a winning ball in a big hit game in each of those per .

  That is, in this case, assuming that the expected value of the number of winning balls that can be obtained in the big hit game according to the "10R probability variation big hit D" is 1,000, the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number. During control of the non-time-short state, if the hit is once obtained in the lottery process of the second special symbol, it will be "10,000" by "1000 × 10 times" with consumption of holding balls suppressed. It will be expected to earn a large number of winning balls.

  In addition, during control of the non-time-short state after the number of times of variation of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number, when 250 game balls are hit to the right, 25 game balls are averaged on the second starting opening 2102 Although the winning probability of the big hit is a low probability such as "1/399" because it is to be entered, the big hit is won if you hit the average of 4,000 game balls on the calculation The Rukoto. Therefore, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number (800 times), “10000” can be obtained when the big hit is obtained, and the high probability non-short time state until the big hit is obtained You can expect as a net increase the number of "4000" required and the difference between "1000", which is the number of gaming balls to be consumed during a 10-time big hit game, and this special symbol The non-time saving state after the number of times of fluctuation exceeds a predetermined number of times (800 times) is also a state in which the number of balls is decreasing due to game progress (a state in which neither the probability changing function nor the time saving function is activated) Regardless of the player), it can be said that the gaming state is such that it is difficult to cancel even if it is desired to stop further games.

  However, with regard to the expected value of the game ball that can be obtained when a big hit is obtained when the number of times of variation of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number (800 times), this produces the above-mentioned net increase number It is more desirable to avoid such a large value. That is, in this case, the player's motivation for continuing the game can be maintained while reducing the burden on the hole side in the normal gaming state.

  In addition, for the probability of entering the second starting opening 2102 after the number of times of variation of the special symbol has reached the predetermined number, the lottery process of the second special symbol is more favored than the lottery process of the first special symbol. In this sense, it is sufficient if the probability is that it is more profitable for the player to play the game ball so as to aim at the right side of the center character 2400 and launch the game ball (so-called “right strike”). It does not necessarily have to be higher than the probability of entering the first starting opening 2101. However, in this case, at least a portion of the decrease in the probability of entering the starting opening after the number of times of variation of the special symbol has reached the predetermined number will be used as the preferential amount of the content of the lottery. Therefore, at least a part of the average hitting total number of game balls required until the number of times of variation of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number is not increased as a premium for the above-mentioned first side expected value.

[7. Control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140 a of the peripheral control unit 4140 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing a process procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 190, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140 e of the peripheral control MPU 4140 a mounted on the peripheral substrate 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are disabled during this initialization process, and interrupts are enabled after the initialization process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process of monitoring whether the 16 ms elapsed flag T has been set or not is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes 2 ms steady processing. In the 2 ms steady process, a process to count up the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter (1 ms added to the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms elapsed monitoring counter becomes 8, that is, 16 ms elapsed. While the flag T is set, processing for resetting (setting to 0) the 16 ms lapse monitoring counter is executed. Thus, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in 2 ms steady processing, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 ms elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and the 16 ms steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 ms steady process, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262, 821, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. When the 16 ms steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above-described steps S503 to S504 are repeated every time the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (16 ms elapsed flag T is "0"), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 191 is a flowchart of an example of a 16 ms steady process that is executed every 16 ms in the sub main process. In the 16 ms steady process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis process of step S601, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the liquid crystal is received based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted by being set in the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S147 of the first fluctuation pattern setting process, the second fluctuation pattern setting process). Control processing related to the display device 1900 is executed.

  Further, in the sound control process of step S603, control processes related to the speakers 130, 222 and 262 provided in the door frame 5 and the speakers 821 provided in the main body frame 3 are executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, control processes related to the lamp and LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 are performed. In the information output process of step S 605, the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 286, 320, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided on the door frame 5, the light emitting substrates 3115 provided on the game board 4, etc. Execute processing such as sending lamp / LED lighting signal. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers (for example, pre-read random numbers) used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  The process of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 ms steady process ends within 16 ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process starts immediately after the 16 ms elapses from the start of the 16 ms steady process (the command in step S601 Do not execute (from analysis processing). That is, when 16 ms has elapsed during execution of the 16 ms steady process, only the 16 ms elapsed flag is set, and after it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S502 after the 16 ms steady process is completed, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is performed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of loop processing in the sub main processing and 16 ms stationary processing.

[8. Game description]
Next, the game realized by the above control process will be described. As described above, when the counter value of the big hit counter is "1 to 9", that is, the last of 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability non-short time state) If it is not a big hit, by setting the high probability flag after the big hit gaming state ends, it shifts to the high probability state (high probability non-time short state, high probability time short state) or continues, and the counter value of the big hit counter is "10" When, that is, the last big hit among the 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state, the high probability state to the low probability state (low probability non Transition to short time state, low probability time short state).

  Moreover, in this example, even when the state is shifted to the high probability state, the lottery process of the first special symbol is performed unless a big hit to control the time saving state (high probability time short state, low probability time short state) occurs. Only the left-handed game played is continued. And as a result, when it has not won even once a big hit that controls to time saving state (high probability time short state, low probability time short state) until 9 big wins win after transition to high probability state The player is controlled to the low probability non-short time state with almost no increase in the number of balls held by the player. On the other hand, if a big hit that controls to a short time state (high probability, short state, low probability, short state) occurs even once, 9 big hits will be won after transition to high probability state, and then low probability state Since the time saving state will be continued until the variation of the special symbol for 100 times is ended, the player is given the lottery contents preferential while suppressing the consumption of the ball by the right-handed game. It becomes possible to perform the lottery process for the second special symbol.

  That is, in the left-handed state, a game based mainly on the winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 2101 is executed, and the display result of the first special symbol variably displayed based on the starting winning in the first starting opening 2101 is While it is set so that the proportion of the 10R big hit gaming state of the above-mentioned short opening is set to be high as a big hit gaming state to be executed when becoming a mode that suggests a big hit, it is difficult to obtain a winning ball, In the right-handed state, a game based on the winning of the game ball to the second start opening 2102 is mainly executed, and the display result of the second special symbol variably displayed based on the start winning to the second start opening 2102 is a big hit It is set so that the ratio to be executed of the long open 10R big hit gaming state is set to be all as a big hit gaming state to be executed when becoming the suggestion mode, and it is easy to obtain a prize ball To have. Therefore, in the left-handed state, in each of the 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability non-short time state), switching to the right handing state is expected each time a big hit occurs. In order to be able to continue the right-handed state for a long time, the game is to be played in anticipation of switching to the right-handed state at an early stage until the high probability state ends.

  Specifically, when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on, the gaming state is controlled to the low probability non-short state and the counter value "10" which is the initial value is set in the big hit counter. That is, when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on, the control of the low probability non-short state is started to control the left hitting state in which the game based on the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting port 2101 is executed .

  And if you win 10R probability variation big hit A in low probability non-short state, by decrementing the counter value of the big hit number counter "1", by controlling the high probability non-short state after the end of the short 10R big hit gaming state Control of the above-mentioned left-handed state is continued. Also, when winning 10R probability variation big hit A in high probability non-short condition, the counter value of the big hit number counter is decremented by "1", and the short hit number 10R big hit game until the counter value of the big hit number counter becomes "1". The control of the left-handed state is continued by controlling to the high probability non-short state after the end of the state, and when the counter value “10” which is the initial value is set again to the big hit counter, the short open 10R big hit gaming state The control of the left-handed state is continued by controlling to the low probability untimely state after the end of. As described above, even if the transition control is changed from the low probability non-short state to the high probability non-short state, the 10R big hit gaming state of short opening is repeated as long as the 10R probability variation big hit A is won in the high probability non-short state. It is difficult to win a prize ball because it continues to control the state.

  In addition, if you win 10R probability variation big hit B in low probability non-short state, by decrementing the counter value of the big hit number counter "1", by controlling the high probability non-short state after the end of the long open 10R big hit gaming state Control of the above-mentioned left-handed state is continued. Also, when winning 10R probability variation big hit B in high probability non-short condition, the counter value of the big hit number counter is decremented by "1", and the long hit number 10R big hit game until the counter value of the big hit number counter becomes "1". The control of the left-handed state is continued by controlling to the high probability non-short state after the end of the state, and the long hit 10R big hit gaming state when the counter value "10" which is the initial value is set again to the big hit counter. The control of the left-handed state is continued by controlling to the low probability untimely state after the end of. As described above, when winning 10R probability variation big hit B in low probability non-short condition or high probability non-short condition, it is possible to obtain one prize ball based on long open 10R big hit gaming condition, but the left strike In order to maintain control of the state, it has become difficult to obtain many winning balls in succession.

  On the other hand, when winning 10R probability variation big hit C in low probability non-short state, the counter value of the big hit number counter is decremented by “1”, and the long open 10R big hit game state is controlled after the end of the big hit state. Transition control to the right strike state. Also, when winning 10R probability variation big hit C in high probability non-short state, the counter value of the big hit number counter is decremented by "1", and the long hit number 10R big hit game until the counter value of the big hit number counter becomes "1". Transition to the above-mentioned right-handed state by controlling to the high probability time short state after the end of the state, and when the counter value "10" which is the initial value is set again to the big hit counter, the end of the long open 10R big hit gaming state The shift control to the right-handed state is performed by controlling the low probability time short state 100 times later. The game ball can be won in the second starting port 2102 by shift control to the right-handed state, and when winning 10R probability variation big D in high probability time short state, the counter value of the big hit counter is Continue the control of the right-handed state by controlling the high probability time reduction state after the end of the long open 10R big hit gaming state until 1 is subtracted and the counter value of the big hit counter becomes “1”, the big hit number When the counter value "10", which is the initial value, is set to the initial value again, control of the above-mentioned right-handed state is continued by controlling to 100 times of low probability time short state after the end of long open 10R big hit gaming state . As described above, when transition control is made from the low probability non-short state or high probability non-short state to the high probability time short state, long open 10R big hit gaming state is repeated as long as the 10R probability variation big hit D is won in high probability time short state. In order to continue control of the right-handed state, it is easy to obtain many winning balls in succession.

  In addition, if the 10R probability variation big hit D is won before the time reduction 100 times low probability time reduction state ends, the counter value of the big hit number counter is decremented by “1” and the high open probability 10R big hit after the end of the gaming state is high probability The control of the right-handed state is continued by controlling the time saving state. On the other hand, when the low probability time reduction state of 100 times is completed without winning the 10R probability variation big hit D, transition control to the left-handed state is performed by controlling to the low probability non-time short state. As described above, when transition control is performed from the low probability time reduction state to the high probability time reduction state, the long open 10R big hit gaming state is repeated by winning the 10R big change state big hit D in the high probability time short state. In order to continue the control of the right-handed state so that the state can obtain 10 consecutive winning balls, it is easy to obtain many winning balls continuously again.

  Further, in this example, switching between the left-handed state and the right-handed state is, as described above, in the short time state (high probability time short state, low probability time short state) in 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state. The number of times (the number of fluctuations) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol (the first special symbol and the second special symbol) after resetting the counter value of the fluctuation count counter as well as the point when the big hit to control occurs exceeds 800 times At the same time. That is, the number of fluctuations is determined when it is determined to be a big hit (10R positive variation big hit B, 10R positive variation big hit C, 10R positive variation big hit D) that can obtain many winning balls by controlling to long open 10R big hit gaming state It is intended to reset the counter value of the counter, and when the condition where many winning balls can not be acquired continues for a long period (800 times of fluctuation), the fluctuation number of the above special symbol is more than 800 times. Compared with the control of the previous non-short state, the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is short and there is no variation, so the gaming ball to the second start opening 2102 is not as short as the above time It is possible to win a prize and it is switched to the right strike state. Therefore, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol exceeds 800 times, the game ball is switched to the right-handed state, the game ball to the second starting opening 2102 mainly even if it is not switched to the right-handed state in the short time state. The game based on the winning a prize is executed, and the above-mentioned big hit gaming state is executed when the display result of the second special symbol variably displayed based on the starting winning to the second starting opening 2102 becomes a mode indicating a big hit The ratio of execution of the long open 10R big hit gaming state is set to be all, making it easy to obtain a winning ball.

  Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds 800 times in the low probability non-short state, the control of the low probability non-short state is continued, but the control of the right strike state is not the short state Transition control. The game ball can be won in the second starting port 2102 by shift control to the right-handed state, and when it is won in the 10R probability variation big hit D in the low probability non-short state, the counter value of the big hit counter Control of the right-handed state is continued by subtracting “1” and controlling to the high probability time-shortened state after the end of the long open 10R big hit gaming state. And, when winning 10R probability variation big hit D in high probability time short state, until the counter value of the big hit counter becomes 1 it controls the high probability time short state after the end of 10R big hit game state of long opening the above-mentioned right Control of the striking state is continued, and when the counter value “10” which is the initial value is set again to the big hit number counter, control is made to the low probability time short state 100 times short time after the end of the long open 10R big hit gaming state The control of the above-mentioned right-handed state is continued. Thus, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol exceeds 800 times in low probability non-short condition, as long as the 10 R probability variation big hit D is won in low probability non-short condition and high probability time short condition thereafter, long open 10R big hit In order to continue the control of the above-mentioned right-handed state so that the long open 10R big hit gaming state enables 10 consecutive winning balls by repeating the gaming state, many winning balls continuously It is easy to acquire. Therefore, in the left-handed state in the low probability non-time-short state, not only expect to be a big hit that will be the start trigger of the high probability state (high probability time short state, high probability non-time short state) The game is played in expectation of switching to the right-handed state when the number of times exceeds 800, and a state where the number of winning balls can not be won is salvaged for a player who has been continued for a long period of time can do.

  Also, if the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol in the high probability non-short state exceeds 800 times, the control of the high probability non-short state continues, but it shifts to the control of the right strike state even if it is not the above time . The game ball can be won in the second starting opening 2102 by shift control to the right-handed state, and when winning 10R probability variation big hit D in high probability non-short state, the counter value of the big hit counter Control of the right-handed state is continued by subtracting “1” and controlling to the high probability time-shortened state after the end of the long open 10R big hit gaming state. And, when winning 10R probability variation big hit D in high probability time short state, until the counter value of the big hit counter becomes 1 it controls the high probability time short state after the end of 10R big hit game state of long opening the above-mentioned right Control of the striking state is continued, and when the counter value “10” which is the initial value is set again to the big hit number counter, control is made to the low probability time short state 100 times short time after the end of the long open 10R big hit gaming state The control of the above-mentioned right-handed state is continued. Thus, when the number of times of variation of the special symbol exceeds 800 times in high probability non-short condition, as long as 10 R probability variation big hit D in high probability non-short condition and high probability time short condition thereafter, long open 10R big hit In order to repeat the gaming state and continue the control of the right-handed state, it is easy to obtain many winning balls in succession. Therefore, in the left-handed state in the high probability non-time-short state, every 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high-probability state (high probability time-short state, high probability non-time short state) In addition to expecting switching of the game, the game will be played in expectation of switching to the right-handed state when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol exceeds 800 times, and many balls can be won It is possible to rescue a player who has been unable to continue for a long time.

  In addition, if the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol exceeds 800 before the low probability time reduction state of 100 times is finished and the low probability time reduction state of 100 times of short count ends without winning 10R probability variation big hit D The transition control to the low probability non-short state is performed, but the control of the right-handed state is continued even if the short state is not the short state. Thus, even if the transition control from the low probability time saving state to the low probability non-time shortening state is performed, if the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol exceeds 800 times before the low probability time saving state 100 times short is completed, As long as you win 10R probability variation big hit D in low probability short time state and high probability time short state thereafter, repeat long open 10R big hit gaming state, long open 10R big hit gaming state winning balls for 10 times in a row In order to continue the control of the above-mentioned right-handed state so as to make it possible to acquire the ball, it is easy to acquire many winning balls continuously again.

  In the present example, a small hit judgment value is set in the low probability big hit judgment table to be compared with the first special random number, and a small hit may be won. Then, if the small hit is won in the low probability non-short state, the control of the left strike is continued by controlling the low probability non-short state after the small hit gaming state ends similar to the case of winning the 10R probability variation big hit A. . In this way, when winning 10R probability variation big hit A or small hit in low probability non-short time state, it is difficult to determine whether it is short open 10R big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state, high probability state (high It is made difficult to recognize whether it is the first big hit among the 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high probability non-short state). In addition, when winning a small hit in the high probability non-short state, continue the control of the left strike by controlling to the high probability non-short state after the end of the small hit gaming state similar to winning 10R probability variation big hit A . In this way, when winning 10R probability variation big hit A or small hit in high probability non-short state, it is difficult to determine whether it is short open 10R big hit gaming state or small hit gaming state, high probability state (high It is made difficult to recognize which of the 10 big hits from the start to the end of the probability short time state and the high probability non-short time state). Therefore, if you win 10R probability variation big hit C in high probability non-time short status, long open 10R big hit gaming state will be repeated as long as 10R probability variation big hit D in high probability non-time short status and high probability time short status thereafter However, among 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state, it becomes difficult to recognize the remaining number of times (less than 10 times) after winning the 10R probability variation big hit D in high probability non-time short condition. It is difficult to predict the number of winning balls in which the 10R jackpot gaming state is continuously acquired.

  Also, in this example, when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol exceeds 800 times in the low probability non-short time condition, long open as long as the 10R probability variation big hit D is won in the low probability non-time short condition and the high probability time short condition thereafter. By repeating the 10R big hit gaming state, the control of the right hitting state is continued so that the long open 10R big hit gaming state enables the winning balls for 10 times in a row. On the other hand, if the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol exceeds 800 times in high probability non-short condition, as long as winning 10R probability variation big hit D in high probability non-short condition and the subsequent high probability time short condition, long open 10R big hit gaming condition Of the 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state (high probability and short state, high probability non-short state), and the remaining number of times since the 10R probability variation big hit D was won in the high probability non-short state. Control of the above-mentioned right-handed state is continued so that the long open 10R big hit gaming state enables acquisition of winning balls continuously for a minute (less than 10 times). For this reason, in the big hit in the second half of the 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high probability state (for example, the big hit in the 7th and subsequent big hits), 10R probability variation big hit B or 10R probability variation big hit C in the high probability non-short state The number of remaining times until the high probability state ends is small, and even if the long open 10R big hit gaming state continues, ten winning balls can not be obtained. That is, compared to the case where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol exceeds 800 times in the low probability non-short condition, even if the long open 10R big hit gaming state continues, the number of winning balls decreases, but it is not only that The counter value of the fluctuation number counter is reset. Therefore, even in the left-handed state in the high probability non-time-short state, the high probability non-power in the second half of the 10 big hits from the start to the end of the high-probability state (for example, the seventh or later big hit) We want to win the 10R probability variation big hit A without winning 10R probability variation big hit B or 10R probability variation big hit C in the time saving state, and end the high probability non-time short status and control to transition to the low probability non-time short status, long open In order to play the game expecting the switch to the right-handed state by the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol exceeding 800 times so that the 10R jackpot gaming state of 10 can obtain the prize ball for 10 times in a row become.

  According to the control structure concerning such a game, as the number of times counted as the number of times of variation of the special symbol exceeds a specific number (here, 800), there is a loss as the number of times counted is increased. The gaming value at the time of gaining will gradually increase (in a form exceeding the gaming value at the time of winning).

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
・ The expected value of the net increase number that can be acquired from the transition to the high probability state to the end of 9 big hit games at the time when "10R probability variation big hit A" is won in the low probability non-short time state is "620 pieces", · · "10R probability variation big hit B" in the low probability non-shorting state, can be acquired by the time the big hit game of 9 times after the transition to the high probability state at the time of winning The expected value of the net increase number is "1520", and · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 10R probability variation big hit C won Expected value of the net increase number that can be acquired in “9000”
If you combine these expected values for each category,
-Net increase that can be acquired by the time the big hit is obtained in the low probability non-short condition state when the big hit is obtained in the lottery process for the first special symbol, and 9 big hit games are over after the transition to the high probability state Expected value of the number "1550"
It has become.

  Here, “net increase number” means the number of gaming balls consumed until the jackpot game is obtained and the number of gaming balls consumed during the jackpot game, from the number of prize balls paid out in the big hit game It is the number which subtracted.

  On the other hand, as described above, the expected value of the net increase number is "5000" when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number (800 times). And, as described above, when 250 game balls are hit to the left, an average of 20 game balls are entered into the first starting opening 2101. In view of these facts, even during the control of the above-mentioned non-short time before the number of times of variation of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number, the number of times of variation of the special symbol is 524 (breakpoint of gain: 800-(5,000 The game situation is more advantageous for the player if the number of times the special symbol changes more than a predetermined number (800 times) as a loss rather than being won by a big hit when exceeding 1550 / 12.5 shots) (The game value when the loss is obtained will exceed the game value when the hit is obtained). In addition, even when compared with the type of hit, "10R probability variation big hit A", as well as operating the probability variation function and a player can obtain many ball numbers, "10R probability variation big hit B" Game value is higher.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the number of times counted does not exceed the predetermined number of times of effect judgment, and the gaming situation (the number of times counted is relatively low) While the game situation is relatively small, by making the appearance frequency at the time of losing about a specific expectation effect low, it impresses the player that the particular expectation effect is a production with a high degree of expectation and a high degree of expectation. Control to And on this, the counted number of times exceeds the predetermined number of effect judgments, and there is a gaming situation where the gaming value as a loss is relatively high (a gaming situation where the counted number is relatively large) Sometimes, it is controlled to increase the appearance frequency of the above-mentioned specific expectation effect which has been impressed while being in the gaming situation where the above-mentioned counted number of times is relatively small that the effect with a high degree of expectation of hitting is performed. There is.

  That is, in this case, when it is in the game situation (the game situation where the number of times counted is relatively large), the game value as the loss is relatively high, the hit expectation itself when the specific expectation effect appears Although it is to be lowered, the player appears that the effect is produced by having been impressed that the effect is a high expected effect while in the gaming situation where the counted number is relatively small. Each time you are at least reflectively aware of the possibility of hitting.

  In this respect, in such a gaming situation (a gaming situation in which the number of times counted is relatively large), the player is awarded a normal bonus (one of 10R certain variation big hit A to C) which is awarded when a hit is obtained. In addition to the big hit game according to the type of the special bonus (expected value "5000" is given when the counted number of times exceeds a specific number (here 800 times) without getting hit In order to be able to execute the lottery process according to the second special symbol so as to obtain the net increase number of Whenever you realize the possibility of being gained, you will have a complex feeling that you may want to get a hit, but you may not want to get a hit. Or, the game situation where the game value when the loss is obtained clearly exceeds the game value when the hit is obtained (for example, several times of pattern changes are digested if the hit is not obtained If so, in a game situation or the like in which a special benefit is awarded, until a special benefit is awarded by the appearance of a specific expectation effect with a high impression of a high expectation on the hit. A continual performance of a throbbing feeling will be realized.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the role played by the specific expectation effect is not only simply indicating the high and low of the expected degree of big hit obtained, but it is planted for a long game period By making use of the impression of high jackpot expectation, the player is at least intuitively aware of the possibility of being hit by the jackpot at the time of its appearance, and thus the special gameplay that is revealed when it is made conscious of the jackpot. In combination with (the game-playing ability of a player who has lost the game value), it is to be able to obtain a certain degree of satisfaction (recognizing a sense of satisfaction) regardless of which of the big hit is obtained.

  In addition, as a "predetermined number of effect judgments", before the big hit is won with a low probability of 1/399 when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is in the above non-short time before the predetermined number of times It is more desirable that the number be greater than the average value of the required number of fluctuations. That is, in this case, a specific expectation effect can be made to occur at a high frequency only when the average value of the number of fluctuations required until the big hit is won with a low probability of 1/399 is exceeded. The jackpot is often won in a stage before the specific expectation effect appears frequently, and as a result, at least the high probability when the specific expectation effect does not appear frequently It is often switched to the production in Therefore, a specific expectation effect is basically positioned as a high expectation effect with a low frequency of occurrence when there is a loss, and this strongly impresses the player as a high expectation effect. Will be

  Here, as a control method concerning such an effect, for example, when the peripheral control unit 4140 first performs an effect based on the result of the lottery process concerning a special symbol, the above-mentioned number of times counted is “a predetermined effect judgment Make a presentation judgment as to whether or not it has exceeded the number of times. As a result, when it is determined that the "predetermined number of effect judgments" has not been made, effects are produced based on the first effect table in which the specific expected effects are not allowed to appear at high frequency, When it is determined that the "predetermined number of effect judgments" is exceeded, it is preferable to perform the effect based on the second effect table in which a specific expected effect is allowed to appear at a high frequency.

  That is, in this case, the variation time (representation time) of the special symbol determined on the main control board 4100 side itself is regardless of whether the counted number of times exceeds the "predetermined number of staged judgments". It is determined based on a predetermined variation pattern table. Then, the peripheral control unit 4140 changes the content of the effect associated with each of the fluctuation times under the fluctuation time (rendering time) determined in this way, for example, to obtain a specific expectation effect (in this case, The appearance ratio of the display image appearing in the effect pattern is changed. In addition, it is also possible to change the appearance ratio of a specific expectation effect (in this case, the advance effect) by changing the appearance ratio of a specific advance effect.

  According to such a control structure, in the gaming situation where the number of times counted is relatively small, the fluctuation on the main control board 4100 side in increasing the appearance frequency of the specific expectation effect of which the hit expectation is increased. There is no change in time. Therefore, it is possible to increase the appearance ratio of the specific expected effects while avoiding that the time per variation is unnecessarily increased due to the frequent occurrence of such effects.

  However, for example, for the remaining predetermined number of changes (10 times) until the counted number of times exceeds the predetermined number (800 times), special effects may be made executable. That is, in this case, also for the main control board 4100, first, in determining the fluctuation time based on the result of the lottery process for the special symbol, the counted number is "predetermined number of effect judgments (here, 790 times)" It will be judged whether or not it exceeds "." And as a result, when it is determined that "predetermined number of effect judgments (here, 790 times)" is not exceeded, while the fluctuation time is determined based on the normal fluctuation pattern table, "predetermined number of effects judgments" When it is determined that “(in this case, 790 times)” is exceeded, the fluctuation time is determined based on the special fluctuation pattern table. Then, when the peripheral control unit 4140 receives a command indicating that the fluctuation time is determined based on the special fluctuation pattern table from the main control board 4100, “predetermined number of effect judgments (here, 790 times) If it does not exceed "", a special effect that can not appear will be performed.

  The “predetermined number of effect judgments” may be a single value (for example, 500 times) prepared in advance, or a plurality of values prepared in advance (450 times, 500 times, 550 times). Any one of the above may be selectively determined.

  However, the peripheral control unit 4140 according to this embodiment is a specific number of times (in this case, a predetermined number of times (800 times) half (400 times) where the counted number of times is less than the above-mentioned branch point (524 times). From the time when it is over, in performing the effect based on the result of the lottery process for the special symbol, to perform the effect lottery about whether or not to perform the effect switching (increase the appearance ratio of the specific expected effect) And In this effect lottery, a lottery process is applied to the falling of the effect per probability with a probability (for example, 1/100) that the average value of the number of fluctuations required until the effect per winning is won is about 100 times . Then, the peripheral control unit 4140 determines that the counted number of times exceeds the “predetermined number of effect determination times” based on the fact that the effect winning is obtained in this effect lottery, and a specific expected effect is obtained. An effect is performed based on the second effect table that is allowed to appear with high frequency.

  According to such a control structure, when the counted number of times is a number of times (500 times) smaller than the above-described branch point (524 times), a specific expected effect can be made to appear at a high frequency Will increase. That is, when the gaming situation is such that the special symbol has been changed by the number of times larger than the average value of the number of changes required until the big hit is won with a low probability of 1/399, a thousand Winning the big hit (second special symbol) as early as possible after exceeding a predetermined number of times (800 times) than winning the big hit (first special symbol) having only 100 expected values It is often the case that you start to feel attracted to the Therefore, if a specific expectation effect is allowed to appear at a high frequency from when the counted number of times is a smaller number of times (500 times) than the above-described branch point (524 times), a specific expectation is obtained. Whenever you realize the possibility that a hit has been obtained by the appearance of a rendition, you can have a complex emotion that you want to get a hit, or you may not want to get a hit. This makes it possible to realize a very special game / representation that a player can be given a certain degree of satisfaction regardless of which result is obtained.

  In addition, depending on the result of the effect lottery, a specific expected effect can be made to appear at a high frequency from the time when the counted number of times is a number of times larger than the above-mentioned branch point (524 times). However, even in such a case, the type of big hit (for example, 10R probability variation big hit C), the quick response for winning the winning ball when the big hit is obtained, the number of gaming balls consumed until the big hit is obtained In some cases, it can not always be said that it is absolutely useful to obtain only a loss until the counted number of times exceeds a predetermined number of times, in consideration of the risk and the like. Therefore, even in the case where it is possible for a specific expected effect to appear at a high frequency from the time when the number of times is more than the above-mentioned branch point (524 times), the period in which such an effect is performed is Although it is shortened, a very special game / representation is realized, such as being able to give the player a certain degree of satisfaction regardless of which result is obtained.

  In addition, as the effect during the control of the non-short time state after the number of times of variation of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number (800 times), the above non-time short before the number of times of variation of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number (800 times) It is desirable to perform as a mode effect in which the effect is performed in a state different from during control of the state, for example, in a specific mode.

  That is, during control of the non-short time state after the number of times the variation of the special symbol exceeds the predetermined number (800 times), the operation of the blade 2125 according to the common drawing variation time determination table at the time of non-short time According to the aspect, although the game ball is made possible to enter the second starting opening 2102 with a high probability, the ease of entering the ball is, on average, 25 in the second starting opening 2102 As compared with the state where the game ball is entered and the time saving function is activated, the consumption of the ball can not be sufficiently suppressed. Therefore, since the player may feel frustrated with such an operation mode of the blade 2125, the effect during the control of the non-short time state after the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol exceeds a predetermined number (800 times) It is desirable that attention be drawn to the effects by performing mode effects in which the appearance frequency of expected effects such as so-called pseudo-links and pre-reading notices is increased.

  In addition, when the number of jackpot wins in the high probability state is a predetermined number (here, 9), after the jackpot game according to the type of the hit is performed, the variation of 100 special symbols It has been mentioned above that the time saving function is activated only until the end. In this gaming state, although the probability change function does not operate, since it is possible to play a game by right-handling, when a big hit (second special symbol) is obtained, the high probability state (high The probability time reduction state, the high probability non-time reduction state) will be started again, that is, 10,000 winning balls can be obtained by a total of 10 big hit games. Therefore, it is desirable that an effect with a sense of anticipation be made to appear at a high frequency as the effect in the gaming state is also performed as a dedicated mode effect.

  In the above-mentioned embodiment, although what was applied to pachinko machine 1 as a game machine was shown, it is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine formed by combining a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Also in this case, the same function and effect as described above can be exhibited.

  In addition, regarding "10R probability variation big hit A", although it is decided that the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is not reset even if winning in the corresponding hit, the counter value of the fluctuation number counter may be reset.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
1100 game area 1200 game panel (game board)
1200 e opening 1900 liquid crystal display device (effect display means)
2401 Base frame member (center frame)
2413 Upper right decoration unit (decorative member)
2420 Logo front decoration (specific character part)
2421 light diffusion sheet 2432 logo lens (decorative letters)
3100 Upper character unit (movable decoration)
3110 base member 3110 d support cylindrical portion (support portion)
3113a light reflecting surface 3120 large side light emitting rotating part (decoring part)
3121 Small-side light emitting rotating part (decoration part)
3122 Large side cover member (cover member)
3123 Small side cover member (cover member)
3126 Large side drive means (drive means)
3130 Small-side drive means (drive means)
3135 central light emitting substrate (light emitting unit)
3139 Reflecting mirror 3142 Light emitting substrate (light emitting portion)
3143 Lens (support part)
3145 Reflective mirror 3162 Rotating body decoration (decoration part)
3168 Lens (support part)
3170 Reflecting mirror 3171 Light emitting substrate (light emitting portion)
3172 cover member 3175 driving means 3180a light reflecting surface 3180b light reflecting surface 3400 logo display unit (character decoration)
3400a first letter part (letter part)
3400b Second character part (character part)
3400c third character part (character part)
3400d 4th character part (character part)
3400e 5th character part (character part)
3400f sixth character part (character part)
3400w overlapping part 3401 logo decoration part (text decoration part)
3403 Light diffusing sheet 3405 Left light emitting substrate (light emitting means)
3406 Right light emitting substrate (light emitting means)

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area on the front side and an opening formed in the game area;
A center piece inserted into the opening of the gaming board;
And a decorative part with three-dimensional decoration,
The center feature is
A warp inlet opening to the outside of the center piece and a warp passage communicating with a warp outlet opening to the inside of the center piece;
An insertion portion inserted into the opening of the gaming board;
A partition wall that protrudes toward the player from the front of the gaming board and partitions the gaming area and the internal space of the center product;
A flange portion which protrudes radially outward from the insertion portion and abuts on a front surface of the gaming board;
An extended gaming area expanded between the insertion portion and the partition wall by arranging at least a part of the partition wall at a predetermined position radially inward of the inner edge of the opening in a front view And a game area extension unit to form
The gaming area extension, which is formed radially inward of the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board in a front view, is formed of a transparent member which can transmit light;
The decorative portion, which is three-dimensionally decorated, is a transparent member through the gaming area extension formed radially inward of the inner edge of the opening of the gaming board in a front view. Located behind the gaming area extension so that the decoration of the above can be viewed visually, and is provided straddling from the rear of the gaming area extension to the radially inner position of the partition wall,
The length in the direction along the partition wall is longer than the diameter of the gaming ball, and the gaming area extension is formed;
A special decorative portion that makes a decoration on the player side of the gaming ball passing surface of the gaming area extension is provided radially inside the partition wall in a front view with respect to the gaming area extension,
The width between the insertion portion, which is the gaming area extension, and the partition wall is larger than the width of the space generated between the insertion portion and the game board,
A gaming area extension portion is provided in a left side flow area where a game ball collided with a top provided in the center product flows down.

Images